DCS-Mirror
/
richmahn_en_tn
mirror of https://git.door43.org/richmahn/en_tn
2
0
Fork 0
Files Issues Releases Wiki Activity See in Reader

Converted from en_tn_17-EST.tsv to tn_EST.tsv 

Signed-off-by: unfoldingWord <info@unfoldingword.org>
This commit is contained in:
unfoldingWord 2022-12-20 22:46:35 +00:00
parent f4250a9d95
commit 8dd6edf7fd
2 changed files with 1077 additions and 1077 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

1077
en_tn_17-EST.tsv
View File

@ -1,1077 +0,0 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
EST front intro d989 0 # Introduction to Esther<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Esther<br><br>1. King Ahasuerus sends away his wife, the queen (1:1–22)<br>2. Ahasuerus chooses Esther as the new queen (2:1–23)<br>3. Haman plots to destroy the Jews (3:1–15)<br>4. Mordecai asks Esther to help her people (4:1–17)<br>5. Esther pleads with the king for the Jews (5:1–7:10)<br>6. The result of Haman’s plot to destroy the Jews (8:1–9:16)<br>7. The Feast of Purim (9:17–32)<br>8. Conclusion (10:1–3)<br><br>### What is the Book of Esther about?<br><br>The Book of Esther tells how a young Jewish woman named Esther became the queen of Persia. As queen, she worked to save all the Jews in the Persian Empire from being destroyed.<br><br>This book ends by telling why the Jews celebrate the festival of Purim. The name “Purim” comes from the word “pur,” which means “lots” or “dice.” Haman, the enemy of Jews, threw dice to choose when to attack and destroy the Jews. The Jews celebrate Purim to remember how Yahweh rescued his people from being destroyed.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators can use the traditional title of this book, which is “The Book of Esther” or just “Esther.” Or they can choose a clearer title, such as “The Book About Esther.”<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the Persian Empire?<br><br>King Cyrus the Great conquered and ruled over many kingdoms. This was in the part of the world called Persia, which is now Iran. So people named his kingdom the Persian Empire. When Cyrus conquered Babylonia in 539 B.C., he then controlled the Jews whom the Babylonians had earlier taken into exile.<br><br>### Why were there Jews in Babylonia when the Persians conquered it?<br><br>In 586 B.C., the Babylonians conquered and took into exile the people of Judah. These Jews and their descendants were still in Babylon when the Persians conquered it.<br><br>### What was meant by “the laws of the Medes and Persians”?<br><br>The phrase “the laws of the Medes and Persians” is found in Esther 1:19 and Daniel 6:12. It referred to laws and decrees that could not be changed or removed once they were issued. In the book of Esther, the king made a decree that the people could attack the Jews. Later he regretted that decision but he was not able to change the decree.<br><br>The term “Medes” refers to a people group that had formed its own nation, but the Persians conquered them.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What different levels of language are in the Book of Esther?<br><br>In the Book of Esther, people talk to each other in many different situations. There is the polite and stately talk in the Persian court and the words of royal decrees. Friends and close relatives also talk to each other. There are even the words that one uses in speaking to oneself. Translators should use all the ways their own language has to express these different situations in a way that their readers will identify and understand.
EST 1 intro v1fp 0 # Esther 1 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The king’s divorce<br><br>The king’s advisers were afraid that husbands would lose their authority when they heard the queen had refused to come to show her beauty to the king’s guests, so the advisers told him to divorce her.
EST 1 1 jdr1 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֖י 1 Now it happened In the Old Testament, this is a standard way of beginning a historical story. Many languages have similar story-opening formulas, and if your language has one, you can use it. But do not use it if it would suggest that the story is not real, only made up. Alternate translation: “this account happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 1 1 zzz2 figs-idiom בִּ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 In the days of Ahasuerus The term **day** is used figuratively here to refer to a longer period of time. You could just say “during the reign of Ahasuerus,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “in the time of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 1 qwe1 translate-names אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Ahasuerus This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 1 v5ts writing-background ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 he was Ahasuerus the one who ruled from India even as far as Ethiopia, 127 provinces This is background information to help the reader identify Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 1 1 qwe3 ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ 1 he was Ahasuerus, the one who ruled Alternative translation: “This king named Ahasuerus ruled”
EST 1 1 qwe5 writing-background מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ 1 from India even as far as Ethiopia In case your audience might not know where these places are, you could say, “extending from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 1 1 qwe7 writing-background שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 127 provinces The number is given to show what a large empire this was. You could say that explicitly by saying, “Ahasuerus ruled a very large empire that had 127 provinces.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 1 1 qwe8 translate-numbers שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 127 provinces Alternate translation: “one hundred twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 1 2 dk31 figs-metonymy כְּ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת…עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 sat on the throne of his royalty Here, the action of **sitting** on a throne is used figuratively to mean ruling over a kingdom. You could just say “ruled,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “ruled his empire from his royal throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 2 qwe9 figs-abstractnouns עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 the throne of his royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with a verb by saying, “the throne he ruled from,” or use an adjective, “his royal throne.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 2 hgm3 translate-names בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֥ן 1 in Susa This was the name of a royal city of the Persian kings. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 2 qwr1 translate-unknown הַ⁠בִּירָֽה 1 the citadel This means a castle or palace where a king would live. But since the city of Susa itself is being called a **citadel** here, it’s likely that the term figuratively means royal city or capital city. The person telling this story is identifying Susa as the capital by calling it by the name of something closely associated with it, the royal palace within it. A good translation might be “the capital city of Persia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 3 ry7m translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 in the third year of his reign This means that Ahasuerus had already ruled for two full years and that these events took place in the year that followed them. Alternate translation: “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled his empire” or “after he had ruled for two years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 1 3 qwr3 figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 in the third year of his reign **Reign** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 3 qwr5 עָשָׂ֣ה מִשְׁתֶּ֔ה 1 he made a feast Alternative translation: “he hosted a feast”
EST 1 3 prm1 figs-synecdoche חֵ֣יל ׀ פָּרַ֣ס וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 the army of Persia and Media This likely refers to the leaders of the army. It is describing a part of the army by referring to the whole army. Alternate translation: “the officers of the army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 1 3 qwr7 הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֛ים 1 the noblemen This probably means something like “the wealthy landowners.”
EST 1 3 jdr3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 before his face **Face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so this phrase means “in his presence.” The invitation was to come to the royal capital to attend a banquet where the king would be present in person. You could say, as UST does, that the king was present in person to host the feast. Or you could say as an alternative, “all of them came to Susa for the feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 4 qwr9 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ אֶת־עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 when he displayed the wealth of the glory of his kingdom You can translate the abstract noun with an emphasized adjective. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 4 qet1 figs-explicit בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 when he displayed **He** refers to the king. The implication is that he held this banquet to show all of his officials how wealthy and powerful he was. The invited officials would then go back to all the different parts of the empire and tell everyone this. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus wanted to demonstrate to his guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 4 m8xa figs-doublet עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 the wealth of the glory of his kingdom The words **wealth** and **glory** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize how great his kingdom was. Alternate translation: “the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 1 4 qet3 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ…וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 when he displayed … the splendor of the beauty of his greatness You can translate the abstract nouns **splendor**, **beauty**, and **greatness** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … that he was a very powerful king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 4 lun5 figs-doublet יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 the splendor of the beauty of his greatness The words **splendor** and **beauty** have similar meaning and emphasize how great he was. Alternate translation: “the splendor of his greatness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 1 4 qet5 figs-explicit יָמִ֣ים רַבִּ֔ים שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 for many days, for 180 days This was a very long time for a royal feast to last. The earlier part of the verse provides the reason for this. To make the connection explicit, you could add some explanatory words to the verse like this: “Ahasuerus entertained his guests fabulously because he wanted to demonstrate that his empire was extremely wealthy and that he was a very powerful king. He did so many things for them that the festivities lasted for six months.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 4 x1v6 translate-numbers שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 for 180 days Six months is about **180 days** or about half a year. You can use whatever expression will best express this time period in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 1 5 ue3x figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠מְל֣וֹאת ׀ הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 And when those days were fulfilled This implies “at the end of that feast.” You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after those 180 days were over” or “at the end of those six months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 5 fv9y translate-numbers עָשָׂ֣ה הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ…מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 the king made a feast This was a second feast that the king hosted. He likely did this to thank the people who had worked so hard in hosting the first feast. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 1 5 mj16 translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֨ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֜ה 1 in Susa the citadel The expression in this case seems to refer specifically to the royal **citadel** from which the city got its name. This second feast would not have been for everyone in the entire city. It was specifically for the people who served the king in the citadel and who had worked so hard over the previous six months hosting the first feast. Alternate translation: “for every man who worked for him in the palace at Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 5 qet7 figs-idiom הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 who were found Here, **found** is an idiom that means could be found or were there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 5 qet9 figs-activepassive הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 who were found You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who worked for him in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 1 5 qey1 figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּ֧דוֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָ֛ן 1 from the greatest even to the least The person telling this story is referring to the staff of the palace by speaking of two extreme parts of it, the most important and the least important people who worked there, in order to include everyone in between. You could just explain this meaning, as UST does. Alternate translation: “from the most important official to the least important servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 1 5 qey3 שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 for seven days The story does not suggest that this was an unusually long time by saying, “for many days.” But you could also say something like “a whole week” to show that this was a generous gesture of thanks on the part of the king. Alternate translation: “another feast that lasted seven days”
EST 1 6 qey5 translate-unknown ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 Linens cotton and blue These **linens** were curtains that were hung in the courtyard. **Cotton** refers to the white color of some of them. So this means white and blue curtains. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 6 qey7 ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 Linens cotton and blue You can specify at the beginning of this verse that the location being described is the same as in the previous verse: “In the courtyard, white and blue curtains.”
EST 1 6 qey9 translate-unknown בְּ⁠חַבְלֵי־ב֣וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן 1 by cords of byssus and purple **Byssus** means “white linen” and it is used to describe the white color of some of these cords. So this means white and purple cords. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 6 qru1 figs-explicit מִטּ֣וֹת ׀ זָהָ֣ב וָ⁠כֶ֗סֶף 1 couches of gold and silver You can specify that these couches were there for the guests to recline on while they ate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 6 asn4 translate-unknown רִֽצְפַ֥ת 1 a pavement This word probably refers to a mosaic floor made of inlaid pieces of colorful precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 6 eyi2 translate-unknown בַּהַט 1 porphyry This is a kind of red and purple stone that contains pieces of crystal. You could call it “feldspar” or something descriptive like “red marble.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 6 qru3 translate-unknown וָ⁠שֵׁ֖שׁ 1 and alabaster This is a white precious stone. You could identify it as “alabaster.” Alternatively, while it is not exactly the same thing as marble, your readers would get the right idea if you called it “white marble.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 6 qru5 translate-unknown וְ⁠סֹחָֽרֶת 1 and precious stone This word probably refers to a black marble that was used to create borders around mosaics. You could call this “black marble,” or you could just say that the floor contained “another precious stone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 7 urm7 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַשְׁקוֹת֙ 1 And the serving was The abstract noun **serving** refers to how the drinks were served at the banquet. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “The attendants served wine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 7 qru7 וְ⁠כֵלִ֖ים מִ⁠כֵּלִ֣ים שׁוֹנִ֑ים 1 with vessels different from other vessels This could mean that “no two of them were alike.” But you could also just say that the wine was served in “various kinds of golden cups.”
EST 1 7 r6ec figs-explicit וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 and the wine of royalty was abundant according to the hand of the king This means that King Ahasuerus himself paid for all the wine that the guests drank at his seven-day feast in Susa, and the wine came from his personal supply. Alternate translation: “the king was very generous with the royal wine” or “the king showed a great willingness to give” or “the king provided all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 7 qru9 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 and the wine of royalty This probably means special fine wine that only the king could acquire and afford. You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “royal wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 7 wpq1 figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 according to the hand of the king Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the king himself, viewed through his action of giving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 8 qtu1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁתִיָּ֥ה כַ⁠דָּ֖ת 1 the drinking was according to the law The abstract noun **drinking** refers here not to the action of drinking, but to the guidelines for serving drinks that the king had established for the banquet. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus had established this rule for all his household attendants who served the wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 8 g5gu figs-explicit אֵ֣ין אֹנֵ֑ס 1 There is no compulsion This could mean one of two things: (1) No one would be stopped from drinking even if the attendants thought they had already had enough. Alternate translation: “there was to be no restriction on drinking” (2) There would be no requirement to drink. Alternate translation: “no one must be forced to drink” Either way, this was another sign of the generosity that the king showed as he hosted this banquet to thank the people who worked for him. Either he was: (1) allowing them to drink as much as they wanted to, or (2) not requiring them to eat and drink everything that was served at a banquet as guests of the king would usually be expected to do. You could say explicitly at the beginning of the verse that the king was giving his guests a special privilege. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 8 f6px grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֣ן ׀ יִסַּ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ עַ֚ל כָּל־רַ֣ב בֵּית֔⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 for thus the king had established for every overseer of his house, to do according to the desire of man by man This explains why no one had to drink if they did not want to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could give this explanation (the reason) before the result that it accounts for, using a connecting word like “so.” You could say, “The king had established for every overseer of his house to do according to the desire of man by man, so the drinking was according to the law, ‘There is no compulsion.’” Alternate translation: “the king made the attendants who served the wine follow this rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 1 8 qtu3 לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 to do according to the desire of man by man Alternate translation: “the king wanted every guest to be able to drink as much as he wanted” or “all the guests could drink as little or as much as they wanted”
EST 1 8 jdr5 figs-idiom אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 man by man This is an idiom that means “everyone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 9 qtu5 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous גַּ֚ם 1 Also This introduces something else that was happening at the same time. You can indicate this by saying something like “during this time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EST 1 9 qtu7 writing-participants וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Vashti the queen You can explain that she was the wife of Ahasuerus by saying, “Queen Vashti**,** the king’s wife” or “his wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EST 1 9 qtu9 translate-names וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Vashti This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next one. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 9 qti1 מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה נָשִׁ֑ים 1 a feast of women This could mean the women who served in the palace, the wives of the men who were officers and servants, or both. You could say, “a feast for the wives of the men who attended” or “for the women who worked in the palace.”
EST 1 9 qti3 בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 the house of royalty that belonged to the king Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “the royal palace where King Ahasuerus lived”
EST 1 9 qti5 figs-abstractnouns בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 house of royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective royal. Alternate translation: “royal palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 10 jv7z translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 On the seventh day Alternate translation: “after six days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 1 10 le6l figs-idiom כְּ⁠ט֥וֹב לֵב־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בַּ⁠יָּ֑יִן 1 when the heart of the king was pleased by the wine Here, **heart** figuratively means the action of thinking or feeling. Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was in a good mood from drinking wine” or “when the king was drunk with wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 10 dcb2 translate-names לִ֠⁠מְהוּמָן בִּזְּתָ֨א חַרְבוֹנָ֜א בִּגְתָ֤א וַ⁠אֲבַגְתָא֙ זֵתַ֣ר וְ⁠כַרְכַּ֔ס 1 Mehuman, Biztha, Harbona, Bigtha and Abagtha, Zethar and Karkas These are names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 10 ens5 translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּ֣רִיסִ֔ים 1 the … eunuchs This term occurs a dozen times in the story. It describes male royal officials who served as guardians for the women who lived in the palace. They were both guardians of the door, to keep unwanted people out of the women’s quarters, and guardians of the women inside, to take care of them and look after their needs. (As we learn in 2:21, some of these officials also protected the king’s private quarters.) As we see here, and as will also be seen in 2:14 and 2:16, their duties included escorting women from place to place. The term likely indicates that, in keeping with the practices of the time, these men were castrated because their work brought them into such close contact with the king’s wives and concubines. If your language has a term for such an official and you think your readers would recognize it, you could use it. Otherwise, you could use a term that describes the role that these officials played in the royal court. Alternate translation: “guardians” or “officials” or “castrated servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 10 qti7 writing-background הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 who served before the face of King Ahasuerus This is background information to explain who these men were. Alternate translation: “who attended him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 1 10 jdr7 figs-metonymy אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 the face of King Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that these seven men served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 11 qti9 figs-explicit לְ֠⁠הָבִיא 1 to bring This is the beginning of the instructions that King Ahasuerus gave to the seven eunuchs he summoned in verse 10. You can make this explicit by saying, “He told them to bring.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 11 jdr9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 to the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus wanted Queen Vashti to come personally into his presence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 11 asd1 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 in a crown of royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective by saying, “wearing her royal crown.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 11 asd3 figs-explicit בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 in a crown of royalty Ahasuerus likely wanted Vashti to wear her queen’s crown so that everyone would know that she was his wife. You could say that explicitly. (For the possible reasons why he wanted them to know this, see the next note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 11 asd5 writing-background לְ⁠הַרְא֨וֹת הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ אֶת־יָפְיָ֔⁠הּ 1 in order to show the people and the officials her beauty Everything Ahasuerus did at his banquets was to show how rich and powerful he was. He seems to have believed that having a very beautiful wife was one more thing that proved he was a great man. So he wanted everyone to see how beautiful Vashti was. You can put this second in the verse, after explaining that Vashti was a very beautiful woman, because it accounts for what happens afterwards, when the king sends his seven personal servants to bring her in to his banquet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 1 11 asd7 הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ 1 the people and the officials This might mean “his guests, especially the officials.”
EST 1 11 asd9 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 for she was pleasing of appearance If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it is the reason that explains everything else that happens afterward in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 1 11 qvk4 figs-idiom כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 she was pleasing of appearance Alternate translation: “she was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 12 asf1 figs-events וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 But the queen Vashti refused to come You can put the events in chronological order and say first that the eunuchs told Vashti what the king had commanded and then say that she refused to come**.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 1 12 asf3 figs-explicit וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 But the queen Vashti refused to come If your language needs to give a reason why she refused, it is most likely because she did not want a group of drunken men staring at her lustfully. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 12 b57q בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 at the word of the king Alternate translation: “at the king’s command” or “what the king wanted”
EST 1 12 asf5 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 by the hand of the eunuchs Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the eunuchs themselves, viewed through their action of telling Vashti what the king had commanded. Alternation translation: “when those servants told Queen Vashti what the king wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 12 kp6p translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 the eunuchs See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 12 asf7 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יִּקְצֹ֤ף הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ מְאֹ֔ד וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 the king became very angry, and his rage burned within him These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. You could combine them as UST does by saying, “The king became so angry that he could barely contain himself.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 1 12 bsd5 figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 and his rage burned within him Here the story uses a metaphor that pictures the king’s anger as **a fire that burned inside of him**. If your language has a different word picture that it uses to describe extreme anger, you can use that here. If not, you can translate plainly, “his anger continued to increase.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 1 13 asf9 לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים 1 to the wise men This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”
EST 1 13 g9fe יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים 1 who were knowers of the times This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”
EST 1 13 x2u7 writing-background כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 for thus was the manner of the king This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 1 13 adf1 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 for thus was the manner of the king If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 1 13 jd11 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 before the face of Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 13 adf3 יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין 1 knowers of law and judgment This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.
EST 1 14 adf5 וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 and the ones near to him Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”
EST 1 14 cc44 translate-names כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן 1 Karshena, Shethar, Admatha, Tarshish, Meres, Mersena, Memukan These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 14 jd13 figs-idiom רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 seers of the face of the king **To see the face of** is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 14 adf7 figs-metaphor הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 the ones who sat first in the kingdom Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 1 15 j6sh figs-explicit כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 According to law, what is to be done with the queen Vashti on account of that she did not perform the command of King Ahasuerus by the hand of the eunuchs? This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 15 ics9 כְּ⁠דָת֙…עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 According to law … on account of that Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because…?”
EST 1 15 adf9 figs-events בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 by the hand of the eunuchs To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 1 15 jd15 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 by the hand of the eunuchs Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that the eunuchs were the ones who told Queen Vashti what King Ahasuerus had commanded her. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 15 adg1 translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 eunuchs See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 1 16 adg3 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מְמוּכָ֗ן לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 And Memukan answered before the face of the king and the officials Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Memukan was speaking in the presence of the king and of the other officials. Alternate translation: “then Memukan spoke so that both the king and the officials could hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 16 yqr8 figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ֣⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֕ר בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 all the people who are in all the provinces of the king This means all the different people groups that were living in the empire. You could say, “all the people groups in all the provinces that King Ahasuerus rules” or more generally, “every person who lives in the entire empire of King Ahasuerus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EST 1 16 ss5y translate-names מְמוּכָ֗ן 1 Memukan See how you translated this man’s name in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 16 adg5 figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 the king Ahasuerus Memukan speaks of **the king** in third person as a form of respect. If you want to portray him as speaking primarily to the king because he is answering the king’s question, you could have him say, “in all the provinces that you rule” or “every person who lives in your entire empire.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 17 jd17 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 For This introduces the reason why Memukan says that Queen Vashti has done wrong against all the men in the kingdom and not only against King Ahasuerus. To show that, you can begin with “This is what will happen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 1 17 gn4g figs-hyperbole יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּה֙ עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 the matter of the queen will go out to all the women To emphasize his point, Memukan exaggerates and says that every single woman in the empire will hear about Queen Vashti refusing to obey King Ahasuerus. You could say, as UST does, that “women all over the empire” will hear about what the queen did. Or you could preserve Memukan’s manner of speaking by saying, “every woman” will hear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EST 1 17 jd19 figs-metaphor לְ⁠הַבְז֥וֹת בַּעְלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 to make their husbands despised in their eyes Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that the women will treat their husbands with disrespect and not obey them. Alternate translation: “women will despise their husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 1 17 adg7 figs-explicit בְּ⁠אָמְרָ֗⁠ם הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 when they say, “The king Ahasuerus said to bring Vashti the queen before his face, but she did not come.” The implication is that they will go on to say, “So if even the queen can disobey the king, why should I have to obey my husband?” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 17 adg9 grammar-connect-logic-result הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 The king Ahasuerus said to bring Vashti the queen before his face, but she did not come. The women will stop respecting their husbands after they hear about this. You can put this report about what Queen Vashti did first, before “women will stop respecting their husbands,” because it is the reason that explains that result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 1 17 jd21 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means the Queen Vashti refused to come into the presence of King Ahasuerus when he summoned her during the feast. See how you translated this in verse 11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 18 afg1 וְֽ⁠הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 Now this day Alternate translation: “even today” or “even this very day”
EST 1 18 afg3 שָׂר֣וֹת פָּֽרַס־וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 the noblewomen of Persia and Media It becomes clear later in the verse that Memukan is speaking of the wives of the king’s officials, and you could communicate that here by saying, “the wives of the officials who govern Persia and Media.” But the term “noblewomen” indicates that they also had high status of their own, so you could also call them “the leading women of Persia and Media.”
EST 1 18 afg5 דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 the matter of the queen Alternate translation: “what the queen has done”
EST 1 18 afg7 תֹּאמַ֣רְנָה 1 will speak This means that they will “talk back” or “disobey.” Alternate translation: “refuse to obey”
EST 1 18 afg9 figs-explicit לְ⁠כֹ֖ל שָׂרֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 to all the officials of the king This means the husbands of the noblewomen. The implication may be, “They will disobey their husbands even though they are officials of the king.” You could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 18 u6d7 וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י בִּזָּי֥וֹן וָ⁠קָֽצֶף 1 and there will be contempt and wrath enough This could mean either that they will treat their husbands with disrespect, and this will make their “husbands angry with them” or that “they will be angry with their husbands and treat them with contempt.”
EST 1 18 afh1 figs-explicit וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י 1 and there will be enough This could mean that the husbands will be as furious “as much as they can bear.” But you could also say, “That will be bad enough by itself, even if the news does not spread any farther.” If you think that is the meaning, you can say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 19 afh3 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 19 d8qk figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it pleases you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 19 jd25 figs-metonymy יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 let a decree of royalty go out from before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that the decree will come from the king himself. Alternate translation: “you should personally issue a royal decree” or “you should write a decree yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 19 afh5 figs-abstractnouns דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 a decree of royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective “royal.” Alternate translation: “royal decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 19 jd23 figs-123person מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 from before his face Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 19 afh7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִכָּתֵ֛ב 1 and let it be written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “you should write a decree yourself” or “command your scribes to write a decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 1 19 mh1a וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֑וֹר 1 which do not pass away Alternate translation: “these laws never become invalid” or “can never be changed”
EST 1 19 jd27 figs-123person תָב֜וֹא…לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 come before the face of the king Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “never come into your presence again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 19 jd29 figs-metonymy תָב֜וֹא…לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 come before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Queen Vashti will never again come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “never again come before King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 19 jd31 figs-123person וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ יִתֵּ֣ן הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠רְעוּתָ֖⁠הּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 and let the king give her royalty to her female neighbor Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You can show the same meaning with a verb that addresses a singular “you” and indicates that Memukan is offering advice, not giving a command when he say, “choose another woman to be queen.” Alternate translation: “the king can give her position as queen to some other woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 19 afh9 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 and … her royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an expression such as “her royal position” or “her position as queen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 1 19 afj1 figs-explicit הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 the woman who is better than she Memukan means that the next queen should be “better than” Vashti by obeying all of the king’s commands. You could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 20 v9l3 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁמַע֩ פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 Then the decree of the king will be heard You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when everyone … hears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 1 20 des3 figs-123person פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 the decree of the king Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person: “When they hear what you have commanded.” Alternate translation: “when they hear the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 20 jd33 figs-explicit אֲשֶֽׁר־יַעֲשֶׂה֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 that he will make for all his kingdom Even though the decree of Ahasuerus applied only to Vashti directly, implicitly it meant that all wives had to obey their husbands or else their husbands could banish and divorce them as well. You can say this explicitly at the end of the verse by saying, “because if any wife disobeys her husband, he can banish and divorce her, just as you did to Vashti.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 1 20 afj3 figs-123person מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 his kingdom Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “for all your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 1 20 p8nz כִּ֥י רַבָּ֖ה הִ֑יא 1 though it is great Alternate translation: “even though your empire is very large”
EST 1 20 afj5 הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֗ים יִתְּנ֤וּ יְקָר֙ לְ⁠בַעְלֵי⁠הֶ֔ן 1 women will give honor to their husbands Alternate translation: “women will respect and obey their husbands”
EST 1 20 be9r figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּד֖וֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָֽן 1 from the greatest to the least This expression figuratively refers to all of the husbands in the empire. By naming both extremes, it includes everyone in between. You could just give the meaning, as UST does: “every husband in the empire.” Alternate translation: “this will be true for both the most important man and the least important man in the empire, and everyone in between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 1 21 afj7 figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּיטַב֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 The word seemed good in the eyes of the king Like “if it is good to the king” in verse 19, this is an idiom that means the king thought this was a good idea or this advice pleased the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 21 afj9 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֑ים 1 in the eyes of the king and the officials Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus and all the officials who heard Memukan’s advice thought that his suggestion was a good idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 1 21 agj1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר מְמוּכָֽן 1 the king acted according to the word of Memukan This means that King Ahasuerus wrote a law proclaiming what Memukan had suggested.
EST 1 21 p5us translate-names מְמוּכָֽן 1 Memukan Translate his name as in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 1 22 agj3 וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֤ח סְפָרִים֙ אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 he sent letters to all the provinces of the king **He** means King Ahasuerus. This is saying that the king sent letters to every province in his empire.
EST 1 22 jd37 figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 province by province This is an idiom that means “every province” or every single province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 22 agj5 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 according to its own writing Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
EST 1 22 jd39 figs-idiom עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 people by people This is an idiom that means “every people group” or every single people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 1 22 jd41 figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 22 jj9n לִ⁠הְי֤וֹת כָּל־אִישׁ֙ שֹׂרֵ֣ר בְּ⁠בֵית֔⁠וֹ 1 that every man should be ruling in his house This meant that all men should have complete authority over their wives and their children.
EST 1 22 jd43 figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 speaking according to the tongue of his people Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 1 22 agj7 figs-explicit כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 speaking according to the tongue of his people The implication is that the husband ought to be able to give orders to his wife in his own native language and that she should understand and obey him, even if she had to learn his language to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 intro eb4q 0 # Esther 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Esther becomes queen<br><br>Esther was humble and took the advice of the royal officials about how to dress for her time with the king. The king chose Esther to be the new queen.<br><br>### Mordecai warns the king against a plot<br><br>Esther’s cousin, Mordecai, discovered that two men planned to kill the king. He told Esther, who then told the king. She also gave Mordecai credit for telling her.
EST 2 1 dpc3 writing-newevent אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 After these things This introduces a new event that happened some time later, but we do not know how much later. You can show this with a phrase like “After some time had passed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 2 1 e4lp כְּ⁠שֹׁ֕ךְ חֲמַ֖ת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 when the rage of the king Ahasuerus subsided Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was not angry any more” or “when King Ahasuerus became less angry”
EST 2 1 agj9 זָכַ֤ר אֶת־וַשְׁתִּי֙ 1 he remembered Vashti This means that he started to think about Vashti. He probably thought about the things that he liked about her, meaning that he missed her.
EST 2 1 xpt9 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 what she had done, and what had been decided concerning her This refers to Vashti’s refusal to obey Ahasuerus, and to the decision he made in [1:21](../01/21.md) that she could never come into his presence again. This could actually mean that when he thought about Vashti and what she had done, he regretted the decision that he had made about her. But there was nothing he could do to bring her back because the laws of the empire could not be changed. You could explain all or some of this in your translation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 1 agk1 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 what had been decided You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 2 agk3 translate-unknown נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו 1 the young men of the king who serve him These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in [1:13](../01/13.md), but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 2 agk5 figs-explicit יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת 1 Let them seek for the king young women Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 2 s4hv writing-participants יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ 1 Let them seek **Them** refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EST 2 2 zi03 figs-123person לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ 1 for the king The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 2 2 jd45 figs-idiom טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה 1 pleasing of appearance As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 3 g9vp figs-123person וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 And let the king appoint The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 2 3 jd47 figs-idiom טוֹבַ֨ת מַרְאֶ֜ה 1 pleasing of appearance As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 3 xqf9 translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֤ן הַ⁠בִּירָה֙ 1 Susa the citadel In this context, this expression probably means “to the palace here in Susa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 3 j4ka בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 the house of women This means the harem for virgins, the place where the young women would live and receive beauty treatments before they were taken to the king (see verses 13 and 14).
EST 2 3 d754 figs-activepassive אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 into the hand of Hegai, the eunuch of the king who is overseer of the women If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “let Hegai, the king’s official, who is in charge of the women, take care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 3 jd49 figs-metaphor יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א 1 the hand of Hegai Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Hegai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 3 lf71 translate-names הֵגֶ֛א 1 Hegai This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 3 jd51 figs-123person סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the eunuch of the king The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 2 3 agk7 translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס 1 eunuch See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the official of” or “the administrator of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 3 agk9 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 who is overseer of the women Alternate translation: “who is in charge of the women who live there.”
EST 2 3 w1ly translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 their ointments This term seems to refer to a specific substance that women would put on their face or other parts of their body to make themselves more beautiful. From verse 12, it appears to mean lotions that were used along with oils and perfumes. But here, this one aspect of a woman’s beauty treatment seems to be used to refer to all of it, so you could call these “beauty treatments.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 4 jd53 figs-123person וְ⁠הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תִּיטַב֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then the young woman who is pleasing in the eyes of the king The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying something such as “the young woman you like the best.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 2 4 lh3n figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י 1 in the eyes of Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus could decide which young woman he liked the best and make her queen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 4 jd55 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the word was pleasing in the eyes of the king Here, **eyes** have the same figurative meaning. The phrase indicates that King Ahasuerus thought that this suggestion was a good idea. Alternate translation: “The king found their suggestion appealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 4 zxc1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ כֵּֽן 1 so he did thus Alternate translation: “so he followed the suggestion”
EST 2 5 h6z2 writing-participants אִ֣ישׁ יְהוּדִ֔י 1 A man, a Jew This introduces Mordecai as a new character in the story. Use your language’s way of introducing a new character. This expression means a Jewish man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EST 2 5 uu9i translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 in Susa the citadel Here the phrase likely indicates the city rather than the palace, that is, the capital city of Susa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 5 zxc3 translate-names מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 Mordecai This is a man’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 5 q2rz translate-names בֶּ֣ן יָאִ֧יר בֶּן־שִׁמְעִ֛י בֶּן־קִ֖ישׁ 1 the son of Jair, the son of Shimei, the son of Kish These are men’s names. Jair, Shimei, and Kish are Mordecai’s male ancestors. You could say, “Mordecai was the son of Jair, who was the son of Shimei, who was the son of Kish,” or see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 5 kw5t אִ֥ישׁ יְמִינִֽי 1 a man, a Benjamite While this likely refers to Kish, it is necessarily also true of Mordecai, and you could put it second in the verse. That way Mordecai’s nationality would come first, then his tribe, and then his family and clan. Alternate translation: “from the tribe of Benjamin”
EST 2 6 zxc5 writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם עִם־הַ⁠גֹּלָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הָגְלְתָ֔ה עִ֖ם יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem with the captives who had been exiled along with Jehoiachin, the king of Judah, who Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon had exiled The story now tells about something that happened many years before. This is background information that explains how this Jewish family came to live in Susa. You can introduce this by saying something like, “Many years earlier.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 2 6 z7fe figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon had taken Kish away from Jerusalem along with some other captives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 6 egm7 writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem You can bring this information forward from later in the verse because it provides background information that helps identify Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 2 6 zxc7 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem If it would be helpful in your language, you could say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought the people that he took away from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “had taken Kish away from Jerusalem … and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 6 zxc9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous עִ֖ם 1 along with This means that the two things happened at the same time. You can indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time that he took.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EST 2 6 ch1t translate-names יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה 1 Jeconiah, the king of Judah In the historical passage where this event is described (2 Kings 24:8–17), this king is called Jehoiachin. That was another name by which he was known. You can call him Jehoiachin here in Esther if you think that would help your readers recognize him better. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 6 zxv1 translate-names אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 whom Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon had exiled You can say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought this king when he took him away from Jerusalem. For example, you can say, “Nebuchadnezzar … took King Jehoiachin of Judah away from Jerusalem and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 7 zxv3 וַ⁠יְהִ֨י 1 And he was The story now returns to talking about Mordecai. If it is helpful for your readers, you can specify his name, saying, “Now, Mordecai.”
EST 2 7 hfm9 בַּת־דֹּד֔⁠וֹ 1 the daughter of his uncle If your language has a specific term for this relationship, you can use it. For example, you can say, “his cousin.” Alternate translation: “his uncle’s daughter”
EST 2 7 m9kx translate-names הֲדַסָּ֗ה הִ֤יא אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 Hadassah (she is Esther) Here the story is indicating that this woman’s Hebrew name was Hadassah and her Persian name was Esther. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 7 zxv7 translate-names אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 Esther This is a woman’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 7 ccb1 אֵ֥ין לָ֖⁠הּ אָ֣ב וָ⁠אֵ֑ם 1 there was not for her a father or a mother You could say simply that “she was an orphan,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “both her father and mother had died”
EST 2 7 jd59 figs-parallelism וְ⁠הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֤ה יְפַת־תֹּ֨אַר֙ וְ⁠טוֹבַ֣ת מַרְאֶ֔ה 1 Now the young woman was beautiful of form and pleasing of appearance These two phrases mean something similar. Separately, they could be saying that Esther was both sexually mature and very attractive. But taken together, they mean that, overall, she was very pleasant to look at. You could combine them, as UST does, and say that she was “exceptionally attractive” Alternate translation: “she had a lovely body and a beautiful face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 2 7 skt5 writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠מ֤וֹת אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ וְ⁠אִמָּ֔⁠הּ לְקָחָ֧⁠הּ מָרְדֳּכַ֛י ל֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַֽת 1 And at the death of her father and her mother, Mordecai had taken her for him as a daughter This is background information explaining the relationship between Mordecai and Esther. You can move it to right after the place where Esther is introduced by name because it describes what happened in the past, before Esther became a beautiful young woman. Alternate translation: “after her father and her mother had died, Mordecai had adopted her as his own daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 2 8 zxv9 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 So it happened that After providing this background information about Mordecai and Esther in verses 5–7, the story now tells what happened as a result of these facts, when the provincial officers described in verse 3 began sending young women to the harem. That is, the story tells what happened to Esther because her family was living in the Persian empire and she was very attractive. Use your language’s way of showing that the events are now moving forward after giving background information. Alternate translation: “and so this is what happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 2 8 zcv1 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 when the decree of the king and his law were heard, and when many young women were gathered This indicates that two actions took place at the same time. You should indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EST 2 8 zcv3 figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 when the decree of the king and his law were heard You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “when the messengers proclaimed the king’s decree and the scribes published the king’s law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 8 c52i דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 the decree of the king This refers to King Ahasuerus banishing Queen Vashti from his presence.
EST 2 8 zcv5 וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ 1 and his law This refers to King Ahasuerus commanding that men would have complete authority over their wives.
EST 2 8 zcv7 figs-explicit בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע 1 when … were heard You could also say where they did this action. Alternate translation: “Messengers went throughout the empire and proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 8 m3ld figs-activepassive וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 and when many young women were gathered You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 8 jd65 translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֖ה 1 Susa the citadel Here again, this likely means “the capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 8 mbk1 figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֣ד הֵגָ֑י 1 into the hand of Hegai Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. You could say that the officers “put them under the custody of Hegai” or that “Hegai began to take care of them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 8 zcv9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע…וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ…וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 So it happened that, when … were heard, and when … were gathered … Esther was taken This means that Esther was brought to the harem of King Ahaserus at the same time as other young women were also being brought to the harem. You can say, “they brought Esther at the same time” or “they also brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EST 2 8 n3zc figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 that … Esther was taken You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they brought Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 8 zcb1 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 that … Esther was taken You can explain why this happened. For example, you can say, “Because Esther was exceptionally attractive, the officers also brought her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 8 zcb3 בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 the house of the king Alternate translation: “the king’s palace”
EST 2 8 jd71 figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגַ֖י שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 into the hand of Hegai As earlier in this verse, this means under the custody of Hegai or that Hegai also began to take care of her. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 8 zcb5 writing-background שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 who was overseer of the women This means that Hegai took care of the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move this information to earlier in the verse when Hegai is first mentioned because it explains why the young women were brought to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 2 9 zcb7 וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 the young woman was pleasing in his eyes, and she lifted kindness before his face This means that Hegai found Esther attractive, and she obtained kindness from him or that Hegai was very impressed with Esther, and she won his favor. In other words, because he was so impressed with her, this made him want to do everything he could to help her. This is background information that explains why Hegai took the actions that are listed next.
EST 2 9 zcb9 figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 the young woman was pleasing in his eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that Hegai thought that Esther was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 2 9 f8i8 הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה 1 the young woman This means Esther. You should make sure that this is clear in your translation.
EST 2 9 jd75 בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 in his eyes Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
EST 2 9 jd77 figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 and she lifted kindness before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. To say that she “lifted kindness before his face” is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, it could even suggest that Esther and Hegai became friends. Alternate translation: “she won his favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 2 9 jd79 לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 before his face Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
EST 2 9 abc1 translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֶ֤י⁠הָ 1 her ointments Alternate translation: “her beauty treatments,” as in [2:3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 9 abc2 מָנוֹתֶ֨⁠הָ֙ 1 her portions of food In context, this likely means that Hegai made sure that Esther was served good food that would keep her healthy.
EST 2 9 abc3 שֶׁ֣בַע הַ⁠נְּעָר֔וֹת הָ⁠רְאֻי֥וֹת לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֖⁠הּ מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 gave her seven young women chosen from the house of the king This means that Hegai chose seven female servants from the king’s palace and assigned them to take care of Esther.
EST 2 9 abc4 וַ⁠יְשַׁנֶּ֧⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתֶ֛י⁠הָ 1 And he transferred her and her young women **Her** means Esther, and **her young women** means the female attendants Hegai assigned to her.
EST 2 10 abc6 לֹא־הִגִּ֣ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 Esther had not told her people or ancestry This means that Esther had not told anyone this information about herself.
EST 2 10 abc7 figs-doublet אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 her people or her ancestry These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does, and say something like “what people group she was from.” Alternate translation: “Esther did not tell anyone that she was a Jew, and she did not tell anyone who her relatives were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 2 10 abc8 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֧י מָרְדֳּכַ֛י צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 for Mordecai had laid a charge upon her This is background information that explains why Esther did not tell anyone about her family or nationality. It might be helpful to your readers to state this at the beginning of the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 2 10 abc9 צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 had laid a charge upon her This means that Mordecai had gotten her to promise not to do it.
EST 2 11 jd81 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 And always day by day Alternate translation: “every single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 11 abd1 מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ 1 Mordecai was walking about Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”
EST 2 11 jd83 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר 1 before the face of the courtyard Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 2 11 abd2 בֵּית־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 the house of women Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”
EST 2 11 abd3 grammar-connect-logic-result לָ⁠דַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 in order to know the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 2 11 nz1p שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 the welfare of Esther Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”
EST 2 11 abd4 figs-parallelism שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 2 12 jcj8 writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ 1 Now when … came Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 2 12 jd85 figs-idiom נַעֲרָ֨ה וְ⁠נַעֲרָ֜ה 1 young woman by young woman Alternate translation: “each one of the young women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 12 abd5 figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ תֹּר֩…לָ⁠ב֣וֹא ׀ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ 1 when the turn came … to go to the king Ahasuerus Each of these young women was going to have sexual relations with the king and, as a result, legally become one of his concubines, that is, one of his secondary wives. As the story has already explained, he would then choose one of them to become his queen and primary wife. But the king would still provide for each of the concubines for the rest of her life; they would not be free to marry anyone else. This is something that the story’s original audience would have understood implicitly. you could say it explicitly if your readers need this information to understand the story: “Each young woman in the harem, one at a time, was going to have sexual relations with King Ahasuerus and become one of his concubines” or “one of his secondary wives.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 12 p7i5 translate-unknown כְּ⁠דָ֤ת הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ 1 according to the law of women Here, **law** probably does not mean a legal decree, but rather a standard regimen that had been developed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 12 abd7 writing-background כִּ֛י כֵּ֥ן יִמְלְא֖וּ יְמֵ֣י מְרוּקֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 For thus the days of their beautification would be fulfilled This phrase indicates that the story is now going to provide background information on how these treatments were done. It means, “This is how these women would spend the time preparing to go to the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 2 12 abd8 figs-explicit שִׁשָּׁ֤ה חֳדָשִׁים֙ בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 six months by oil of myrrh This means that a woman’s attendants would rub her body with olive oil mixed with myrrh every day for six months. you could explain this in more detail if your readers need this information to understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 12 abd9 בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 by oil of myrrh This likely means “olive oil mixed with myrrh.”
EST 2 12 zhd1 translate-unknown וּ⁠בְ⁠תַמְרוּקֵ֖י הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 and by the ointments of women This means lotions designed for women. In 2:3 and 2:9, this one specific part of the program seems to be used figuratively to mean all of it, and so in those verses it can be translated “beauty treatments.” But it should be translated with a specific term or phrase here, such as “women’s lotions” or “feminine ointments” because it is named along with oils and perfumes as one component of the treatment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 13 abd0 וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה 1 Then at this Alternate translation: “after a woman’s year of beauty treatments was completed”
EST 2 13 abe0 figs-explicit הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the young woman would go to the king This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 13 abe1 figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 Anything that she said would be given to her **Anything** most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 13 v133 figs-activepassive כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 Anything that she said would be given to her You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 13 xx9x בֵּ֥ית 2 the house of Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
EST 2 13 abe3 בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the house of the king Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
EST 2 14 abe4 figs-explicit הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה 1 she would go She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in [1:11](../01/11.md). you could say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 14 ded5 figs-explicit וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה 1 and in the morning she would return to It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 14 lq9h translate-ordinal בֵּ֤ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ שֵׁנִ֔י 1 the second house of women Alternate translations: “a different house for women” or “the harem for concubines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 2 14 yw63 אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 into the hand of Shaashgaz, the eunuch of the king who was overseer of the concubines Alternate translation: “where Shaashgaz, the king’s servant in charge of the concubines, would take care of her”
EST 2 14 ze74 figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 into the hand of Shaashgaz Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. Just as Hegai was the overseer of the virgins, Shaashgaz was the overseer of the concubines, so he would be the one responsible for Esther while she was in the harem for concubines. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Shaashgaz” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 14 q5yx translate-names שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז 1 Shaashgaz This is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 14 abe5 translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the eunuch of the king See how you translated this term, **eunuch**, in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” rather than “of the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 14 abe6 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 the overseer of the concubines This means that Shaashgaz was the official who *took care of the concubines* or who was responsible for the concubines.
EST 2 14 abe7 figs-explicit הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 the concubines As a **concubine**, the young woman was one of the king’s secondary wives. She would live in this harem for the rest of her life. She was not free to return to her family or to marry anybody else. If it would help your readers to understand the story, you could explain all or part of this to your readers here, if you did not do so in 2:12 or 2:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 14 abe8 לֹא־תָב֥וֹא עוֹד֙ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 She would not go to the king again In verse 12, the Note mentioned that “go to the king” meant “have sexual relations with the king.” But for this occurrence of the expression, it is appropriate to use a more general phrase such as “visit the king” because there could be other, more social reasons for a further visit. The woman would now be a secondary wife, and the king would only send for her if he decided that he enjoyed being with her. Alternate translation: “She would not go and see the king again”
EST 2 14 abe9 חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ 1 had delighted in her This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”
EST 2 14 abf0 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 and she was called by name You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 15 fiy8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר…לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Now when the turn of Esther … came to go to the king The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12-14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EST 2 15 jk51 figs-distinguish בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת 1 the daughter of Abihail, the uncle of Mordecai, who had taken her for him as a daughter This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 2 15 mg8y translate-names אֲבִיחַ֣יִל 1 Abihail This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 15 qx3u figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 she did not ask for anything except what Hegai … said You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
EST 2 15 vw9r אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 what Hegai … said Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”
EST 2 15 abf1 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 what Hegai … said As the king’s personal servant, **Hegai** would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you could make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 15 abf2 figs-distinguish סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 the eunuch of the king who was overseer of the women This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 2 15 abf3 translate-unknown סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the eunuch of the king See how you decided to translate the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” for “of the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 15 z519 figs-idiom נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 a lifter of favor in the eyes of every man who saw her This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 15 jd87 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י 1 in the eyes of Here, **eyes** is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 15 jd89 figs-gendernotations כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 every man who saw her This phrase can mean either **every man or every person who saw her**. Alternate translation: “every man who saw her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
EST 2 16 jd91 figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֨ח אֶסְתֵּ֜ר 1 So Esther was taken You can say this with an active form by saying, for example, “The king’s servants brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 16 abf5 figs-abstractnouns אֶל־בֵּ֣ית מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 to the house of his royalty You can use an adjective to translate the abstract noun **royalty.** For example, you can say, “in his royal palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 2 16 jd92 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֖י 1 in the tenth month Alternate translation: “in month ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 2 16 jr5s translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 which is the month of Tebeth **Tebeth** is the name of the tenth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “that is, the month of Tebeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 2 16 abf6 חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 the month of Tebeth The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court. But for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given.
EST 2 16 abf7 translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 the month of Tebeth You could convert the Hebrew days and months into approximate dates on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to provide the Hebrew days and months. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 16 x6yg translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠מַלְכוּתֽ⁠וֹ 1 in the seventh year of his reign Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 2 17 p3s7 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֶּאֱהַ֨ב הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֶת־אֶסְתֵּר֙ מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠בְּתוּלֹ֑ת 1 And the king loved Esther more than all the women, and she lifted both favor and kindness before his face more than all the other virgins These two phrases mean almost the same thing. The information is given twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Ahasuerus was completely convinced that Esther was the one he should make his queen**.** “More than all the virgins” basically duplicates the meaning of “more than all the women,” so, if this duplication would be confusing in your language, you don’t need to include both phrases, or you could say, “more than all of them” for the second phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 2 17 abf8 figs-explicit מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 more than all the women This means all the other women who had been brought to the king and who became his concubines. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 17 bcu8 figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 And she lifted both favor and kindness before his face This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. See how you translated similar phrases in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:15](../02/15.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus was very impressed with both Esther’s appearance and her personality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 17 abf9 figs-doublet וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 And she lifted both favor and kindness before his face **Favor** and **kindness** mean similar things and are probably used together here to strengthen a single idea. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 2 17 jd93 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 2 17 sym3 translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֤שֶׂם כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ בְּ⁠רֹאשָׁ֔⁠הּ 1 So he set a crown of royalty on her head Ahasuerus did this to show that he was making Esther his queen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 2 17 abg0 figs-abstractnouns כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 a crown of royalty To translate the abstract noun **royalty**, you can use an adjective such as a “royal” crown. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 2 18 abg1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה גָד֗וֹל 1 Then the king made a great feast The king did this to celebrate Esther becoming the queen. You can say this explicitly. For example, you can say, “Then, to celebrate her becoming the queen, the king hosted a great feast.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 18 b1hd translate-names מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 the feast of Esther You could indicate to your readers this is the name that Ahasuerus gave to the feast, for example, “He called it ‘Esther’s Feast.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 18 ufm8 translate-unknown וַ⁠הֲנָחָ֤ה לַ⁠מְּדִינוֹת֙ עָשָׂ֔ה 1 And he made a holiday for the provinces This was probably a “tax holiday,” that is, a temporary elimination of taxes. For a time, the provinces did not have to send in the usual taxes to the king. You could say something like “he proclaimed a temporary reprieve from taxes for all the provinces of his empire.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 18 jd95 figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 according to the hand of the king Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus personally gave lavish gifts to the guests at this feast. You could say something like “with royal generosity” or “with great willingness to give” or “with generosity that only a king can give.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 2 19 g38f grammar-connect-time-sequential וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Now when virgins were being gathered a second time Since this happened some time after Esther’s Feast, you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EST 2 19 p842 figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Now when virgins were being gathered a second time The most likely explanation for this is that Ahasuerus decided he would like to have more concubines. you could say this explicitly if it will help the readers to understand the story. He probably believed that having a large number of concubines was another thing that would show he was a great king. To do so, you could add: “because Ahasuerus decided that he would like to have more concubines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 19 abg2 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Now when virgins were being gathered a second time You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “at the time when the king’s officers were gathering virgins for a second time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 19 ang3 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 Now when … were being gathered … Mordecai … then This indicates that the information about Mordecai explains what he was doing at this same time. You can use a phrase such as “during this time” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EST 2 19 a23f figs-idiom וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֥ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Mordecai was then sitting at the gate of the king Possible meanings are: (1) **Sitting at the king’s gate** is an idiom meaning that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) Mordecai sat there so he could hear about how Esther was doing from the many people who passed through the gate.
EST 2 19 i8in בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 at the gate of the king Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s house” or “the gate to the king’s palace”
EST 2 20 abg5 figs-doublet מֽוֹלַדְתָּ⁠הּ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עַמָּ֔⁠הּ 1 her ancestry (that is, her people) These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does. Alternate translation: “who her relatives were or that she was a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 2 20 fb39 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 according to the charge that Mordecai had laid upon her Alternate translation: “just as Mordecai had instructed her” or “as Mordecai had made her promise” or “because Mordecai had warned her not to tell anyone”
EST 2 21 vi16 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֔ם 1 In those days This resumes the story after the background information that is provided in verse 20. Indicate this in the way that your language resumes a story after giving background information, such as with a connecting phrase like “during that time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
EST 2 21 abg7 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 when Mordecai was sitting at the gate of the king It is implicit in the story that Mordecai heard the two men talking who are named right afterwards. You can say this explicitly if it helps the readers to understand this part of the story. To do so, add: “he heard two men talking.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 2 21 abg8 figs-idiom יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 was sitting at the gate of the king As in verse 19, this is likely an idiom that means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate where officials met to make important decisions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 21 y2vl translate-names בִּגְתָ֨ן וָ⁠תֶ֜רֶשׁ 1 Bigthan and Teresh These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 2 21 abg9 translate-unknown שְׁנֵֽי־סָרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 two eunuchs of the king See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). For the phrase **of the king**, you can say “royal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 21 abh0 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֣י הַ⁠סַּ֔ף 1 who were guardians of the doorway In this case the men were not guardians of one of the harems but guardians of the king’s private rooms. You could say, “they guarded the doorway to the king’s private rooms” or “they protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters.”
EST 2 21 abh1 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקְשׁוּ֙ 1 and they sought Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they were plotting” or “they wanted to find a way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 2 21 jd97 figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 to stretch out a hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. You could say, “they were planning to assassinate him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 22 y7tv figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּוָּדַ֤ע הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 But the matter was made known to Mordecai You can say this with an active form, for example by saying, “Mordecai found out what they were planning.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 22 abh2 וַ⁠יַּגֵּ֖ד לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 so he told it to Esther the queen This means that he told Queen Esther about it somehow.
EST 2 22 dgp3 figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 in the name of Mordecai This expression means that Esther passed the information along to King Ahasuerus on Mordecai’s behalf or that she told the king the information had come from Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 23 abh3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out, and the two of them were hanged on a tree. This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EST 2 23 ld4y figs-activepassive וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 23 abh4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 the two of them were hanged on a tree You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 23 y28j translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 on a tree This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or “wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 2 23 g9nh figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב 1 And it was written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 2 23 abh5 figs-idiom בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים 1 the book of the events of days This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 2 23 abh6 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 3 intro zb26 0 # Esther 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Haman plots against the Jews<br><br>Mordecai was told to prostrate himself before Haman. This would be considered to be worship. But for a Jew, it was wrong to worship someone other than Yahweh. Because of this, he refused to do it. This made Haman angry, so he decided to kill all the Jews in the Persian Empire. Haman was a descendant of Agag, a king of the Amalekite people. The Amalekites became the enemies of the Jews during the exodus (Exodus 17:8-16). Moses told the people that they would need to destroy them (Deuteronomy 25:17-19), and later God commanded Saul to destroy them (1 Samuel 15:2-3). Samuel killed King Agag (1 Samuel 15:33), but the Amalekites were never completely destroyed (1 Samuel 30:17). Both Mordecai and Haman were probably very aware that their people were enemies.
EST 3 1 mm4c writing-newevent אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 After these things This introduces a new event in the story. Use a connecting phrase that introduces a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 3 1 abh7 grammar-connect-time-sequential אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 After these things This event happened some time after Esther became queen, and you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EST 3 1 ir5v translate-names הָמָ֧ן 1 Haman This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 3 1 abh8 translate-names בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 the son of Hammedatha, the Agagite These are the names of Haman’s father and Haman’s people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 3 1 abh9 figs-explicit גִּדַּל֩…אֲחַשְׁוֵר֜וֹשׁ אֶת־הָמָ֧ן 1 Ahasuerus made Haman … great This means that Ahasuerus **promoted** Haman. It’s implied in the story that Haman was already one of Ahasuerus’s officials, but that he was now being promoted to a higher position. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 1 abi0 figs-doublet וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם֙ אֶת־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים 1 He lifted him up and placed his seat of authority from over all the officials These two phrases mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that the king was making Haman very powerful. You could combine them and say something like, “the king gave Haman a very high position that was over all of his other officials.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 3 1 pl9i figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 He lifted him up Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to advance or promote a person to a higher, more important position than they held previously. Alternate translation: “he gave him a more important position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 1 ptm4 figs-idiom כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 his seat of authority Here, **seat of authority** means Haman’s position or status in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 1 abi1 figs-abstractnouns כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 his seat of authority If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you can express the same idea with a concrete noun for this whole phrase. For example, you can say, “his position.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 3 1 abi2 מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר אִתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 from over all the officials who were with him **Him** in this phrase may refer to the king. You could say that “the king promoted him above his other officials” or “gave him more authority than all of his other officials” or that “Haman became more important than all of his other officials.”
EST 3 2 abi3 figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Then all the servants of the king who were at the gate of the king Here, the **gate of the king**, probably the entrance to the citadel, may figuratively represent the citadel itself, the place where these people served the king. The citadel, in turn, would represent everyone who served the king. So you could say just “all the king’s other servants.” However, this may also be a reference to the specific group of officials who were stationed at the gate, the way Mordecai was. Alternate translation: “the royal officials who were stationed at the palace gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 3 2 abi4 figs-explicit וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ…כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ לְ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 all the servants of the king … were bowing down and prostrating themselves to Haman The servants were required to do this as a way of honoring him whenever Haman walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 2 e25k translate-symaction כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 were bowing down and prostrating themselves This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 3 2 abi5 figs-doublet כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 were bowing down and prostrating themselves These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 3 2 fg8v וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 and prostrating themselves to Haman This means bowing down all the way to the ground.
EST 3 2 jd99 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 3 2 abi6 figs-explicit כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 2 abi7 figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 3 2 abi8 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 3 abi9 עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the servants of the king who were at the gate of the king See how you translated this expression at the beginning of [3:2](../03/02.md).
EST 3 3 abj0 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ…לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 said to Mordecai They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. You could say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 3 abj1 מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Why are you trespassing the command of the king? Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”
EST 3 4 jd3r figs-explicit ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ 1 when they spoke to him This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 4 jd1r figs-idiom י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 day by day This expression means “every day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 4 abj2 figs-idiom וַ⁠יְהִ֗י ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙…וְ⁠לֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 Now it happened that, when they spoke … he did not listen to them. Here, **he did not listen** means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 4 uek4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠הָמָ֗ן לִ⁠רְאוֹת֙ הֲ⁠יַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 So they told Haman to see if the words of Mordecai would stand In this context, **standing** figuratively means to survive a challenge, and **words** means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 4 abj3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 3 4 abj4 figs-explicit כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 5 abj5 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן 1 The Haman saw Here, **seeing** figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 5 njt5 figs-parallelism אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑⁠וֹ 1 Mordecai would neither bow down nor prostrate himself to him These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 3 5 wk8p figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה 1 And Haman was filled with rage Here, **Haman’s rage** is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 6 k5h9 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 And it was despised in his eyes You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 6 abj6 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 And it was despised in his eyes Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 6 abj7 וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז 1 it was despised **Despise** in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.
EST 3 6 jd9r figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 in his eyes Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 6 abj8 לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְ⁠בַדּ֔⁠וֹ 1 to stretch out a hand against Mordecai alone Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”
EST 3 6 j11r figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ 1 to stretch out a hand As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 6 abj9 כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥ידוּ ל֖⁠וֹ אֶת־עַ֣ם מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 for they had told him the people of Mordecai **They** means the other royal officials. **Him** refers to Haman. **The people of Mordecai** means the Jews. Mordecai had told these officials that he would not bow down to Haman because Jews worshiped only God. So this means that the other officials had told Haman that Mordecai was not bowing down to him because he was a Jew.
EST 3 6 hue9 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֣שׁ הָמָ֗ן לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֧יד 1 So Haman sought to annihilate Here, **seeking** figuratively means trying to do something. In this context, it means that Haman decided that he would try to kill all the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 6 abk0 בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכ֥וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֖וֹשׁ 1 in all the kingdom of Ahasuerus This means in the entire empire that King Ahasuerus ruled.
EST 3 6 abk1 figs-doublet הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים…עַ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 the Jews, the people of Mordecai These two phrases refer to the same group of people. The repetition emphasizes how great the threat was to their existence. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “all of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai’s people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 3 7 zl12 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙ 1 In the first month Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 3 7 wyv6 translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 which is the month of Nisan **Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 3 7 abk2 translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 the month of Nisan As in [2:16](../02/16.md), you could convert the Hebrew month into an approximate time on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to give the Hebrew month. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 3 7 tw99 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֔ה לַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 in the twelfth year of the king Ahasuerus Alternate translations: “during the twelfth year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” or “when King Ahasuerus had reigned for about twelve years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 3 7 g4lt translate-names הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 a Pur (which is “the lot”) The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 3 7 abk3 translate-unknown הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 the lot A **lot** was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 3 7 abk4 figs-activepassive הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 7 abk5 grammar-connect-logic-result הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 3 7 j13r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן 1 before the face of Haman Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 3 7 j15r מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.
EST 3 7 j17r figs-explicit מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 7 ih4b translate-hebrewmonths שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 3 7 abk6 שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar See how you decided in [2:16](../02/16.md) and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.
EST 3 7 abk7 figs-explicit שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 7 k3vd translate-ordinal שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 the twelfth Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 3 8 abk8 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Then Haman said to the king Ahasuerus The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 8 aig9 translate-numbers יֶשְׁנ֣⁠וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד 1 He has one people **He** refers to the king, and **one people** refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 3 8 p4a8 figs-doublet מְפֻזָּ֤ר וּ⁠מְפֹרָד֙ 1 scattered and dispersed These two words mean almost the same thing. Haman uses the repetition to emphasize that the Jews are everywhere throughout the empire and so their influence, which he says is bad, will affect everyone. You could combine these words as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 3 8 abk9 בֵּ֣ין הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל מְדִינ֣וֹת מַלְכוּתֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 among the peoples in all the provinces of your kingdom Haman is saying that the Jews are mixed in with all the other peoples, and they live in every province.
EST 3 8 abl0 וְ⁠דָתֵי⁠הֶ֞ם שֹׁנ֣וֹת מִ⁠כָּל־עָ֗ם וְ⁠אֶת־דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֵינָ֣⁠ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 And their laws are different from every people, and the laws of the king they do not obey. Haman is saying that the Jews have their own set of laws, and he is accusing them of not obeying the king’s laws as a result.
EST 3 8 r34x figs-123person דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 the laws of the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could have him say, “your laws.” Or you could indicate this respect another way by having Haman begin by saying, “Your Majesty.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 3 8 bf9g וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֵין־שֹׁוֶ֖ה לְ⁠הַנִּיחָֽ⁠ם 1 And there is no profit to the king to leave them untouched Haman is saying, “It is not good for you to allow them to live in your empire.” This can also be stated without the negative. Alternate translation: “the king should remove them” or “you should remove them”
EST 3 8 j19r figs-123person וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 no profit to the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying, “not good for you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 3 9 abl1 figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 3 9 abl2 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king See how you decided to translate this idiom in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” or “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 9 abl3 figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֖ב 1 let it be written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who would do the action. For example, you could say, “the king could write a decree” or “you could write a decree.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 9 abl4 לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 to destroy them This means that the decree would say that all the Jews should be killed.
EST 3 9 eh3w figs-idiom אֶשְׁקוֹל֙ עַל־יְדֵי֙ עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 I will weigh out … into the hands of the doers of the work This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) Haman could mean that the king’s men will be able to collect a huge amount of money from the plunder that they would get from the Jews. Referring to the weight would be a way of saying, “I guarantee that it will be at least that much.” This reasoning agrees with 3:13, where the king’s letter specifies that those who kill the Jews can take their plunder. Alternate translation: “we will get so much plunder that the officers you send will be able to bring back” (Also see UST) (2) “**Weigh out into the hands**” could be an idiom that means Haman himself will pay the officers who will put the plan into effect. Haman will not do this personally, but it means that he will take responsibility for paying them from his own resources. Alternate translation: “From my own resources I will pay … to the men who do the work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 9 lhv5 translate-bmoney וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 10,000 talents of silver This would be worth over $300 million at current prices today. But since prices vary over time, if you expressed the value in modern measurements, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate. Instead you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the talent, and explain in a note that a talent was equivalent to about 30 kilograms. Alternatively, you could specify the weight of the silver in the text, as UST does in metric tons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
EST 3 9 vm59 figs-hyperbole וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 The **talent** was the largest unit of money and **10,000** was the largest number in the counting system of the time. It is possible that Haman used these terms to represent a very large, but not precise, amount. Alternate translation: “a huge amount of silver” or “enormous amounts of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EST 3 9 abl5 עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 the doers of the work This could mean: (1) those who work for the king in general (administrators) or (2) more specifically the officers whom Ahasuerus would send around the empire to organize the killing of the Jews.
EST 3 9 abl7 figs-123person גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the treasuries of the king Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could also have him speak of “your royal treasuries.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 3 10 abl8 figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 Then the king removed his signet from on his hand, and he gave it to Haman The implication is that Ahasuerus thought that Haman’s suggestion was a good idea and he agreed to it. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king agreed that this was a good idea, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 10 abl9 translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 Then the king removed his signet ring from on his hand **Giving the ring to Haman** showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 3 10 c9md translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 his signet ring This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 3 10 abm0 בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 the son of Hammedatha the Agagite This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.
EST 3 10 abm1 figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים 1 the adversary of the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 3 11 sz4b figs-activepassive הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ 1 The silver is given to you You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 11 abm2 figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 and the people, to do with them as is good in your eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that **he can do whatever he wants to the Jews**. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 12 hx6c figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 And the scribes of the king were called You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 12 t6qa translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 in the first month, on the thirteenth day of it You can add “of that same year” to show that Haman did this right after Ahasuerus agreed to his plan. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the first month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 3 12 abm3 בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 in the first month, on the thirteenth day of it You can put this information first because it places the event within the timeline of the story.
EST 3 12 abm4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה הָמָ֡ן 1 in was written according to all the Haman commanded You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Haman dictated a letter to them” or “they wrote a decree containing all that Haman had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 12 abm5 translate-unknown אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵֽי־הַ֠⁠מֶּלֶךְ 1 the satraps of the king This seems to mean the officials of the king who served in the palace in the capital city, since they are distinguished from the provincial governors and the leaders of the people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 3 12 j23r figs-idiom מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 province by province This expression means every province**.** See how you translated this in 1:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 12 abm7 שָׂ֤רֵי עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the officials of people by people Alternate translation: “the leaders of each people group”
EST 3 12 j25r figs-idiom עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 people by people This expression means every people group**.** See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 12 j27r figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 province by province according to its writing See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “to each province using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 12 abm8 figs-explicit מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 province by province according to its writing The implication is that the scribes translated the letter and sent it to each province using its own alphabet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 12 j31r figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 and to people by people according to its own tongue See how you translated this expression in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “and to each people group in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 12 j33r figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** is a metonym meaning the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “according to its language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 3 12 abm9 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹשׁ֙ נִכְתָּ֔ב 1 In the name of the king Ahasuerus it was written There are two This could mean: (1) Here, **name** could mean the authority of the king. This would be saying that Haman’s letter had the same authority as it would have had if the king had sent it himself. Alternate translation: “Haman sent the letter under the king’s own authority” (2) However, this could also mean that Haman actually had the scribes sign the king’s name to the letter. Alternate translation: “they signed the king’s name at the end of the letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 12 lyf2 figs-activepassive נִכְתָּ֔ב וְ⁠נֶחְתָּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 It was written, and it was sealed with the signet ring of the king You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to show that he was sending the letter under the king’s own authority, Haman sealed each copy of the letter with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it,” or “the scribes signed the king’s name at the end of the letters. Then they sealed the letters with wax, and stamped the wax by using the king’s ring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 13 hxx6 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁל֨וֹחַ סְפָרִ֜ים 1 And letters were sent You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “couriers delivered the letters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 13 j34r figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הָ⁠רָצִים֮ 1 by the hand of runners Here, **hand** could mean two different things: (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the couriers carried the letters in their hands. Alternate translation: “couriers hand-delivered the documents” (2) “Hand” could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that couriers were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers gave the documents directly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 3 13 abn0 figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 to all of the provinces of the king Haman did not send the letters to the provinces (the geographical territories) themselves. Rather, he sent them to the officials in every province in the empire. The story is using the word “province” to refer figuratively to these officials by something associated with them, the territories they ruled. Your translation should make clear that the letters were sent to people, not places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 3 13 xs6g figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֡יד לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֣ד 1 to annihilate, to slaughter, and to destroy These words mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is envisioned. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “completely destroy.” (A “doublet” can use more than two words. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 3 13 abn1 figs-merism מִ⁠נַּ֨עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֜ן 1 from young even to old This is a figure of speech that figuratively describes all of something by naming two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. You could express its meaning as UST does and say something like “every single one of them.” Alternate translation: “including young people and old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 3 13 abn2 טַ֤ף וְ⁠נָשִׁים֙ 1 children and women Alternate translation: “including the children and the women”
EST 3 13 j35r translate-numbers בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 on one day Alternate translation: “on a single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 3 13 abn3 figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 on the thirteenth of the twelfth month Implicitly, this means “the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 13 g5br translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 on the thirteenth Alternate translation: “on day thirteen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 3 13 j36r translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 of the twelfth month Alternate translation: “of month twelve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 3 13 i5ur translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 which is the month of Adar This is the name of the twelfth month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you decided in 2:16 and 3:7 to express dates that the story gives according to the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 3 13 pbp1 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 and to plunder their spoils This means that the letters also said that those who killed the Jews could take everything that belonged to them.
EST 3 14 tj7n figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 the writing, to be given as a law in every province by province You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “The officials in every province presented a copy of the letter as the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 14 vga2 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 In every province by province This expression means each and every province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 3 14 l9w7 figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב…גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 the writing … was uncovered for all the peoples You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to post copies where everyone could see them” or “the king commanded the officials to display copies of these letters where all the people could see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 14 f6dc לִ⁠הְי֥וֹת עֲתִדִ֖ים לַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 to be ready for this day Alternate translations: “so that people would be ready to do on that day what the king had written in the letter” or “so that they would get ready to do what the letter said to do when the day came”
EST 3 15 abn4 הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The runners went out hurrying by decree of the king This means that the king had commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible.
EST 3 15 abn5 figs-explicit הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The runners went out hurrying by decree of the king You can state explicitly where the couriers brought the letters. Alternate translation: “as the king had commanded, couriers rushed the letters to every province in the empire” or “then, according to what the king commanded, men riding horses took these letters quickly to every province in the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 15 i12c figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 and the law was given You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “People read the letter out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 3 15 nlk8 translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 in Susa the citadel Here this likely means in the “capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 3 15 abn6 figs-synecdoche יָשְׁב֣וּ לִ⁠שְׁתּ֔וֹת 1 sat down to drink (1) This could mean that Ahasuerus and Haman had more than just a drink together. This could be a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. They may have celebrated with an entire banquet that is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “had a celebration feast together” (2) Another possibility is that this is describing a toast that Ahasuerus and Haman shared to celebrate their plan. “Sat down” would simply be describing how the men would have reclined at a table to drink. Alternate translation: “had a celebration toast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 3 15 wm4u figs-explicit נָבֽוֹכָה 1 the city of Susa was in confusion The implication is that the people in Susa were very upset about what was going to happen and they did not know what to do about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 3 15 wbgv grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר 1 The author wants us to see the contrast between the king and Haman sitting down to relax and drink and the people in the city agitated and in an uproar over what the king and Haman had proclaimed. Use a connecting word or other way that your language uses to show a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EST 3 15 abn7 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר שׁוּשָׁ֖ן 1 but the city of Susa This does not mean the city itself, but the people who live there. This is a figure of speech in which something is called not by its own name, but by the name of something closely associated with it. So this means “everyone who lived in Susa” or the people in Susa (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 3 15 abn8 figs-abstractnouns נָבֽוֹכָה 1 was in confusion You can translate the abstract noun **confusion** with a verbal phrase such as “was very confused.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 4 intro z7u2 0 # Esther 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Mordecai warns Esther to act<br><br>Mordecai tells Esther she must beg the king for the Jews’ lives even if she risks her own death.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Implicit information<br><br>There is implicit information that translators may not understand. The sentence, “Who knows whether you have come to this royal position for such a time as this?” means “maybe God made you the queen so you could save the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 1 j37r writing-participants וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י יָדַע֙ 1 Now when Mordecai knew Here the story re-introduces Mordecai as the main character in focus. Alternate translation: “when Mordecai found out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
EST 4 1 nya6 כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר נַעֲשָׂ֔ה 1 about all that had been done Alternate translation: “about Haman’s plan to kill all the Jews” or “about those letters”
EST 4 1 vgy8 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 he tore his garments and put on sackcloth and ashes These actions demonstrate extreme sadness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 1 abn9 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 he tore his garments and put on sackcloth and ashes You can explain why Mordecai did this. Alternate translation: “he was so anguished that he tore his clothes and put on rough sackcloth and threw ashes over himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 1 abo0 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹךְ הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 he went out into the midst of the city The next verse shows that Mordecai was heading towards the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly here. Mordecai might have wanted to call attention to the danger that the Jews were in by going to a public location where people were used to seeing him. Or he might have wanted to contact Esther and ask her to help with the trouble. Or he might have wanted both. Alternate translation: “he started walking towards the city center, towards the king’s palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 1 abo1 figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּזְעַ֛ק זְעָקָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּ⁠מָרָֽה 1 and cried out a great and bitter outcry **Great** and **bitter** are two words that refer to the same thing and that work together. They indicate that Mordecai’s cry was so loud because it was so anguished. Alternate translation: “cried out in anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 4 2 abo2 וַ⁠יָּב֕וֹא 1 And he came **He** means Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai came”
EST 4 2 j38r figs-metonymy עַ֖ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 only as far as before the face of the gate of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that Mordecai could not come inside the gate to the king’s palace, but had to wait just outside of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 4 2 abo3 שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the gate of the king See how you translated this in [2:19](../02/19.md). Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s palace”
EST 4 2 abo4 grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֥ין לָ⁠ב֛וֹא אֶל־שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בִּ⁠לְב֥וּשׁ שָֽׂק 1 no one was to come into the gate of the king while wearing sackcloth If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains why Mordecai waited outside. See the UST. Alternate translation: “But no one who was wearing sackcloth was allowed inside the palace gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 4 3 e73y figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 And in every province by province This expression means in every single province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. Alternate translation: “in each and every province” or “in every province of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 4 3 abo5 מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 any place where the decree of the king and his law reached Alternate translation: “anywhere that the letter that said to destroy the Jews was announced in public”
EST 4 3 abo6 figs-doublet דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ 1 the decree of the king and his law These two phrases are referring to the same thing, that is, the information that the letter conveyed. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious a situation this was. Alternate translation: “the letter from the king” or “the law that said to destroy the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 4 3 e7zx אֵ֤בֶל גָּדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 there was great mourning by the Jews Alternate translation: “the Jews mourned greatly” or “when the Jews heard about it, they mourned greatly”
EST 4 3 abo7 figs-explicit וְ⁠צ֥וֹם 1 and fasting **Fasting** is a sign of mourning. If your readers would not understand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “they went without food because they were so upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 3 abo8 figs-doublet וּ⁠בְכִ֖י וּ⁠מִסְפֵּ֑ד 1 weeping, and lamenting These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how distressed the Jews were. Alternate translation: “wailed loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 4 3 djf6 translate-symaction שַׂ֣ק וָ⁠אֵ֔פֶר יֻצַּ֖ע לָֽ⁠רַבִּֽים 1 sackcloth and ashes were laid out by the multitudes These were actions that demonstrated deep grief. “Many of them lay on the ground, dressed in sackcloth and sitting in ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 4 q7ll נַעֲר֨וֹת אֶסְתֵּ֤ר 1 the young female attendants of Esther Alternate translation: “Esther’s female servants” of “Esther’s maids”
EST 4 4 abo9 translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֶ֨י⁠הָ֙ 1 and her eunuchs See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “her male servants” or “her other officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 4 4 abp0 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לָ֔⁠הּ 1 and they told her That is, they told her that Mordecai was sitting outside the gate wearing sackcloth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 4 abp1 figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 even the queen was seized with extreme fear **The queen** means Esther. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Esther herself became very afraid” or “this made the queen very distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 4 4 abp2 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 even the queen was seized with extreme fear The implication is that this happened when she heard what Mordecai was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When she heard about this, Esther herself became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 4 y8bc translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּשְׁלַ֨ח בְּגָדִ֜ים לְ⁠הַלְבִּ֣ישׁ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 she sent garments to clothe Mordecai and to take off his sackcloth from upon him **She** means Esther. This was her way of encouraging Mordecai to be hopeful and act publicly as if whatever situation he was worried about were not completely desperate. Alternate translation: “she sent servants to take to Mordecai some good clothes to wear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 4 abp3 translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹ֥א קִבֵּֽל 1 he did not accept This was Mordecai’s way of replying to Esther that the situation truly was desperate. Alternate translation: “he refused to put them on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 5 abp4 וַ⁠תִּקְרָא֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 So Esther called for Hathak, from the eunuchs of the king Alternative translation: “then Esther summoned Hathak, one of the king’s officials”
EST 4 5 vf4m translate-names לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ 1 for Hathak This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 4 5 lp8m writing-background מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶעֱמִ֣יד לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 from the eunuchs of the king whom he had caused to stand before her face Alternate translation: “who was one of the royal guardians whom the king had assigned to serve Esther personally” You can put this information first because it provides background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 4 5 icg7 translate-unknown מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י 1 from the eunuchs of See how you translated this term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 4 5 j39r figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 before her face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the guardians served Esther personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 4 5 abp6 figs-parallelism לָ⁠דַ֥עַת מַה־זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠עַל־מַה־זֶּֽה 1 to know what this was and on account of what this was These two phrases mean similar things. In both cases, “this” refers to what Mordecai was doing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Esther now knew there must be a very serious reason why Mordecai was wearing sackcloth in such a public place. Alternate translation: “to find out why he was so distressed that he was sitting at the palace gate wearing sackcloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 4 6 abp7 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הֲתָ֖ךְ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 So Hathak went out to Mordecai Hathak went out specifically to speak with Mordecai and find out why he was so distressed, as Esther had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Hathak went out to speak with Mordecai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 6 mgl5 רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 the open place of the city Alternate translation: “the central plaza”
EST 4 6 j41r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 before the face of Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that the open square was in front of the palace gate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 4 6 abp8 figs-metonymy שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the gate of the king The citadel is being described by reference to something associated with it, the gate that leads into it. Alternate translation: “the citadel gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 4 7 zq3s figs-synecdoche אֵ֖ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 Mordecai reported to him all that had happened to him Here, **him** refers to Mordecai, but here Mordecai figuratively represents the entire group of which he is a member. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman was planning to do to the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 4 7 abp9 פָּרָשַׁ֣ת הַ⁠כֶּ֗סֶף אֲשֶׁ֨ר אָמַ֤ר הָמָן֙ לִ֠⁠שְׁקוֹל עַל־גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ בַּיְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 the exact amount of silver that Haman had said to weigh out in the treasuries of the king, against, to destroy them This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) the amount of silver that Haman said the king would get for his treasury from the plunder that the people who destroyed the Jews would take from them, or (2) the amount of silver that Haman had said he would contribute to pay for the expenses of the plan to destroy the Jews. You could say either one as an alternate translation, but it should agree with your interpretation of [3:9](../03/09.md).
EST 4 8 j43r פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן כְּתָֽב־הַ֠⁠דָּת 1 a copy of the writing Alternate translation: “a copy of the letter that Haman had sent out” or “a copy of the decree”
EST 4 8 zt49 figs-activepassive הַ֠⁠דָּת אֲשֶׁר־נִתַּ֨ן בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֤ן 1 the law that had been given in Susa If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the law that the heralds had read out loud in Susa” or “the decree that the king’s servants had posted in Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 4 8 abq0 לְ⁠הַשְׁמִידָ⁠ם֙ 1 to annihilate them Alternative translation: “that said that all the Jews must be killed”
EST 4 8 abq1 figs-parallelism לְ⁠הַרְא֥וֹת אֶת־אֶסְתֵּ֖ר וּ⁠לְ⁠הַגִּ֣יד לָ֑⁠הּ 1 in order to show Esther, and to inform her These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize how important Mordecai knew it was for Esther to understand just what Haman was planning. “so that Esther could see exactly what it said.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 4 8 abq2 וּ⁠לְ⁠צַוּ֣וֹת עָלֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 and to lay a charge upon her Alternate translation: “and to urge her”
EST 4 8 gds6 figs-doublet לְ⁠הִֽתְחַנֶּן־ל֛⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠בַקֵּ֥שׁ 1 to implore his favor and to seek These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize the force of the action that Mordecai felt was needed. Alternate translation: “to plead with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 4 8 j47r figs-metonymy מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 to go to the king … from before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Esther should go into the presence of the king to ask personally for the king’s intervention. Alternate translation: “to go to the king personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 4 8 abq3 עַל־עַמָּֽ⁠הּ 1 concerning her people Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”
EST 4 10 abq5 וַ⁠תֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַ⁠הֲתָ֔ךְ וַ⁠תְּצַוֵּ֖⁠הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 Then Esther spoke to Hathak and commanded him to say to Mordecai: Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”
EST 4 11 abq6 figs-merism כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing **All the servants of the king** refers to the royal officials in the palace. **The people of the provinces** refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 4 11 abq7 כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If it would be helpful in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
EST 4 11 d9mh figs-merism כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 for any man or woman Here, Esther once again refers to a group figuratively by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 4 11 abq8 translate-symaction יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶ⁠חָצֵ֨ר הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֜ית 1 who goes to the king, to the inner court As [5:1](../05/01.md) makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 11 abq9 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א 1 who has not been called If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 4 11 abr0 אַחַ֤ת דָּת⁠וֹ֙ 1 his law is one If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself. Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom”
EST 4 11 abr1 לְ⁠הָמִ֔ית 1 to cause to die Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”
EST 4 11 abr2 translate-symaction לְ֠⁠בַד מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 apart from when the king holds out to him the scepter of gold, then he will live If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 11 abr3 translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 the scepter of gold A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 4 11 ilp4 figs-explicit וְ⁠חָיָ֑ה 1 This means that the guards will not kill this person and he can proceed to speak to the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the guards will not kill him and he can speak to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 11 abr4 figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י לֹ֤א נִקְרֵ֨אתי֙ לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 But as for me, I have not been called to come to the king these thirty days Esther is saying by implication that she cannot speak to the king as Mordecai has requested because the king has not been calling for her, which would have given her an opportunity to speak to him. If she goes without being summoned, she could be put to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 11 j49r grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י 1 But as for me This expression indicates a contrast between Esther’s present situation and the situation she has just described. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EST 4 11 abr5 זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 these 30 days The phrase means that Esther has not been called in the king’s presence for a period of at least 30 days. You could use an equivalent expression in your language that would indicate this is a long enough time that Esther has reason to believe the king is not interested in seeing her. Alternate translation: “in over a month”
EST 4 11 gv1v translate-numbers זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 these 30 days Alternate translation: “thirty days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 4 12 abr6 וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֔י 1 So they told to Mordecai the words of Esther From this point on, the author focuses only on Mordecai and Esther and does not specify who the messenger is. You can use a general phrase such as, “they told Mordecai” or “Mordecai was told” or “messengers told Mordecai.” If that would be confusing, you could continue to specify that the messenger was Hathak, as the ancient Greek version did. See the UST.
EST 4 13 abr7 וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר מָרְדֳּכַ֖י לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶל־אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 Then Mordecai said to return to Esther Alternate translation: “then Mordecai sent back this message to Esther”
EST 4 14 i1uy figs-personification רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה יַעֲמ֤וֹד לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מִ⁠מָּק֣וֹם אַחֵ֔ר 1 relief and deliverance will arise for the Jews from another place Here, **relief** and **deliverance** are spoken of as if they are living things that can rise up. Alternate translation: “someone else will rise up from another place and rescue the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 4 14 t3k7 figs-doublet רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה 1 Here, **relief** and **deliverance** mean very similar things. They are used together to emphasize the great emotion behind being delivered from this great evil. If it works better in your language, you can use one word instead of two, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 4 14 abs0 וְ⁠אַ֥תְּ וּ⁠בֵית־אָבִ֖י⁠ךְ תֹּאבֵ֑דוּ 1 but you and the house of your father will perish The implication is that the Jews will be rescued starting in that other place, but the ones living in Susa will still be in danger because no one who could have helped them there (such as Esther) would have done anything. Alternate translation: “you and your relatives will be killed”
EST 4 14 dtg7 figs-rquestion וּ⁠מִ֣י יוֹדֵ֔עַ אִם־לְ⁠עֵ֣ת כָּ⁠זֹ֔את הִגַּ֖עַתְּ לַ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 And who knows if you have arrived at royalty for such a time as this? This is really a statement, and it is about what is happening right then. Mordecai asks it in question form so that Esther will think deeply about her role in this situation. Alternate translation: “who knows, perhaps it was to intervene in this very situation that you became queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
EST 4 16 d6cq figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים הַֽ⁠נִּמְצְאִ֣ים בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 all the Jews who are found in Susa You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live here in Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 4 16 t2wg translate-symaction וְ⁠צ֣וּמוּ עָ֠לַ⁠י 1 And fast on account of me The verb **fast** here is plural, including Mordecai and all of the Jews. Fasting (that is, going without eating) was a symbolic act that the Jews did when they were praying intensely. You could make the connection with prayer explicit. Alternate translation: “fast and pray for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 4 16 qw8v translate-numbers וְ⁠אַל־תֹּאכְל֨וּ וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁתּ֜וּ שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת יָמִים֙ לַ֣יְלָה וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 neither eating nor drinking for three days, both night and day This expression means that Esther was asking the Jews in Susa not to eat or drink anything during the day or the night for a period of three days. Alternate translation: “tell them to not eat or drink anything for three days and three nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 4 16 j51r גַּם־אֲנִ֥י וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתַ֖⁠י אָצ֣וּם כֵּ֑ן 1 Also, I myself and my young female attendants will fast likewise Alternate translation: “my maids and I will also fast”
EST 4 16 abs2 וּ⁠בְ⁠כֵ֞ן 1 Then, in such circumstances Alternate translation: “after we have all done that, and while still fasting”
EST 4 16 abs3 אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת 1 which is not according to the law Alternate translation: “even though there is a law against going without being summoned”
EST 4 16 abs4 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי 1 and if I perish, I perish Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”
EST 4 17 abs5 figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 So Mordecai went The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 4 17 abs6 כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 according to the whole charge that Esther had laid upon him Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”
EST 5 intro k5ff 0 # Esther 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Esther’s respect<br>Esther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 1 j53r writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י 1 Now it happened on the third day This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 5 1 abs7 figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 Esther put on royalty If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **royalty**, you can express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 5 1 abs8 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 Esther put on royalty It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 1 abs9 בַּ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֔ית 1 the inner court of the palace of the king See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “the inner courtyard of the palace”
EST 5 1 uk7p נֹ֖כַח בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 opposite to the house of the king Alternate translation: “across from the room where the king was”
EST 5 1 abt0 figs-abstractnouns וְ֠⁠הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ יוֹשֵׁ֞ב עַל־כִּסֵּ֤א מַלְכוּת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 sitting on the throne of his royalty in the palace of royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to those things that belonged only to the king. You can translate this idea with a verb, “the throne he ruled from” and “the palace where he reigned,” or with an adjective, “his royal throne” and “his royal palace.” Alternate translation: “in the throne room of the palace, sitting on the king’s throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 5 1 j55r נֹ֖כַח פֶּ֥תַח הַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 opposite to the entrance of the palace Alternate translation: “facing the entrance of the room”
EST 5 2 abt1 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְהִי֩ 1 Then it happened that This expression introduces what happened next. Alternate translation: “Now” or “and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
EST 5 2 abt2 כִ⁠רְא֨וֹת 1 as soon as … saw Alternate translation: “when … noticed”
EST 5 2 j57r figs-idiom נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 she lifted favor in his eyes See how you translated similar expressions in 2:9, 2:15, and 2:17. Review the explanations there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus **thought Esther looked very attractive** as she stood in the court. It could also mean that King Ahasuerus was very pleased to see her. It could mean both. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” or “he approved of her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 5 2 pw4x figs-metaphor נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 she lifted favor in his eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that King Ahasuerus decided not to kill Esther for coming into the inner court without being summoned. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 5 2 uu8s translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 And the king held out to her the golden scepter that was in his hand King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said that Esther should be executed for coming into the king’s inner court without being summoned. See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 5 2 abt3 figs-explicit וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 And the king held out to her the golden scepter that was in his hand King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her to signal that he would be glad to talk to her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 2 abt4 וַ⁠תִּקְרַ֣ב 1 so … approached Alternate translation; “so … came close” or “so … came up to the throne”
EST 5 2 z4mn translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 and touched the head of the scepter This action was probably customary for a king’s subjects in a Persian court, when the king extended the royal scepter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 5 2 abt5 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 and touched the head of the scepter This action demonstrated that Esther respected the authority of King Ahasuerus and was thankful for his kindness to her. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include that information here, such as: “…to show that she respected his authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 2 j59r figs-metonymy בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 the head of the scepter Here, **head** is a metonym meaning the top (or uppermost part) of an object or location. This phrase means that Esther touched the top of the king’s scepter on the end that was extended toward her. Alternate translation: “the top of the scepter” or “the tip of the scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 5 3 abt6 מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 What is to you, Esther the queen? Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”
EST 5 3 abt7 figs-parallelism מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 What is to you, Esther the queen? And what is your request? These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is very interested in hearing why Esther has come to see him. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if it would be more natural in your language to combine them into one. Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 5 3 j61r figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 As much as half of the kingdom, and let it be given to you This was probably a formal and customary expression in the Persian royal court, meant to show honor to the person making a request of the king and to indicate the king’s willingness to be very generous when answering the request. King Ahasuerus was almost certainly not offering to give Esther half of his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is.” Alternate translation: “I will give you what you want, even if you ask me to give you half of my kingdom!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EST 5 3 c6h7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 and let it be given to you You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” or “I will give you what you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 5 4 abt8 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19 and 3:9. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 5 4 m3uy figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 5 4 j63r figs-123person יָב֨וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָן֙ 1 let the king come with Haman Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “O king, please come with Haman” or “you and Haman come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 5 4 abt9 figs-123person הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 the banquet that I have made for him Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “the banquet that I have prepared for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 5 4 abu0 figs-yousingular הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 the banquet that I have made for him If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be singular, since here it refers just to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
EST 5 5 abu1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then the king said The king would have said this to his servants, not to Esther. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The king said to his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 5 abu2 מַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָמָ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 Bring Haman quickly, in order to do the word of Esther The **word of Esther** means her invitation to the banquet. Alternate translation: “go and get Haman and bring him quickly to the banquet that Esther has prepared”
EST 5 5 abu3 עָשְׂתָ֥ה 1 had made Alternate translation: “had prepared for them”
EST 5 6 d5wr figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 What is your petition? And let it be given to you. And what is your request? As much as half of the kingdom, and let it be done. These two question-and-statement pairs mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther whatever she wants. If this is confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. you can combine them into one or replace the repetition with a statement of what the repetition means, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 5 6 pj3p figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 What is your petition? When Ahasuerus asked Esther in the throne room what she wanted, she said that she wanted him and Haman to come to a banquet she had prepared. But since the king asks her once again at the banquet what she wants, it is clear that he knew this was not her real request. Instead, he knew that she wanted to show him hospitality first, as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship. You can indicate this by translating, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 6 q5nt figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 your petition … your request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 5 6 e2v2 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 And let it be given to you … let it be done You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 5 6 j65r עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 As much as half of the kingdom See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”
EST 5 7 abu5 figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֥עַן…וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֑ר 1 Then … answered and said Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” or “replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 5 7 r4aw figs-doublet שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 My petition and my request The words **petition** and **request** mean the same thing. Esther probably used these words together as a way of speaking very formally and respectfully to the king. Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 5 7 abu6 figs-abstractnouns שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 My petition and my request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 5 8 c2br figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 if I have found favor in the eyes of the king The expression **find favor** means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 5 8 abu7 figs-metaphor אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 if I have found favor in the eyes of the king Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means the King Ahasuerus is pleased with Esther and willing to grant her request. Alternate translation: “if the king evaluates me and approves” or “if the king is pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 5 8 c2jy figs-123person אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 if I have found favor in the eyes of the king Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 5 8 abu8 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ ט֔וֹב 1 if it is good to the king This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), and [5:4](../05/04.md). Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 5 8 j69r figs-doublet לָ⁠תֵת֙ אֶת־שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־בַּקָּשָׁתִ֑⁠י 1 to grant my petition and to perform my request The phrases **to grant my petition** and **to perform my request** mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “to do what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 5 8 x8hf figs-123person יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 let the king come with Haman to the banquet that I will make for them Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “please come with Haman to another banquet that I will prepare for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 5 8 j71r figs-youdual יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 let the king come with Haman to the banquet that I will make for them If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be dual if your language uses that form, since it refers to the king and Haman, otherwise it should be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
EST 5 8 abu9 וּ⁠מָחָ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 and tomorrow I will do according to the word of the king The **word of the king** means his request for Esther to tell him what she wants. Alternate translation: “I will answer your question then”
EST 5 8 gf9b figs-123person כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 according to the word of the king Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “according to your word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 5 9 abv1 וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֤א 1 And … went out Alternate translation: “and … left the banquet”
EST 5 9 j73r figs-doublet שָׂמֵ֖חַ וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 joyful and good of heart The word **joyful** and the phrase **good of heart** mean the same thing. These terms are used together to show that Haman was very happy after attending Esther’s banquet with King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “feeling very good” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]
EST 5 9 j75r figs-metaphor וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 and good of heart Here, **heart** figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. The phrase means that Haman felt happy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 5 9 dkg6 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹא־קָם֙ 1 that he neither rose up Under other circumstances, officials were expected to bow low to the ground to show respect for Haman. See [3:2](../03/02.md). But since Mordecai was already sitting on the ground as a sign of mourning, he would have been expected to stand up to show respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not stand up to show respect for Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 9 j77r translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹא־זָ֣ע מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ 1 nor trembled from him The phrase means that Mordecai was not afraid of Haman or of what Haman might do to him for refusing to show the respect that the king had commanded. Alternate translation: “or tremble fearfully in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 5 9 s47u figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֛ן עַֽל־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י חֵמָֽה 1 then Haman was filled with rage on account of Mordecai Here, **Haman’s rage** is described as something that could fill him up. See how you translated this expression in [3:5](../03/05.md). Alternate translation: “Haman became very angry because of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 5 10 v5nl grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּתְאַפַּ֣ק הָמָ֔ן 1 But Haman restrained himself There is a contrast between this sentence and the previous one. Haman felt very much like doing one thing, but he decided it would be better to do something else. The contrast can be indicated with a phrase such as “but even though.” Alternate translation: “but even though Haman was so angry, he kept himself from losing his temper” or “Haman refused to show how angry he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EST 5 10 bcn1 translate-names זֶ֥רֶשׁ 1 Zeresh This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 5 11 abv4 וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר לָ⁠הֶ֥ם 1 Then … recounted Alternate translation: “then … made a long speech to them about”
EST 5 11 mvm5 figs-abstractnouns כְּב֥וֹד עָשְׁר֖⁠וֹ 1 the glory of his wealth **Glory** and **wealth** are both abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “Haman told them about how great his wealth was” or “Haman told them about the many great things he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 5 11 j79r translate-symaction וְ⁠רֹ֣ב בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 and the multitude of his sons Having many sons was probably seen as a mark of honor and status in Persian culture. This phrase probably means that Haman was boasting about the status he enjoyed in Persian society because he had many sons. Alternate translation: “how many sons he had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 5 11 abv5 figs-gendernotations בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 his sons This word can sometimes be used in Hebrew to mean both male and female children. However, here it clearly refers to male children, so you should translate it that way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
EST 5 11 m7fq גִּדְּל֤⁠וֹ 1 made him great Alternate translation: “how the king had continually given him more authority” or “how the king had honored him many times by giving him more important work”
EST 5 11 b7c5 figs-metaphor נִשְּׂא֔⁠וֹ עַל 1 he had lifted him over Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to “advance” or “promote” a person to a higher, more important position than they had previously. Alternate translation: “given him a position more important than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 5 11 abv6 figs-explicit הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the officials and administrators of the king This means all of the others, as [3:1](../03/01.md) makes clear. Alternate translation: “all of his other officials and administrators” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 11 xwvh figs-doublet הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The words **officials** and **administrators** mean similar things. If your language uses one word for these, you can combine them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 5 12 abv7 figs-exclamations אַ֣ף 1 In addition You can translate it as an exclamation because Haman believes he has saved the best for last and is now introducing what he considers to be his most recent significant honor. Alternate translation: “and that is not all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
EST 5 12 w1bm figs-doublenegatives לֹא־הֵבִיאָה֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֧ה עִם־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ…כִּ֣י אִם־אוֹתִ֑⁠י 1 Esther the queen did not bring anyone with the king … except me This can be expressed positively. Alternate translation: “I was the only one Queen Esther invited besides the king” or “Queen Esther invited just two of us, the king and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
EST 5 12 abv8 עָשָׂ֖תָה 1 she had made Alternate translation: “she had prepared”
EST 5 12 abv9 figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 And also for tomorrow, I am called by her with the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 5 13 abw0 figs-metaphor וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙ 1 But all of this is not equal for me to every time that I see This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “…does not satisfy me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 5 13 wu84 וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה 1 But all of this Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”
EST 5 13 abw1 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 5 13 abw2 figs-explicit יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 sitting at the gate of the king Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 13 abw3 בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the gate of the king Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
EST 5 14 abw4 figs-explicit וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 Then … said to him The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 j81r וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 with all his friends This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
EST 5 14 abw5 figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 Let them make You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 i2f3 translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 a tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 5 14 k8zd translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 50 cubits high You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
EST 5 14 hiui figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 abw7 figs-explicit וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 5 14 abw8 grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בֹֽא…אֶל הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ 1 Then go … to the banquet joyful **Then** indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 5 14 bbs9 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן 1 And the word was good before the face of Haman The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 5 14 i8is וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 and he made the tree Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
EST 5 14 j83r translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 6 intro i9x7 0 # Esther 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Approaching the king<br>It was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
EST 6 1 j85r writing-newevent בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא 1 That night This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 6 1 abw9 figs-personification נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the sleep of the king fled away Here, **sleep** is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 6 1 abx1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא 1 And he said to bring **He** means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 1 abx2 סֵ֤פֶר הַ⁠זִּכְרֹנוֹת֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים 1 the book of records of the events of days This is equivalent to the expression “the book of the events of days” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “the royal chronicles” or “the records of what had happened during all the time that he had been king”
EST 6 1 abx3 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּהְי֥וּ נִקְרָאִ֖ים 1 they were being called out This means that the chronicles were read out loud. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the young men got the chronicles and began to read them out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 6 1 j87r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the book was being read in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 6 2 u4gi figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֣א כָת֗וּב 1 And it was found written Both terms **found** and **recorded** can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the writers had recorded there” or “they read the part where the writers had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 6 2 abx4 figs-explicit הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 Mordecai had told about The implication is that Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering the plot and telling him about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering a plot against the king and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 2 abx5 figs-events הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 Mordecai had told about To relate the events in chronological order, you can put this at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “but Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering their plot and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 6 2 syd9 translate-names בִּגְתָ֣נָא וָ⁠תֶ֗רֶשׁ 1 Bigthana and Teresh These are the same two men who are named in [2:21](../02/21.md). However, there the first man’s name is said to be “Bigthan.” Decide on a consistent way of translating these names so your readers will know that they are the same men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 6 2 abx6 translate-unknown שְׁנֵי֙ סָרִיסֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 two of the eunuchs of the king See how you translated the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “two of the royal guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 6 2 abx7 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֖י הַ⁠סַּ֑ף 1 who were from the guardians of the doorway See how you translated this expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “who protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters”
EST 6 2 abx8 figs-metaphor בִּקְשׁוּ֙ 1 they had sought Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they had planned” or “they had tried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 2 j89r figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 to stretch out a hand As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “to assassinate” or “to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 3 lmz6 figs-hendiadys מַֽה־נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה יְקָ֧ר וּ⁠גְדוּלָּ֛ה לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 What honor or great deed was done for Mordecai **Honor** and **greatness** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize that Mordecai should certainly have been honored in some grand way for saving the king’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this by putting the terms together. For example, you could say, “What great honor was done for Mordecai?” Alternate translation: “what did we do to reward Mordecai or to show that we appreciated what he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 6 3 aby0 figs-activepassive נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה 1 was done You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what did I do” or “what did we do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 6 3 n2az figs-activepassive לֹא־נַעֲשָׂ֥ה עִמּ֖⁠וֹ דָּבָֽר 1 Not a thing has been done with him You can say this with an active form. However, it would be good to say this in a way that does not create the impression that the young men are accusing the king. Alternate translation: “no one did anything for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 6 3 aby1 עַל־זֶ֑ה 1 on account of this Alternate translation: “for saving my life”
EST 6 4 aby2 figs-explicit מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 Who is in the court? This could mean either: (1) The king knows that there is someone in the courtyard, maybe because he heard someone walking there; he wants to know who it is. (2) Since there are always people around the palace, the king assumes that there must be someone out in the courtyard. In either case, the king wants to know if there is someone there with whom he could consult about the best way to honor Mordecai. As the story has already said in [1:13](../01/13.md), it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king wanted to consult someone about the best way to honor Mordecai, so he asked, ‘who is in the courtyard’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 4 aby3 מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 Who is in the court? In order to present the events in logical and chronological order, you can put the king’s question last in the verse if that would be more natural in your language. Haman had already come in the courtyard by the time the king asked this question.
EST 6 4 j91r grammar-connect-time-background וְ⁠הָמָ֣ן בָּ֗א לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 Now Haman had come into the outer court of the house of the king to say to the king to hang Mordecai on the tree that he had prepared for him This sentence indicates that Haman had already entered the outer court when King Ahasuerus asked his question. You could indicate this with a phrase such as “at that moment” or “just then” or “while they were talking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
EST 6 4 rg8t לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה 1 to the outer court of the house of the king This phrase is describing the first courtyard a person would come to after entering the palace from the outside. Alternate translation: “the outer courtyard of the palace”
EST 6 4 vu7p לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 to say to the king to hang Mordecai Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”
EST 6 4 at53 הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 the tree that he had prepared for him Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”
EST 6 4 aby4 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 6 5 aby5 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 And the young men of the king said It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say so. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 5 j93r figs-explicit הִנֵּ֥ה 1 Behold This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 5 j95r יָבֽוֹא 1 Let him come Alternate translation: “he may come in”
EST 6 6 j97r וַ⁠יָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then Haman came, and the king said to him Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”
EST 6 6 ky5i figs-123person מַה־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֕וֹת בָּ⁠אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 What is one to do for the man in whose honor the king is delighted? Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “what should I do for the man whom I would really like to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 6 n3r5 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “whom I am glad to honor” or “whom I want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 6 jh4i figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Then Haman said in his heart Here, **heart** could mean two different things: (1) Heart could figuratively represent the action of thinking or feeling. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said in his thoughts.” (2) Heart could also be a metaphor meaning to be inside someone or something. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said inside himself.” Either way, the phrase means that Haman was not saying this out loud, but saying it to himself in his thoughts. Alternate translation: “Haman thought to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 6 yft1 figs-rquestion לְ⁠מִ֞י יַחְפֹּ֥ץ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת יְקָ֖ר יוֹתֵ֥ר מִמֶּֽ⁠נִּי 1 For whom would the king delight to do honor more than me Haman is actually making a statement to himself rather than asking a question and trying to figure out the answer. He uses a question form to emphasize how true he believes the statement to be. If it would be helpful in your language, instead of a question, you could use a statement such as, “Surely there is no one whom the king would take pleasure in honoring more than me!” Alternate translation: “whom would the king like to honor more than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
EST 6 7 j1d1 figs-idiom אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 For a man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “for a man the king is glad to honor” or “for a man the king wants to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 7 aby6 figs-123person אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 For a man in whose honor the king is delighted Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “if you really want to honor someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 8 mz79 figs-explicit יָבִ֨יאוּ֙ 1 let them bring The implication is that the king’s servants would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “let someone bring” or “tell your servants to bring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 8 aby7 figs-abstractnouns לְב֣וּשׁ מַלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 a garment of royalty with which the king has clothed himself **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to anything that belongs to the king. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal garment.” Alternate translation: “one of your own royal robes that you have already worn yourself” or “one of the robes you wear to show that you are the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 6 8 aby8 figs-123person אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 with which the king has clothed himself Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “that you have already worn yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 8 aby9 figs-123person וְ⁠ס֗וּס אֲשֶׁ֨ר רָכַ֤ב עָלָי⁠ו֙ 1 and a horse on which the king has ridden Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “a horse that you have already ridden yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 8 r63j figs-activepassive וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 and which has been given a crown of royalty for its head This whole phrase refers to the horse. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 6 8 abz0 figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 and which has been given a crown of royalty for its head The implication is that this would be done to show that this was one of the king’s own horses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head to show that it belongs to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 8 abz1 figs-abstractnouns כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת 1 a crown of royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 6 9 pp3l figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָת֨וֹן הַ⁠לְּב֜וּשׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Then give this garment and this horse into the hand of a man from the most noble officials of the king Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 9 j1d3 figs-123person אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֔ים 1 a man from the most noble officials of the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 9 pfz6 figs-explicit וְ⁠הִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙ 1 And let them clothe Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 9 j1d5 figs-idiom הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 9 abz2 figs-123person הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 9 abz4 בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 in the open place of the city This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in [4:6](../04/06.md)), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”
EST 6 9 qs3k וְ⁠קָרְא֣וּ 1 and proclaim Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”
EST 6 9 j1d7 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 6 9 j1d9 figs-idiom כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 Thus shall it be done for the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” or “this is what the king does when he especially wants to honor someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 9 pwgm figs-activepassive כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this” or “this is what the king does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 6 10 j2d1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 So the king said to Haman The implication is that the king liked Haman’s suggestion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king liked this idea, so he replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 10 abz5 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר דִּבַּ֔רְתָּ וַֽ⁠עֲשֵׂה־כֵן֙ 1 according to how you have spoken, and do thus Alternate translation: “do everything that you have said” or “do just what you have suggested”
EST 6 10 abz6 figs-idiom הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the man who sits at the gate of the king As in [2:19](../02/19.md), this is likely an idiom which means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the king’s gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 10 abz7 figs-123person הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the man who sits at the gate of the king Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the gate to the palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 6 10 gln7 figs-metaphor אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 Do not allow a word to fail Here the action of letting **fall** is a metaphor meaning to leave out or leave unfulfilled. The phrase means that Haman must do absolutely everything that he said. Alternate translation: “do not leave out anything that you suggested” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 10 abz8 figs-doublenegatives אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 Do not allow a word to fail This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “Be sure to do absolutely everything that you have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
EST 6 11 abz9 וַ⁠יַּרְכִּיבֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 and paraded him in the open place of the city See how you translated these expressions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “seated him on the horse and then led the horse through the public square of the city”
EST 6 11 j2d5 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 called out before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman shouted out to the people in front of Mordecai, that is, the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “called out to all of the people in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 6 11 j2d7 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 Thus shall it be done for the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 6 12 uri5 translate-symaction אָבֵ֖ל וַ⁠חֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ 1 mourning with a covering of head People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 6 13 j3d1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן 1 Then Haman recounted The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in [5:10](../05/10.md) to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 13 aca1 figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 everything that had happened to him The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 13 aca2 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨⁠וֹ חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠זֶ֣רֶשׁ 1 Then his wise men and Zeresh said to him The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 6 13 aca3 חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו 1 his wise men See how you translated this expression in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “his advisors”
EST 6 13 fd5k figs-metaphor אִ֣ם…מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִ⁠נְפֹּ֤ל לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 If Mordecai, before whose face you have begun to fall This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he…” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 13 j3d3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 before … face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. This could mean: (1) that Haman has already begun to fall down (bow down) in front of Mordecai figuratively, or (2) that Haman and Mordecai are facing one another figuratively in hand-to-hand combat. Alternate translation: “before whom” or “in whose presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 6 13 p5t2 figs-metaphor מִ⁠זֶּ֣רַע הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 from the seed of the Jews Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “one of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 13 nan5 figs-metaphor לֹא־תוּכַ֣ל ל֔⁠וֹ 1 you will not prevail against him Here Haman’s wife and friends are again speaking figuratively as if Haman is in a battle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “you will not win against him” or “you will not have greater honor than he has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 13 j3d5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּֽי 1 but This conjunction indicates a contrast between the actions of prevailing (in the previous clause) and falling. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
EST 6 13 j3d7 figs-metaphor נָפ֥וֹל תִּפּ֖וֹל 1 you will surely fall Here the action of **falling**: (1) either refers once again to prostrating oneself, and is a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated, or (2) Haman’s wife and friends are saying that for Haman, defeat will be the outcome of the figurative battle. Alternate translation: “you will certainly lose to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 6 13 j3d9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman will lose in his struggle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “before him” or “in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 6 14 j4d1 grammar-connect-time-background עוֹדָ⁠ם֙ מְדַבְּרִ֣ים עִמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 They were still speaking with him when the eunuchs of the king arrived This phrase indicates something that happened after Haman’s wife and friends started talking with Haman and while they were still talking. You should indicate this with a phrase such as “while.” Alternate translation: “while they were still talking together, the king’s eunuchs arrived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
EST 6 14 aca4 translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 when the eunuchs of the king See how you decided to translate this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Not all of the king’s eunuchs came. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the king’s servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 6 14 aca5 וַ⁠יַּבְהִ֨לוּ֙ לְ⁠הָבִ֣יא אֶת־הָמָ֔ן 1 And they hurried to bring Haman Alternative translation: “they wanted to bring Haman quickly”
EST 6 14 aca6 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשְׂתָ֥ה אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 that Esther had made Esther’s servants would have done most of the work of preparing the banquet. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Esther and her servants had prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 intro x4w3 0 # Esther 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of Haman’s fall concludes in this chapter.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Covering Haman’s face<br><br>When “the servants covered Haman’s face,” they were showing that he had been condemned to be executed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 1 n8vb figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יָּבֹ֤א הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠הָמָ֔ן לִ⁠שְׁתּ֖וֹת עִם־אֶסְתֵּ֥ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּֽה 1 So the king came with Haman to drink with Esther the queen. Esther hosted Ahasuerus and Haman for more than just drinks. This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. An entire banquet is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “so the king and Haman went to the second banquet that Queen Esther had prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 7 2 xt9f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙ 1 on the second day This refers to the day after the first banquet, as mentioned in [5:8](../05/08.md). Alternate translation: “at that second banquet” or “on that second day of feasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 7 2 s5ae בְּ⁠מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 during the banquet of wine Alternate translation: “while they were drinking wine” or “while the servants were pouring the wine and giving it to them”
EST 7 2 yks7 figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ…וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 What is your petition … And let it be given to you. And what is your request? As much as half of the kingdom, and let it be done. These two statements mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is truly disposed to giving Esther what she wants. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 7 2 p1xt figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 What is your petition Ahasuerus has now allowed Esther to show her hospitality at two banquets. But he knows that she has done this as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship, and that this signals that she has an important and urgent request to make. You can indicate this by having the king ask, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 2 sem7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 And let it be given to you … and let it be done You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you what you ask for” or “I will do for you what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 7 2 j4d3 figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 your petition … your request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 7 2 j4d5 figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 As much as half of the kingdom See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EST 7 3 ac96 figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֨עַן…וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֔ר 1 Then … answered and said Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 7 3 k27c figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 If I have found favor in your eyes **Favor** means the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 7 3 aca7 figs-metonymy אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 If I have found favor in your eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 7 3 j4d7 הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 O king In this case, Esther is addressing Ahasuerus directly as “O king”; she is not speaking about him in the third person as a sign of respect, as she and others usually do elsewhere in the story. This may indicate a special urgency to what she is saying, so it would be good to include this difference in your translation or indicate the urgency in some other way.
EST 7 3 aca8 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 and if it is good to the king This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). The suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good plan to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But here, Esther has just addressed the king directly with “O king” and she is pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people. So an alternate translation here could be something more like, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 7 3 aca9 figs-parallelism תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 let my life be given to me at my petition, and my people at my request The phrases **at my petition** and **at my request** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the urgency of the request. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two requests. Alternate translation: “please spare my life and save my people” or “my request is that you spare my life and the lives of my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 7 3 j4d9 figs-activepassive תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ 1 let my life be given to me You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please spare my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 7 3 bvi1 figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י 1 at my petition The abstract noun **petition** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “that is what I am asking for” or “that is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 7 3 qghp figs-ellipsis וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 If this is unclear in your language, you can repeat from the previous clause the words that have been left out. Alternate translation: “and let my people be given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
EST 7 3 j5d1 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 at my request The abstract noun **request** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “rhat is what I am asking for” or “rhat is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 7 4 acb1 figs-metaphor כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 For we have been sold As Esther points out later in the verse, the Jews actually have not been exchanged for money. Rather, **sell** is a figurative way of saying “turn over to.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning by saying something like “For someone has turned us over to our enemies.” Alternatively, you could use the same figure, but show that it is a comparison. Alternate translation: “it is as though I and my people are cattle that have been sold to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 7 4 fhs7 figs-activepassive כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 For we have been sold You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has sold us” or “for someone has put us in danger of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 7 4 e9cx figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 for annihilation, for slaughter, and for destruction As in [3:13](../03/13.md), these words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction. If using three words would be difficult or confusing in your language, you could use one word for this and indicate that the destruction is extreme. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 7 4 yg01 figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns such as these, you can replace them with one or more verbs. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 7 4 acb2 וְ֠⁠אִלּוּ לַ⁠עֲבָדִ֨ים וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁפָח֤וֹת נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 if we had been sold as slaves and female servants Alternate translation: “if the men and even the women had been sold into slavery”
EST 7 4 j5d3 figs-hyperbole אֵ֥ין הַ⁠צָּ֛ר שֹׁוֶ֖ה בְּ⁠נֵ֥זֶק הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the distress would not have been equal to a burden of the king Esther is speaking very deferentially and with some exaggeration in order to impress on the king how important this is to her. She is saying that it would have been worth less to her to see her people rescued from slavery than it would have been to see the king spared the trouble of intervening on their behalf. (Haman uses the expression of “not equal” in this same sense in [5:13](../05/13.md).) Alternate translation: “that would have been a matter too small to bother you with” or “that would be a small matter to a king like you, but this is very much worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
EST 7 4 acb4 figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the king Esther addresses King Ahasuerus in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 7 5 acb5 figs-doublet וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 Then … spoke and said These two words mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 7 5 acb6 figs-parallelism מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 Who is he, this man? And where is this man These two phrases mean similar things. They both ask about the identity of the man who is trying to destroy the Jews. King Ahasuerus uses the repetition to emphasize how outraged he is. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two phrases. However, from another perspective, both the man’s identity and his location are important to know so that his plot can be stopped. So, for that reason, you could also decide to include both phrases in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 7 5 acb7 מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 Who is he, this man? Alternate translation: “who has done this”
EST 7 5 dl4b figs-metaphor וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁר־מְלָא֥⁠וֹ לִבּ֖⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת כֵּֽן 1 And where is this man, he whose heart is full to do thus? Here the concept of a **full heart** uses two metaphors at once. “Heart” figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. Also, saying that the “heart” is “full” is a figurative way of saying that someone is fully intending to do something, usually something that should not be done. Alternate translation: “where is the man who is intending to do such a thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 7 6 j5d5 figs-doublet צַ֣ר וְ⁠אוֹיֵ֔ב 1 A man, and adversary, and an enemy These words mean the same thing. Together, they emphasize Haman’s complete hostility towards the Jews. If it is more natural in your language, you can combine them and indicate the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “the one who is our absolute nemesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 7 6 ar4f נִבְעַ֔ת 1 was terrified Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”
EST 7 6 j5d9 figs-metonymy נִבְעַ֔ת מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 terrified from before the face of Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 7 7 bzd4 figs-idiom וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּ⁠חֲמָת⁠וֹ֙ מִ⁠מִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 Then the king rose up in his rage from the banquet of wine Here, **in his rage** is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 7 7 j6d1 figs-explicit אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַ⁠בִּיתָ֑ן 1 rose up … to the garden of the palace The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you could say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 7 uaq6 figs-metaphor לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁ⁠וֹ֙ 1 in order to seek for his life Here, **seeking** figuratively means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 7 7 qz1m figs-metaphor כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה 1 for he saw Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 7 7 nin1 figs-activepassive כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 evil was determined against him by the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 7 7 j6d3 figs-abstractnouns כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 evil was determined against him by the king Here the abstract noun **evil** means “harm,” not something that is morally wrong as in the previous verse. In this context, it can be expressed with a verb such as “execute.” Alternate translation: “the king was likely to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 7 8 j6d5 figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ שָׁב֩…וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל 1 Now when the king returned … Haman was fallen The implication is that when the king returned to the room, he saw what this verse describes next. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the king returned…, he saw that Haman had fallen…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 8 h4c7 figs-explicit וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was The implication is that Haman was doing this as he pleaded for his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add that information to the end of this phrase: “…as he was begging Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 8 acb8 figs-events וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 7 8 acb9 figs-idiom וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was The expression **was fallen** means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 7 8 acc0 הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 the couch on which Esther was In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”
EST 7 8 thq6 figs-rquestion הֲ֠⁠גַם לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 Is it also to subdue the queen, with me, in the house? The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could phrase it as a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
EST 7 8 l4ce figs-euphemism לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה 1 to subdue the queen The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
EST 7 8 acc1 figs-parallelism עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 with me, in the house These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you could also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 7 8 adq6 figs-idiom הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִ⁠פִּ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The word was going out from the mouth of the king This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 7 8 acc2 grammar-connect-time-background הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר…וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 The word was going out … when they covered the face of Haman The king spoke, and then the servants covered Haman’s face. One action followed upon another. However, this happened so quickly that almost no time seemed to pass in between. You can indicate this with a phrase like “as soon as.” Alternate translation: “when the king said this, immediately they covered Haman’s face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
EST 7 8 j6d9 figs-explicit וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 when they covered the face of Haman The implication is that some the king’s servants who were present did this, and they did it because they understood that the king wanted Haman to be executed. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face because he was going to be executed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 8 acc3 translate-symaction וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 when they covered the face of Haman **Covering the face** in this culture, as in many others, was a sign that a person had been condemned to death. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face to show that he would be executed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 7 9 a7ic translate-names חַ֠רְבוֹנָה 1 Harbona This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 7 9 j7d1 figs-metonymy אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 one from the eunuchs before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 7 9 acc4 translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 the eunuchs before the face of the king See how you translated this term and this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 7 9 j7d3 הִנֵּה 1 behold **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”
EST 7 9 acc5 גַּ֣ם…הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י…עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן 1 Also … the tree that Haman made for Mordecai … is standing at the house of Haman Alternate translation:“Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
EST 7 9 j7d5 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 7 9 j7d7 figs-idiom לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 for Mordecai, who spoke good for the king This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 7 9 j7d9 figs-123person דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 spoke good for the king Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 7 9 acc6 עֹמֵד֙ 1 is standing Alternate translation: “is set up”
EST 7 9 sre1 translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 50 cubits high If it would be helpful in your language, you could convert this to a modern measure. See how you translated this phrase in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
EST 7 9 acc7 figs-explicit תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 Hang him on it **Him** means Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 7 10 j8d3 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 7 10 umd4 figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה 1 and the rage of the king subsided Here the story figuratively compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 intro z6j7 0 # Esther 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### God’s protection<br>Yahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
EST 8 1 j8d5 writing-newevent בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 On that day This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 8 1 j8d7 figs-synecdoche נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן 1 the king Ahasuerus gave to Esther the queen the house of Haman Here, **house** figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 8 1 nm3u figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 the adversary of the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 8 1 acc9 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai came before the face of the king The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 1 j8d9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 1 acd0 figs-events הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 Esther told what he was to her You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 8 1 j9d1 figs-explicit הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 Esther told what he was to her Esther told this to the king. She would likely have explained not just how she and Mordecai were related, but that he had raised her after her parents died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king that Mordecai was her cousin and that he had been like a father to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 2 m5hz translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֨סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ…וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 the king removed his signet ring … and he gave it to Mordecai Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 8 2 acd1 translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ 1 signet ring See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 8 2 j9d3 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 2 acd2 figs-events אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 8 2 z5yn figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 and he gave it to Mordecai By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 2 acd3 figs-metaphor וַ⁠תָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 Esther placed Mordecai over the house of Haman To place someone over something figuratively means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 2 d2tj figs-metonymy בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 the house of Haman See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 3 j9d5 writing-newevent וַ⁠תּ֣וֹסֶף אֶסְתֵּ֗ר וַ⁠תְּדַבֵּר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then Esther repeated her action, and she spoke before the face of the king Here the exact meaning of the progression of verbs is uncertain, but this verse probably begins a new event in the story separate from what happened in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then Esther again spoke in the king’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 8 3 j9d7 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “while she was in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 3 j9d9 figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 And she fell before the face of his feet Here, **falling** is an idiom referring to the action of bowing down or prostrating oneself, and **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. Alternate translation: “and she bowed down” or “and she prostrated herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 3 acd4 translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 And she fell before the face of his feet This may actually mean that Esther put her face right on top of the feet of King Ahasuerus. This would have been an act of humility and desperation by which she showed that her need was very great and that she believed the king had great power to help her. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 8 3 acd5 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 And she fell before the face of his feet Esther’s action was probably a recognized sign of pleading in this culture. However, it would likely still have been remarkable for a queen to fall at the feet of her husband, the king. you could show this by introducing the information with a phrase like “in fact.” Alternate translation: “in fact, to show how desperately she was pleading, Esther got down and put her face right on top of his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 3 j1r1 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 before the face of his feet Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means that Esther prostrated herself in front of the feet of King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 3 jmn7 figs-idiom לְ⁠הַֽעֲבִיר֙ אֶת־רָעַת֙ הָמָ֣ן הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 to take away the evil of Haman the Agagite and his plot that he had plotted against the Jews Here, **the evil** refers to Haman’s plan. This expression means to prevent a wrong action from happening. Alternate translation: “to stop the evil plan of Haman the Agagite” or “to prevent the evil things from happening that Haman the Agagite had planned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 3 bp22 translate-names הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 the Agagite This is the name of Haman’s people group. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 8 3 c2hw מַֽחֲשַׁבְתּ֔⁠וֹ אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָשַׁ֖ב 1 his plot that he had plotted Alternate translation: “and the plot that he had invented” or “and the plot that Haman invented”
EST 8 4 xh24 translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֤וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֵ֖ת שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 And the king held out to Esther the scepter of gold As in [5:2](../05/02.md), King Ahasuerus did this to show that Esther had his favor. In that earlier episode, this indicated that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed for coming into the inner court without being summoned. But since Esther was apparently already in the king’s presence on this occasion, it seems that the gesture could also be used generally to show that the king was positively disposed towards a person and would grant the person’s request. Alternate translation: “the king held out his golden scepter to Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 8 4 acd7 translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 the scepter of gold See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would be helpful, review the explanation of what this object was. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 8 4 acd8 וַ⁠תָּ֣קָם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 so Esther rose up Alternate translation: “Esther got up off the floor”
EST 8 4 j1r5 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means the Esther now stood facing King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “and stood facing the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 5 w7yl figs-parallelism אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב…וְ⁠כָשֵׁ֤ר הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 If it is good to the king, and if I have found favor before his face, and the word is proper before the face of the king, and I am good in his eyes These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king will think that her suggestion is a good idea and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if what I am going to suggest seems like a good idea to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 8 5 r2yy figs-parallelism וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו…וְ⁠טוֹבָ֥ה אֲנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king is positively disposed towards her, that he thinks well of her, and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 8 5 acd9 figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו 1 If it is good to the king, and if I have found favor before his face, and the word is proper before the face of the king, and I am good in his eyes Here Esther addresses the king throughout in the third person as a way of showing respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 8 5 ace0 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). A suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But in another place, [7:3](../07/03.md), when Esther was pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people, the suggested alternate translation was, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” Here, Esther is also pleading, so you could use that phrase here in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “if what I ask for seems right in the king’s evaluation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 5 ftc7 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן 1 if I have found favor This expression also appears many times in the story. It means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 5 j1r7 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 before his face … before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. These phrases could mean “as I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Esther’s request would become evident in his face first, so it would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 5 xci7 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 in his eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and I please you” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 5 j1r9 figs-idiom יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 let it be written to take back the letters The first letters that told of the plan to destroy the Jews would not be brought back to Susa physically. Rather, **bring back** is an idiom that means “cancel” or “revoke.” Alternate translation: “make a new law to cancel what Haman decreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 5 nbk3 figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 let it be written You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “write a new letter” or “make a new law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 6 j2r5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֠י 1 For Here Esther is giving the reason why she is asking King Ahasuerus to revoke the letters. Alternate translation: “the reason I am asking is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 8 6 udt6 figs-rquestion אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 how could I bear to see the evil that my people would find? And how could I bear seeing the destruction of my kindred? Esther is actually making a statement, but she expresses herself in question form to show how strongly she feels about what she is saying. She does not actually expect the king to tell her how she could bear seeing her people destroyed. Alternate translation: “I cannot bear to see disaster fall on the Jews” or “I cannot endure watching my relatives be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
EST 8 6 ace1 figs-parallelism אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 how could I bear to see the evil that my people would find? And how could I bear seeing the destruction of my kindred? These two sentences mean basically the same thing. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I could not bear to see my relatives and my whole people destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 8 6 ace2 figs-abstractnouns בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 the evil Even though it was morally very wrong for Haman to want to destroy Mordecai’s whole people, here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md). It means the same thing as “destruction” in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “my people being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 8 6 ace3 figs-idiom יִמְצָ֣א 1 would find As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **find** is an idiom that means something exists in a certain place or time, not that people were looking for it and located it. Esther is speaking of the harm that will exist for the Jews if the effect of Haman’s letters is not undone. Alternate translation: “would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 6 ace4 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן 1 the destruction of This abstract noun can be expressed with a verb such as “destroyed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 8 6 ace5 מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 my kindred Alternate translation: “my relatives”
EST 8 7 j2r7 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 Behold This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
EST 8 7 ace6 בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר 1 I have given the house of Haman to Esther See the note about this expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I have given Esther all the property that belonged to Haman” or “I have given Esther the household of Haman”
EST 8 7 h44h figs-metonymy בֵית־הָמָ֜ן 1 the house of Haman Here, **house** is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 7 ace7 figs-events וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 they have hanged him on the tree You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 8 7 ace8 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 8 7 j2r9 figs-idiom שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ 1 he stretched out his hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 8 acf0 וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם 1 So you Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”
EST 8 8 acf1 כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 write for the Jews as is good in your eyes Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”
EST 8 8 j3r1 figs-metaphor כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 as is good in your eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 8 j3mn figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 in the name of the king Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. This phrase means Esther and Mordecai have permission to write with the authority of the King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 8 acf2 figs-123person בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 in the name of the king King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I give you permission to write with my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 8 8 j3r3 translate-unknown בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 with the signet ring of the king This is a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 8 8 acf3 figs-123person בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 with the signet ring of the king King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EST 8 8 j3r5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 For Here, King Ahasuerus is expressing the reason why he cannot simply revoke the first letter and also why Esther and Mordecai can write another letter that people must obey. Alternate translation: “you see” or “people will obey your letter because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 8 8 acf4 אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 there is none to take back a writing As in verse 5, this expression means “revoke.” Alternate translation: “no one can revoke” or “no one can nullify”
EST 8 8 acf5 כְתָ֞ב…אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 there is none to take back a writing If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this first in the verse because it explains why Ahasuerus answers Esther and Mordecai in the way that he does. See the UST.
EST 8 8 acf6 figs-explicit כְתָ֞ב אֲשֶׁר־נִכְתָּ֣ב בְּ⁠שֵׁם־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠נַחְתּ֛וֹם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 a writing that has been written in the name of the king and has been sealed with the signet ring of the king The king is describing a general situation, but he has Haman’s letter specifically in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman wrote his letter with my authority, and he sealed it with the ring that has my official seal on it. No one can revoke a letter like that” (The story explained in [1:19](../01/19.md) that the king’s laws could not be changed once they had been made and proclaimed.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 9 acf7 grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 So … were called This indicates that what is described in this verse was done because of what the king said in the previous verse. Use a connecting word or phrase to show this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 8 9 s4ue figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 So the scribes of the king were called You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king called his scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 9 acf8 וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 So the scribes of the king were called If you use an expression such as “called,” make sure your readers will understand that the king likely sent an official to go and bring the scribes back with him. The king did not call out in a loud voice to get them to come.
EST 8 9 j4r1 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 in the third month Alternate translation: “in month three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 8 9 acf9 figs-explicit בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 in the third month It would still be the same year as in [3:7](../03/07.md), the twelfth year that Ahasuerus reigned as king of Persia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the third month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 9 j356 translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 which is the month of Sivan **Sivan** is the name of the third month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “the month of Sivan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 8 9 acg1 הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 which is the month of Sivan The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court, but for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given. This month overlaps with May and June on a Western calendar.
EST 8 9 j4r3 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֣ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 on the twenty-third of it Alternation translation: “on day 23” or “on the twenty-third day of the month” The exact date of the letter helps to establish its legal authority. This would be on June 25th of a Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 8 9 sz6j figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מָרְדֳּכַ֣י 1 And according to all that Mordecai commanded it was written You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and they wrote in a letter everything that Mordecai dictated to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 9 acg2 figs-explicit אֶל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 to the Jews It appears from verse 11 that the letter would have been addressed specifically to the Jews in the empire, telling them that the king had authorized them to defend themselves. But copies were also sent to all the royal and provincial officials. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the letter addressed the Jews in the empire, but copies were also sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 9 acg3 וְ⁠אֶ֣ל הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִֽים־וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּחוֹת֩ וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת 1 and to the satraps, and the governors and officials of the provinces See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md), where they were used to describe who received Haman’s letter. These are all people in government positions. The first one is the governor of the province and the other two are rulers under him who govern cities or smaller areas. If your language uses one term for all of these, you could use that with a descriptive phrase such as “to the government leaders of each province and also to the leaders under him.”
EST 8 9 acg4 אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֗וּשׁ שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 that were from India even as far as Ethiopia: 127 provinces This is background information explaining how far this new letter had to be sent. See how you translated this phrase in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the empire of Ahasuerus had 127 provinces, stretching all the way from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west”
EST 8 9 zp4q translate-numbers שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 127 provinces Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 8 9 j4r5 figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 province by province This expression means “to people in every province.” Alternate translation: “the scribes wrote to the people in each province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 9 bj5s כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 according to its writing Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
EST 8 9 j4r7 figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 and people by people This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 9 j4r9 figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשֹׁנ֑⁠וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 9 j5r1 וְ⁠אֶ֨ל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם וְ⁠כִ⁠לְשׁוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 and to the Jews according to their writing and according to their tongue The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”
EST 8 10 acg5 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֗ב…וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם 1 And he wrote … and he sealed **He** refers to Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use his name here.
EST 8 10 ijp2 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁם֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ 1 in the name of King Ahasuerus Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 10 jf31 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 and he sealed with the signet ring of the king This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 10 yt4j figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַד֩ הָ⁠רָצִ֨ים בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֜ים 1 by the hand of runners on horses As in [3:13](../03/13.md), **hand** could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 10 acg6 רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 riders of the royal pack horses, sons of the mares Alternate translation: “They rose fast horses that were used in the king’s service. These horses had been bred in the king’s stables.”
EST 8 10 p9uc figs-metonymy בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 sons of the mares Here, **sons** is a metonym meaning the offspring of royal livestock. Alternate translation: “the offspring of the king’s horses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 11 j5r5 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־עִיר־וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 in every city by city This expression means “in each and every city.” It is possibly referring to the entire empire by naming one part of it, its cities. The story says in [9:19](../09/19.md) that not just Jews living in cities but Jews living in rural areas also defended themselves. It is likely that the messengers only published the news in the cities and not the entire countryside, but the news was certainly intended for everyone, not only people living in the cities. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire” or “in each and every city” or “in every single city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 11 e1mj figs-metaphor לְ⁠הִקָּהֵל֮ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ⁠ם֒ 1 to gather and to stand for their life Here, **to stand** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “to join together and fight for their lives” or “to join together and fight back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 11 j5r7 figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִיד֩ וְ⁠לַ⁠הֲרֹ֨ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 to annihilate, and to slaughter, and to destroy These words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is being described. See how you translated this in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [7:4](../07/04.md). Alternate translation: “completely destroy” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 8 11 acg7 figs-metonymy כָּל־חֵ֨יל עַ֧ם וּ⁠מְדִינָ֛ה הַ⁠צָּרִ֥ים אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 any strength of a people or province that would attack them **Strength** is a figurative way of referring to an army or to a person carrying weaponry. Alternate translation: “the army of any people or province that attacked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 11 acg8 טַ֣ף וְ⁠נָשִׁ֑ים 1 children and women Alternate translation: “they could also kill the wives and children of the armed men”
EST 8 11 acg9 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 and plunder their spoil See how you translated this expression in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “and take everything that belonged to them”
EST 8 12 ach0 figs-explicit בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 on one day This was the day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “on the same day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 12 ach1 בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 in all of the provinces of the king Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “in every province of the kingdom”
EST 8 12 j6r3 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 on the thirteenth Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 8 12 hi2y translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 of the twelfth month Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 8 12 ach2 figs-explicit לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 of the twelfth month Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 12 j6r4 translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 which is the month of Adar This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:07](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 8 13 j6r5 figs-activepassive פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ 1 was to be given as a law You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 13 j6r7 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 in every province by province This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 13 ach4 figs-activepassive גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 being uncovered for all the peoples You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 13 ach5 וְ⁠לִ⁠הְי֨וֹת הַיְּהוּדִ֤ים עֲתִידִים֙ לַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 for the Jews to be prepared for that day Alternate translation: “that way the Jews would get ready to do what the letter said when the day came”
EST 8 13 qk1d figs-idiom לְ⁠הִנָּקֵ֖ם מֵ⁠אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 to take revenge from their enemies This expression, “to take revenge from” another person, means to correct a wrong they have done. In this context, the phrase means to correct the wrong of the original law that gave people permission to kill the Jews. Alternate translation: “and fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 14 ach7 הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 The runners, the riders of the royal pack horses See how you translated this in [8:10](../08/10.md). Alternate translation: “messengers riding on fast horses that were used for the king’s business”
EST 8 14 ach6 figs-activepassive מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 hastened and hurried by the word of the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 14 b69j figs-doublet מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים 1 hastened and hurried These two terms mean almost the same thing and are used together to emphasize the fact that the couriers were told to deliver the letters as quickly as possible. Alternate translation: “they went immediately” or “as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 8 14 ach8 figs-events הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 The runners, the riders of the royal pack horses To present the events in chronological order, you can put this after the king’s command, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 8 14 j6r9 figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 And the law was given You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king’s officials also posted and read copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 8 15 j7r3 writing-newevent וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י יָצָ֣א 1 Then Mordecai went out This introduces a new event in the story. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 8 15 j7r5 figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 from before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Mordecai had been in the presence of King Ahasuerus and was now leaving in order to fulfill his duties as a high official in the Persian government. Alternate translation: “from the palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 15 ach9 figs-explicit בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת וָ⁠ח֔וּר וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה וְ⁠תַכְרִ֥יךְ בּ֖וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן 1 in a garment of royalty of blue and white, with a great crown of gold and a robe of fine linen and purple The implication is that the king gave Mordecai these special things to wear to show that he was now his highest officer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. To put these events in chronological order, you could place this information before the report that Mordecai left the king’s presence to fulfill his duties. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 15 aci1 בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת 1 a garment of royalty of blue and white Alternate translation: “a blue and white garment that the king had worn”
EST 8 15 aci2 וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה 1 a great crown of gold Alternate translation: “a large golden crown”
EST 8 15 eqc4 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֣יר שׁוּשָׁ֔ן צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 and the city of Susa Here, **the city** represents the people living in it. Alternate translation: “the people of Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 8 15 i1ec figs-hendiadys צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 cheered and rejoiced This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoiced** tells how they cheered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by saying something like “shouted joyfully.” Alternate translation: “cheered and were happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 8 15 aci3 figs-explicit צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 cheered and rejoiced The implication is that the people did this when they saw Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 16 q2ru figs-metaphor הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה 1 there was light Here, **light** figuratively represents happiness. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 16 aci4 figs-doublet הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֑ה 1 there was light and joy The terms **light** and **joy** refer to the same thing here. They are used together to emphasize the extreme happiness that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 8 16 j8r1 figs-doublet וְ⁠שָׂשֹׂ֖ן וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 and rejoicing and honor These terms have similar meaning and are used together with the previous doublet to emphasize again the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 8 16 n94u figs-explicit וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 and honor Here, **honor** might have two possible meanings. (1) Other people honored the Jews. Alternate translation: “other people honored them” (2) The Jews themselves felt honor instead of shame. Alternate translation: “they felt honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 17 k1eh figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֨ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֜ה 1 And in every province by province This expression means “each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 17 j8r3 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 and in every city by city This expression means “each and every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 17 va7t figs-personification מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 any place where the word of the king and his law had reached This expression describes the king’s message as if it were a person that could travel to a particular place. This phrase refers to all the places that received the king’s letter. Alternate translation: “wherever the king’s couriers took his decree” or “wherever the couriers read the letter announcing the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 8 17 j8r5 figs-doublet שִׂמְחָ֤ה וְ⁠שָׂשׂוֹן֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 there was joy and rejoicing for the Jews The terms **joy** and **rejoicing** have similar meaning and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 8 17 p89m figs-doublet מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 a feast and a good day These two terms mean something similar and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “and had festive celebrations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 8 17 aci5 figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 a good day This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. Alternate translation: “and a holiday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 17 aci6 figs-explicit וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 And many from the peoples of the land became Jews The implication is that they did this because they thought that the Jews might attack them when the Jews fought back against their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 8 17 aci7 וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 And many from the peoples of the land Alternate translation: “many people from the other ethnic groups in the empire”
EST 8 17 aci8 figs-idiom מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ 1 from the peoples of the land The **peoples of the land** were the non-Jewish people groups within the empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 8 17 r3qf figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 dread of the Jews had fallen on them Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they had become very afraid of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 8 17 aci9 figs-events נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 dread of the Jews had fallen upon them To present the events in chronological order, you can say this before saying that the people from the other groups became Jews themselves. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 9 intro yty1 0 # Esther 9 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Purim<br><br>The events of this chapter were so significant, the Jews celebrated these events every year after this. It is known as “Purim.”<br><br>## Important stylistic devices in this chapter<br><br>### Ironic Situation<br><br>The day that was supposed to bring great victory to the enemies of the Jews became a day of great victory for the Jews. This is a type of irony.<br><br>### Opening Summary<br><br>Verse 1 of chapter 9 provides a summary of everything that happens in this chapter. If using an opening summary is not normally used in your language, be sure to mark this as a summary either in the text or in a footnote. An opening summary like this is a characteristic device of Hebrew storytelling. So even though it describes the final outcome, we do not recommend that you move it to the end of the chapter unless it is very confusing to leave it here. To make it clear that verse 1 is only a summary and not the entire story, you could say something like this at the end of the verse: “This is what happened” or “Here are more details about what happened.”
EST 9 1 j8r7 writing-newevent וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 Now in the twelfth month This introduces a new event. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 9 1 acj0 figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Now in the twelfth month, which is the month of Adar, on the thirteenth day of it The implication is that this happened in the twelfth month of the same year that the letters were sent out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that year, the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 1 j8r9 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 Now in the twelfth month Alternate translation: “now in the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 1 t9yc translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר 1 which is the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), and [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 9 1 j9r1 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the thirteenth day of it Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 1 acj1 אֲשֶׁ֨ר…דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 when the word of the king and his law Alternate translation: “what the letters said the king had decreed”
EST 9 1 wh56 figs-personification אֲשֶׁ֨ר הִגִּ֧יעַ דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 when the word of the king and his law had reached the time to be done This expression describes the king’s decree as if it had traveled through time (as a person travels through space) and reached this particular day. This phrase means that it was time for people to obey the decree. Alternate translation: “when the time came for people to obey the king’s law and decree” or “when it was the day established in the king’s letters for people to carry out the king’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 9 1 acj2 בַּ⁠יּ֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר שִׂבְּר֜וּ אֹיְבֵ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט בָּ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 on the day when the enemies of the Jews hoped to dominate them Alternate translation: “the enemies of the Jews had expected to defeat the Jews on that day”
EST 9 1 ect2 figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט 1 to dominate This word usually means “to rule over,” but here it figuratively means “to have power over, to be able to destroy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 1 lq9y figs-metaphor וְ⁠נַהֲפ֣וֹךְ 1 but being overturned Saying that a situation was turned over is a figurative way of saying that what happened was the opposite of what was expected. Alternate translation: “the situation was reversed” or “the opposite happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 1 acj3 ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִשְׁלְט֧וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים הֵ֖מָּה בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 it happened that the Jews themselves dominated those who hated them Alternate translation: “Instead, it was the Jews themselves who destroyed their enemies”
EST 9 1 acj4 figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 those who hated them This is an idiom that describes enemies (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 2 tj62 figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 to stretch out a hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. Alternate translation: “to defend themselves” or “to fight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 2 d44x figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠מְבַקְשֵׁ֖י רָֽעָתָ֑⁠ם 1 against those seeking their evil Here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md) and [8:6](../08/06.md). In this context, the term can be expressed with a verb. Alternate translation: “who were trying to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 9 2 acj6 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 But a man did not stand to their face Alternate translation: “no one stood against them” or “no one was able to defeat them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 2 x8s3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 But a man did not stand to their face Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “was able to fight back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 2 j9r3 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 to their face Here, **face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so here it means “when faced with them.” Alternate translation: “against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 9 2 h7jh figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 sudden fear of them had fallen on all the peoples Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “all the peoples suddenly became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 2 acj7 figs-explicit נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 sudden fear of them had fallen on all the peoples The implication is that as a result, no one helped anyone who attacked the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 3 acj8 שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת וְ⁠הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּח֗וֹת 1 the officials of the provinces, and the satraps, and the governors See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [8:9](../08/09.md). Alternate translation: “the government leaders in each province”
EST 9 3 acj9 וְ⁠עֹשֵׂ֤י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 and those doing the work that was for the king Alternate translation: “anyone the king had trusted with his affairs”
EST 9 3 ack0 figs-metaphor מְנַשְּׂאִ֖ים אֶת־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 were lifting up the Jews Here, **lifting up** is a figurative way of saying “helping.” The picture is likely of someone helping a tired or injured person to stand or walk by holding them up. Alternate translation: “helped the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 3 q2ue figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 dread of Mordecai had fallen on them Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 4 j9r5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 For This term introduces the reason why the officials and satraps and governors were becoming afraid of Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 4 xd49 figs-explicit גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai was great in the palace of the king The implication is that this is why all the other officials were afraid of Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “They were afraid of him because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 4 ack1 figs-metonymy גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai was great in the palace of the king **The palace of the king** is a figurative way of describing the king’s administration by referring to the place where it was headquartered. Alternate translation: “was very important in the king’s government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 9 4 ack2 גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai was great **Great** here is the same term that, as a verb, describes promotion within the king’s service in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “Mordecai was a very important royal official”
EST 9 4 mr66 figs-personification וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖⁠וֹ הוֹלֵ֣ךְ בְּ⁠כָל־הַ⁠מְּדִינ֑וֹת 1 and the report of him was going out into all the provinces Here the story speaks of the news of Mordecai’s greatness as if it were a living thing that could travel throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire, everyone was hearing the news of his greatness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 9 4 j9r9 figs-idiom מָרְדֳּכַ֖י הוֹלֵ֥ךְ וְ⁠גָדֽוֹל 1 Mordecai was progressing and becoming great This expression means that Mordecai continued to become more powerful and influential. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was becoming more famous because the king was giving him more and more power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 5 ack3 וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 the Jews struck to all their enemies a strike of sword After the information about Mordecai, the story now returns to tell what happened on the appointed day. You could add a phrase to show this. Alternate translation, add: “on the day when they were allowed to defend themselves”
EST 9 5 ack4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 the Jews struck to all their enemies a strike of sword This expression means that the Jews defended themselves against their enemies, even to the point of killing people who attacked them. Alternate translation: “the Jews attacked all of their enemies and killed them with their swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 5 j11d figs-synecdoche מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 a strike of sword Swords were not necessarily the only weapons the Jews had and used. The sword is used to represent all of their weaponry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this more general meaning. Alternate translation: “the Jews took up their weapons and used them against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 9 5 j13d figs-doublet וְ⁠הֶ֖רֶג וְ⁠אַבְדָ֑ן 1 and slaughter, and destruction These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they destroyed them completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 9 5 j15d figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֥וּ בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ⁠רְצוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 and they did to those who hated them according to their pleasure This expression does not mean that the Jews felt pleasure when they killed their enemies. Rather, it means that the Jews were able to defend themselves against their enemies and were not hindered in any way. Alternate translation: “they were able to do everything they wanted to do against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 5 ack5 figs-idiom בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 those who hated them This is an idiom that describes enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 6 b5ft וּ⁠בְ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֗ה 1 And in Susa the citadel Alternate translation: “just in Susa, the capital city”
EST 9 6 j17d figs-doublet הָרְג֤וּ…וְ⁠אַבֵּ֔ד 1 slaughtered and destroyed These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 9 6 ha18 translate-numbers חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִֽישׁ 1 500 men Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 7 ack6 figs-explicit פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא…דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן…אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 Parshandatha, Dalphon, Aspatha The story lists the names of Haman’s sons before explaining that they were his sons and that the Jews killed them. To be clear who these people are, you can add this information from verse 10 explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “rhe Jews killed the ten sons of their enemy Haman son of Hammedatha. The names of his sons were…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 7 s6x2 translate-names פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא…דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן…אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 Parshandatha, Dalphon, Aspatha These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 9 8 g6zx translate-names פּוֹרָ֛תָא…אֲדַלְיָ֖א…אֲרִידָֽתָא 1 Poratha, Adalia, Aridatha These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 9 9 gj4p translate-names פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙…אֲרִיסַ֔י…אֲרִדַ֖י…וַיְזָֽתָא 1 Parmashta, Arisai, Aridai, Vaizatha These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 9 10 fsa2 translate-numbers עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “the 10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 10 xt5b figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים 1 the adversary of the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 9 10 j19d figs-idiom לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 they did not stretch out their hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 10 ack7 וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה 1 But … to the plunder Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”
EST 9 11 ack8 בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 On that day Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”
EST 9 11 j21d figs-personification בָּ֣א מִסְפַּ֧ר…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the report of the number … came to the face of the king Here the story speaks about the report as if it were a living thing that could come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “one of the king’s servants told the king the number of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 9 11 acl0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 to the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase likely means that someone came into the king’s presence in order to deliver this report. Alternate translation: “someone came in and reported to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 9 11 j22d figs-activepassive מִסְפַּ֧ר הַֽ⁠הֲרוּגִ֛ים 1 the number of those who were killed You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “how many people the Jews had killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 9 12 j33d figs-doublet הָרְגוּ֩…וְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 have slaughtered and destroyed These terms mean the same thing and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 9 12 cz3e translate-numbers חֲמֵ֧שׁ מֵא֣וֹת אִ֗ישׁ 1 500 men Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 12 acl1 וְ⁠אֵת֙ 1 with Alternate translation: “including”
EST 9 12 j5p9 translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 12 vh5l figs-rquestion בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר מְדִינ֥וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מֶ֣ה עָשׂ֑וּ 1 In the rest of the provinces of the king, what have they done? The king is making a statement, but he uses a question form to show that he is very convinced that the Jews must have also killed many people in the other provinces. Alternate translation: “what they must have done in the rest of the king’s provinces” or “they must have killed many more in the rest of the king’s provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
EST 9 12 s3sr figs-parallelism וּ⁠מַה־שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ ע֖וֹד וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 Now what is your petition? And it will be given to you. And what is your request? Again, and it will be done. These two statements mean basically the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther what she wants. If it would be confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “is there anything more that you want? Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 9 12 n3ua figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 And it will be given to you … and it will be done You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. You can also say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 9 12 ly4g figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ 1 your petition … your request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “anything more that you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 9 13 acl2 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that has been used many times in the story. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 13 acl3 figs-activepassive יִנָּתֵ֣ן 1 let it be given You can say this with an active form, and you can indicate that Esther is asking the king to do it. Alternate translation: “please allow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 9 13 nz41 גַּם־מָחָ֗ר לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כְּ⁠דָ֣ת הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם 1 also tomorrow to the Jews who are in Susa to do according to the law of today Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live in Susa to obey today’s decree tomorrow also” or “to do tomorrow also what was decreed that they should do today”
EST 9 13 j43d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 in Susa Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
EST 9 13 acl4 עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 let the ten sons of Haman hang The request is not for the king to allow the bodies to be impaled (or hanged), but instead, for the king to order this. Alternate translation: “and have the bodies of Haman’s ten sons hanged [or impaled]”
EST 9 13 acl5 translate-symaction עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 let the ten sons of Haman hang The purpose of this would not be to kill the sons, since they are already dead, but to demonstrate publicly that the enemies of the Jews had been completely defeated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 9 13 acl6 figs-explicit עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 the ten sons of Haman It is implicit that since Haman’s sons are already dead, what Esther is actually asking for is for their bodies to be impaled or hanged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 13 nr1p translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 13 qyu8 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 9 14 acl7 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠הֵֽעָשׂ֣וֹת כֵּ֔ן 1 the king said for this to be done You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king granted both of Esther’s requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 9 14 acl8 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 And a law was given in Susa This phrase, “in Susa,” seems to indicate that this refers to Esther’s first request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he issued a decree allowing the Jews in Susa to fight against their enemies again the next day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 14 j47d figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 And a law was given in Susa This can be stated in active form as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 9 14 j49d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 in Susa Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
EST 9 14 acl9 figs-explicit תָּלֽוּ 1 they hanged This was Esther’s second request. You can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he ordered his servants to hang [or impale] the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 14 j51d translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 15 j55d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 who were in Susa Alternate translation: “who lived in the capital city of Susa”
EST 9 15 acm0 וַ⁠יִּֽקָּהֲל֞וּ 1 So … assembled themselves Alternate translation: “joined together”
EST 9 15 p9gc translate-ordinal בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 on the fourteenth day Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 15 j57d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), and [9:1](../09/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 9 15 j59d בְ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 in Susa Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
EST 9 15 j61d translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִ֑ישׁ 1 300 men Alternate translation: “three hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 15 lp12 figs-idiom וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 they did not stretch out their hand to the plunder Here, the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 16 j65d figs-metaphor נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 assembled themselves and stood for their lives Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. See how you translated this in [8:11](../08/11.md). Alternate translation: “joined together to fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 16 acm2 figs-explicit נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 assembled themselves It’s implicit here, and stated explicitly in the next verse, that these other Jews fought their enemies only on the thirteenth day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “on the thirteenth day of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 16 acm3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֨וֹחַ֙ מֵ⁠אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 and they rested from their enemies Here, **resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they had no more trouble from their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 16 kms1 וְ⁠הָרֹג֙ בְּ⁠שֹׂ֣נְאֵי⁠הֶ֔ם חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 they slaughtered 75,000 of those who hated them Alternate translation: “and killed 75,000 of them”
EST 9 16 i1d1 translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 75,000 Alternate translation: “seventy-five thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 16 m2cx לֹ֥א שָֽׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 they did not stretch out their hand to the plunder Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” or “they did not take the valuable things” or “the did not take their possessions”
EST 9 17 ll4f translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר 1 the thirteenth day Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 17 j67d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), and [9:15](../09/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 9 17 acm5 בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 on the fourteenth day of it, then they made it a day of feasting and rejoicing Alternate translation: “they devoted the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar, to joyful celebration” or “they feasted joyfully the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar”
EST 9 17 kjj1 translate-ordinal בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the fourteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 17 j69d figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 feasting and rejoicing This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoicing** tells how they celebrated. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 9 17 acm6 figs-synecdoche מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה 1 feasting This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
EST 9 18 w531 וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 But the Jews who were in Susa assembled themselves Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”
EST 9 18 acm7 figs-explicit נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 assembled themselves The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 18 acm8 figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it and on the fourteenth of it If it would be helpful in your language, you could say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 18 j73d translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 13” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 18 j75d translate-ordinal וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 and on the fourteenth of it Alternate translation: “and on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 18 acm9 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֗וֹחַ בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 And they rested on the fifteenth of it, and they made it a day of feasting and rejoicing **Resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 18 j77d translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the fifteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 18 j79d figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 feasting and rejoicing This phrase means the same thing as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 9 19 j81d grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֞ן 1 Therefore This term introduces the result of the events that were described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 19 acn0 figs-parallelism הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֣ים הַפְּרָזִ֗ים הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִים֮ בְּ⁠עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠פְּרָזוֹת֒ 1 the Jews, the ones of the open country, the ones who dwell in the cities of the open areas These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to make the identification of this group clear. The first phrase means that they lived in rural areas. The second phrase means they lived in settlements that did not have walls around them, that is, in villages. You can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Jews who live in villages in the countryside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 9 19 acn1 figs-explicit עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙…וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 make the fourteenth day … and a good day The implication is that this explanation is being offered for the benefit of city-dwelling Jews who might wonder why rural Jews celebrate this holiday on a different day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “rather than on the fifteenth day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 19 acn2 עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙…וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 make the fourteenth day … and a good day Alternate translation: “observe this holiday on the fourteenth day”
EST 9 19 j83d translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 the fourteenth day Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 19 j85d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md) and [9:17](../09/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 9 19 j87d figs-hendiadys שִׂמְחָ֥ה וּ⁠מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 for rejoicing and for feasting As in verses 17 and 18, this means “by celebrating joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 9 19 j89d figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 and a good day This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 19 acn3 translate-symaction וּ⁠מִשְׁל֥וֹחַ מָנ֖וֹת אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 and for the sending of gifts, a man to his friend Giving gifts, in this culture as in many cultures, was a way of acknowledging a special occasion. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 9 19 j91d figs-idiom אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 a man to his friend Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 20 acn4 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב…הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה 1 And … wrote these things Alternate translation: “wrote an account of all of these events”
EST 9 20 acn5 כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינוֹת֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 all the Jews who were in all the provinces of the king Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “all the Jews everywhere in the kingdom”
EST 9 20 j95d figs-merism הַ⁠קְּרוֹבִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רְחוֹקִֽים 1 the near ones and the far ones This is a figurative way of referring to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. This expression means the Jews who lived in or near Susa, those who lived far away, and all Jews in between. Alternate translation: “everywhere they lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 9 21 acn6 figs-idiom לְ⁠קַיֵּם֮ עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֒ לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים 1 to set up for them to be making Here, **to set up** means to establish, and to **make** a day means to observe it as a holiday. Alternate translation: “to establish … as a holiday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 21 j97d translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 the fourteenth day Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 21 j99d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md), [9:17](../09/17.md), and [9:19](../09/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
EST 9 21 j111 translate-ordinal יוֹם־חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 the fifteenth day of it Alternate translation: “the fifteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
EST 9 21 n4v9 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 every year by year This expression means “every year.” Alternation translation: “each year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 22 acn7 grammar-connect-logic-result כַּ⁠יָּמִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר 1 as the days when This verse gives the reason for what Mordecai told the Jews to do in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because those were the days when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 22 acn8 figs-metaphor נָ֨חוּ בָ⁠הֶ֤ם הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מֵ⁠א֣וֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 the Jews rested on them from their enemies As in verses 16, 17, and 18, **resting** here is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “the Jews stopped fighting because they had defeated their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 22 acn9 וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ אֲשֶׁר֩ 1 and as the month when Alternate translation: “And that was the month when”
EST 9 22 aco1 figs-parallelism נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 it had turned for them from sorrow into joy and from mourning into a good day These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how dramatic and wonderful the change was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “after being very sad, they became very happy.” Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sorrowful and crying to being very joyful and celebrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 9 22 aco3 figs-explicit נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 it had turned for them from sorrow into joy and from mourning into a good day It is implicit that the Jews were deeply distressed because they were being threatened with destruction, and they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “everything had changed for them. They had been deeply distressed because they were threatened with destruction. But they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 22 nch1 figs-metaphor נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 it had turned for them from sorrow into joy **Turning** figuratively represents changing. Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sad to being joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 22 aco4 figs-abstractnouns מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 from sorrow into joy The abstract nouns **sorrow** and **joy** can be expressed with adjectives such as “distressed” and “happy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 9 22 j113 figs-explicit לַ⁠עֲשׂ֣וֹת אוֹתָ֗⁠ם יְמֵי֙ 1 in order to make them days of These are things that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “so Mordecai told them to observe those days with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 22 j115 figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 feasting and rejoicing As in verses 17, 18, and 19, this phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word “rejoicing” tells how the celebrating was to be done. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” or “feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 9 22 aco5 וּ⁠מִשְׁל֤וֹחַ מָנוֹת֙ אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 and sending of gifts, a man to his friend See how you translated this in verse 19. Review the notes there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”
EST 9 22 j117 figs-idiom אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 a man to his friend Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 22 aco6 translate-symaction וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 and gifts to the needy In this culture as in many others, helping the poor was also a way of acknowledging a special occasion. The idea was that no one should miss out on the benefits of the wonderful thing that God had done. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should help the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
EST 9 22 z1vl figs-explicit וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 This is also something that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should give gifts to the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 23 aco7 figs-explicit וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙…אֲשֶׁר־כָּתַ֥ב מָרְדֳּכַ֖י אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 And … accepted … what Mordecai had written to them The implication seems to be that the Jews were glad to do what Mordecai had instructed, because they had already been doing it. You can add a word such as “readily” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 23 aco8 וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ 1 And … accepted Alternate translation: “agreed”
EST 9 23 ib25 figs-events אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת 1 what they had begun to do You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 9 24 j119 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי֩ 1 For This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 24 kqf6 figs-explicit כִּי֩ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 24 j125 figs-distinguish צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 the adversary of all the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 9 24 aco9 חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 had plotted concerning the Jews to annihilate them Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”
EST 9 24 xz7s figs-explicit וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 and he had cast a Pur (which is “the lot”) You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 24 bcy2 translate-names פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 a Pur (which is “the lot”) As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 9 24 j127 figs-hendiadys לְ⁠הֻמָּ֖⁠ם וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 to vex them and to destroy them The terms **vex** and **destroy** mean basically the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the degree to which Haman’s deadly plans were distressing to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the terms and express the emphasis with a word like “completely.” Alternate translation: “and completely destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
EST 9 25 m8x3 figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹאָ⁠הּ֮ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 But when she came before the face of the king In this summary, many details are communicated implicitly. **She** means Esther. Also, this verse continues the account of what this celebration is commemorating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these things explicit. Alternate translation: “the celebration also commemorated how Esther dared to come into the king’s presence without being summoned, and she won his favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 25 j128 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the presence of a person. This phrase means that Esther came into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into the king’s presence” or “before the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 9 25 acp1 figs-explicit אָמַ֣ר עִם־הַ⁠סֵּ֔פֶר 1 he said with the letter Once again, there is much information that is implicit here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the king gave Mordecai the authority to send a letter throughout the empire saying that the Jews could defend themselves against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 25 y57b figs-idiom יָשׁ֞וּב מַחֲשַׁבְתּ֧⁠וֹ הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה אֲשֶׁר־חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עַל־רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ 1 Let his evil plot that he plotted concerning the Jews return on his head **His**, **he**, and **him** in this sentence refer to Haman. **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person was planning to do to someone else happened to that person instead. Use an idiom with that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “the wicked plan that Haman developed against the Jews will be done to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 25 acp2 figs-personification וְ⁠תָל֥וּ אֹת֛⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנָ֖י⁠ו עַל־הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 and let them hang him and his sons on the tree The letter itself did not say this. The story is summarizing the events in compressed form. It is speaking of the letter as if it were a person who could take action and give commands like this, but it was the king who gave the command. Alternate translation: “the king also ordered his servants to hang [or impale] Haman on a wooden pole [or hang Haman on a gallows]. When the Jews in Susa killed his ten sons, the king had their bodies hanged [or impaled] as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
EST 9 25 j129 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
EST 9 26 j131 grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֡ן 1 Therefore This introduces the reason why the Jews gave the name “Purim” to this celebration. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 26 acp3 figs-explicit קָֽרְאוּ֩ לַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֤לֶּה פוּרִים֙ 1 they called these days, “Purim” **They** means the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jews called these days Purim, like the word Pur” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 26 c1gi translate-names פוּרִים֙ 1 Purim This is the name of the festival that commemorates the salvation of the Jewish people in ancient Persia from Haman’s plot to destroy and kill all the Jews in a single day. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 9 26 buf1 writing-background עַל־שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 on account of the name of Pur This is information that the original audience needed to understand how this celebration got its name. You can put this first in the verse because it explains what comes next. Alternate translation: “the Persian word for ‘lot’ is ‘Pur’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
EST 9 26 yq8m figs-explicit שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 the name of Pur. It can be stated clearly what “Pur” means. Alternate translation: “the word Pur, which means ‘lot’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 26 j133 grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֕ן 1 Therefore The story has just given the reason why the holiday is called Purim. Now it is going to give another reason. It will be explaining why the Jews added this holiday to their calendar, in addition to the festivals that were commanded in the Law of Moses. The next verse describes them adding the holiday. This verse gives the reasons why they did that. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 26 acp4 עַל־כָּל־דִּבְרֵ֖י הָ⁠אִגֶּ֣רֶת הַ⁠זֹּ֑את 1 on account of all the words of this letter This is a reference to the letter that Mordecai wrote, as described in verses 20–22. Alternate translation: “because Mordecai wrote to them to tell them to observe this holiday”
EST 9 26 acp5 figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what they had seen concerning this and what had come upon them These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize what a vivid experience it was to live through the events that this story describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “amazing.” Alternate translation: “the amazing things that had happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 9 26 acp6 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what they had seen concerning this and what had come upon them These phrases say generally “this” and “what,” but they are referring to the specific events the story has related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could describe these things specifically. Alternate translation: “because the Jews had been able to destroy the enemies who had wanted to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 9 26 acp7 figs-events וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what they had seen concerning this and what had come upon them You can put this first, before the information about Mordecai’s letter, because it happened first. You can say “then” when you tell about the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 9 26 j135 figs-idiom וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what had come upon them This expression means “what had happened to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 27 acp8 קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ ׀ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֨ם ׀ וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם וְ⁠עַ֨ל כָּל־הַ⁠נִּלְוִ֤ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙…לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 The Jews set up and accepted for themselves, and for their seed, and for all those who unite themselves to them … to be making these two days Alternate translation: “the Jews said that they would tell their descendants and those people who became Jews to be certain to celebrate this festival”
EST 9 27 acp9 figs-doublet קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ 1 The Jews set up and accepted “Set up” and “accepted” mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews definitely agreed to do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “agreed to establish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 9 27 j137 figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם 1 and for their seed As in [6:13](../06/13.md), **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 27 j141 figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֔וֹר 1 and it will not pass away This expression means that the Jews would never stop celebrating the feast of Purim every year. you could put this last since it applies to the whole verse. Alternate translation: “always” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 27 acq0 figs-events לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 to be making these two days To present things in chronological order, you can put this before the reference to Jewish descendants and converts to Judaism. Alternate translation: “to establish those two days as holidays and to observe them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
EST 9 27 acq1 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם 1 according to their writing Alternate translation: “in the way that Mordecai had told them to do in the letter”
EST 9 27 acq2 וְ⁠כִ⁠זְמַנָּ֑⁠ם 1 and according to their appointed time This means the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar, as specified in [9:21](../09/21.md). Alternate translation: “on those exact days of the month of Adar”
EST 9 27 j143 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 every year by year This expression means “each and every year.” Alternate translation: “every single year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 28 acq3 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 So these days are remembered and are made This gives the result of the reasons described in verses 26 and 27. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 9 28 acq4 figs-doublet וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 So these days are remembered and are made **Remembered** and **made** mean basically the same thing here. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews have been faithful in doing this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “So the Jews have celebrated these days.” Alternate translation: “therefore they said that they would remember and celebrate on those two days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 9 28 hc8s figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 So these days are remembered and are made This expression uses two passive forms, but you could say the same thing using active forms. Alternate translation: “so the Jews have celebrated and observed these days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 9 28 j145 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־דּ֣וֹר וָ⁠ד֗וֹר 1 in every generation by generation This expression means “in each and every generation.” Alternate translation: “in every single generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 28 j147 figs-idiom מִשְׁפָּחָה֙ וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּחָ֔ה 1 family by family This expression means “every family.” Alternate translation: “every Jewish family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 28 acq5 figs-merism מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 province by province, and city by city This could be a figure of speech that refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. Generally speaking, a province would be the largest division of the empire that would identify a person’s location, and a city would be the smallest. Particularly, since the Jews would continue to celebrate Purim after the Persian empire and its provinces no longer exist, you might choose to express the meaning of this figure of speech in a more general way. Alternate translation: “everywhere they have lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 9 28 j149 figs-idiom מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה 1 province by province This expression means “every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 28 j151 figs-idiom וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 and city by city This expression means “every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 9 28 acq6 figs-doublenegatives וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 these days of Purim will not pass away As in verse 27, this expression means that the Jews will never stop celebrating the feast of Purim. You can say this positively. Alternate translation: “will always observe the Festival of Purim faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
EST 9 28 m5o8 figs-parallelism וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews will definitely not stop celebrating Purim each year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “definitely” or “certainly” or “always.” Alternate translation: “the Jews and their descendants will certainly always continue to celebrate this festival of Purim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 9 28 acq7 מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 from the midst of the Jews Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”
EST 9 28 i2qk וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף 1 and their remembrance will not come to an end Alternate translation: “will always observe”
EST 9 28 j155 figs-metaphor מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 from their seed As in verse 27, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 29 je8e figs-distinguish בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 the daughter of Abihail This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 9 29 cm8c translate-names אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 Abihail This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
EST 9 29 oc4c וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י 1 Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of **Mordecai** here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”
EST 9 29 acq8 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י 1 the Jew This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 9 29 acq9 וַ֠⁠תִּכְתֹּב…אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף 1 wrote with all power Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”
EST 9 29 ku7d translate-numbers לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 to set up this second letter of Purim **This second letter of Purim** could refer to: (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (see verses 20-22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 30 acr1 figs-gendernotations וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים 1 he sent letters While this says “**he**,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
EST 9 30 acr2 figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֶל־שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה מַלְכ֖וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 to all the Jews, to 127 provinces, the kingdom of Ahasuerus These three phrases all mean the same thing. The repetition emphasizes that Esther and Mordecai sent this second letter out comprehensively throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “to all the Jews throughout the entire empire of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 9 30 acr3 figs-metonymy שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 127 provinces The letter was not sent to the provinces as geographical territories, but to the Jews who lived in them. The Jews are being described by something associated with them, the places where they lived. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 9 30 u389 translate-numbers שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 127 provinces Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
EST 9 30 iaf7 figs-abstractnouns דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 words of peace and truth The abstract nouns **peace** and **truth** can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 9 30 mpse דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 The Hebrew word translated as **truth** here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”
EST 9 31 acr4 לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 to set up these days of Purim at their appointed times according to what Mordecai the Jew and Esther the queen had set up for them Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”
EST 9 31 rgr9 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 9 31 acr5 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם 1 according to what they had set up concerning their lives and concerning their seed, to matters of the fasts and their outcry This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in [2:6](../02/06.md).) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.
EST 9 31 rl2s figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם 1 and concerning their seed Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 9 32 acr7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר 1 and it was written in the book You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 10 intro h4m4 0 # Esther 10 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Mordecai’s new position<br><br>Through the power of Yahweh, Mordecai was given a new position in the Persian Empire. Mordecai was now the second in command in the kingdom of Persia and he used his position to help other Jews.
EST 10 1 j157 writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֧וֹשׁ 1 Then the king Ahasuerus set This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way to introduce a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
EST 10 1 b5ht וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩…מַ֛ס 1 Then … set a tribute Alternate translation: “Then … levied a tax”
EST 10 1 acr8 figs-merism עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the land and the islands of the sea The purpose of this chapter is to describe the greatness of Mordecai. It does that by showing that he was second in command to a very powerful emperor. Referring to both the land and the sea is a way to include everything that lives in a very large area of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “everyone throughout his empire.” Alternate translation: “on all the people in the empire … even the people who lived on the islands in the Mediterranean Sea” or “on everyone throughout the land and even the far-away islands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
EST 10 1 twn8 figs-explicit וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The phrase **the islands of the sea** likely refers to the fact that the Persian kings had conquered territories reaching all the way to the Mediterranean Sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which reached all the way to the Mediterranean Sea.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
EST 10 1 acr9 figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the land and the islands of the sea These geographic features were not expected to pay the tax. The land and coastlands represent the people living there. The story is describing those people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the places where they live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
EST 10 2 acs1 figs-doublet וְ⁠כָל־מַעֲשֵׂ֤ה תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 And all the deeds of his power and his might **Power** and **might** mean essentially the same thing. They are used together to emphasize how powerful King Ahasuerus was. If it is more natural in your language, you can use one word with that meaning, with another word that gives it emphasis. Alternate translation: “all that he achieved because of how very powerful he was” or “all the great things that he did because of his great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
EST 10 2 p98n figs-abstractnouns תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 his power and his might The abstract nouns **power** and **might** can be translated with an adjective. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 10 2 k7tc וּ⁠פָרָשַׁת֙ 1 with the full account of Alternate translation: “They also wrote a full account”
EST 10 2 acs2 גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 the greatness of Mordecai to which the king had made him great Alternate translation: “of how important Mordecai was” or “of how the king had honored Mordecai for the great things he had done”
EST 10 2 acs3 גִּדְּל֖⁠וֹ 1 made him great See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”
EST 10 2 acs4 figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 are they not written in the book of the events of days of the kings of Persia and Media? This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
EST 10 2 acs5 figs-activepassive הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
EST 10 2 acs6 הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse, if it would be helpful in your language.
EST 10 2 acs7 figs-idiom סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 the book of the events of days for the kings of Media and Persia See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 10 3 j159 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 For This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
EST 10 3 acs8 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
EST 10 3 acs9 מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 was second to the King Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”
EST 10 3 act0 וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 and great among the Jews Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”
EST 10 3 iui7 figs-gendernotations אֶחָ֑י⁠ו 1 his brothers Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
EST 10 3 act2 figs-parallelism דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed These two phrases basically mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard Mordecai worked for the good of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “He worked hard so his people and their descendants would prosper.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
EST 10 3 act3 figs-abstractnouns דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
EST 10 3 wte9 figs-metaphor דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people **Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EST 10 3 s8f8 figs-idiom וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 and speaking peace to all its seed **Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
EST 10 3 j161 figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 to all its seed Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1 Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2 EST front intro d989 0 # Introduction to Esther<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of Esther<br><br>1. King Ahasuerus sends away his wife, the queen (1:1–22)<br>2. Ahasuerus chooses Esther as the new queen (2:1–23)<br>3. Haman plots to destroy the Jews (3:1–15)<br>4. Mordecai asks Esther to help her people (4:1–17)<br>5. Esther pleads with the king for the Jews (5:1–7:10)<br>6. The result of Haman’s plot to destroy the Jews (8:1–9:16)<br>7. The Feast of Purim (9:17–32)<br>8. Conclusion (10:1–3)<br><br>### What is the Book of Esther about?<br><br>The Book of Esther tells how a young Jewish woman named Esther became the queen of Persia. As queen, she worked to save all the Jews in the Persian Empire from being destroyed.<br><br>This book ends by telling why the Jews celebrate the festival of Purim. The name “Purim” comes from the word “pur,” which means “lots” or “dice.” Haman, the enemy of Jews, threw dice to choose when to attack and destroy the Jews. The Jews celebrate Purim to remember how Yahweh rescued his people from being destroyed.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators can use the traditional title of this book, which is “The Book of Esther” or just “Esther.” Or they can choose a clearer title, such as “The Book About Esther.”<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the Persian Empire?<br><br>King Cyrus the Great conquered and ruled over many kingdoms. This was in the part of the world called Persia, which is now Iran. So people named his kingdom the Persian Empire. When Cyrus conquered Babylonia in 539 B.C., he then controlled the Jews whom the Babylonians had earlier taken into exile.<br><br>### Why were there Jews in Babylonia when the Persians conquered it?<br><br>In 586 B.C., the Babylonians conquered and took into exile the people of Judah. These Jews and their descendants were still in Babylon when the Persians conquered it.<br><br>### What was meant by “the laws of the Medes and Persians”?<br><br>The phrase “the laws of the Medes and Persians” is found in Esther 1:19 and Daniel 6:12. It referred to laws and decrees that could not be changed or removed once they were issued. In the book of Esther, the king made a decree that the people could attack the Jews. Later he regretted that decision but he was not able to change the decree.<br><br>The term “Medes” refers to a people group that had formed its own nation, but the Persians conquered them.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What different levels of language are in the Book of Esther?<br><br>In the Book of Esther, people talk to each other in many different situations. There is the polite and stately talk in the Persian court and the words of royal decrees. Friends and close relatives also talk to each other. There are even the words that one uses in speaking to oneself. Translators should use all the ways their own language has to express these different situations in a way that their readers will identify and understand.
3 EST 1 intro v1fp 0 # Esther 1 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### The king’s divorce<br><br>The king’s advisers were afraid that husbands would lose their authority when they heard the queen had refused to come to show her beauty to the king’s guests, so the advisers told him to divorce her.
4 EST 1 1 jdr1 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֖י 1 Now it happened In the Old Testament, this is a standard way of beginning a historical story. Many languages have similar story-opening formulas, and if your language has one, you can use it. But do not use it if it would suggest that the story is not real, only made up. Alternate translation: “this account happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5 EST 1 1 zzz2 figs-idiom בִּ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 In the days of Ahasuerus The term **day** is used figuratively here to refer to a longer period of time. You could just say “during the reign of Ahasuerus,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “in the time of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6 EST 1 1 qwe1 translate-names אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Ahasuerus This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7 EST 1 1 v5ts writing-background ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 he was Ahasuerus the one who ruled from India even as far as Ethiopia, 127 provinces This is background information to help the reader identify Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8 EST 1 1 qwe3 ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ 1 he was Ahasuerus, the one who ruled Alternative translation: “This king named Ahasuerus ruled”
9 EST 1 1 qwe5 writing-background מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ 1 from India even as far as Ethiopia In case your audience might not know where these places are, you could say, “extending from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
10 EST 1 1 qwe7 writing-background שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 127 provinces The number is given to show what a large empire this was. You could say that explicitly by saying, “Ahasuerus ruled a very large empire that had 127 provinces.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11 EST 1 1 qwe8 translate-numbers שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 127 provinces Alternate translation: “one hundred twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
12 EST 1 2 dk31 figs-metonymy כְּ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת…עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 sat on the throne of his royalty Here, the action of **sitting** on a throne is used figuratively to mean ruling over a kingdom. You could just say “ruled,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “ruled his empire from his royal throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13 EST 1 2 qwe9 figs-abstractnouns עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 the throne of his royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with a verb by saying, “the throne he ruled from,” or use an adjective, “his royal throne.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14 EST 1 2 hgm3 translate-names בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֥ן 1 in Susa This was the name of a royal city of the Persian kings. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
15 EST 1 2 qwr1 translate-unknown הַ⁠בִּירָֽה 1 the citadel This means a castle or palace where a king would live. But since the city of Susa itself is being called a **citadel** here, it’s likely that the term figuratively means royal city or capital city. The person telling this story is identifying Susa as the capital by calling it by the name of something closely associated with it, the royal palace within it. A good translation might be “the capital city of Persia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16 EST 1 3 ry7m translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 in the third year of his reign This means that Ahasuerus had already ruled for two full years and that these events took place in the year that followed them. Alternate translation: “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled his empire” or “after he had ruled for two years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
17 EST 1 3 qwr3 figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 in the third year of his reign **Reign** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 EST 1 3 qwr5 עָשָׂ֣ה מִשְׁתֶּ֔ה 1 he made a feast Alternative translation: “he hosted a feast”
19 EST 1 3 prm1 figs-synecdoche חֵ֣יל ׀ פָּרַ֣ס וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 the army of Persia and Media This likely refers to the leaders of the army. It is describing a part of the army by referring to the whole army. Alternate translation: “the officers of the army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20 EST 1 3 qwr7 הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֛ים 1 the noblemen This probably means something like “the wealthy landowners.”
21 EST 1 3 jdr3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 before his face **Face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so this phrase means “in his presence.” The invitation was to come to the royal capital to attend a banquet where the king would be present in person. You could say, as UST does, that the king was present in person to host the feast. Or you could say as an alternative, “all of them came to Susa for the feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22 EST 1 4 qwr9 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ אֶת־עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 when he displayed the wealth of the glory of his kingdom You can translate the abstract noun with an emphasized adjective. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23 EST 1 4 qet1 figs-explicit בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 when he displayed **He** refers to the king. The implication is that he held this banquet to show all of his officials how wealthy and powerful he was. The invited officials would then go back to all the different parts of the empire and tell everyone this. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus wanted to demonstrate to his guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24 EST 1 4 m8xa figs-doublet עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 the wealth of the glory of his kingdom The words **wealth** and **glory** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize how great his kingdom was. Alternate translation: “the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
25 EST 1 4 qet3 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ…וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 when he displayed … the splendor of the beauty of his greatness You can translate the abstract nouns **splendor**, **beauty**, and **greatness** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … that he was a very powerful king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26 EST 1 4 lun5 figs-doublet יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 the splendor of the beauty of his greatness The words **splendor** and **beauty** have similar meaning and emphasize how great he was. Alternate translation: “the splendor of his greatness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
27 EST 1 4 qet5 figs-explicit יָמִ֣ים רַבִּ֔ים שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 for many days, for 180 days This was a very long time for a royal feast to last. The earlier part of the verse provides the reason for this. To make the connection explicit, you could add some explanatory words to the verse like this: “Ahasuerus entertained his guests fabulously because he wanted to demonstrate that his empire was extremely wealthy and that he was a very powerful king. He did so many things for them that the festivities lasted for six months.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28 EST 1 4 x1v6 translate-numbers שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 for 180 days Six months is about **180 days** or about half a year. You can use whatever expression will best express this time period in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
29 EST 1 5 ue3x figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠מְל֣וֹאת ׀ הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 And when those days were fulfilled This implies “at the end of that feast.” You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after those 180 days were over” or “at the end of those six months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
30 EST 1 5 fv9y translate-numbers עָשָׂ֣ה הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ…מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 the king made a feast This was a second feast that the king hosted. He likely did this to thank the people who had worked so hard in hosting the first feast. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
31 EST 1 5 mj16 translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֨ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֜ה 1 in Susa the citadel The expression in this case seems to refer specifically to the royal **citadel** from which the city got its name. This second feast would not have been for everyone in the entire city. It was specifically for the people who served the king in the citadel and who had worked so hard over the previous six months hosting the first feast. Alternate translation: “for every man who worked for him in the palace at Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
32 EST 1 5 qet7 figs-idiom הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 who were found Here, **found** is an idiom that means could be found or were there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33 EST 1 5 qet9 figs-activepassive הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 who were found You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who worked for him in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
34 EST 1 5 qey1 figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּ֧דוֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָ֛ן 1 from the greatest even to the least The person telling this story is referring to the staff of the palace by speaking of two extreme parts of it, the most important and the least important people who worked there, in order to include everyone in between. You could just explain this meaning, as UST does. Alternate translation: “from the most important official to the least important servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
35 EST 1 5 qey3 שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 for seven days The story does not suggest that this was an unusually long time by saying, “for many days.” But you could also say something like “a whole week” to show that this was a generous gesture of thanks on the part of the king. Alternate translation: “another feast that lasted seven days”
36 EST 1 6 qey5 translate-unknown ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 Linens cotton and blue These **linens** were curtains that were hung in the courtyard. **Cotton** refers to the white color of some of them. So this means white and blue curtains. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
37 EST 1 6 qey7 ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 Linens cotton and blue You can specify at the beginning of this verse that the location being described is the same as in the previous verse: “In the courtyard, white and blue curtains.”
38 EST 1 6 qey9 translate-unknown בְּ⁠חַבְלֵי־ב֣וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן 1 by cords of byssus and purple **Byssus** means “white linen” and it is used to describe the white color of some of these cords. So this means white and purple cords. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
39 EST 1 6 qru1 figs-explicit מִטּ֣וֹת ׀ זָהָ֣ב וָ⁠כֶ֗סֶף 1 couches of gold and silver You can specify that these couches were there for the guests to recline on while they ate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
40 EST 1 6 asn4 translate-unknown רִֽצְפַ֥ת 1 a pavement This word probably refers to a mosaic floor made of inlaid pieces of colorful precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
41 EST 1 6 eyi2 translate-unknown בַּהַט 1 porphyry This is a kind of red and purple stone that contains pieces of crystal. You could call it “feldspar” or something descriptive like “red marble.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
42 EST 1 6 qru3 translate-unknown וָ⁠שֵׁ֖שׁ 1 and alabaster This is a white precious stone. You could identify it as “alabaster.” Alternatively, while it is not exactly the same thing as marble, your readers would get the right idea if you called it “white marble.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
43 EST 1 6 qru5 translate-unknown וְ⁠סֹחָֽרֶת 1 and precious stone This word probably refers to a black marble that was used to create borders around mosaics. You could call this “black marble,” or you could just say that the floor contained “another precious stone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
44 EST 1 7 urm7 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַשְׁקוֹת֙ 1 And the serving was The abstract noun **serving** refers to how the drinks were served at the banquet. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “The attendants served wine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
45 EST 1 7 qru7 וְ⁠כֵלִ֖ים מִ⁠כֵּלִ֣ים שׁוֹנִ֑ים 1 with vessels different from other vessels This could mean that “no two of them were alike.” But you could also just say that the wine was served in “various kinds of golden cups.”
46 EST 1 7 r6ec figs-explicit וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 and the wine of royalty was abundant according to the hand of the king This means that King Ahasuerus himself paid for all the wine that the guests drank at his seven-day feast in Susa, and the wine came from his personal supply. Alternate translation: “the king was very generous with the royal wine” or “the king showed a great willingness to give” or “the king provided all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
47 EST 1 7 qru9 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 and the wine of royalty This probably means special fine wine that only the king could acquire and afford. You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “royal wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
48 EST 1 7 wpq1 figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 according to the hand of the king Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the king himself, viewed through his action of giving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
49 EST 1 8 qtu1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁתִיָּ֥ה כַ⁠דָּ֖ת 1 the drinking was according to the law The abstract noun **drinking** refers here not to the action of drinking, but to the guidelines for serving drinks that the king had established for the banquet. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus had established this rule for all his household attendants who served the wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
50 EST 1 8 g5gu figs-explicit אֵ֣ין אֹנֵ֑ס 1 There is no compulsion This could mean one of two things: (1) No one would be stopped from drinking even if the attendants thought they had already had enough. Alternate translation: “there was to be no restriction on drinking” (2) There would be no requirement to drink. Alternate translation: “no one must be forced to drink” Either way, this was another sign of the generosity that the king showed as he hosted this banquet to thank the people who worked for him. Either he was: (1) allowing them to drink as much as they wanted to, or (2) not requiring them to eat and drink everything that was served at a banquet as guests of the king would usually be expected to do. You could say explicitly at the beginning of the verse that the king was giving his guests a special privilege. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
51 EST 1 8 f6px grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֣ן ׀ יִסַּ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ עַ֚ל כָּל־רַ֣ב בֵּית֔⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 for thus the king had established for every overseer of his house, to do according to the desire of man by man This explains why no one had to drink if they did not want to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could give this explanation (the reason) before the result that it accounts for, using a connecting word like “so.” You could say, “The king had established for every overseer of his house to do according to the desire of man by man, so the drinking was according to the law, ‘There is no compulsion.’” Alternate translation: “the king made the attendants who served the wine follow this rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
52 EST 1 8 qtu3 לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 to do according to the desire of man by man Alternate translation: “the king wanted every guest to be able to drink as much as he wanted” or “all the guests could drink as little or as much as they wanted”
53 EST 1 8 jdr5 figs-idiom אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 man by man This is an idiom that means “everyone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
54 EST 1 9 qtu5 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous גַּ֚ם 1 Also This introduces something else that was happening at the same time. You can indicate this by saying something like “during this time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
55 EST 1 9 qtu7 writing-participants וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Vashti the queen You can explain that she was the wife of Ahasuerus by saying, “Queen Vashti**,** the king’s wife” or “his wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
56 EST 1 9 qtu9 translate-names וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Vashti This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next one. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
57 EST 1 9 qti1 מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה נָשִׁ֑ים 1 a feast of women This could mean the women who served in the palace, the wives of the men who were officers and servants, or both. You could say, “a feast for the wives of the men who attended” or “for the women who worked in the palace.”
58 EST 1 9 qti3 בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 the house of royalty that belonged to the king Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “the royal palace where King Ahasuerus lived”
59 EST 1 9 qti5 figs-abstractnouns בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 house of royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective royal. Alternate translation: “royal palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
60 EST 1 10 jv7z translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 On the seventh day Alternate translation: “after six days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
61 EST 1 10 le6l figs-idiom כְּ⁠ט֥וֹב לֵב־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בַּ⁠יָּ֑יִן 1 when the heart of the king was pleased by the wine Here, **heart** figuratively means the action of thinking or feeling. Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was in a good mood from drinking wine” or “when the king was drunk with wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
62 EST 1 10 dcb2 translate-names לִ֠⁠מְהוּמָן בִּזְּתָ֨א חַרְבוֹנָ֜א בִּגְתָ֤א וַ⁠אֲבַגְתָא֙ זֵתַ֣ר וְ⁠כַרְכַּ֔ס 1 Mehuman, Biztha, Harbona, Bigtha and Abagtha, Zethar and Karkas These are names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
63 EST 1 10 ens5 translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּ֣רִיסִ֔ים 1 the … eunuchs This term occurs a dozen times in the story. It describes male royal officials who served as guardians for the women who lived in the palace. They were both guardians of the door, to keep unwanted people out of the women’s quarters, and guardians of the women inside, to take care of them and look after their needs. (As we learn in 2:21, some of these officials also protected the king’s private quarters.) As we see here, and as will also be seen in 2:14 and 2:16, their duties included escorting women from place to place. The term likely indicates that, in keeping with the practices of the time, these men were castrated because their work brought them into such close contact with the king’s wives and concubines. If your language has a term for such an official and you think your readers would recognize it, you could use it. Otherwise, you could use a term that describes the role that these officials played in the royal court. Alternate translation: “guardians” or “officials” or “castrated servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
64 EST 1 10 qti7 writing-background הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 who served before the face of King Ahasuerus This is background information to explain who these men were. Alternate translation: “who attended him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
65 EST 1 10 jdr7 figs-metonymy אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 the face of King Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that these seven men served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
66 EST 1 11 qti9 figs-explicit לְ֠⁠הָבִיא 1 to bring This is the beginning of the instructions that King Ahasuerus gave to the seven eunuchs he summoned in verse 10. You can make this explicit by saying, “He told them to bring.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
67 EST 1 11 jdr9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 to the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus wanted Queen Vashti to come personally into his presence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
68 EST 1 11 asd1 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 in a crown of royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective by saying, “wearing her royal crown.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
69 EST 1 11 asd3 figs-explicit בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 in a crown of royalty Ahasuerus likely wanted Vashti to wear her queen’s crown so that everyone would know that she was his wife. You could say that explicitly. (For the possible reasons why he wanted them to know this, see the next note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
70 EST 1 11 asd5 writing-background לְ⁠הַרְא֨וֹת הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ אֶת־יָפְיָ֔⁠הּ 1 in order to show the people and the officials her beauty Everything Ahasuerus did at his banquets was to show how rich and powerful he was. He seems to have believed that having a very beautiful wife was one more thing that proved he was a great man. So he wanted everyone to see how beautiful Vashti was. You can put this second in the verse, after explaining that Vashti was a very beautiful woman, because it accounts for what happens afterwards, when the king sends his seven personal servants to bring her in to his banquet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
71 EST 1 11 asd7 הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ 1 the people and the officials This might mean “his guests, especially the officials.”
72 EST 1 11 asd9 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 for she was pleasing of appearance If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it is the reason that explains everything else that happens afterward in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
73 EST 1 11 qvk4 figs-idiom כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 she was pleasing of appearance Alternate translation: “she was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
74 EST 1 12 asf1 figs-events וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 But the queen Vashti refused to come You can put the events in chronological order and say first that the eunuchs told Vashti what the king had commanded and then say that she refused to come**.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
75 EST 1 12 asf3 figs-explicit וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 But the queen Vashti refused to come If your language needs to give a reason why she refused, it is most likely because she did not want a group of drunken men staring at her lustfully. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
76 EST 1 12 b57q בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 at the word of the king Alternate translation: “at the king’s command” or “what the king wanted”
77 EST 1 12 asf5 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 by the hand of the eunuchs Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the eunuchs themselves, viewed through their action of telling Vashti what the king had commanded. Alternation translation: “when those servants told Queen Vashti what the king wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
78 EST 1 12 kp6p translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 the eunuchs See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
79 EST 1 12 asf7 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יִּקְצֹ֤ף הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ מְאֹ֔ד וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 the king became very angry, and his rage burned within him These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. You could combine them as UST does by saying, “The king became so angry that he could barely contain himself.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
80 EST 1 12 bsd5 figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 and his rage burned within him Here the story uses a metaphor that pictures the king’s anger as **a fire that burned inside of him**. If your language has a different word picture that it uses to describe extreme anger, you can use that here. If not, you can translate plainly, “his anger continued to increase.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
81 EST 1 13 asf9 לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים 1 to the wise men This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”
82 EST 1 13 g9fe יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים 1 who were knowers of the times This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”
83 EST 1 13 x2u7 writing-background כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 for thus was the manner of the king This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
84 EST 1 13 adf1 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 for thus was the manner of the king If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
85 EST 1 13 jd11 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 before the face of Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
86 EST 1 13 adf3 יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין 1 knowers of law and judgment This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.
87 EST 1 14 adf5 וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 and the ones near to him Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”
88 EST 1 14 cc44 translate-names כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן 1 Karshena, Shethar, Admatha, Tarshish, Meres, Mersena, Memukan These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
89 EST 1 14 jd13 figs-idiom רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 seers of the face of the king **To see the face of** is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
90 EST 1 14 adf7 figs-metaphor הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 the ones who sat first in the kingdom Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
91 EST 1 15 j6sh figs-explicit כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 According to law, what is to be done with the queen Vashti on account of that she did not perform the command of King Ahasuerus by the hand of the eunuchs? This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
92 EST 1 15 ics9 כְּ⁠דָת֙…עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 According to law … on account of that Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because…?”
93 EST 1 15 adf9 figs-events בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 by the hand of the eunuchs To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
94 EST 1 15 jd15 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 by the hand of the eunuchs Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that the eunuchs were the ones who told Queen Vashti what King Ahasuerus had commanded her. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
95 EST 1 15 adg1 translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 eunuchs See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
96 EST 1 16 adg3 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מְמוּכָ֗ן לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 And Memukan answered before the face of the king and the officials Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Memukan was speaking in the presence of the king and of the other officials. Alternate translation: “then Memukan spoke so that both the king and the officials could hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
97 EST 1 16 yqr8 figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ֣⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֕ר בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 all the people who are in all the provinces of the king This means all the different people groups that were living in the empire. You could say, “all the people groups in all the provinces that King Ahasuerus rules” or more generally, “every person who lives in the entire empire of King Ahasuerus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
98 EST 1 16 ss5y translate-names מְמוּכָ֗ן 1 Memukan See how you translated this man’s name in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
99 EST 1 16 adg5 figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 the king Ahasuerus Memukan speaks of **the king** in third person as a form of respect. If you want to portray him as speaking primarily to the king because he is answering the king’s question, you could have him say, “in all the provinces that you rule” or “every person who lives in your entire empire.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
100 EST 1 17 jd17 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 For This introduces the reason why Memukan says that Queen Vashti has done wrong against all the men in the kingdom and not only against King Ahasuerus. To show that, you can begin with “This is what will happen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
101 EST 1 17 gn4g figs-hyperbole יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּה֙ עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 the matter of the queen will go out to all the women To emphasize his point, Memukan exaggerates and says that every single woman in the empire will hear about Queen Vashti refusing to obey King Ahasuerus. You could say, as UST does, that “women all over the empire” will hear about what the queen did. Or you could preserve Memukan’s manner of speaking by saying, “every woman” will hear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
102 EST 1 17 jd19 figs-metaphor לְ⁠הַבְז֥וֹת בַּעְלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 to make their husbands despised in their eyes Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that the women will treat their husbands with disrespect and not obey them. Alternate translation: “women will despise their husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
103 EST 1 17 adg7 figs-explicit בְּ⁠אָמְרָ֗⁠ם הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 when they say, “The king Ahasuerus said to bring Vashti the queen before his face, but she did not come.” The implication is that they will go on to say, “So if even the queen can disobey the king, why should I have to obey my husband?” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
104 EST 1 17 adg9 grammar-connect-logic-result הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 The king Ahasuerus said to bring Vashti the queen before his face, but she did not come. The women will stop respecting their husbands after they hear about this. You can put this report about what Queen Vashti did first, before “women will stop respecting their husbands,” because it is the reason that explains that result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
105 EST 1 17 jd21 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means the Queen Vashti refused to come into the presence of King Ahasuerus when he summoned her during the feast. See how you translated this in verse 11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
106 EST 1 18 afg1 וְֽ⁠הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 Now this day Alternate translation: “even today” or “even this very day”
107 EST 1 18 afg3 שָׂר֣וֹת פָּֽרַס־וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 the noblewomen of Persia and Media It becomes clear later in the verse that Memukan is speaking of the wives of the king’s officials, and you could communicate that here by saying, “the wives of the officials who govern Persia and Media.” But the term “noblewomen” indicates that they also had high status of their own, so you could also call them “the leading women of Persia and Media.”
108 EST 1 18 afg5 דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 the matter of the queen Alternate translation: “what the queen has done”
109 EST 1 18 afg7 תֹּאמַ֣רְנָה 1 will speak This means that they will “talk back” or “disobey.” Alternate translation: “refuse to obey”
110 EST 1 18 afg9 figs-explicit לְ⁠כֹ֖ל שָׂרֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 to all the officials of the king This means the husbands of the noblewomen. The implication may be, “They will disobey their husbands even though they are officials of the king.” You could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
111 EST 1 18 u6d7 וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י בִּזָּי֥וֹן וָ⁠קָֽצֶף 1 and there will be contempt and wrath enough This could mean either that they will treat their husbands with disrespect, and this will make their “husbands angry with them” or that “they will be angry with their husbands and treat them with contempt.”
112 EST 1 18 afh1 figs-explicit וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י 1 and there will be enough This could mean that the husbands will be as furious “as much as they can bear.” But you could also say, “That will be bad enough by itself, even if the news does not spread any farther.” If you think that is the meaning, you can say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
113 EST 1 19 afh3 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
114 EST 1 19 d8qk figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it pleases you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
115 EST 1 19 jd25 figs-metonymy יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 let a decree of royalty go out from before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that the decree will come from the king himself. Alternate translation: “you should personally issue a royal decree” or “you should write a decree yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
116 EST 1 19 afh5 figs-abstractnouns דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 a decree of royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective “royal.” Alternate translation: “royal decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
117 EST 1 19 jd23 figs-123person מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 from before his face Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
118 EST 1 19 afh7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִכָּתֵ֛ב 1 and let it be written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “you should write a decree yourself” or “command your scribes to write a decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
119 EST 1 19 mh1a וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֑וֹר 1 which do not pass away Alternate translation: “these laws never become invalid” or “can never be changed”
120 EST 1 19 jd27 figs-123person תָב֜וֹא…לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 come before the face of the king Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “never come into your presence again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
121 EST 1 19 jd29 figs-metonymy תָב֜וֹא…לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 come before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Queen Vashti will never again come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “never again come before King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
122 EST 1 19 jd31 figs-123person וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ יִתֵּ֣ן הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠רְעוּתָ֖⁠הּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 and let the king give her royalty to her female neighbor Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You can show the same meaning with a verb that addresses a singular “you” and indicates that Memukan is offering advice, not giving a command when he say, “choose another woman to be queen.” Alternate translation: “the king can give her position as queen to some other woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
123 EST 1 19 afh9 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 and … her royalty You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an expression such as “her royal position” or “her position as queen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
124 EST 1 19 afj1 figs-explicit הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 the woman who is better than she Memukan means that the next queen should be “better than” Vashti by obeying all of the king’s commands. You could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
125 EST 1 20 v9l3 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁמַע֩ פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 Then the decree of the king will be heard You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when everyone … hears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
126 EST 1 20 des3 figs-123person פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 the decree of the king Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person: “When they hear what you have commanded.” Alternate translation: “when they hear the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
127 EST 1 20 jd33 figs-explicit אֲשֶֽׁר־יַעֲשֶׂה֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 that he will make for all his kingdom Even though the decree of Ahasuerus applied only to Vashti directly, implicitly it meant that all wives had to obey their husbands or else their husbands could banish and divorce them as well. You can say this explicitly at the end of the verse by saying, “because if any wife disobeys her husband, he can banish and divorce her, just as you did to Vashti.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
128 EST 1 20 afj3 figs-123person מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 his kingdom Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “for all your kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
129 EST 1 20 p8nz כִּ֥י רַבָּ֖ה הִ֑יא 1 though it is great Alternate translation: “even though your empire is very large”
130 EST 1 20 afj5 הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֗ים יִתְּנ֤וּ יְקָר֙ לְ⁠בַעְלֵי⁠הֶ֔ן 1 women will give honor to their husbands Alternate translation: “women will respect and obey their husbands”
131 EST 1 20 be9r figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּד֖וֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָֽן 1 from the greatest to the least This expression figuratively refers to all of the husbands in the empire. By naming both extremes, it includes everyone in between. You could just give the meaning, as UST does: “every husband in the empire.” Alternate translation: “this will be true for both the most important man and the least important man in the empire, and everyone in between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
132 EST 1 21 afj7 figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּיטַב֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 The word seemed good in the eyes of the king Like “if it is good to the king” in verse 19, this is an idiom that means the king thought this was a good idea or this advice pleased the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
133 EST 1 21 afj9 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֑ים 1 in the eyes of the king and the officials Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus and all the officials who heard Memukan’s advice thought that his suggestion was a good idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
134 EST 1 21 agj1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר מְמוּכָֽן 1 the king acted according to the word of Memukan This means that King Ahasuerus wrote a law proclaiming what Memukan had suggested.
135 EST 1 21 p5us translate-names מְמוּכָֽן 1 Memukan Translate his name as in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
136 EST 1 22 agj3 וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֤ח סְפָרִים֙ אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 he sent letters to all the provinces of the king **He** means King Ahasuerus. This is saying that the king sent letters to every province in his empire.
137 EST 1 22 jd37 figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 province by province This is an idiom that means “every province” or every single province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
138 EST 1 22 agj5 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 according to its own writing Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
139 EST 1 22 jd39 figs-idiom עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 people by people This is an idiom that means “every people group” or every single people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
140 EST 1 22 jd41 figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
141 EST 1 22 jj9n לִ⁠הְי֤וֹת כָּל־אִישׁ֙ שֹׂרֵ֣ר בְּ⁠בֵית֔⁠וֹ 1 that every man should be ruling in his house This meant that all men should have complete authority over their wives and their children.
142 EST 1 22 jd43 figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 speaking according to the tongue of his people Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
143 EST 1 22 agj7 figs-explicit כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 speaking according to the tongue of his people The implication is that the husband ought to be able to give orders to his wife in his own native language and that she should understand and obey him, even if she had to learn his language to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
144 EST 2 intro eb4q 0 # Esther 2 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Esther becomes queen<br><br>Esther was humble and took the advice of the royal officials about how to dress for her time with the king. The king chose Esther to be the new queen.<br><br>### Mordecai warns the king against a plot<br><br>Esther’s cousin, Mordecai, discovered that two men planned to kill the king. He told Esther, who then told the king. She also gave Mordecai credit for telling her.
145 EST 2 1 dpc3 writing-newevent אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 After these things This introduces a new event that happened some time later, but we do not know how much later. You can show this with a phrase like “After some time had passed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
146 EST 2 1 e4lp כְּ⁠שֹׁ֕ךְ חֲמַ֖ת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 when the rage of the king Ahasuerus subsided Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was not angry any more” or “when King Ahasuerus became less angry”
147 EST 2 1 agj9 זָכַ֤ר אֶת־וַשְׁתִּי֙ 1 he remembered Vashti This means that he started to think about Vashti. He probably thought about the things that he liked about her, meaning that he missed her.
148 EST 2 1 xpt9 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 what she had done, and what had been decided concerning her This refers to Vashti’s refusal to obey Ahasuerus, and to the decision he made in [1:21](../01/21.md) that she could never come into his presence again. This could actually mean that when he thought about Vashti and what she had done, he regretted the decision that he had made about her. But there was nothing he could do to bring her back because the laws of the empire could not be changed. You could explain all or some of this in your translation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
149 EST 2 1 agk1 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 what had been decided You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
150 EST 2 2 agk3 translate-unknown נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו 1 the young men of the king who serve him These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in [1:13](../01/13.md), but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
151 EST 2 2 agk5 figs-explicit יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת 1 Let them seek for the king young women Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
152 EST 2 2 s4hv writing-participants יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ 1 Let them seek **Them** refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
153 EST 2 2 zi03 figs-123person לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ 1 for the king The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
154 EST 2 2 jd45 figs-idiom טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה 1 pleasing of appearance As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
155 EST 2 3 g9vp figs-123person וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 And let the king appoint The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
156 EST 2 3 jd47 figs-idiom טוֹבַ֨ת מַרְאֶ֜ה 1 pleasing of appearance As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
157 EST 2 3 xqf9 translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֤ן הַ⁠בִּירָה֙ 1 Susa the citadel In this context, this expression probably means “to the palace here in Susa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
158 EST 2 3 j4ka בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 the house of women This means the harem for virgins, the place where the young women would live and receive beauty treatments before they were taken to the king (see verses 13 and 14).
159 EST 2 3 d754 figs-activepassive אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 into the hand of Hegai, the eunuch of the king who is overseer of the women If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “let Hegai, the king’s official, who is in charge of the women, take care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
160 EST 2 3 jd49 figs-metaphor יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א 1 the hand of Hegai Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Hegai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
161 EST 2 3 lf71 translate-names הֵגֶ֛א 1 Hegai This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
162 EST 2 3 jd51 figs-123person סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the eunuch of the king The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
163 EST 2 3 agk7 translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס 1 eunuch See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the official of” or “the administrator of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
164 EST 2 3 agk9 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 who is overseer of the women Alternate translation: “who is in charge of the women who live there.”
165 EST 2 3 w1ly translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 their ointments This term seems to refer to a specific substance that women would put on their face or other parts of their body to make themselves more beautiful. From verse 12, it appears to mean lotions that were used along with oils and perfumes. But here, this one aspect of a woman’s beauty treatment seems to be used to refer to all of it, so you could call these “beauty treatments.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
166 EST 2 4 jd53 figs-123person וְ⁠הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תִּיטַב֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then the young woman who is pleasing in the eyes of the king The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying something such as “the young woman you like the best.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
167 EST 2 4 lh3n figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י 1 in the eyes of Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus could decide which young woman he liked the best and make her queen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
168 EST 2 4 jd55 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the word was pleasing in the eyes of the king Here, **eyes** have the same figurative meaning. The phrase indicates that King Ahasuerus thought that this suggestion was a good idea. Alternate translation: “The king found their suggestion appealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
169 EST 2 4 zxc1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ כֵּֽן 1 so he did thus Alternate translation: “so he followed the suggestion”
170 EST 2 5 h6z2 writing-participants אִ֣ישׁ יְהוּדִ֔י 1 A man, a Jew This introduces Mordecai as a new character in the story. Use your language’s way of introducing a new character. This expression means a Jewish man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
171 EST 2 5 uu9i translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 in Susa the citadel Here the phrase likely indicates the city rather than the palace, that is, the capital city of Susa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
172 EST 2 5 zxc3 translate-names מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 Mordecai This is a man’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
173 EST 2 5 q2rz translate-names בֶּ֣ן יָאִ֧יר בֶּן־שִׁמְעִ֛י בֶּן־קִ֖ישׁ 1 the son of Jair, the son of Shimei, the son of Kish These are men’s names. Jair, Shimei, and Kish are Mordecai’s male ancestors. You could say, “Mordecai was the son of Jair, who was the son of Shimei, who was the son of Kish,” or see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
174 EST 2 5 kw5t אִ֥ישׁ יְמִינִֽי 1 a man, a Benjamite While this likely refers to Kish, it is necessarily also true of Mordecai, and you could put it second in the verse. That way Mordecai’s nationality would come first, then his tribe, and then his family and clan. Alternate translation: “from the tribe of Benjamin”
175 EST 2 6 zxc5 writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם עִם־הַ⁠גֹּלָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הָגְלְתָ֔ה עִ֖ם יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem with the captives who had been exiled along with Jehoiachin, the king of Judah, who Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon had exiled The story now tells about something that happened many years before. This is background information that explains how this Jewish family came to live in Susa. You can introduce this by saying something like, “Many years earlier.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
176 EST 2 6 z7fe figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon had taken Kish away from Jerusalem along with some other captives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177 EST 2 6 egm7 writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem You can bring this information forward from later in the verse because it provides background information that helps identify Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
178 EST 2 6 zxc7 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 who had been exiled from Jerusalem If it would be helpful in your language, you could say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought the people that he took away from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “had taken Kish away from Jerusalem … and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
179 EST 2 6 zxc9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous עִ֖ם 1 along with This means that the two things happened at the same time. You can indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time that he took.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
180 EST 2 6 ch1t translate-names יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה 1 Jeconiah, the king of Judah In the historical passage where this event is described (2 Kings 24:8–17), this king is called Jehoiachin. That was another name by which he was known. You can call him Jehoiachin here in Esther if you think that would help your readers recognize him better. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
181 EST 2 6 zxv1 translate-names אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 whom Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon had exiled You can say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought this king when he took him away from Jerusalem. For example, you can say, “Nebuchadnezzar … took King Jehoiachin of Judah away from Jerusalem and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
182 EST 2 7 zxv3 וַ⁠יְהִ֨י 1 And he was The story now returns to talking about Mordecai. If it is helpful for your readers, you can specify his name, saying, “Now, Mordecai.”
183 EST 2 7 hfm9 בַּת־דֹּד֔⁠וֹ 1 the daughter of his uncle If your language has a specific term for this relationship, you can use it. For example, you can say, “his cousin.” Alternate translation: “his uncle’s daughter”
184 EST 2 7 m9kx translate-names הֲדַסָּ֗ה הִ֤יא אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 Hadassah (she is Esther) Here the story is indicating that this woman’s Hebrew name was Hadassah and her Persian name was Esther. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
185 EST 2 7 zxv7 translate-names אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 Esther This is a woman’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
186 EST 2 7 ccb1 אֵ֥ין לָ֖⁠הּ אָ֣ב וָ⁠אֵ֑ם 1 there was not for her a father or a mother You could say simply that “she was an orphan,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “both her father and mother had died”
187 EST 2 7 jd59 figs-parallelism וְ⁠הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֤ה יְפַת־תֹּ֨אַר֙ וְ⁠טוֹבַ֣ת מַרְאֶ֔ה 1 Now the young woman was beautiful of form and pleasing of appearance These two phrases mean something similar. Separately, they could be saying that Esther was both sexually mature and very attractive. But taken together, they mean that, overall, she was very pleasant to look at. You could combine them, as UST does, and say that she was “exceptionally attractive” Alternate translation: “she had a lovely body and a beautiful face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
188 EST 2 7 skt5 writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠מ֤וֹת אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ וְ⁠אִמָּ֔⁠הּ לְקָחָ֧⁠הּ מָרְדֳּכַ֛י ל֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַֽת 1 And at the death of her father and her mother, Mordecai had taken her for him as a daughter This is background information explaining the relationship between Mordecai and Esther. You can move it to right after the place where Esther is introduced by name because it describes what happened in the past, before Esther became a beautiful young woman. Alternate translation: “after her father and her mother had died, Mordecai had adopted her as his own daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
189 EST 2 8 zxv9 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 So it happened that After providing this background information about Mordecai and Esther in verses 5–7, the story now tells what happened as a result of these facts, when the provincial officers described in verse 3 began sending young women to the harem. That is, the story tells what happened to Esther because her family was living in the Persian empire and she was very attractive. Use your language’s way of showing that the events are now moving forward after giving background information. Alternate translation: “and so this is what happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
190 EST 2 8 zcv1 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 when the decree of the king and his law were heard, and when many young women were gathered This indicates that two actions took place at the same time. You should indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
191 EST 2 8 zcv3 figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 when the decree of the king and his law were heard You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “when the messengers proclaimed the king’s decree and the scribes published the king’s law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
192 EST 2 8 c52i דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 the decree of the king This refers to King Ahasuerus banishing Queen Vashti from his presence.
193 EST 2 8 zcv5 וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ 1 and his law This refers to King Ahasuerus commanding that men would have complete authority over their wives.
194 EST 2 8 zcv7 figs-explicit בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע 1 when … were heard You could also say where they did this action. Alternate translation: “Messengers went throughout the empire and proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
195 EST 2 8 m3ld figs-activepassive וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 and when many young women were gathered You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
196 EST 2 8 jd65 translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֖ה 1 Susa the citadel Here again, this likely means “the capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
197 EST 2 8 mbk1 figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֣ד הֵגָ֑י 1 into the hand of Hegai Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. You could say that the officers “put them under the custody of Hegai” or that “Hegai began to take care of them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
198 EST 2 8 zcv9 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע…וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ…וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 So it happened that, when … were heard, and when … were gathered … Esther was taken This means that Esther was brought to the harem of King Ahaserus at the same time as other young women were also being brought to the harem. You can say, “they brought Esther at the same time” or “they also brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
199 EST 2 8 n3zc figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 that … Esther was taken You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they brought Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
200 EST 2 8 zcb1 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 that … Esther was taken You can explain why this happened. For example, you can say, “Because Esther was exceptionally attractive, the officers also brought her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
201 EST 2 8 zcb3 בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 the house of the king Alternate translation: “the king’s palace”
202 EST 2 8 jd71 figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגַ֖י שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 into the hand of Hegai As earlier in this verse, this means under the custody of Hegai or that Hegai also began to take care of her. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
203 EST 2 8 zcb5 writing-background שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 who was overseer of the women This means that Hegai took care of the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move this information to earlier in the verse when Hegai is first mentioned because it explains why the young women were brought to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
204 EST 2 9 zcb7 וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 the young woman was pleasing in his eyes, and she lifted kindness before his face This means that Hegai found Esther attractive, and she obtained kindness from him or that Hegai was very impressed with Esther, and she won his favor. In other words, because he was so impressed with her, this made him want to do everything he could to help her. This is background information that explains why Hegai took the actions that are listed next.
205 EST 2 9 zcb9 figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 the young woman was pleasing in his eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that Hegai thought that Esther was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
206 EST 2 9 f8i8 הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה 1 the young woman This means Esther. You should make sure that this is clear in your translation.
207 EST 2 9 jd75 בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 in his eyes Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
208 EST 2 9 jd77 figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 and she lifted kindness before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. To say that she “lifted kindness before his face” is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, it could even suggest that Esther and Hegai became friends. Alternate translation: “she won his favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
209 EST 2 9 jd79 לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 before his face Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
210 EST 2 9 abc1 translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֶ֤י⁠הָ 1 her ointments Alternate translation: “her beauty treatments,” as in [2:3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
211 EST 2 9 abc2 מָנוֹתֶ֨⁠הָ֙ 1 her portions of food In context, this likely means that Hegai made sure that Esther was served good food that would keep her healthy.
212 EST 2 9 abc3 שֶׁ֣בַע הַ⁠נְּעָר֔וֹת הָ⁠רְאֻי֥וֹת לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֖⁠הּ מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 gave her seven young women chosen from the house of the king This means that Hegai chose seven female servants from the king’s palace and assigned them to take care of Esther.
213 EST 2 9 abc4 וַ⁠יְשַׁנֶּ֧⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתֶ֛י⁠הָ 1 And he transferred her and her young women **Her** means Esther, and **her young women** means the female attendants Hegai assigned to her.
214 EST 2 10 abc6 לֹא־הִגִּ֣ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 Esther had not told her people or ancestry This means that Esther had not told anyone this information about herself.
215 EST 2 10 abc7 figs-doublet אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 her people or her ancestry These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does, and say something like “what people group she was from.” Alternate translation: “Esther did not tell anyone that she was a Jew, and she did not tell anyone who her relatives were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
216 EST 2 10 abc8 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֧י מָרְדֳּכַ֛י צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 for Mordecai had laid a charge upon her This is background information that explains why Esther did not tell anyone about her family or nationality. It might be helpful to your readers to state this at the beginning of the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
217 EST 2 10 abc9 צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 had laid a charge upon her This means that Mordecai had gotten her to promise not to do it.
218 EST 2 11 jd81 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 And always day by day Alternate translation: “every single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
219 EST 2 11 abd1 מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ 1 Mordecai was walking about Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”
220 EST 2 11 jd83 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר 1 before the face of the courtyard Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
221 EST 2 11 abd2 בֵּית־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 the house of women Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”
222 EST 2 11 abd3 grammar-connect-logic-result לָ⁠דַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 in order to know the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
223 EST 2 11 nz1p שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 the welfare of Esther Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”
224 EST 2 11 abd4 figs-parallelism שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 the welfare of Esther and what was being done with her These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
225 EST 2 12 jcj8 writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ 1 Now when … came Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
226 EST 2 12 jd85 figs-idiom נַעֲרָ֨ה וְ⁠נַעֲרָ֜ה 1 young woman by young woman Alternate translation: “each one of the young women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
227 EST 2 12 abd5 figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ תֹּר֩…לָ⁠ב֣וֹא ׀ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ 1 when the turn came … to go to the king Ahasuerus Each of these young women was going to have sexual relations with the king and, as a result, legally become one of his concubines, that is, one of his secondary wives. As the story has already explained, he would then choose one of them to become his queen and primary wife. But the king would still provide for each of the concubines for the rest of her life; they would not be free to marry anyone else. This is something that the story’s original audience would have understood implicitly. you could say it explicitly if your readers need this information to understand the story: “Each young woman in the harem, one at a time, was going to have sexual relations with King Ahasuerus and become one of his concubines” or “one of his secondary wives.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
228 EST 2 12 p7i5 translate-unknown כְּ⁠דָ֤ת הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ 1 according to the law of women Here, **law** probably does not mean a legal decree, but rather a standard regimen that had been developed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
229 EST 2 12 abd7 writing-background כִּ֛י כֵּ֥ן יִמְלְא֖וּ יְמֵ֣י מְרוּקֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 For thus the days of their beautification would be fulfilled This phrase indicates that the story is now going to provide background information on how these treatments were done. It means, “This is how these women would spend the time preparing to go to the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
230 EST 2 12 abd8 figs-explicit שִׁשָּׁ֤ה חֳדָשִׁים֙ בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 six months by oil of myrrh This means that a woman’s attendants would rub her body with olive oil mixed with myrrh every day for six months. you could explain this in more detail if your readers need this information to understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
231 EST 2 12 abd9 בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 by oil of myrrh This likely means “olive oil mixed with myrrh.”
232 EST 2 12 zhd1 translate-unknown וּ⁠בְ⁠תַמְרוּקֵ֖י הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 and by the ointments of women This means lotions designed for women. In 2:3 and 2:9, this one specific part of the program seems to be used figuratively to mean all of it, and so in those verses it can be translated “beauty treatments.” But it should be translated with a specific term or phrase here, such as “women’s lotions” or “feminine ointments” because it is named along with oils and perfumes as one component of the treatment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
233 EST 2 13 abd0 וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה 1 Then at this Alternate translation: “after a woman’s year of beauty treatments was completed”
234 EST 2 13 abe0 figs-explicit הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the young woman would go to the king This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
235 EST 2 13 abe1 figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 Anything that she said would be given to her **Anything** most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
236 EST 2 13 v133 figs-activepassive כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 Anything that she said would be given to her You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
237 EST 2 13 xx9x בֵּ֥ית 2 the house of Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
238 EST 2 13 abe3 בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the house of the king Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
239 EST 2 14 abe4 figs-explicit הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה 1 she would go She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in [1:11](../01/11.md). you could say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
240 EST 2 14 ded5 figs-explicit וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה 1 and in the morning she would return to It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
241 EST 2 14 lq9h translate-ordinal בֵּ֤ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ שֵׁנִ֔י 1 the second house of women Alternate translations: “a different house for women” or “the harem for concubines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
242 EST 2 14 yw63 אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 into the hand of Shaashgaz, the eunuch of the king who was overseer of the concubines Alternate translation: “where Shaashgaz, the king’s servant in charge of the concubines, would take care of her”
243 EST 2 14 ze74 figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 into the hand of Shaashgaz Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. Just as Hegai was the overseer of the virgins, Shaashgaz was the overseer of the concubines, so he would be the one responsible for Esther while she was in the harem for concubines. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Shaashgaz” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
244 EST 2 14 q5yx translate-names שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז 1 Shaashgaz This is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
245 EST 2 14 abe5 translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the eunuch of the king See how you translated this term, **eunuch**, in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” rather than “of the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
246 EST 2 14 abe6 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 the overseer of the concubines This means that Shaashgaz was the official who *took care of the concubines* or who was responsible for the concubines.
247 EST 2 14 abe7 figs-explicit הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 the concubines As a **concubine**, the young woman was one of the king’s secondary wives. She would live in this harem for the rest of her life. She was not free to return to her family or to marry anybody else. If it would help your readers to understand the story, you could explain all or part of this to your readers here, if you did not do so in 2:12 or 2:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
248 EST 2 14 abe8 לֹא־תָב֥וֹא עוֹד֙ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 She would not go to the king again In verse 12, the Note mentioned that “go to the king” meant “have sexual relations with the king.” But for this occurrence of the expression, it is appropriate to use a more general phrase such as “visit the king” because there could be other, more social reasons for a further visit. The woman would now be a secondary wife, and the king would only send for her if he decided that he enjoyed being with her. Alternate translation: “She would not go and see the king again”
249 EST 2 14 abe9 חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ 1 had delighted in her This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”
250 EST 2 14 abf0 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 and she was called by name You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
251 EST 2 15 fiy8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר…לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Now when the turn of Esther … came to go to the king The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12-14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
252 EST 2 15 jk51 figs-distinguish בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת 1 the daughter of Abihail, the uncle of Mordecai, who had taken her for him as a daughter This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
253 EST 2 15 mg8y translate-names אֲבִיחַ֣יִל 1 Abihail This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
254 EST 2 15 qx3u figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 she did not ask for anything except what Hegai … said You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
255 EST 2 15 vw9r אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 what Hegai … said Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”
256 EST 2 15 abf1 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 what Hegai … said As the king’s personal servant, **Hegai** would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you could make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
257 EST 2 15 abf2 figs-distinguish סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 the eunuch of the king who was overseer of the women This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
258 EST 2 15 abf3 translate-unknown סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the eunuch of the king See how you decided to translate the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” for “of the king.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
259 EST 2 15 z519 figs-idiom נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 a lifter of favor in the eyes of every man who saw her This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
260 EST 2 15 jd87 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י 1 in the eyes of Here, **eyes** is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
261 EST 2 15 jd89 figs-gendernotations כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 every man who saw her This phrase can mean either **every man or every person who saw her**. Alternate translation: “every man who saw her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
262 EST 2 16 jd91 figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֨ח אֶסְתֵּ֜ר 1 So Esther was taken You can say this with an active form by saying, for example, “The king’s servants brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
263 EST 2 16 abf5 figs-abstractnouns אֶל־בֵּ֣ית מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 to the house of his royalty You can use an adjective to translate the abstract noun **royalty.** For example, you can say, “in his royal palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
264 EST 2 16 jd92 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֖י 1 in the tenth month Alternate translation: “in month ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
265 EST 2 16 jr5s translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 which is the month of Tebeth **Tebeth** is the name of the tenth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “that is, the month of Tebeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
266 EST 2 16 abf6 חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 the month of Tebeth The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court. But for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given.
267 EST 2 16 abf7 translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 the month of Tebeth You could convert the Hebrew days and months into approximate dates on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to provide the Hebrew days and months. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
268 EST 2 16 x6yg translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠מַלְכוּתֽ⁠וֹ 1 in the seventh year of his reign Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
269 EST 2 17 p3s7 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֶּאֱהַ֨ב הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֶת־אֶסְתֵּר֙ מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠בְּתוּלֹ֑ת 1 And the king loved Esther more than all the women, and she lifted both favor and kindness before his face more than all the other virgins These two phrases mean almost the same thing. The information is given twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Ahasuerus was completely convinced that Esther was the one he should make his queen**.** “More than all the virgins” basically duplicates the meaning of “more than all the women,” so, if this duplication would be confusing in your language, you don’t need to include both phrases, or you could say, “more than all of them” for the second phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
270 EST 2 17 abf8 figs-explicit מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 more than all the women This means all the other women who had been brought to the king and who became his concubines. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
271 EST 2 17 bcu8 figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 And she lifted both favor and kindness before his face This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. See how you translated similar phrases in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:15](../02/15.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus was very impressed with both Esther’s appearance and her personality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
272 EST 2 17 abf9 figs-doublet וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 And she lifted both favor and kindness before his face **Favor** and **kindness** mean similar things and are probably used together here to strengthen a single idea. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
273 EST 2 17 jd93 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
274 EST 2 17 sym3 translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֤שֶׂם כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ בְּ⁠רֹאשָׁ֔⁠הּ 1 So he set a crown of royalty on her head Ahasuerus did this to show that he was making Esther his queen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
275 EST 2 17 abg0 figs-abstractnouns כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 a crown of royalty To translate the abstract noun **royalty**, you can use an adjective such as a “royal” crown. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
276 EST 2 18 abg1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה גָד֗וֹל 1 Then the king made a great feast The king did this to celebrate Esther becoming the queen. You can say this explicitly. For example, you can say, “Then, to celebrate her becoming the queen, the king hosted a great feast.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
277 EST 2 18 b1hd translate-names מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 the feast of Esther You could indicate to your readers this is the name that Ahasuerus gave to the feast, for example, “He called it ‘Esther’s Feast.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
278 EST 2 18 ufm8 translate-unknown וַ⁠הֲנָחָ֤ה לַ⁠מְּדִינוֹת֙ עָשָׂ֔ה 1 And he made a holiday for the provinces This was probably a “tax holiday,” that is, a temporary elimination of taxes. For a time, the provinces did not have to send in the usual taxes to the king. You could say something like “he proclaimed a temporary reprieve from taxes for all the provinces of his empire.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
279 EST 2 18 jd95 figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 according to the hand of the king Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus personally gave lavish gifts to the guests at this feast. You could say something like “with royal generosity” or “with great willingness to give” or “with generosity that only a king can give.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
280 EST 2 19 g38f grammar-connect-time-sequential וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Now when virgins were being gathered a second time Since this happened some time after Esther’s Feast, you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
281 EST 2 19 p842 figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Now when virgins were being gathered a second time The most likely explanation for this is that Ahasuerus decided he would like to have more concubines. you could say this explicitly if it will help the readers to understand the story. He probably believed that having a large number of concubines was another thing that would show he was a great king. To do so, you could add: “because Ahasuerus decided that he would like to have more concubines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
282 EST 2 19 abg2 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Now when virgins were being gathered a second time You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “at the time when the king’s officers were gathering virgins for a second time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
283 EST 2 19 ang3 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 Now when … were being gathered … Mordecai … then This indicates that the information about Mordecai explains what he was doing at this same time. You can use a phrase such as “during this time” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
284 EST 2 19 a23f figs-idiom וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֥ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Mordecai was then sitting at the gate of the king Possible meanings are: (1) **Sitting at the king’s gate** is an idiom meaning that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) Mordecai sat there so he could hear about how Esther was doing from the many people who passed through the gate.
285 EST 2 19 i8in בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 at the gate of the king Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s house” or “the gate to the king’s palace”
286 EST 2 20 abg5 figs-doublet מֽוֹלַדְתָּ⁠הּ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עַמָּ֔⁠הּ 1 her ancestry (that is, her people) These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does. Alternate translation: “who her relatives were or that she was a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
287 EST 2 20 fb39 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 according to the charge that Mordecai had laid upon her Alternate translation: “just as Mordecai had instructed her” or “as Mordecai had made her promise” or “because Mordecai had warned her not to tell anyone”
288 EST 2 21 vi16 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֔ם 1 In those days This resumes the story after the background information that is provided in verse 20. Indicate this in the way that your language resumes a story after giving background information, such as with a connecting phrase like “during that time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
289 EST 2 21 abg7 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 when Mordecai was sitting at the gate of the king It is implicit in the story that Mordecai heard the two men talking who are named right afterwards. You can say this explicitly if it helps the readers to understand this part of the story. To do so, add: “he heard two men talking.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
290 EST 2 21 abg8 figs-idiom יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 was sitting at the gate of the king As in verse 19, this is likely an idiom that means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate where officials met to make important decisions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
291 EST 2 21 y2vl translate-names בִּגְתָ֨ן וָ⁠תֶ֜רֶשׁ 1 Bigthan and Teresh These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
292 EST 2 21 abg9 translate-unknown שְׁנֵֽי־סָרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 two eunuchs of the king See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). For the phrase **of the king**, you can say “royal.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
293 EST 2 21 abh0 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֣י הַ⁠סַּ֔ף 1 who were guardians of the doorway In this case the men were not guardians of one of the harems but guardians of the king’s private rooms. You could say, “they guarded the doorway to the king’s private rooms” or “they protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters.”
294 EST 2 21 abh1 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקְשׁוּ֙ 1 and they sought Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they were plotting” or “they wanted to find a way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
295 EST 2 21 jd97 figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 to stretch out a hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. You could say, “they were planning to assassinate him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
296 EST 2 22 y7tv figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּוָּדַ֤ע הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 But the matter was made known to Mordecai You can say this with an active form, for example by saying, “Mordecai found out what they were planning.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
297 EST 2 22 abh2 וַ⁠יַּגֵּ֖ד לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 so he told it to Esther the queen This means that he told Queen Esther about it somehow.
298 EST 2 22 dgp3 figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 in the name of Mordecai This expression means that Esther passed the information along to King Ahasuerus on Mordecai’s behalf or that she told the king the information had come from Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
299 EST 2 23 abh3 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out, and the two of them were hanged on a tree. This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
300 EST 2 23 ld4y figs-activepassive וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א 1 Then the matter was sought out and was found out You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
301 EST 2 23 abh4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 the two of them were hanged on a tree You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
302 EST 2 23 y28j translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 on a tree This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or “wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
303 EST 2 23 g9nh figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב 1 And it was written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
304 EST 2 23 abh5 figs-idiom בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים 1 the book of the events of days This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
305 EST 2 23 abh6 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
306 EST 3 intro zb26 0 # Esther 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Haman plots against the Jews<br><br>Mordecai was told to prostrate himself before Haman. This would be considered to be worship. But for a Jew, it was wrong to worship someone other than Yahweh. Because of this, he refused to do it. This made Haman angry, so he decided to kill all the Jews in the Persian Empire. Haman was a descendant of Agag, a king of the Amalekite people. The Amalekites became the enemies of the Jews during the exodus (Exodus 17:8-16). Moses told the people that they would need to destroy them (Deuteronomy 25:17-19), and later God commanded Saul to destroy them (1 Samuel 15:2-3). Samuel killed King Agag (1 Samuel 15:33), but the Amalekites were never completely destroyed (1 Samuel 30:17). Both Mordecai and Haman were probably very aware that their people were enemies.
307 EST 3 1 mm4c writing-newevent אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 After these things This introduces a new event in the story. Use a connecting phrase that introduces a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
308 EST 3 1 abh7 grammar-connect-time-sequential אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 After these things This event happened some time after Esther became queen, and you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
309 EST 3 1 ir5v translate-names הָמָ֧ן 1 Haman This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
310 EST 3 1 abh8 translate-names בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 the son of Hammedatha, the Agagite These are the names of Haman’s father and Haman’s people group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
311 EST 3 1 abh9 figs-explicit גִּדַּל֩…אֲחַשְׁוֵר֜וֹשׁ אֶת־הָמָ֧ן 1 Ahasuerus made Haman … great This means that Ahasuerus **promoted** Haman. It’s implied in the story that Haman was already one of Ahasuerus’s officials, but that he was now being promoted to a higher position. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
312 EST 3 1 abi0 figs-doublet וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם֙ אֶת־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים 1 He lifted him up and placed his seat of authority from over all the officials These two phrases mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that the king was making Haman very powerful. You could combine them and say something like, “the king gave Haman a very high position that was over all of his other officials.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
313 EST 3 1 pl9i figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 He lifted him up Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to advance or promote a person to a higher, more important position than they held previously. Alternate translation: “he gave him a more important position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
314 EST 3 1 ptm4 figs-idiom כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 his seat of authority Here, **seat of authority** means Haman’s position or status in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
315 EST 3 1 abi1 figs-abstractnouns כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 his seat of authority If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you can express the same idea with a concrete noun for this whole phrase. For example, you can say, “his position.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
316 EST 3 1 abi2 מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר אִתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 from over all the officials who were with him **Him** in this phrase may refer to the king. You could say that “the king promoted him above his other officials” or “gave him more authority than all of his other officials” or that “Haman became more important than all of his other officials.”
317 EST 3 2 abi3 figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Then all the servants of the king who were at the gate of the king Here, the **gate of the king**, probably the entrance to the citadel, may figuratively represent the citadel itself, the place where these people served the king. The citadel, in turn, would represent everyone who served the king. So you could say just “all the king’s other servants.” However, this may also be a reference to the specific group of officials who were stationed at the gate, the way Mordecai was. Alternate translation: “the royal officials who were stationed at the palace gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
318 EST 3 2 abi4 figs-explicit וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ…כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ לְ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 all the servants of the king … were bowing down and prostrating themselves to Haman The servants were required to do this as a way of honoring him whenever Haman walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
319 EST 3 2 e25k translate-symaction כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 were bowing down and prostrating themselves This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
320 EST 3 2 abi5 figs-doublet כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 were bowing down and prostrating themselves These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
321 EST 3 2 fg8v וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 and prostrating themselves to Haman This means bowing down all the way to the ground.
322 EST 3 2 jd99 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
323 EST 3 2 abi6 figs-explicit כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 for thus the king had commanded concerning him The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
324 EST 3 2 abi7 figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
325 EST 3 2 abi8 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 But Mordecai would neither bow down nor would he prostrate himself It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
326 EST 3 3 abi9 עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 the servants of the king who were at the gate of the king See how you translated this expression at the beginning of [3:2](../03/02.md).
327 EST 3 3 abj0 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ…לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 said to Mordecai They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. You could say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
328 EST 3 3 abj1 מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Why are you trespassing the command of the king? Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”
329 EST 3 4 jd3r figs-explicit ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ 1 when they spoke to him This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
330 EST 3 4 jd1r figs-idiom י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 day by day This expression means “every day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
331 EST 3 4 abj2 figs-idiom וַ⁠יְהִ֗י ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙…וְ⁠לֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 Now it happened that, when they spoke … he did not listen to them. Here, **he did not listen** means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
332 EST 3 4 uek4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠הָמָ֗ן לִ⁠רְאוֹת֙ הֲ⁠יַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 So they told Haman to see if the words of Mordecai would stand In this context, **standing** figuratively means to survive a challenge, and **words** means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
333 EST 3 4 abj3 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
334 EST 3 4 abj4 figs-explicit כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 for he had told them that he was a Jew Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
335 EST 3 5 abj5 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן 1 The Haman saw Here, **seeing** figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
336 EST 3 5 njt5 figs-parallelism אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑⁠וֹ 1 Mordecai would neither bow down nor prostrate himself to him These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
337 EST 3 5 wk8p figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה 1 And Haman was filled with rage Here, **Haman’s rage** is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
338 EST 3 6 k5h9 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 And it was despised in his eyes You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
339 EST 3 6 abj6 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 And it was despised in his eyes Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
340 EST 3 6 abj7 וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז 1 it was despised **Despise** in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.
341 EST 3 6 jd9r figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 in his eyes Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
342 EST 3 6 abj8 לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְ⁠בַדּ֔⁠וֹ 1 to stretch out a hand against Mordecai alone Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”
343 EST 3 6 j11r figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ 1 to stretch out a hand As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
344 EST 3 6 abj9 כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥ידוּ ל֖⁠וֹ אֶת־עַ֣ם מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 for they had told him the people of Mordecai **They** means the other royal officials. **Him** refers to Haman. **The people of Mordecai** means the Jews. Mordecai had told these officials that he would not bow down to Haman because Jews worshiped only God. So this means that the other officials had told Haman that Mordecai was not bowing down to him because he was a Jew.
345 EST 3 6 hue9 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֣שׁ הָמָ֗ן לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֧יד 1 So Haman sought to annihilate Here, **seeking** figuratively means trying to do something. In this context, it means that Haman decided that he would try to kill all the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
346 EST 3 6 abk0 בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכ֥וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֖וֹשׁ 1 in all the kingdom of Ahasuerus This means in the entire empire that King Ahasuerus ruled.
347 EST 3 6 abk1 figs-doublet הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים…עַ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 the Jews, the people of Mordecai These two phrases refer to the same group of people. The repetition emphasizes how great the threat was to their existence. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “all of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai’s people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
348 EST 3 7 zl12 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙ 1 In the first month Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
349 EST 3 7 wyv6 translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 which is the month of Nisan **Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
350 EST 3 7 abk2 translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 the month of Nisan As in [2:16](../02/16.md), you could convert the Hebrew month into an approximate time on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to give the Hebrew month. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
351 EST 3 7 tw99 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֔ה לַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 in the twelfth year of the king Ahasuerus Alternate translations: “during the twelfth year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” or “when King Ahasuerus had reigned for about twelve years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
352 EST 3 7 g4lt translate-names הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 a Pur (which is “the lot”) The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
353 EST 3 7 abk3 translate-unknown הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 the lot A **lot** was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
354 EST 3 7 abk4 figs-activepassive הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
355 EST 3 7 abk5 grammar-connect-logic-result הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 a Pur … was cast If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
356 EST 3 7 j13r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן 1 before the face of Haman Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
357 EST 3 7 j15r מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.
358 EST 3 7 j17r figs-explicit מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 from day to day and from month to month Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
359 EST 3 7 ih4b translate-hebrewmonths שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
360 EST 3 7 abk6 שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar See how you decided in [2:16](../02/16.md) and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.
361 EST 3 7 abk7 figs-explicit שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 the twelfth, which is the month of Adar This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
362 EST 3 7 k3vd translate-ordinal שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 the twelfth Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
363 EST 3 8 abk8 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Then Haman said to the king Ahasuerus The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
364 EST 3 8 aig9 translate-numbers יֶשְׁנ֣⁠וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד 1 He has one people **He** refers to the king, and **one people** refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
365 EST 3 8 p4a8 figs-doublet מְפֻזָּ֤ר וּ⁠מְפֹרָד֙ 1 scattered and dispersed These two words mean almost the same thing. Haman uses the repetition to emphasize that the Jews are everywhere throughout the empire and so their influence, which he says is bad, will affect everyone. You could combine these words as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
366 EST 3 8 abk9 בֵּ֣ין הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל מְדִינ֣וֹת מַלְכוּתֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 among the peoples in all the provinces of your kingdom Haman is saying that the Jews are mixed in with all the other peoples, and they live in every province.
367 EST 3 8 abl0 וְ⁠דָתֵי⁠הֶ֞ם שֹׁנ֣וֹת מִ⁠כָּל־עָ֗ם וְ⁠אֶת־דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֵינָ֣⁠ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 And their laws are different from every people, and the laws of the king they do not obey. Haman is saying that the Jews have their own set of laws, and he is accusing them of not obeying the king’s laws as a result.
368 EST 3 8 r34x figs-123person דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 the laws of the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could have him say, “your laws.” Or you could indicate this respect another way by having Haman begin by saying, “Your Majesty.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
369 EST 3 8 bf9g וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֵין־שֹׁוֶ֖ה לְ⁠הַנִּיחָֽ⁠ם 1 And there is no profit to the king to leave them untouched Haman is saying, “It is not good for you to allow them to live in your empire.” This can also be stated without the negative. Alternate translation: “the king should remove them” or “you should remove them”
370 EST 3 8 j19r figs-123person וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 no profit to the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying, “not good for you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
371 EST 3 9 abl1 figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
372 EST 3 9 abl2 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king See how you decided to translate this idiom in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” or “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
373 EST 3 9 abl3 figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֖ב 1 let it be written You can say this with an active form, and you can say who would do the action. For example, you could say, “the king could write a decree” or “you could write a decree.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
374 EST 3 9 abl4 לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 to destroy them This means that the decree would say that all the Jews should be killed.
375 EST 3 9 eh3w figs-idiom אֶשְׁקוֹל֙ עַל־יְדֵי֙ עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 I will weigh out … into the hands of the doers of the work This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) Haman could mean that the king’s men will be able to collect a huge amount of money from the plunder that they would get from the Jews. Referring to the weight would be a way of saying, “I guarantee that it will be at least that much.” This reasoning agrees with 3:13, where the king’s letter specifies that those who kill the Jews can take their plunder. Alternate translation: “we will get so much plunder that the officers you send will be able to bring back” (Also see UST) (2) “**Weigh out into the hands**” could be an idiom that means Haman himself will pay the officers who will put the plan into effect. Haman will not do this personally, but it means that he will take responsibility for paying them from his own resources. Alternate translation: “From my own resources I will pay … to the men who do the work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
376 EST 3 9 lhv5 translate-bmoney וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 10,000 talents of silver This would be worth over $300 million at current prices today. But since prices vary over time, if you expressed the value in modern measurements, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate. Instead you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the talent, and explain in a note that a talent was equivalent to about 30 kilograms. Alternatively, you could specify the weight of the silver in the text, as UST does in metric tons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
377 EST 3 9 vm59 figs-hyperbole וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 The **talent** was the largest unit of money and **10,000** was the largest number in the counting system of the time. It is possible that Haman used these terms to represent a very large, but not precise, amount. Alternate translation: “a huge amount of silver” or “enormous amounts of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
378 EST 3 9 abl5 עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 the doers of the work This could mean: (1) those who work for the king in general (administrators) or (2) more specifically the officers whom Ahasuerus would send around the empire to organize the killing of the Jews.
379 EST 3 9 abl7 figs-123person גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the treasuries of the king Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could also have him speak of “your royal treasuries.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
380 EST 3 10 abl8 figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 Then the king removed his signet from on his hand, and he gave it to Haman The implication is that Ahasuerus thought that Haman’s suggestion was a good idea and he agreed to it. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king agreed that this was a good idea, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
381 EST 3 10 abl9 translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 Then the king removed his signet ring from on his hand **Giving the ring to Haman** showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
382 EST 3 10 c9md translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 his signet ring This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
383 EST 3 10 abm0 בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 the son of Hammedatha the Agagite This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.
384 EST 3 10 abm1 figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים 1 the adversary of the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
385 EST 3 11 sz4b figs-activepassive הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ 1 The silver is given to you You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
386 EST 3 11 abm2 figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 and the people, to do with them as is good in your eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that **he can do whatever he wants to the Jews**. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
387 EST 3 12 hx6c figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 And the scribes of the king were called You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
388 EST 3 12 t6qa translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 in the first month, on the thirteenth day of it You can add “of that same year” to show that Haman did this right after Ahasuerus agreed to his plan. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the first month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
389 EST 3 12 abm3 בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 in the first month, on the thirteenth day of it You can put this information first because it places the event within the timeline of the story.
390 EST 3 12 abm4 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה הָמָ֡ן 1 in was written according to all the Haman commanded You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Haman dictated a letter to them” or “they wrote a decree containing all that Haman had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
391 EST 3 12 abm5 translate-unknown אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵֽי־הַ֠⁠מֶּלֶךְ 1 the satraps of the king This seems to mean the officials of the king who served in the palace in the capital city, since they are distinguished from the provincial governors and the leaders of the people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
392 EST 3 12 j23r figs-idiom מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 province by province This expression means every province**.** See how you translated this in 1:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
393 EST 3 12 abm7 שָׂ֤רֵי עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the officials of people by people Alternate translation: “the leaders of each people group”
394 EST 3 12 j25r figs-idiom עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 people by people This expression means every people group**.** See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
395 EST 3 12 j27r figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 province by province according to its writing See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “to each province using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
396 EST 3 12 abm8 figs-explicit מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 province by province according to its writing The implication is that the scribes translated the letter and sent it to each province using its own alphabet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
397 EST 3 12 j31r figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 and to people by people according to its own tongue See how you translated this expression in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “and to each people group in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
398 EST 3 12 j33r figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** is a metonym meaning the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “according to its language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
399 EST 3 12 abm9 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹשׁ֙ נִכְתָּ֔ב 1 In the name of the king Ahasuerus it was written There are two This could mean: (1) Here, **name** could mean the authority of the king. This would be saying that Haman’s letter had the same authority as it would have had if the king had sent it himself. Alternate translation: “Haman sent the letter under the king’s own authority” (2) However, this could also mean that Haman actually had the scribes sign the king’s name to the letter. Alternate translation: “they signed the king’s name at the end of the letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
400 EST 3 12 lyf2 figs-activepassive נִכְתָּ֔ב וְ⁠נֶחְתָּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 It was written, and it was sealed with the signet ring of the king You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to show that he was sending the letter under the king’s own authority, Haman sealed each copy of the letter with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it,” or “the scribes signed the king’s name at the end of the letters. Then they sealed the letters with wax, and stamped the wax by using the king’s ring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
401 EST 3 13 hxx6 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁל֨וֹחַ סְפָרִ֜ים 1 And letters were sent You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “couriers delivered the letters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
402 EST 3 13 j34r figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הָ⁠רָצִים֮ 1 by the hand of runners Here, **hand** could mean two different things: (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the couriers carried the letters in their hands. Alternate translation: “couriers hand-delivered the documents” (2) “Hand” could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that couriers were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers gave the documents directly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
403 EST 3 13 abn0 figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 to all of the provinces of the king Haman did not send the letters to the provinces (the geographical territories) themselves. Rather, he sent them to the officials in every province in the empire. The story is using the word “province” to refer figuratively to these officials by something associated with them, the territories they ruled. Your translation should make clear that the letters were sent to people, not places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
404 EST 3 13 xs6g figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֡יד לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֣ד 1 to annihilate, to slaughter, and to destroy These words mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is envisioned. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “completely destroy.” (A “doublet” can use more than two words. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
405 EST 3 13 abn1 figs-merism מִ⁠נַּ֨עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֜ן 1 from young even to old This is a figure of speech that figuratively describes all of something by naming two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. You could express its meaning as UST does and say something like “every single one of them.” Alternate translation: “including young people and old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
406 EST 3 13 abn2 טַ֤ף וְ⁠נָשִׁים֙ 1 children and women Alternate translation: “including the children and the women”
407 EST 3 13 j35r translate-numbers בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 on one day Alternate translation: “on a single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
408 EST 3 13 abn3 figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 on the thirteenth of the twelfth month Implicitly, this means “the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
409 EST 3 13 g5br translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 on the thirteenth Alternate translation: “on day thirteen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
410 EST 3 13 j36r translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 of the twelfth month Alternate translation: “of month twelve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
411 EST 3 13 i5ur translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 which is the month of Adar This is the name of the twelfth month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you decided in 2:16 and 3:7 to express dates that the story gives according to the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
412 EST 3 13 pbp1 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 and to plunder their spoils This means that the letters also said that those who killed the Jews could take everything that belonged to them.
413 EST 3 14 tj7n figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 the writing, to be given as a law in every province by province You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “The officials in every province presented a copy of the letter as the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
414 EST 3 14 vga2 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 In every province by province This expression means each and every province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
415 EST 3 14 l9w7 figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב…גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 the writing … was uncovered for all the peoples You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to post copies where everyone could see them” or “the king commanded the officials to display copies of these letters where all the people could see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
416 EST 3 14 f6dc לִ⁠הְי֥וֹת עֲתִדִ֖ים לַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 to be ready for this day Alternate translations: “so that people would be ready to do on that day what the king had written in the letter” or “so that they would get ready to do what the letter said to do when the day came”
417 EST 3 15 abn4 הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The runners went out hurrying by decree of the king This means that the king had commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible.
418 EST 3 15 abn5 figs-explicit הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The runners went out hurrying by decree of the king You can state explicitly where the couriers brought the letters. Alternate translation: “as the king had commanded, couriers rushed the letters to every province in the empire” or “then, according to what the king commanded, men riding horses took these letters quickly to every province in the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
419 EST 3 15 i12c figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 and the law was given You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “People read the letter out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
420 EST 3 15 nlk8 translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 in Susa the citadel Here this likely means in the “capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
421 EST 3 15 abn6 figs-synecdoche יָשְׁב֣וּ לִ⁠שְׁתּ֔וֹת 1 sat down to drink (1) This could mean that Ahasuerus and Haman had more than just a drink together. This could be a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. They may have celebrated with an entire banquet that is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “had a celebration feast together” (2) Another possibility is that this is describing a toast that Ahasuerus and Haman shared to celebrate their plan. “Sat down” would simply be describing how the men would have reclined at a table to drink. Alternate translation: “had a celebration toast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
422 EST 3 15 wm4u figs-explicit נָבֽוֹכָה 1 the city of Susa was in confusion The implication is that the people in Susa were very upset about what was going to happen and they did not know what to do about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
423 EST 3 15 wbgv grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר 1 The author wants us to see the contrast between the king and Haman sitting down to relax and drink and the people in the city agitated and in an uproar over what the king and Haman had proclaimed. Use a connecting word or other way that your language uses to show a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
424 EST 3 15 abn7 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר שׁוּשָׁ֖ן 1 but the city of Susa This does not mean the city itself, but the people who live there. This is a figure of speech in which something is called not by its own name, but by the name of something closely associated with it. So this means “everyone who lived in Susa” or the people in Susa (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
425 EST 3 15 abn8 figs-abstractnouns נָבֽוֹכָה 1 was in confusion You can translate the abstract noun **confusion** with a verbal phrase such as “was very confused.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
426 EST 4 intro z7u2 0 # Esther 4 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Mordecai warns Esther to act<br><br>Mordecai tells Esther she must beg the king for the Jews’ lives even if she risks her own death.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Implicit information<br><br>There is implicit information that translators may not understand. The sentence, “Who knows whether you have come to this royal position for such a time as this?” means “maybe God made you the queen so you could save the Jews.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
427 EST 4 1 j37r writing-participants וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י יָדַע֙ 1 Now when Mordecai knew Here the story re-introduces Mordecai as the main character in focus. Alternate translation: “when Mordecai found out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
428 EST 4 1 nya6 כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר נַעֲשָׂ֔ה 1 about all that had been done Alternate translation: “about Haman’s plan to kill all the Jews” or “about those letters”
429 EST 4 1 vgy8 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 he tore his garments and put on sackcloth and ashes These actions demonstrate extreme sadness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
430 EST 4 1 abn9 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 he tore his garments and put on sackcloth and ashes You can explain why Mordecai did this. Alternate translation: “he was so anguished that he tore his clothes and put on rough sackcloth and threw ashes over himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
431 EST 4 1 abo0 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹךְ הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 he went out into the midst of the city The next verse shows that Mordecai was heading towards the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly here. Mordecai might have wanted to call attention to the danger that the Jews were in by going to a public location where people were used to seeing him. Or he might have wanted to contact Esther and ask her to help with the trouble. Or he might have wanted both. Alternate translation: “he started walking towards the city center, towards the king’s palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
432 EST 4 1 abo1 figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּזְעַ֛ק זְעָקָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּ⁠מָרָֽה 1 and cried out a great and bitter outcry **Great** and **bitter** are two words that refer to the same thing and that work together. They indicate that Mordecai’s cry was so loud because it was so anguished. Alternate translation: “cried out in anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
433 EST 4 2 abo2 וַ⁠יָּב֕וֹא 1 And he came **He** means Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai came”
434 EST 4 2 j38r figs-metonymy עַ֖ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 only as far as before the face of the gate of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that Mordecai could not come inside the gate to the king’s palace, but had to wait just outside of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
435 EST 4 2 abo3 שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the gate of the king See how you translated this in [2:19](../02/19.md). Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s palace”
436 EST 4 2 abo4 grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֥ין לָ⁠ב֛וֹא אֶל־שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בִּ⁠לְב֥וּשׁ שָֽׂק 1 no one was to come into the gate of the king while wearing sackcloth If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains why Mordecai waited outside. See the UST. Alternate translation: “But no one who was wearing sackcloth was allowed inside the palace gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
437 EST 4 3 e73y figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 And in every province by province This expression means in every single province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. Alternate translation: “in each and every province” or “in every province of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
438 EST 4 3 abo5 מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 any place where the decree of the king and his law reached Alternate translation: “anywhere that the letter that said to destroy the Jews was announced in public”
439 EST 4 3 abo6 figs-doublet דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ 1 the decree of the king and his law These two phrases are referring to the same thing, that is, the information that the letter conveyed. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious a situation this was. Alternate translation: “the letter from the king” or “the law that said to destroy the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
440 EST 4 3 e7zx אֵ֤בֶל גָּדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 there was great mourning by the Jews Alternate translation: “the Jews mourned greatly” or “when the Jews heard about it, they mourned greatly”
441 EST 4 3 abo7 figs-explicit וְ⁠צ֥וֹם 1 and fasting **Fasting** is a sign of mourning. If your readers would not understand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “they went without food because they were so upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
442 EST 4 3 abo8 figs-doublet וּ⁠בְכִ֖י וּ⁠מִסְפֵּ֑ד 1 weeping, and lamenting These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how distressed the Jews were. Alternate translation: “wailed loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
443 EST 4 3 djf6 translate-symaction שַׂ֣ק וָ⁠אֵ֔פֶר יֻצַּ֖ע לָֽ⁠רַבִּֽים 1 sackcloth and ashes were laid out by the multitudes These were actions that demonstrated deep grief. “Many of them lay on the ground, dressed in sackcloth and sitting in ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
444 EST 4 4 q7ll נַעֲר֨וֹת אֶסְתֵּ֤ר 1 the young female attendants of Esther Alternate translation: “Esther’s female servants” of “Esther’s maids”
445 EST 4 4 abo9 translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֶ֨י⁠הָ֙ 1 and her eunuchs See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “her male servants” or “her other officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
446 EST 4 4 abp0 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לָ֔⁠הּ 1 and they told her That is, they told her that Mordecai was sitting outside the gate wearing sackcloth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
447 EST 4 4 abp1 figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 even the queen was seized with extreme fear **The queen** means Esther. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Esther herself became very afraid” or “this made the queen very distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
448 EST 4 4 abp2 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 even the queen was seized with extreme fear The implication is that this happened when she heard what Mordecai was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When she heard about this, Esther herself became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
449 EST 4 4 y8bc translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּשְׁלַ֨ח בְּגָדִ֜ים לְ⁠הַלְבִּ֣ישׁ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 she sent garments to clothe Mordecai and to take off his sackcloth from upon him **She** means Esther. This was her way of encouraging Mordecai to be hopeful and act publicly as if whatever situation he was worried about were not completely desperate. Alternate translation: “she sent servants to take to Mordecai some good clothes to wear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
450 EST 4 4 abp3 translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹ֥א קִבֵּֽל 1 he did not accept This was Mordecai’s way of replying to Esther that the situation truly was desperate. Alternate translation: “he refused to put them on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
451 EST 4 5 abp4 וַ⁠תִּקְרָא֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 So Esther called for Hathak, from the eunuchs of the king Alternative translation: “then Esther summoned Hathak, one of the king’s officials”
452 EST 4 5 vf4m translate-names לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ 1 for Hathak This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
453 EST 4 5 lp8m writing-background מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶעֱמִ֣יד לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 from the eunuchs of the king whom he had caused to stand before her face Alternate translation: “who was one of the royal guardians whom the king had assigned to serve Esther personally” You can put this information first because it provides background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
454 EST 4 5 icg7 translate-unknown מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י 1 from the eunuchs of See how you translated this term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
455 EST 4 5 j39r figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 before her face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the guardians served Esther personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
456 EST 4 5 abp6 figs-parallelism לָ⁠דַ֥עַת מַה־זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠עַל־מַה־זֶּֽה 1 to know what this was and on account of what this was These two phrases mean similar things. In both cases, “this” refers to what Mordecai was doing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Esther now knew there must be a very serious reason why Mordecai was wearing sackcloth in such a public place. Alternate translation: “to find out why he was so distressed that he was sitting at the palace gate wearing sackcloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
457 EST 4 6 abp7 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הֲתָ֖ךְ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 So Hathak went out to Mordecai Hathak went out specifically to speak with Mordecai and find out why he was so distressed, as Esther had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Hathak went out to speak with Mordecai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
458 EST 4 6 mgl5 רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 the open place of the city Alternate translation: “the central plaza”
459 EST 4 6 j41r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 before the face of Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that the open square was in front of the palace gate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
460 EST 4 6 abp8 figs-metonymy שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the gate of the king The citadel is being described by reference to something associated with it, the gate that leads into it. Alternate translation: “the citadel gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
461 EST 4 7 zq3s figs-synecdoche אֵ֖ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 Mordecai reported to him all that had happened to him Here, **him** refers to Mordecai, but here Mordecai figuratively represents the entire group of which he is a member. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman was planning to do to the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
462 EST 4 7 abp9 פָּרָשַׁ֣ת הַ⁠כֶּ֗סֶף אֲשֶׁ֨ר אָמַ֤ר הָמָן֙ לִ֠⁠שְׁקוֹל עַל־גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ בַּיְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 the exact amount of silver that Haman had said to weigh out in the treasuries of the king, against, to destroy them This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) the amount of silver that Haman said the king would get for his treasury from the plunder that the people who destroyed the Jews would take from them, or (2) the amount of silver that Haman had said he would contribute to pay for the expenses of the plan to destroy the Jews. You could say either one as an alternate translation, but it should agree with your interpretation of [3:9](../03/09.md).
463 EST 4 8 j43r פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן כְּתָֽב־הַ֠⁠דָּת 1 a copy of the writing Alternate translation: “a copy of the letter that Haman had sent out” or “a copy of the decree”
464 EST 4 8 zt49 figs-activepassive הַ֠⁠דָּת אֲשֶׁר־נִתַּ֨ן בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֤ן 1 the law that had been given in Susa If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the law that the heralds had read out loud in Susa” or “the decree that the king’s servants had posted in Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
465 EST 4 8 abq0 לְ⁠הַשְׁמִידָ⁠ם֙ 1 to annihilate them Alternative translation: “that said that all the Jews must be killed”
466 EST 4 8 abq1 figs-parallelism לְ⁠הַרְא֥וֹת אֶת־אֶסְתֵּ֖ר וּ⁠לְ⁠הַגִּ֣יד לָ֑⁠הּ 1 in order to show Esther, and to inform her These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize how important Mordecai knew it was for Esther to understand just what Haman was planning. “so that Esther could see exactly what it said.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
467 EST 4 8 abq2 וּ⁠לְ⁠צַוּ֣וֹת עָלֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 and to lay a charge upon her Alternate translation: “and to urge her”
468 EST 4 8 gds6 figs-doublet לְ⁠הִֽתְחַנֶּן־ל֛⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠בַקֵּ֥שׁ 1 to implore his favor and to seek These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize the force of the action that Mordecai felt was needed. Alternate translation: “to plead with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
469 EST 4 8 j47r figs-metonymy מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 to go to the king … from before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Esther should go into the presence of the king to ask personally for the king’s intervention. Alternate translation: “to go to the king personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
470 EST 4 8 abq3 עַל־עַמָּֽ⁠הּ 1 concerning her people Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”
471 EST 4 10 abq5 וַ⁠תֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַ⁠הֲתָ֔ךְ וַ⁠תְּצַוֵּ֖⁠הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 Then Esther spoke to Hathak and commanded him to say to Mordecai: Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”
472 EST 4 11 abq6 figs-merism כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing **All the servants of the king** refers to the royal officials in the palace. **The people of the provinces** refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
473 EST 4 11 abq7 כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 All the servants of the king and the people of the provinces of the king are knowing Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If it would be helpful in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
474 EST 4 11 d9mh figs-merism כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 for any man or woman Here, Esther once again refers to a group figuratively by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
475 EST 4 11 abq8 translate-symaction יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶ⁠חָצֵ֨ר הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֜ית 1 who goes to the king, to the inner court As [5:1](../05/01.md) makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
476 EST 4 11 abq9 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א 1 who has not been called If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
477 EST 4 11 abr0 אַחַ֤ת דָּת⁠וֹ֙ 1 his law is one If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself. Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom”
478 EST 4 11 abr1 לְ⁠הָמִ֔ית 1 to cause to die Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”
479 EST 4 11 abr2 translate-symaction לְ֠⁠בַד מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 apart from when the king holds out to him the scepter of gold, then he will live If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
480 EST 4 11 abr3 translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 the scepter of gold A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
481 EST 4 11 ilp4 figs-explicit וְ⁠חָיָ֑ה 1 This means that the guards will not kill this person and he can proceed to speak to the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the guards will not kill him and he can speak to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
482 EST 4 11 abr4 figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י לֹ֤א נִקְרֵ֨אתי֙ לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 But as for me, I have not been called to come to the king these thirty days Esther is saying by implication that she cannot speak to the king as Mordecai has requested because the king has not been calling for her, which would have given her an opportunity to speak to him. If she goes without being summoned, she could be put to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
483 EST 4 11 j49r grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י 1 But as for me This expression indicates a contrast between Esther’s present situation and the situation she has just described. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
484 EST 4 11 abr5 זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 these 30 days The phrase means that Esther has not been called in the king’s presence for a period of at least 30 days. You could use an equivalent expression in your language that would indicate this is a long enough time that Esther has reason to believe the king is not interested in seeing her. Alternate translation: “in over a month”
485 EST 4 11 gv1v translate-numbers זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 these 30 days Alternate translation: “thirty days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
486 EST 4 12 abr6 וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֔י 1 So they told to Mordecai the words of Esther From this point on, the author focuses only on Mordecai and Esther and does not specify who the messenger is. You can use a general phrase such as, “they told Mordecai” or “Mordecai was told” or “messengers told Mordecai.” If that would be confusing, you could continue to specify that the messenger was Hathak, as the ancient Greek version did. See the UST.
487 EST 4 13 abr7 וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר מָרְדֳּכַ֖י לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶל־אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 Then Mordecai said to return to Esther Alternate translation: “then Mordecai sent back this message to Esther”
488 EST 4 14 i1uy figs-personification רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה יַעֲמ֤וֹד לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מִ⁠מָּק֣וֹם אַחֵ֔ר 1 relief and deliverance will arise for the Jews from another place Here, **relief** and **deliverance** are spoken of as if they are living things that can rise up. Alternate translation: “someone else will rise up from another place and rescue the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
489 EST 4 14 t3k7 figs-doublet רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה 1 Here, **relief** and **deliverance** mean very similar things. They are used together to emphasize the great emotion behind being delivered from this great evil. If it works better in your language, you can use one word instead of two, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
490 EST 4 14 abs0 וְ⁠אַ֥תְּ וּ⁠בֵית־אָבִ֖י⁠ךְ תֹּאבֵ֑דוּ 1 but you and the house of your father will perish The implication is that the Jews will be rescued starting in that other place, but the ones living in Susa will still be in danger because no one who could have helped them there (such as Esther) would have done anything. Alternate translation: “you and your relatives will be killed”
491 EST 4 14 dtg7 figs-rquestion וּ⁠מִ֣י יוֹדֵ֔עַ אִם־לְ⁠עֵ֣ת כָּ⁠זֹ֔את הִגַּ֖עַתְּ לַ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 And who knows if you have arrived at royalty for such a time as this? This is really a statement, and it is about what is happening right then. Mordecai asks it in question form so that Esther will think deeply about her role in this situation. Alternate translation: “who knows, perhaps it was to intervene in this very situation that you became queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
492 EST 4 16 d6cq figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים הַֽ⁠נִּמְצְאִ֣ים בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 all the Jews who are found in Susa You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live here in Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
493 EST 4 16 t2wg translate-symaction וְ⁠צ֣וּמוּ עָ֠לַ⁠י 1 And fast on account of me The verb **fast** here is plural, including Mordecai and all of the Jews. Fasting (that is, going without eating) was a symbolic act that the Jews did when they were praying intensely. You could make the connection with prayer explicit. Alternate translation: “fast and pray for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
494 EST 4 16 qw8v translate-numbers וְ⁠אַל־תֹּאכְל֨וּ וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁתּ֜וּ שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת יָמִים֙ לַ֣יְלָה וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 neither eating nor drinking for three days, both night and day This expression means that Esther was asking the Jews in Susa not to eat or drink anything during the day or the night for a period of three days. Alternate translation: “tell them to not eat or drink anything for three days and three nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
495 EST 4 16 j51r גַּם־אֲנִ֥י וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתַ֖⁠י אָצ֣וּם כֵּ֑ן 1 Also, I myself and my young female attendants will fast likewise Alternate translation: “my maids and I will also fast”
496 EST 4 16 abs2 וּ⁠בְ⁠כֵ֞ן 1 Then, in such circumstances Alternate translation: “after we have all done that, and while still fasting”
497 EST 4 16 abs3 אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת 1 which is not according to the law Alternate translation: “even though there is a law against going without being summoned”
498 EST 4 16 abs4 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי 1 and if I perish, I perish Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”
499 EST 4 17 abs5 figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 So Mordecai went The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
500 EST 4 17 abs6 כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 according to the whole charge that Esther had laid upon him Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”
501 EST 5 intro k5ff 0 # Esther 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Esther’s respect<br>Esther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
502 EST 5 1 j53r writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י 1 Now it happened on the third day This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
503 EST 5 1 abs7 figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 Esther put on royalty If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **royalty**, you can express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
504 EST 5 1 abs8 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 Esther put on royalty It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
505 EST 5 1 abs9 בַּ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֔ית 1 the inner court of the palace of the king See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “the inner courtyard of the palace”
506 EST 5 1 uk7p נֹ֖כַח בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 opposite to the house of the king Alternate translation: “across from the room where the king was”
507 EST 5 1 abt0 figs-abstractnouns וְ֠⁠הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ יוֹשֵׁ֞ב עַל־כִּסֵּ֤א מַלְכוּת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 sitting on the throne of his royalty in the palace of royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to those things that belonged only to the king. You can translate this idea with a verb, “the throne he ruled from” and “the palace where he reigned,” or with an adjective, “his royal throne” and “his royal palace.” Alternate translation: “in the throne room of the palace, sitting on the king’s throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
508 EST 5 1 j55r נֹ֖כַח פֶּ֥תַח הַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 opposite to the entrance of the palace Alternate translation: “facing the entrance of the room”
509 EST 5 2 abt1 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְהִי֩ 1 Then it happened that This expression introduces what happened next. Alternate translation: “Now” or “and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
510 EST 5 2 abt2 כִ⁠רְא֨וֹת 1 as soon as … saw Alternate translation: “when … noticed”
511 EST 5 2 j57r figs-idiom נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 she lifted favor in his eyes See how you translated similar expressions in 2:9, 2:15, and 2:17. Review the explanations there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus **thought Esther looked very attractive** as she stood in the court. It could also mean that King Ahasuerus was very pleased to see her. It could mean both. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” or “he approved of her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
512 EST 5 2 pw4x figs-metaphor נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 she lifted favor in his eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that King Ahasuerus decided not to kill Esther for coming into the inner court without being summoned. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
513 EST 5 2 uu8s translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 And the king held out to her the golden scepter that was in his hand King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said that Esther should be executed for coming into the king’s inner court without being summoned. See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
514 EST 5 2 abt3 figs-explicit וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 And the king held out to her the golden scepter that was in his hand King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her to signal that he would be glad to talk to her.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
515 EST 5 2 abt4 וַ⁠תִּקְרַ֣ב 1 so … approached Alternate translation; “so … came close” or “so … came up to the throne”
516 EST 5 2 z4mn translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 and touched the head of the scepter This action was probably customary for a king’s subjects in a Persian court, when the king extended the royal scepter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
517 EST 5 2 abt5 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 and touched the head of the scepter This action demonstrated that Esther respected the authority of King Ahasuerus and was thankful for his kindness to her. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include that information here, such as: “…to show that she respected his authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
518 EST 5 2 j59r figs-metonymy בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 the head of the scepter Here, **head** is a metonym meaning the top (or uppermost part) of an object or location. This phrase means that Esther touched the top of the king’s scepter on the end that was extended toward her. Alternate translation: “the top of the scepter” or “the tip of the scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
519 EST 5 3 abt6 מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 What is to you, Esther the queen? Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”
520 EST 5 3 abt7 figs-parallelism מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 What is to you, Esther the queen? And what is your request? These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is very interested in hearing why Esther has come to see him. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if it would be more natural in your language to combine them into one. Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
521 EST 5 3 j61r figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 As much as half of the kingdom, and let it be given to you This was probably a formal and customary expression in the Persian royal court, meant to show honor to the person making a request of the king and to indicate the king’s willingness to be very generous when answering the request. King Ahasuerus was almost certainly not offering to give Esther half of his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is.” Alternate translation: “I will give you what you want, even if you ask me to give you half of my kingdom!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
522 EST 5 3 c6h7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 and let it be given to you You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” or “I will give you what you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
523 EST 5 4 abt8 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19 and 3:9. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
524 EST 5 4 m3uy figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 If it is good to the king Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
525 EST 5 4 j63r figs-123person יָב֨וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָן֙ 1 let the king come with Haman Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “O king, please come with Haman” or “you and Haman come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
526 EST 5 4 abt9 figs-123person הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 the banquet that I have made for him Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “the banquet that I have prepared for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
527 EST 5 4 abu0 figs-yousingular הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 the banquet that I have made for him If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be singular, since here it refers just to the king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
528 EST 5 5 abu1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then the king said The king would have said this to his servants, not to Esther. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The king said to his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
529 EST 5 5 abu2 מַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָמָ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 Bring Haman quickly, in order to do the word of Esther The **word of Esther** means her invitation to the banquet. Alternate translation: “go and get Haman and bring him quickly to the banquet that Esther has prepared”
530 EST 5 5 abu3 עָשְׂתָ֥ה 1 had made Alternate translation: “had prepared for them”
531 EST 5 6 d5wr figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 What is your petition? And let it be given to you. And what is your request? As much as half of the kingdom, and let it be done. These two question-and-statement pairs mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther whatever she wants. If this is confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. you can combine them into one or replace the repetition with a statement of what the repetition means, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
532 EST 5 6 pj3p figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 What is your petition? When Ahasuerus asked Esther in the throne room what she wanted, she said that she wanted him and Haman to come to a banquet she had prepared. But since the king asks her once again at the banquet what she wants, it is clear that he knew this was not her real request. Instead, he knew that she wanted to show him hospitality first, as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship. You can indicate this by translating, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
533 EST 5 6 q5nt figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 your petition … your request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
534 EST 5 6 e2v2 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 And let it be given to you … let it be done You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
535 EST 5 6 j65r עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 As much as half of the kingdom See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”
536 EST 5 7 abu5 figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֥עַן…וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֑ר 1 Then … answered and said Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” or “replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
537 EST 5 7 r4aw figs-doublet שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 My petition and my request The words **petition** and **request** mean the same thing. Esther probably used these words together as a way of speaking very formally and respectfully to the king. Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
538 EST 5 7 abu6 figs-abstractnouns שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 My petition and my request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
539 EST 5 8 c2br figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 if I have found favor in the eyes of the king The expression **find favor** means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
540 EST 5 8 abu7 figs-metaphor אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 if I have found favor in the eyes of the king Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means the King Ahasuerus is pleased with Esther and willing to grant her request. Alternate translation: “if the king evaluates me and approves” or “if the king is pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
541 EST 5 8 c2jy figs-123person אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 if I have found favor in the eyes of the king Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
542 EST 5 8 abu8 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ ט֔וֹב 1 if it is good to the king This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), and [5:4](../05/04.md). Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
543 EST 5 8 j69r figs-doublet לָ⁠תֵת֙ אֶת־שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־בַּקָּשָׁתִ֑⁠י 1 to grant my petition and to perform my request The phrases **to grant my petition** and **to perform my request** mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “to do what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
544 EST 5 8 x8hf figs-123person יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 let the king come with Haman to the banquet that I will make for them Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “please come with Haman to another banquet that I will prepare for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
545 EST 5 8 j71r figs-youdual יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 let the king come with Haman to the banquet that I will make for them If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be dual if your language uses that form, since it refers to the king and Haman, otherwise it should be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
546 EST 5 8 abu9 וּ⁠מָחָ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 and tomorrow I will do according to the word of the king The **word of the king** means his request for Esther to tell him what she wants. Alternate translation: “I will answer your question then”
547 EST 5 8 gf9b figs-123person כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 according to the word of the king Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “according to your word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
548 EST 5 9 abv1 וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֤א 1 And … went out Alternate translation: “and … left the banquet”
549 EST 5 9 j73r figs-doublet שָׂמֵ֖חַ וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 joyful and good of heart The word **joyful** and the phrase **good of heart** mean the same thing. These terms are used together to show that Haman was very happy after attending Esther’s banquet with King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “feeling very good” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]
550 EST 5 9 j75r figs-metaphor וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 and good of heart Here, **heart** figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. The phrase means that Haman felt happy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
551 EST 5 9 dkg6 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹא־קָם֙ 1 that he neither rose up Under other circumstances, officials were expected to bow low to the ground to show respect for Haman. See [3:2](../03/02.md). But since Mordecai was already sitting on the ground as a sign of mourning, he would have been expected to stand up to show respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not stand up to show respect for Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
552 EST 5 9 j77r translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹא־זָ֣ע מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ 1 nor trembled from him The phrase means that Mordecai was not afraid of Haman or of what Haman might do to him for refusing to show the respect that the king had commanded. Alternate translation: “or tremble fearfully in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
553 EST 5 9 s47u figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֛ן עַֽל־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י חֵמָֽה 1 then Haman was filled with rage on account of Mordecai Here, **Haman’s rage** is described as something that could fill him up. See how you translated this expression in [3:5](../03/05.md). Alternate translation: “Haman became very angry because of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
554 EST 5 10 v5nl grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּתְאַפַּ֣ק הָמָ֔ן 1 But Haman restrained himself There is a contrast between this sentence and the previous one. Haman felt very much like doing one thing, but he decided it would be better to do something else. The contrast can be indicated with a phrase such as “but even though.” Alternate translation: “but even though Haman was so angry, he kept himself from losing his temper” or “Haman refused to show how angry he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
555 EST 5 10 bcn1 translate-names זֶ֥רֶשׁ 1 Zeresh This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
556 EST 5 11 abv4 וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר לָ⁠הֶ֥ם 1 Then … recounted Alternate translation: “then … made a long speech to them about”
557 EST 5 11 mvm5 figs-abstractnouns כְּב֥וֹד עָשְׁר֖⁠וֹ 1 the glory of his wealth **Glory** and **wealth** are both abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “Haman told them about how great his wealth was” or “Haman told them about the many great things he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
558 EST 5 11 j79r translate-symaction וְ⁠רֹ֣ב בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 and the multitude of his sons Having many sons was probably seen as a mark of honor and status in Persian culture. This phrase probably means that Haman was boasting about the status he enjoyed in Persian society because he had many sons. Alternate translation: “how many sons he had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
559 EST 5 11 abv5 figs-gendernotations בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 his sons This word can sometimes be used in Hebrew to mean both male and female children. However, here it clearly refers to male children, so you should translate it that way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
560 EST 5 11 m7fq גִּדְּל֤⁠וֹ 1 made him great Alternate translation: “how the king had continually given him more authority” or “how the king had honored him many times by giving him more important work”
561 EST 5 11 b7c5 figs-metaphor נִשְּׂא֔⁠וֹ עַל 1 he had lifted him over Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to “advance” or “promote” a person to a higher, more important position than they had previously. Alternate translation: “given him a position more important than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
562 EST 5 11 abv6 figs-explicit הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the officials and administrators of the king This means all of the others, as [3:1](../03/01.md) makes clear. Alternate translation: “all of his other officials and administrators” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
563 EST 5 11 xwvh figs-doublet הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The words **officials** and **administrators** mean similar things. If your language uses one word for these, you can combine them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
564 EST 5 12 abv7 figs-exclamations אַ֣ף 1 In addition You can translate it as an exclamation because Haman believes he has saved the best for last and is now introducing what he considers to be his most recent significant honor. Alternate translation: “and that is not all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
565 EST 5 12 w1bm figs-doublenegatives לֹא־הֵבִיאָה֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֧ה עִם־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ…כִּ֣י אִם־אוֹתִ֑⁠י 1 Esther the queen did not bring anyone with the king … except me This can be expressed positively. Alternate translation: “I was the only one Queen Esther invited besides the king” or “Queen Esther invited just two of us, the king and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
566 EST 5 12 abv8 עָשָׂ֖תָה 1 she had made Alternate translation: “she had prepared”
567 EST 5 12 abv9 figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 And also for tomorrow, I am called by her with the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
568 EST 5 13 abw0 figs-metaphor וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙ 1 But all of this is not equal for me to every time that I see This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “…does not satisfy me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
569 EST 5 13 wu84 וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה 1 But all of this Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”
570 EST 5 13 abw1 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
571 EST 5 13 abw2 figs-explicit יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 sitting at the gate of the king Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
572 EST 5 13 abw3 בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the gate of the king Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
573 EST 5 14 abw4 figs-explicit וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 Then … said to him The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
574 EST 5 14 j81r וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 with all his friends This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
575 EST 5 14 abw5 figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 Let them make You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
576 EST 5 14 i2f3 translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 a tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
577 EST 5 14 k8zd translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 50 cubits high You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
578 EST 5 14 hiui figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
579 EST 5 14 abw7 figs-explicit וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 say to the king, and let them hang Mordecai on it If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
580 EST 5 14 abw8 grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בֹֽא…אֶל הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ 1 Then go … to the banquet joyful **Then** indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
581 EST 5 14 bbs9 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן 1 And the word was good before the face of Haman The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
582 EST 5 14 i8is וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 and he made the tree Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
583 EST 5 14 j83r translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
584 EST 6 intro i9x7 0 # Esther 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Approaching the king<br>It was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
585 EST 6 1 j85r writing-newevent בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא 1 That night This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
586 EST 6 1 abw9 figs-personification נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the sleep of the king fled away Here, **sleep** is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
587 EST 6 1 abx1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא 1 And he said to bring **He** means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
588 EST 6 1 abx2 סֵ֤פֶר הַ⁠זִּכְרֹנוֹת֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים 1 the book of records of the events of days This is equivalent to the expression “the book of the events of days” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “the royal chronicles” or “the records of what had happened during all the time that he had been king”
589 EST 6 1 abx3 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּהְי֥וּ נִקְרָאִ֖ים 1 they were being called out This means that the chronicles were read out loud. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the young men got the chronicles and began to read them out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
590 EST 6 1 j87r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the book was being read in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
591 EST 6 2 u4gi figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֣א כָת֗וּב 1 And it was found written Both terms **found** and **recorded** can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the writers had recorded there” or “they read the part where the writers had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
592 EST 6 2 abx4 figs-explicit הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 Mordecai had told about The implication is that Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering the plot and telling him about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering a plot against the king and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
593 EST 6 2 abx5 figs-events הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 Mordecai had told about To relate the events in chronological order, you can put this at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “but Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering their plot and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
594 EST 6 2 syd9 translate-names בִּגְתָ֣נָא וָ⁠תֶ֗רֶשׁ 1 Bigthana and Teresh These are the same two men who are named in [2:21](../02/21.md). However, there the first man’s name is said to be “Bigthan.” Decide on a consistent way of translating these names so your readers will know that they are the same men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
595 EST 6 2 abx6 translate-unknown שְׁנֵי֙ סָרִיסֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 two of the eunuchs of the king See how you translated the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “two of the royal guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
596 EST 6 2 abx7 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֖י הַ⁠סַּ֑ף 1 who were from the guardians of the doorway See how you translated this expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “who protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters”
597 EST 6 2 abx8 figs-metaphor בִּקְשׁוּ֙ 1 they had sought Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they had planned” or “they had tried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
598 EST 6 2 j89r figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 to stretch out a hand As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “to assassinate” or “to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
599 EST 6 3 lmz6 figs-hendiadys מַֽה־נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה יְקָ֧ר וּ⁠גְדוּלָּ֛ה לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 What honor or great deed was done for Mordecai **Honor** and **greatness** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize that Mordecai should certainly have been honored in some grand way for saving the king’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this by putting the terms together. For example, you could say, “What great honor was done for Mordecai?” Alternate translation: “what did we do to reward Mordecai or to show that we appreciated what he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
600 EST 6 3 aby0 figs-activepassive נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה 1 was done You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what did I do” or “what did we do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
601 EST 6 3 n2az figs-activepassive לֹא־נַעֲשָׂ֥ה עִמּ֖⁠וֹ דָּבָֽר 1 Not a thing has been done with him You can say this with an active form. However, it would be good to say this in a way that does not create the impression that the young men are accusing the king. Alternate translation: “no one did anything for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
602 EST 6 3 aby1 עַל־זֶ֑ה 1 on account of this Alternate translation: “for saving my life”
603 EST 6 4 aby2 figs-explicit מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 Who is in the court? This could mean either: (1) The king knows that there is someone in the courtyard, maybe because he heard someone walking there; he wants to know who it is. (2) Since there are always people around the palace, the king assumes that there must be someone out in the courtyard. In either case, the king wants to know if there is someone there with whom he could consult about the best way to honor Mordecai. As the story has already said in [1:13](../01/13.md), it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king wanted to consult someone about the best way to honor Mordecai, so he asked, ‘who is in the courtyard’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
604 EST 6 4 aby3 מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 Who is in the court? In order to present the events in logical and chronological order, you can put the king’s question last in the verse if that would be more natural in your language. Haman had already come in the courtyard by the time the king asked this question.
605 EST 6 4 j91r grammar-connect-time-background וְ⁠הָמָ֣ן בָּ֗א לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 Now Haman had come into the outer court of the house of the king to say to the king to hang Mordecai on the tree that he had prepared for him This sentence indicates that Haman had already entered the outer court when King Ahasuerus asked his question. You could indicate this with a phrase such as “at that moment” or “just then” or “while they were talking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
606 EST 6 4 rg8t לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה 1 to the outer court of the house of the king This phrase is describing the first courtyard a person would come to after entering the palace from the outside. Alternate translation: “the outer courtyard of the palace”
607 EST 6 4 vu7p לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 to say to the king to hang Mordecai Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”
608 EST 6 4 at53 הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 the tree that he had prepared for him Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”
609 EST 6 4 aby4 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
610 EST 6 5 aby5 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 And the young men of the king said It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say so. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
611 EST 6 5 j93r figs-explicit הִנֵּ֥ה 1 Behold This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
612 EST 6 5 j95r יָבֽוֹא 1 Let him come Alternate translation: “he may come in”
613 EST 6 6 j97r וַ⁠יָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then Haman came, and the king said to him Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”
614 EST 6 6 ky5i figs-123person מַה־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֕וֹת בָּ⁠אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 What is one to do for the man in whose honor the king is delighted? Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “what should I do for the man whom I would really like to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
615 EST 6 6 n3r5 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “whom I am glad to honor” or “whom I want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
616 EST 6 6 jh4i figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Then Haman said in his heart Here, **heart** could mean two different things: (1) Heart could figuratively represent the action of thinking or feeling. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said in his thoughts.” (2) Heart could also be a metaphor meaning to be inside someone or something. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said inside himself.” Either way, the phrase means that Haman was not saying this out loud, but saying it to himself in his thoughts. Alternate translation: “Haman thought to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
617 EST 6 6 yft1 figs-rquestion לְ⁠מִ֞י יַחְפֹּ֥ץ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת יְקָ֖ר יוֹתֵ֥ר מִמֶּֽ⁠נִּי 1 For whom would the king delight to do honor more than me Haman is actually making a statement to himself rather than asking a question and trying to figure out the answer. He uses a question form to emphasize how true he believes the statement to be. If it would be helpful in your language, instead of a question, you could use a statement such as, “Surely there is no one whom the king would take pleasure in honoring more than me!” Alternate translation: “whom would the king like to honor more than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
618 EST 6 7 j1d1 figs-idiom אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 For a man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “for a man the king is glad to honor” or “for a man the king wants to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
619 EST 6 7 aby6 figs-123person אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 For a man in whose honor the king is delighted Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “if you really want to honor someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
620 EST 6 8 mz79 figs-explicit יָבִ֨יאוּ֙ 1 let them bring The implication is that the king’s servants would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “let someone bring” or “tell your servants to bring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
621 EST 6 8 aby7 figs-abstractnouns לְב֣וּשׁ מַלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 a garment of royalty with which the king has clothed himself **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to anything that belongs to the king. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal garment.” Alternate translation: “one of your own royal robes that you have already worn yourself” or “one of the robes you wear to show that you are the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
622 EST 6 8 aby8 figs-123person אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 with which the king has clothed himself Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “that you have already worn yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
623 EST 6 8 aby9 figs-123person וְ⁠ס֗וּס אֲשֶׁ֨ר רָכַ֤ב עָלָי⁠ו֙ 1 and a horse on which the king has ridden Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “a horse that you have already ridden yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
624 EST 6 8 r63j figs-activepassive וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 and which has been given a crown of royalty for its head This whole phrase refers to the horse. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
625 EST 6 8 abz0 figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 and which has been given a crown of royalty for its head The implication is that this would be done to show that this was one of the king’s own horses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head to show that it belongs to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
626 EST 6 8 abz1 figs-abstractnouns כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת 1 a crown of royalty **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
627 EST 6 9 pp3l figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָת֨וֹן הַ⁠לְּב֜וּשׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Then give this garment and this horse into the hand of a man from the most noble officials of the king Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
628 EST 6 9 j1d3 figs-123person אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֔ים 1 a man from the most noble officials of the king Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
629 EST 6 9 pfz6 figs-explicit וְ⁠הִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙ 1 And let them clothe Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
630 EST 6 9 j1d5 figs-idiom הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
631 EST 6 9 abz2 figs-123person הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 the man in whose honor the king is delighted Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
632 EST 6 9 abz4 בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 in the open place of the city This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in [4:6](../04/06.md)), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”
633 EST 6 9 qs3k וְ⁠קָרְא֣וּ 1 and proclaim Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”
634 EST 6 9 j1d7 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
635 EST 6 9 j1d9 figs-idiom כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 Thus shall it be done for the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” or “this is what the king does when he especially wants to honor someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
636 EST 6 9 pwgm figs-activepassive כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this” or “this is what the king does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
637 EST 6 10 j2d1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 So the king said to Haman The implication is that the king liked Haman’s suggestion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king liked this idea, so he replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
638 EST 6 10 abz5 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר דִּבַּ֔רְתָּ וַֽ⁠עֲשֵׂה־כֵן֙ 1 according to how you have spoken, and do thus Alternate translation: “do everything that you have said” or “do just what you have suggested”
639 EST 6 10 abz6 figs-idiom הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the man who sits at the gate of the king As in [2:19](../02/19.md), this is likely an idiom which means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the king’s gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
640 EST 6 10 abz7 figs-123person הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 the man who sits at the gate of the king Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the gate to the palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
641 EST 6 10 gln7 figs-metaphor אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 Do not allow a word to fail Here the action of letting **fall** is a metaphor meaning to leave out or leave unfulfilled. The phrase means that Haman must do absolutely everything that he said. Alternate translation: “do not leave out anything that you suggested” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
642 EST 6 10 abz8 figs-doublenegatives אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 Do not allow a word to fail This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “Be sure to do absolutely everything that you have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
643 EST 6 11 abz9 וַ⁠יַּרְכִּיבֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 and paraded him in the open place of the city See how you translated these expressions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “seated him on the horse and then led the horse through the public square of the city”
644 EST 6 11 j2d5 figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 called out before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman shouted out to the people in front of Mordecai, that is, the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “called out to all of the people in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
645 EST 6 11 j2d7 figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 Thus shall it be done for the man in whose honor the king is delighted **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
646 EST 6 12 uri5 translate-symaction אָבֵ֖ל וַ⁠חֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ 1 mourning with a covering of head People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
647 EST 6 13 j3d1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן 1 Then Haman recounted The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in [5:10](../05/10.md) to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
648 EST 6 13 aca1 figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 everything that had happened to him The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
649 EST 6 13 aca2 figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨⁠וֹ חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠זֶ֣רֶשׁ 1 Then his wise men and Zeresh said to him The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
650 EST 6 13 aca3 חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו 1 his wise men See how you translated this expression in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “his advisors”
651 EST 6 13 fd5k figs-metaphor אִ֣ם…מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִ⁠נְפֹּ֤ל לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 If Mordecai, before whose face you have begun to fall This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he…” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
652 EST 6 13 j3d3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 before … face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. This could mean: (1) that Haman has already begun to fall down (bow down) in front of Mordecai figuratively, or (2) that Haman and Mordecai are facing one another figuratively in hand-to-hand combat. Alternate translation: “before whom” or “in whose presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
653 EST 6 13 p5t2 figs-metaphor מִ⁠זֶּ֣רַע הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 from the seed of the Jews Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “one of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
654 EST 6 13 nan5 figs-metaphor לֹא־תוּכַ֣ל ל֔⁠וֹ 1 you will not prevail against him Here Haman’s wife and friends are again speaking figuratively as if Haman is in a battle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “you will not win against him” or “you will not have greater honor than he has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
655 EST 6 13 j3d5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּֽי 1 but This conjunction indicates a contrast between the actions of prevailing (in the previous clause) and falling. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
656 EST 6 13 j3d7 figs-metaphor נָפ֥וֹל תִּפּ֖וֹל 1 you will surely fall Here the action of **falling**: (1) either refers once again to prostrating oneself, and is a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated, or (2) Haman’s wife and friends are saying that for Haman, defeat will be the outcome of the figurative battle. Alternate translation: “you will certainly lose to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
657 EST 6 13 j3d9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman will lose in his struggle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “before him” or “in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
658 EST 6 14 j4d1 grammar-connect-time-background עוֹדָ⁠ם֙ מְדַבְּרִ֣ים עִמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 They were still speaking with him when the eunuchs of the king arrived This phrase indicates something that happened after Haman’s wife and friends started talking with Haman and while they were still talking. You should indicate this with a phrase such as “while.” Alternate translation: “while they were still talking together, the king’s eunuchs arrived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
659 EST 6 14 aca4 translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 when the eunuchs of the king See how you decided to translate this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Not all of the king’s eunuchs came. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the king’s servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
660 EST 6 14 aca5 וַ⁠יַּבְהִ֨לוּ֙ לְ⁠הָבִ֣יא אֶת־הָמָ֔ן 1 And they hurried to bring Haman Alternative translation: “they wanted to bring Haman quickly”
661 EST 6 14 aca6 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשְׂתָ֥ה אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 that Esther had made Esther’s servants would have done most of the work of preparing the banquet. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Esther and her servants had prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
662 EST 7 intro x4w3 0 # Esther 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The story of Haman’s fall concludes in this chapter.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Covering Haman’s face<br><br>When “the servants covered Haman’s face,” they were showing that he had been condemned to be executed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
663 EST 7 1 n8vb figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יָּבֹ֤א הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠הָמָ֔ן לִ⁠שְׁתּ֖וֹת עִם־אֶסְתֵּ֥ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּֽה 1 So the king came with Haman to drink with Esther the queen. Esther hosted Ahasuerus and Haman for more than just drinks. This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. An entire banquet is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “so the king and Haman went to the second banquet that Queen Esther had prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
664 EST 7 2 xt9f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙ 1 on the second day This refers to the day after the first banquet, as mentioned in [5:8](../05/08.md). Alternate translation: “at that second banquet” or “on that second day of feasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
665 EST 7 2 s5ae בְּ⁠מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 during the banquet of wine Alternate translation: “while they were drinking wine” or “while the servants were pouring the wine and giving it to them”
666 EST 7 2 yks7 figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ…וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 What is your petition … And let it be given to you. And what is your request? As much as half of the kingdom, and let it be done. These two statements mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is truly disposed to giving Esther what she wants. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
667 EST 7 2 p1xt figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 What is your petition Ahasuerus has now allowed Esther to show her hospitality at two banquets. But he knows that she has done this as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship, and that this signals that she has an important and urgent request to make. You can indicate this by having the king ask, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
668 EST 7 2 sem7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 And let it be given to you … and let it be done You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you what you ask for” or “I will do for you what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
669 EST 7 2 j4d3 figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 your petition … your request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
670 EST 7 2 j4d5 figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 As much as half of the kingdom See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
671 EST 7 3 ac96 figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֨עַן…וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֔ר 1 Then … answered and said Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
672 EST 7 3 k27c figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 If I have found favor in your eyes **Favor** means the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
673 EST 7 3 aca7 figs-metonymy אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 If I have found favor in your eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
674 EST 7 3 j4d7 הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 O king In this case, Esther is addressing Ahasuerus directly as “O king”; she is not speaking about him in the third person as a sign of respect, as she and others usually do elsewhere in the story. This may indicate a special urgency to what she is saying, so it would be good to include this difference in your translation or indicate the urgency in some other way.
675 EST 7 3 aca8 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 and if it is good to the king This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). The suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good plan to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But here, Esther has just addressed the king directly with “O king” and she is pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people. So an alternate translation here could be something more like, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
676 EST 7 3 aca9 figs-parallelism תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 let my life be given to me at my petition, and my people at my request The phrases **at my petition** and **at my request** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the urgency of the request. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two requests. Alternate translation: “please spare my life and save my people” or “my request is that you spare my life and the lives of my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
677 EST 7 3 j4d9 figs-activepassive תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ 1 let my life be given to me You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please spare my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
678 EST 7 3 bvi1 figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י 1 at my petition The abstract noun **petition** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “that is what I am asking for” or “that is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
679 EST 7 3 qghp figs-ellipsis וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 If this is unclear in your language, you can repeat from the previous clause the words that have been left out. Alternate translation: “and let my people be given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
680 EST 7 3 j5d1 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 at my request The abstract noun **request** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “rhat is what I am asking for” or “rhat is what I want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
681 EST 7 4 acb1 figs-metaphor כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 For we have been sold As Esther points out later in the verse, the Jews actually have not been exchanged for money. Rather, **sell** is a figurative way of saying “turn over to.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning by saying something like “For someone has turned us over to our enemies.” Alternatively, you could use the same figure, but show that it is a comparison. Alternate translation: “it is as though I and my people are cattle that have been sold to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
682 EST 7 4 fhs7 figs-activepassive כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 For we have been sold You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has sold us” or “for someone has put us in danger of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
683 EST 7 4 e9cx figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 for annihilation, for slaughter, and for destruction As in [3:13](../03/13.md), these words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction. If using three words would be difficult or confusing in your language, you could use one word for this and indicate that the destruction is extreme. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
684 EST 7 4 yg01 figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns such as these, you can replace them with one or more verbs. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
685 EST 7 4 acb2 וְ֠⁠אִלּוּ לַ⁠עֲבָדִ֨ים וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁפָח֤וֹת נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 if we had been sold as slaves and female servants Alternate translation: “if the men and even the women had been sold into slavery”
686 EST 7 4 j5d3 figs-hyperbole אֵ֥ין הַ⁠צָּ֛ר שֹׁוֶ֖ה בְּ⁠נֵ֥זֶק הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the distress would not have been equal to a burden of the king Esther is speaking very deferentially and with some exaggeration in order to impress on the king how important this is to her. She is saying that it would have been worth less to her to see her people rescued from slavery than it would have been to see the king spared the trouble of intervening on their behalf. (Haman uses the expression of “not equal” in this same sense in [5:13](../05/13.md).) Alternate translation: “that would have been a matter too small to bother you with” or “that would be a small matter to a king like you, but this is very much worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
687 EST 7 4 acb4 figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the king Esther addresses King Ahasuerus in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
688 EST 7 5 acb5 figs-doublet וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 Then … spoke and said These two words mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
689 EST 7 5 acb6 figs-parallelism מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 Who is he, this man? And where is this man These two phrases mean similar things. They both ask about the identity of the man who is trying to destroy the Jews. King Ahasuerus uses the repetition to emphasize how outraged he is. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two phrases. However, from another perspective, both the man’s identity and his location are important to know so that his plot can be stopped. So, for that reason, you could also decide to include both phrases in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
690 EST 7 5 acb7 מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 Who is he, this man? Alternate translation: “who has done this”
691 EST 7 5 dl4b figs-metaphor וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁר־מְלָא֥⁠וֹ לִבּ֖⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת כֵּֽן 1 And where is this man, he whose heart is full to do thus? Here the concept of a **full heart** uses two metaphors at once. “Heart” figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. Also, saying that the “heart” is “full” is a figurative way of saying that someone is fully intending to do something, usually something that should not be done. Alternate translation: “where is the man who is intending to do such a thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
692 EST 7 6 j5d5 figs-doublet צַ֣ר וְ⁠אוֹיֵ֔ב 1 A man, and adversary, and an enemy These words mean the same thing. Together, they emphasize Haman’s complete hostility towards the Jews. If it is more natural in your language, you can combine them and indicate the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “the one who is our absolute nemesis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
693 EST 7 6 ar4f נִבְעַ֔ת 1 was terrified Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”
694 EST 7 6 j5d9 figs-metonymy נִבְעַ֔ת מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 terrified from before the face of Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
695 EST 7 7 bzd4 figs-idiom וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּ⁠חֲמָת⁠וֹ֙ מִ⁠מִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 Then the king rose up in his rage from the banquet of wine Here, **in his rage** is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
696 EST 7 7 j6d1 figs-explicit אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַ⁠בִּיתָ֑ן 1 rose up … to the garden of the palace The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you could say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
697 EST 7 7 uaq6 figs-metaphor לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁ⁠וֹ֙ 1 in order to seek for his life Here, **seeking** figuratively means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
698 EST 7 7 qz1m figs-metaphor כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה 1 for he saw Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
699 EST 7 7 nin1 figs-activepassive כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 evil was determined against him by the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
700 EST 7 7 j6d3 figs-abstractnouns כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 evil was determined against him by the king Here the abstract noun **evil** means “harm,” not something that is morally wrong as in the previous verse. In this context, it can be expressed with a verb such as “execute.” Alternate translation: “the king was likely to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
701 EST 7 8 j6d5 figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ שָׁב֩…וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל 1 Now when the king returned … Haman was fallen The implication is that when the king returned to the room, he saw what this verse describes next. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the king returned…, he saw that Haman had fallen…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
702 EST 7 8 h4c7 figs-explicit וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was The implication is that Haman was doing this as he pleaded for his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add that information to the end of this phrase: “…as he was begging Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
703 EST 7 8 acb8 figs-events וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
704 EST 7 8 acb9 figs-idiom וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Now … Haman was fallen on the couch on which Esther was The expression **was fallen** means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
705 EST 7 8 acc0 הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 the couch on which Esther was In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”
706 EST 7 8 thq6 figs-rquestion הֲ֠⁠גַם לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 Is it also to subdue the queen, with me, in the house? The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could phrase it as a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
707 EST 7 8 l4ce figs-euphemism לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה 1 to subdue the queen The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
708 EST 7 8 acc1 figs-parallelism עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 with me, in the house These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you could also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
709 EST 7 8 adq6 figs-idiom הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִ⁠פִּ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The word was going out from the mouth of the king This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
710 EST 7 8 acc2 grammar-connect-time-background הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר…וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 The word was going out … when they covered the face of Haman The king spoke, and then the servants covered Haman’s face. One action followed upon another. However, this happened so quickly that almost no time seemed to pass in between. You can indicate this with a phrase like “as soon as.” Alternate translation: “when the king said this, immediately they covered Haman’s face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
711 EST 7 8 j6d9 figs-explicit וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 when they covered the face of Haman The implication is that some the king’s servants who were present did this, and they did it because they understood that the king wanted Haman to be executed. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face because he was going to be executed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
712 EST 7 8 acc3 translate-symaction וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 when they covered the face of Haman **Covering the face** in this culture, as in many others, was a sign that a person had been condemned to death. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face to show that he would be executed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
713 EST 7 9 a7ic translate-names חַ֠רְבוֹנָה 1 Harbona This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
714 EST 7 9 j7d1 figs-metonymy אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 one from the eunuchs before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
715 EST 7 9 acc4 translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 the eunuchs before the face of the king See how you translated this term and this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
716 EST 7 9 j7d3 הִנֵּה 1 behold **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”
717 EST 7 9 acc5 גַּ֣ם…הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י…עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן 1 Also … the tree that Haman made for Mordecai … is standing at the house of Haman Alternate translation:“Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
718 EST 7 9 j7d5 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
719 EST 7 9 j7d7 figs-idiom לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 for Mordecai, who spoke good for the king This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
720 EST 7 9 j7d9 figs-123person דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 spoke good for the king Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
721 EST 7 9 acc6 עֹמֵד֙ 1 is standing Alternate translation: “is set up”
722 EST 7 9 sre1 translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 50 cubits high If it would be helpful in your language, you could convert this to a modern measure. See how you translated this phrase in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
723 EST 7 9 acc7 figs-explicit תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 Hang him on it **Him** means Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
724 EST 7 10 j8d3 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
725 EST 7 10 umd4 figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה 1 and the rage of the king subsided Here the story figuratively compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
726 EST 8 intro z6j7 0 # Esther 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### God’s protection<br>Yahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
727 EST 8 1 j8d5 writing-newevent בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 On that day This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
728 EST 8 1 j8d7 figs-synecdoche נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן 1 the king Ahasuerus gave to Esther the queen the house of Haman Here, **house** figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
729 EST 8 1 nm3u figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 the adversary of the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
730 EST 8 1 acc9 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai came before the face of the king The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
731 EST 8 1 j8d9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
732 EST 8 1 acd0 figs-events הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 Esther told what he was to her You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
733 EST 8 1 j9d1 figs-explicit הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 Esther told what he was to her Esther told this to the king. She would likely have explained not just how she and Mordecai were related, but that he had raised her after her parents died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king that Mordecai was her cousin and that he had been like a father to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
734 EST 8 2 m5hz translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֨סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ…וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 the king removed his signet ring … and he gave it to Mordecai Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
735 EST 8 2 acd1 translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ 1 signet ring See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
736 EST 8 2 j9d3 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
737 EST 8 2 acd2 figs-events אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 that he had caused to pass from Haman If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
738 EST 8 2 z5yn figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 and he gave it to Mordecai By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
739 EST 8 2 acd3 figs-metaphor וַ⁠תָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 Esther placed Mordecai over the house of Haman To place someone over something figuratively means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
740 EST 8 2 d2tj figs-metonymy בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 the house of Haman See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
741 EST 8 3 j9d5 writing-newevent וַ⁠תּ֣וֹסֶף אֶסְתֵּ֗ר וַ⁠תְּדַבֵּר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Then Esther repeated her action, and she spoke before the face of the king Here the exact meaning of the progression of verbs is uncertain, but this verse probably begins a new event in the story separate from what happened in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then Esther again spoke in the king’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
742 EST 8 3 j9d7 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “while she was in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
743 EST 8 3 j9d9 figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 And she fell before the face of his feet Here, **falling** is an idiom referring to the action of bowing down or prostrating oneself, and **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. Alternate translation: “and she bowed down” or “and she prostrated herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
744 EST 8 3 acd4 translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 And she fell before the face of his feet This may actually mean that Esther put her face right on top of the feet of King Ahasuerus. This would have been an act of humility and desperation by which she showed that her need was very great and that she believed the king had great power to help her. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
745 EST 8 3 acd5 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 And she fell before the face of his feet Esther’s action was probably a recognized sign of pleading in this culture. However, it would likely still have been remarkable for a queen to fall at the feet of her husband, the king. you could show this by introducing the information with a phrase like “in fact.” Alternate translation: “in fact, to show how desperately she was pleading, Esther got down and put her face right on top of his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
746 EST 8 3 j1r1 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 before the face of his feet Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means that Esther prostrated herself in front of the feet of King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
747 EST 8 3 jmn7 figs-idiom לְ⁠הַֽעֲבִיר֙ אֶת־רָעַת֙ הָמָ֣ן הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 to take away the evil of Haman the Agagite and his plot that he had plotted against the Jews Here, **the evil** refers to Haman’s plan. This expression means to prevent a wrong action from happening. Alternate translation: “to stop the evil plan of Haman the Agagite” or “to prevent the evil things from happening that Haman the Agagite had planned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
748 EST 8 3 bp22 translate-names הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 the Agagite This is the name of Haman’s people group. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
749 EST 8 3 c2hw מַֽחֲשַׁבְתּ֔⁠וֹ אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָשַׁ֖ב 1 his plot that he had plotted Alternate translation: “and the plot that he had invented” or “and the plot that Haman invented”
750 EST 8 4 xh24 translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֤וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֵ֖ת שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 And the king held out to Esther the scepter of gold As in [5:2](../05/02.md), King Ahasuerus did this to show that Esther had his favor. In that earlier episode, this indicated that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed for coming into the inner court without being summoned. But since Esther was apparently already in the king’s presence on this occasion, it seems that the gesture could also be used generally to show that the king was positively disposed towards a person and would grant the person’s request. Alternate translation: “the king held out his golden scepter to Esther” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
751 EST 8 4 acd7 translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 the scepter of gold See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would be helpful, review the explanation of what this object was. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
752 EST 8 4 acd8 וַ⁠תָּ֣קָם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 so Esther rose up Alternate translation: “Esther got up off the floor”
753 EST 8 4 j1r5 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means the Esther now stood facing King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “and stood facing the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
754 EST 8 5 w7yl figs-parallelism אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב…וְ⁠כָשֵׁ֤ר הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 If it is good to the king, and if I have found favor before his face, and the word is proper before the face of the king, and I am good in his eyes These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king will think that her suggestion is a good idea and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if what I am going to suggest seems like a good idea to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
755 EST 8 5 r2yy figs-parallelism וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו…וְ⁠טוֹבָ֥ה אֲנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king is positively disposed towards her, that he thinks well of her, and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
756 EST 8 5 acd9 figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו 1 If it is good to the king, and if I have found favor before his face, and the word is proper before the face of the king, and I am good in his eyes Here Esther addresses the king throughout in the third person as a way of showing respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
757 EST 8 5 ace0 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). A suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But in another place, [7:3](../07/03.md), when Esther was pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people, the suggested alternate translation was, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” Here, Esther is also pleading, so you could use that phrase here in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “if what I ask for seems right in the king’s evaluation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
758 EST 8 5 ftc7 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן 1 if I have found favor This expression also appears many times in the story. It means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
759 EST 8 5 j1r7 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 before his face … before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. These phrases could mean “as I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Esther’s request would become evident in his face first, so it would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
760 EST 8 5 xci7 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 in his eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and I please you” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
761 EST 8 5 j1r9 figs-idiom יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 let it be written to take back the letters The first letters that told of the plan to destroy the Jews would not be brought back to Susa physically. Rather, **bring back** is an idiom that means “cancel” or “revoke.” Alternate translation: “make a new law to cancel what Haman decreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
762 EST 8 5 nbk3 figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 let it be written You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “write a new letter” or “make a new law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
763 EST 8 6 j2r5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֠י 1 For Here Esther is giving the reason why she is asking King Ahasuerus to revoke the letters. Alternate translation: “the reason I am asking is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
764 EST 8 6 udt6 figs-rquestion אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 how could I bear to see the evil that my people would find? And how could I bear seeing the destruction of my kindred? Esther is actually making a statement, but she expresses herself in question form to show how strongly she feels about what she is saying. She does not actually expect the king to tell her how she could bear seeing her people destroyed. Alternate translation: “I cannot bear to see disaster fall on the Jews” or “I cannot endure watching my relatives be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
765 EST 8 6 ace1 figs-parallelism אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 how could I bear to see the evil that my people would find? And how could I bear seeing the destruction of my kindred? These two sentences mean basically the same thing. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I could not bear to see my relatives and my whole people destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
766 EST 8 6 ace2 figs-abstractnouns בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 the evil Even though it was morally very wrong for Haman to want to destroy Mordecai’s whole people, here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md). It means the same thing as “destruction” in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “my people being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
767 EST 8 6 ace3 figs-idiom יִמְצָ֣א 1 would find As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **find** is an idiom that means something exists in a certain place or time, not that people were looking for it and located it. Esther is speaking of the harm that will exist for the Jews if the effect of Haman’s letters is not undone. Alternate translation: “would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
768 EST 8 6 ace4 figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן 1 the destruction of This abstract noun can be expressed with a verb such as “destroyed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
769 EST 8 6 ace5 מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 my kindred Alternate translation: “my relatives”
770 EST 8 7 j2r7 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 Behold This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
771 EST 8 7 ace6 בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר 1 I have given the house of Haman to Esther See the note about this expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I have given Esther all the property that belonged to Haman” or “I have given Esther the household of Haman”
772 EST 8 7 h44h figs-metonymy בֵית־הָמָ֜ן 1 the house of Haman Here, **house** is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
773 EST 8 7 ace7 figs-events וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 they have hanged him on the tree You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
774 EST 8 7 ace8 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
775 EST 8 7 j2r9 figs-idiom שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ 1 he stretched out his hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
776 EST 8 8 acf0 וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם 1 So you Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”
777 EST 8 8 acf1 כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 write for the Jews as is good in your eyes Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”
778 EST 8 8 j3r1 figs-metaphor כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 as is good in your eyes Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
779 EST 8 8 j3mn figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 in the name of the king Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. This phrase means Esther and Mordecai have permission to write with the authority of the King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
780 EST 8 8 acf2 figs-123person בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 in the name of the king King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I give you permission to write with my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
781 EST 8 8 j3r3 translate-unknown בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 with the signet ring of the king This is a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
782 EST 8 8 acf3 figs-123person בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 with the signet ring of the king King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
783 EST 8 8 j3r5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 For Here, King Ahasuerus is expressing the reason why he cannot simply revoke the first letter and also why Esther and Mordecai can write another letter that people must obey. Alternate translation: “you see” or “people will obey your letter because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
784 EST 8 8 acf4 אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 there is none to take back a writing As in verse 5, this expression means “revoke.” Alternate translation: “no one can revoke” or “no one can nullify”
785 EST 8 8 acf5 כְתָ֞ב…אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 there is none to take back a writing If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this first in the verse because it explains why Ahasuerus answers Esther and Mordecai in the way that he does. See the UST.
786 EST 8 8 acf6 figs-explicit כְתָ֞ב אֲשֶׁר־נִכְתָּ֣ב בְּ⁠שֵׁם־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠נַחְתּ֛וֹם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 a writing that has been written in the name of the king and has been sealed with the signet ring of the king The king is describing a general situation, but he has Haman’s letter specifically in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman wrote his letter with my authority, and he sealed it with the ring that has my official seal on it. No one can revoke a letter like that” (The story explained in [1:19](../01/19.md) that the king’s laws could not be changed once they had been made and proclaimed.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
787 EST 8 9 acf7 grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 So … were called This indicates that what is described in this verse was done because of what the king said in the previous verse. Use a connecting word or phrase to show this in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
788 EST 8 9 s4ue figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 So the scribes of the king were called You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king called his scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
789 EST 8 9 acf8 וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 So the scribes of the king were called If you use an expression such as “called,” make sure your readers will understand that the king likely sent an official to go and bring the scribes back with him. The king did not call out in a loud voice to get them to come.
790 EST 8 9 j4r1 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 in the third month Alternate translation: “in month three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
791 EST 8 9 acf9 figs-explicit בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 in the third month It would still be the same year as in [3:7](../03/07.md), the twelfth year that Ahasuerus reigned as king of Persia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the third month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
792 EST 8 9 j356 translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 which is the month of Sivan **Sivan** is the name of the third month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “the month of Sivan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
793 EST 8 9 acg1 הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 which is the month of Sivan The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court, but for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given. This month overlaps with May and June on a Western calendar.
794 EST 8 9 j4r3 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֣ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 on the twenty-third of it Alternation translation: “on day 23” or “on the twenty-third day of the month” The exact date of the letter helps to establish its legal authority. This would be on June 25th of a Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
795 EST 8 9 sz6j figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מָרְדֳּכַ֣י 1 And according to all that Mordecai commanded it was written You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and they wrote in a letter everything that Mordecai dictated to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
796 EST 8 9 acg2 figs-explicit אֶל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 to the Jews It appears from verse 11 that the letter would have been addressed specifically to the Jews in the empire, telling them that the king had authorized them to defend themselves. But copies were also sent to all the royal and provincial officials. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the letter addressed the Jews in the empire, but copies were also sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
797 EST 8 9 acg3 וְ⁠אֶ֣ל הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִֽים־וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּחוֹת֩ וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת 1 and to the satraps, and the governors and officials of the provinces See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md), where they were used to describe who received Haman’s letter. These are all people in government positions. The first one is the governor of the province and the other two are rulers under him who govern cities or smaller areas. If your language uses one term for all of these, you could use that with a descriptive phrase such as “to the government leaders of each province and also to the leaders under him.”
798 EST 8 9 acg4 אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֗וּשׁ שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 that were from India even as far as Ethiopia: 127 provinces This is background information explaining how far this new letter had to be sent. See how you translated this phrase in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the empire of Ahasuerus had 127 provinces, stretching all the way from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west”
799 EST 8 9 zp4q translate-numbers שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 127 provinces Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
800 EST 8 9 j4r5 figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 province by province This expression means “to people in every province.” Alternate translation: “the scribes wrote to the people in each province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
801 EST 8 9 bj5s כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 according to its writing Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
802 EST 8 9 j4r7 figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 and people by people This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
803 EST 8 9 j4r9 figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשֹׁנ֑⁠וֹ 1 according to its tongue Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
804 EST 8 9 j5r1 וְ⁠אֶ֨ל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם וְ⁠כִ⁠לְשׁוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 and to the Jews according to their writing and according to their tongue The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”
805 EST 8 10 acg5 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֗ב…וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם 1 And he wrote … and he sealed **He** refers to Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use his name here.
806 EST 8 10 ijp2 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁם֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ 1 in the name of King Ahasuerus Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
807 EST 8 10 jf31 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 and he sealed with the signet ring of the king This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
808 EST 8 10 yt4j figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַד֩ הָ⁠רָצִ֨ים בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֜ים 1 by the hand of runners on horses As in [3:13](../03/13.md), **hand** could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
809 EST 8 10 acg6 רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 riders of the royal pack horses, sons of the mares Alternate translation: “They rose fast horses that were used in the king’s service. These horses had been bred in the king’s stables.”
810 EST 8 10 p9uc figs-metonymy בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 sons of the mares Here, **sons** is a metonym meaning the offspring of royal livestock. Alternate translation: “the offspring of the king’s horses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
811 EST 8 11 j5r5 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־עִיר־וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 in every city by city This expression means “in each and every city.” It is possibly referring to the entire empire by naming one part of it, its cities. The story says in [9:19](../09/19.md) that not just Jews living in cities but Jews living in rural areas also defended themselves. It is likely that the messengers only published the news in the cities and not the entire countryside, but the news was certainly intended for everyone, not only people living in the cities. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire” or “in each and every city” or “in every single city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
812 EST 8 11 e1mj figs-metaphor לְ⁠הִקָּהֵל֮ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ⁠ם֒ 1 to gather and to stand for their life Here, **to stand** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “to join together and fight for their lives” or “to join together and fight back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
813 EST 8 11 j5r7 figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִיד֩ וְ⁠לַ⁠הֲרֹ֨ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 to annihilate, and to slaughter, and to destroy These words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is being described. See how you translated this in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [7:4](../07/04.md). Alternate translation: “completely destroy” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
814 EST 8 11 acg7 figs-metonymy כָּל־חֵ֨יל עַ֧ם וּ⁠מְדִינָ֛ה הַ⁠צָּרִ֥ים אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 any strength of a people or province that would attack them **Strength** is a figurative way of referring to an army or to a person carrying weaponry. Alternate translation: “the army of any people or province that attacked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
815 EST 8 11 acg8 טַ֣ף וְ⁠נָשִׁ֑ים 1 children and women Alternate translation: “they could also kill the wives and children of the armed men”
816 EST 8 11 acg9 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 and plunder their spoil See how you translated this expression in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “and take everything that belonged to them”
817 EST 8 12 ach0 figs-explicit בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 on one day This was the day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “on the same day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
818 EST 8 12 ach1 בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 in all of the provinces of the king Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “in every province of the kingdom”
819 EST 8 12 j6r3 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 on the thirteenth Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
820 EST 8 12 hi2y translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 of the twelfth month Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
821 EST 8 12 ach2 figs-explicit לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 of the twelfth month Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
822 EST 8 12 j6r4 translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 which is the month of Adar This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:07](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
823 EST 8 13 j6r5 figs-activepassive פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ 1 was to be given as a law You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
824 EST 8 13 j6r7 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 in every province by province This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
825 EST 8 13 ach4 figs-activepassive גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 being uncovered for all the peoples You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
826 EST 8 13 ach5 וְ⁠לִ⁠הְי֨וֹת הַיְּהוּדִ֤ים עֲתִידִים֙ לַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 for the Jews to be prepared for that day Alternate translation: “that way the Jews would get ready to do what the letter said when the day came”
827 EST 8 13 qk1d figs-idiom לְ⁠הִנָּקֵ֖ם מֵ⁠אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 to take revenge from their enemies This expression, “to take revenge from” another person, means to correct a wrong they have done. In this context, the phrase means to correct the wrong of the original law that gave people permission to kill the Jews. Alternate translation: “and fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
828 EST 8 14 ach7 הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 The runners, the riders of the royal pack horses See how you translated this in [8:10](../08/10.md). Alternate translation: “messengers riding on fast horses that were used for the king’s business”
829 EST 8 14 ach6 figs-activepassive מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 hastened and hurried by the word of the king You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
830 EST 8 14 b69j figs-doublet מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים 1 hastened and hurried These two terms mean almost the same thing and are used together to emphasize the fact that the couriers were told to deliver the letters as quickly as possible. Alternate translation: “they went immediately” or “as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
831 EST 8 14 ach8 figs-events הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 The runners, the riders of the royal pack horses To present the events in chronological order, you can put this after the king’s command, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
832 EST 8 14 j6r9 figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 And the law was given You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king’s officials also posted and read copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
833 EST 8 15 j7r3 writing-newevent וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י יָצָ֣א 1 Then Mordecai went out This introduces a new event in the story. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
834 EST 8 15 j7r5 figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 from before the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Mordecai had been in the presence of King Ahasuerus and was now leaving in order to fulfill his duties as a high official in the Persian government. Alternate translation: “from the palace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
835 EST 8 15 ach9 figs-explicit בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת וָ⁠ח֔וּר וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה וְ⁠תַכְרִ֥יךְ בּ֖וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן 1 in a garment of royalty of blue and white, with a great crown of gold and a robe of fine linen and purple The implication is that the king gave Mordecai these special things to wear to show that he was now his highest officer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. To put these events in chronological order, you could place this information before the report that Mordecai left the king’s presence to fulfill his duties. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
836 EST 8 15 aci1 בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת 1 a garment of royalty of blue and white Alternate translation: “a blue and white garment that the king had worn”
837 EST 8 15 aci2 וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה 1 a great crown of gold Alternate translation: “a large golden crown”
838 EST 8 15 eqc4 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֣יר שׁוּשָׁ֔ן צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 and the city of Susa Here, **the city** represents the people living in it. Alternate translation: “the people of Susa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
839 EST 8 15 i1ec figs-hendiadys צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 cheered and rejoiced This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoiced** tells how they cheered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by saying something like “shouted joyfully.” Alternate translation: “cheered and were happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
840 EST 8 15 aci3 figs-explicit צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 cheered and rejoiced The implication is that the people did this when they saw Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
841 EST 8 16 q2ru figs-metaphor הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה 1 there was light Here, **light** figuratively represents happiness. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
842 EST 8 16 aci4 figs-doublet הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֑ה 1 there was light and joy The terms **light** and **joy** refer to the same thing here. They are used together to emphasize the extreme happiness that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
843 EST 8 16 j8r1 figs-doublet וְ⁠שָׂשֹׂ֖ן וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 and rejoicing and honor These terms have similar meaning and are used together with the previous doublet to emphasize again the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
844 EST 8 16 n94u figs-explicit וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 and honor Here, **honor** might have two possible meanings. (1) Other people honored the Jews. Alternate translation: “other people honored them” (2) The Jews themselves felt honor instead of shame. Alternate translation: “they felt honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
845 EST 8 17 k1eh figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֨ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֜ה 1 And in every province by province This expression means “each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
846 EST 8 17 j8r3 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 and in every city by city This expression means “each and every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
847 EST 8 17 va7t figs-personification מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 any place where the word of the king and his law had reached This expression describes the king’s message as if it were a person that could travel to a particular place. This phrase refers to all the places that received the king’s letter. Alternate translation: “wherever the king’s couriers took his decree” or “wherever the couriers read the letter announcing the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
848 EST 8 17 j8r5 figs-doublet שִׂמְחָ֤ה וְ⁠שָׂשׂוֹן֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 there was joy and rejoicing for the Jews The terms **joy** and **rejoicing** have similar meaning and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
849 EST 8 17 p89m figs-doublet מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 a feast and a good day These two terms mean something similar and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “and had festive celebrations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
850 EST 8 17 aci5 figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 a good day This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. Alternate translation: “and a holiday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
851 EST 8 17 aci6 figs-explicit וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 And many from the peoples of the land became Jews The implication is that they did this because they thought that the Jews might attack them when the Jews fought back against their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
852 EST 8 17 aci7 וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 And many from the peoples of the land Alternate translation: “many people from the other ethnic groups in the empire”
853 EST 8 17 aci8 figs-idiom מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ 1 from the peoples of the land The **peoples of the land** were the non-Jewish people groups within the empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
854 EST 8 17 r3qf figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 dread of the Jews had fallen on them Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they had become very afraid of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
855 EST 8 17 aci9 figs-events נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 dread of the Jews had fallen upon them To present the events in chronological order, you can say this before saying that the people from the other groups became Jews themselves. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
856 EST 9 intro yty1 0 # Esther 9 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Purim<br><br>The events of this chapter were so significant, the Jews celebrated these events every year after this. It is known as “Purim.”<br><br>## Important stylistic devices in this chapter<br><br>### Ironic Situation<br><br>The day that was supposed to bring great victory to the enemies of the Jews became a day of great victory for the Jews. This is a type of irony.<br><br>### Opening Summary<br><br>Verse 1 of chapter 9 provides a summary of everything that happens in this chapter. If using an opening summary is not normally used in your language, be sure to mark this as a summary either in the text or in a footnote. An opening summary like this is a characteristic device of Hebrew storytelling. So even though it describes the final outcome, we do not recommend that you move it to the end of the chapter unless it is very confusing to leave it here. To make it clear that verse 1 is only a summary and not the entire story, you could say something like this at the end of the verse: “This is what happened” or “Here are more details about what happened.”
857 EST 9 1 j8r7 writing-newevent וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 Now in the twelfth month This introduces a new event. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
858 EST 9 1 acj0 figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Now in the twelfth month, which is the month of Adar, on the thirteenth day of it The implication is that this happened in the twelfth month of the same year that the letters were sent out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that year, the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
859 EST 9 1 j8r9 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 Now in the twelfth month Alternate translation: “now in the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
860 EST 9 1 t9yc translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר 1 which is the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), and [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
861 EST 9 1 j9r1 translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the thirteenth day of it Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
862 EST 9 1 acj1 אֲשֶׁ֨ר…דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 when the word of the king and his law Alternate translation: “what the letters said the king had decreed”
863 EST 9 1 wh56 figs-personification אֲשֶׁ֨ר הִגִּ֧יעַ דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 when the word of the king and his law had reached the time to be done This expression describes the king’s decree as if it had traveled through time (as a person travels through space) and reached this particular day. This phrase means that it was time for people to obey the decree. Alternate translation: “when the time came for people to obey the king’s law and decree” or “when it was the day established in the king’s letters for people to carry out the king’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
864 EST 9 1 acj2 בַּ⁠יּ֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר שִׂבְּר֜וּ אֹיְבֵ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט בָּ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 on the day when the enemies of the Jews hoped to dominate them Alternate translation: “the enemies of the Jews had expected to defeat the Jews on that day”
865 EST 9 1 ect2 figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט 1 to dominate This word usually means “to rule over,” but here it figuratively means “to have power over, to be able to destroy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
866 EST 9 1 lq9y figs-metaphor וְ⁠נַהֲפ֣וֹךְ 1 but being overturned Saying that a situation was turned over is a figurative way of saying that what happened was the opposite of what was expected. Alternate translation: “the situation was reversed” or “the opposite happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
867 EST 9 1 acj3 ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִשְׁלְט֧וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים הֵ֖מָּה בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 it happened that the Jews themselves dominated those who hated them Alternate translation: “Instead, it was the Jews themselves who destroyed their enemies”
868 EST 9 1 acj4 figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 those who hated them This is an idiom that describes enemies (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
869 EST 9 2 tj62 figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 to stretch out a hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. Alternate translation: “to defend themselves” or “to fight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
870 EST 9 2 d44x figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠מְבַקְשֵׁ֖י רָֽעָתָ֑⁠ם 1 against those seeking their evil Here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md) and [8:6](../08/06.md). In this context, the term can be expressed with a verb. Alternate translation: “who were trying to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
871 EST 9 2 acj6 figs-idiom וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 But a man did not stand to their face Alternate translation: “no one stood against them” or “no one was able to defeat them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
872 EST 9 2 x8s3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 But a man did not stand to their face Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “was able to fight back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
873 EST 9 2 j9r3 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 to their face Here, **face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so here it means “when faced with them.” Alternate translation: “against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
874 EST 9 2 h7jh figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 sudden fear of them had fallen on all the peoples Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “all the peoples suddenly became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
875 EST 9 2 acj7 figs-explicit נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 sudden fear of them had fallen on all the peoples The implication is that as a result, no one helped anyone who attacked the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
876 EST 9 3 acj8 שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת וְ⁠הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּח֗וֹת 1 the officials of the provinces, and the satraps, and the governors See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [8:9](../08/09.md). Alternate translation: “the government leaders in each province”
877 EST 9 3 acj9 וְ⁠עֹשֵׂ֤י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 and those doing the work that was for the king Alternate translation: “anyone the king had trusted with his affairs”
878 EST 9 3 ack0 figs-metaphor מְנַשְּׂאִ֖ים אֶת־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 were lifting up the Jews Here, **lifting up** is a figurative way of saying “helping.” The picture is likely of someone helping a tired or injured person to stand or walk by holding them up. Alternate translation: “helped the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
879 EST 9 3 q2ue figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 dread of Mordecai had fallen on them Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
880 EST 9 4 j9r5 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 For This term introduces the reason why the officials and satraps and governors were becoming afraid of Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
881 EST 9 4 xd49 figs-explicit גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai was great in the palace of the king The implication is that this is why all the other officials were afraid of Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “They were afraid of him because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
882 EST 9 4 ack1 figs-metonymy גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai was great in the palace of the king **The palace of the king** is a figurative way of describing the king’s administration by referring to the place where it was headquartered. Alternate translation: “was very important in the king’s government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
883 EST 9 4 ack2 גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Mordecai was great **Great** here is the same term that, as a verb, describes promotion within the king’s service in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “Mordecai was a very important royal official”
884 EST 9 4 mr66 figs-personification וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖⁠וֹ הוֹלֵ֣ךְ בְּ⁠כָל־הַ⁠מְּדִינ֑וֹת 1 and the report of him was going out into all the provinces Here the story speaks of the news of Mordecai’s greatness as if it were a living thing that could travel throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire, everyone was hearing the news of his greatness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
885 EST 9 4 j9r9 figs-idiom מָרְדֳּכַ֖י הוֹלֵ֥ךְ וְ⁠גָדֽוֹל 1 Mordecai was progressing and becoming great This expression means that Mordecai continued to become more powerful and influential. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was becoming more famous because the king was giving him more and more power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
886 EST 9 5 ack3 וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 the Jews struck to all their enemies a strike of sword After the information about Mordecai, the story now returns to tell what happened on the appointed day. You could add a phrase to show this. Alternate translation, add: “on the day when they were allowed to defend themselves”
887 EST 9 5 ack4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 the Jews struck to all their enemies a strike of sword This expression means that the Jews defended themselves against their enemies, even to the point of killing people who attacked them. Alternate translation: “the Jews attacked all of their enemies and killed them with their swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
888 EST 9 5 j11d figs-synecdoche מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 a strike of sword Swords were not necessarily the only weapons the Jews had and used. The sword is used to represent all of their weaponry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this more general meaning. Alternate translation: “the Jews took up their weapons and used them against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
889 EST 9 5 j13d figs-doublet וְ⁠הֶ֖רֶג וְ⁠אַבְדָ֑ן 1 and slaughter, and destruction These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they destroyed them completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
890 EST 9 5 j15d figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֥וּ בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ⁠רְצוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 and they did to those who hated them according to their pleasure This expression does not mean that the Jews felt pleasure when they killed their enemies. Rather, it means that the Jews were able to defend themselves against their enemies and were not hindered in any way. Alternate translation: “they were able to do everything they wanted to do against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
891 EST 9 5 ack5 figs-idiom בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 those who hated them This is an idiom that describes enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
892 EST 9 6 b5ft וּ⁠בְ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֗ה 1 And in Susa the citadel Alternate translation: “just in Susa, the capital city”
893 EST 9 6 j17d figs-doublet הָרְג֤וּ…וְ⁠אַבֵּ֔ד 1 slaughtered and destroyed These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
894 EST 9 6 ha18 translate-numbers חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִֽישׁ 1 500 men Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
895 EST 9 7 ack6 figs-explicit פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא…דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן…אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 Parshandatha, Dalphon, Aspatha The story lists the names of Haman’s sons before explaining that they were his sons and that the Jews killed them. To be clear who these people are, you can add this information from verse 10 explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “rhe Jews killed the ten sons of their enemy Haman son of Hammedatha. The names of his sons were…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
896 EST 9 7 s6x2 translate-names פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא…דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן…אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 Parshandatha, Dalphon, Aspatha These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
897 EST 9 8 g6zx translate-names פּוֹרָ֛תָא…אֲדַלְיָ֖א…אֲרִידָֽתָא 1 Poratha, Adalia, Aridatha These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
898 EST 9 9 gj4p translate-names פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙…אֲרִיסַ֔י…אֲרִדַ֖י…וַיְזָֽתָא 1 Parmashta, Arisai, Aridai, Vaizatha These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
899 EST 9 10 fsa2 translate-numbers עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “the 10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
900 EST 9 10 xt5b figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים 1 the adversary of the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
901 EST 9 10 j19d figs-idiom לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 they did not stretch out their hand Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
902 EST 9 10 ack7 וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה 1 But … to the plunder Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”
903 EST 9 11 ack8 בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 On that day Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”
904 EST 9 11 j21d figs-personification בָּ֣א מִסְפַּ֧ר…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 the report of the number … came to the face of the king Here the story speaks about the report as if it were a living thing that could come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “one of the king’s servants told the king the number of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
905 EST 9 11 acl0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 to the face of the king Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase likely means that someone came into the king’s presence in order to deliver this report. Alternate translation: “someone came in and reported to the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
906 EST 9 11 j22d figs-activepassive מִסְפַּ֧ר הַֽ⁠הֲרוּגִ֛ים 1 the number of those who were killed You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “how many people the Jews had killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
907 EST 9 12 j33d figs-doublet הָרְגוּ֩…וְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 have slaughtered and destroyed These terms mean the same thing and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
908 EST 9 12 cz3e translate-numbers חֲמֵ֧שׁ מֵא֣וֹת אִ֗ישׁ 1 500 men Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
909 EST 9 12 acl1 וְ⁠אֵת֙ 1 with Alternate translation: “including”
910 EST 9 12 j5p9 translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
911 EST 9 12 vh5l figs-rquestion בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר מְדִינ֥וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מֶ֣ה עָשׂ֑וּ 1 In the rest of the provinces of the king, what have they done? The king is making a statement, but he uses a question form to show that he is very convinced that the Jews must have also killed many people in the other provinces. Alternate translation: “what they must have done in the rest of the king’s provinces” or “they must have killed many more in the rest of the king’s provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
912 EST 9 12 s3sr figs-parallelism וּ⁠מַה־שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ ע֖וֹד וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 Now what is your petition? And it will be given to you. And what is your request? Again, and it will be done. These two statements mean basically the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther what she wants. If it would be confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “is there anything more that you want? Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
913 EST 9 12 n3ua figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ…וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 And it will be given to you … and it will be done You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. You can also say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
914 EST 9 12 ly4g figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙…בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ 1 your petition … your request The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “anything more that you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
915 EST 9 13 acl2 figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 If it is good to the king This is an idiom that has been used many times in the story. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
916 EST 9 13 acl3 figs-activepassive יִנָּתֵ֣ן 1 let it be given You can say this with an active form, and you can indicate that Esther is asking the king to do it. Alternate translation: “please allow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
917 EST 9 13 nz41 גַּם־מָחָ֗ר לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כְּ⁠דָ֣ת הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם 1 also tomorrow to the Jews who are in Susa to do according to the law of today Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live in Susa to obey today’s decree tomorrow also” or “to do tomorrow also what was decreed that they should do today”
918 EST 9 13 j43d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 in Susa Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
919 EST 9 13 acl4 עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 let the ten sons of Haman hang The request is not for the king to allow the bodies to be impaled (or hanged), but instead, for the king to order this. Alternate translation: “and have the bodies of Haman’s ten sons hanged [or impaled]”
920 EST 9 13 acl5 translate-symaction עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 let the ten sons of Haman hang The purpose of this would not be to kill the sons, since they are already dead, but to demonstrate publicly that the enemies of the Jews had been completely defeated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
921 EST 9 13 acl6 figs-explicit עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 the ten sons of Haman It is implicit that since Haman’s sons are already dead, what Esther is actually asking for is for their bodies to be impaled or hanged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
922 EST 9 13 nr1p translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
923 EST 9 13 qyu8 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
924 EST 9 14 acl7 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠הֵֽעָשׂ֣וֹת כֵּ֔ן 1 the king said for this to be done You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king granted both of Esther’s requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
925 EST 9 14 acl8 figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 And a law was given in Susa This phrase, “in Susa,” seems to indicate that this refers to Esther’s first request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he issued a decree allowing the Jews in Susa to fight against their enemies again the next day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
926 EST 9 14 j47d figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 And a law was given in Susa This can be stated in active form as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
927 EST 9 14 j49d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 in Susa Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
928 EST 9 14 acl9 figs-explicit תָּלֽוּ 1 they hanged This was Esther’s second request. You can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he ordered his servants to hang [or impale] the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
929 EST 9 14 j51d translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 ten sons Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
930 EST 9 15 j55d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 who were in Susa Alternate translation: “who lived in the capital city of Susa”
931 EST 9 15 acm0 וַ⁠יִּֽקָּהֲל֞וּ 1 So … assembled themselves Alternate translation: “joined together”
932 EST 9 15 p9gc translate-ordinal בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 on the fourteenth day Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
933 EST 9 15 j57d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), and [9:1](../09/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
934 EST 9 15 j59d בְ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 in Susa Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
935 EST 9 15 j61d translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִ֑ישׁ 1 300 men Alternate translation: “three hundred men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
936 EST 9 15 lp12 figs-idiom וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 they did not stretch out their hand to the plunder Here, the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
937 EST 9 16 j65d figs-metaphor נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 assembled themselves and stood for their lives Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. See how you translated this in [8:11](../08/11.md). Alternate translation: “joined together to fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
938 EST 9 16 acm2 figs-explicit נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 assembled themselves It’s implicit here, and stated explicitly in the next verse, that these other Jews fought their enemies only on the thirteenth day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “on the thirteenth day of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
939 EST 9 16 acm3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֨וֹחַ֙ מֵ⁠אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 and they rested from their enemies Here, **resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they had no more trouble from their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
940 EST 9 16 kms1 וְ⁠הָרֹג֙ בְּ⁠שֹׂ֣נְאֵי⁠הֶ֔ם חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 they slaughtered 75,000 of those who hated them Alternate translation: “and killed 75,000 of them”
941 EST 9 16 i1d1 translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 75,000 Alternate translation: “seventy-five thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
942 EST 9 16 m2cx לֹ֥א שָֽׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 they did not stretch out their hand to the plunder Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” or “they did not take the valuable things” or “the did not take their possessions”
943 EST 9 17 ll4f translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר 1 the thirteenth day Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
944 EST 9 17 j67d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), and [9:15](../09/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
945 EST 9 17 acm5 בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 on the fourteenth day of it, then they made it a day of feasting and rejoicing Alternate translation: “they devoted the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar, to joyful celebration” or “they feasted joyfully the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar”
946 EST 9 17 kjj1 translate-ordinal בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the fourteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
947 EST 9 17 j69d figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 feasting and rejoicing This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoicing** tells how they celebrated. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
948 EST 9 17 acm6 figs-synecdoche מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה 1 feasting This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
949 EST 9 18 w531 וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 But the Jews who were in Susa assembled themselves Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”
950 EST 9 18 acm7 figs-explicit נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 assembled themselves The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
951 EST 9 18 acm8 figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it and on the fourteenth of it If it would be helpful in your language, you could say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
952 EST 9 18 j73d translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the thirteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 13” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
953 EST 9 18 j75d translate-ordinal וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 and on the fourteenth of it Alternate translation: “and on day 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
954 EST 9 18 acm9 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֗וֹחַ בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 And they rested on the fifteenth of it, and they made it a day of feasting and rejoicing **Resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
955 EST 9 18 j77d translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 on the fifteenth of it Alternate translation: “on day 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
956 EST 9 18 j79d figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 feasting and rejoicing This phrase means the same thing as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
957 EST 9 19 j81d grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֞ן 1 Therefore This term introduces the result of the events that were described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
958 EST 9 19 acn0 figs-parallelism הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֣ים הַפְּרָזִ֗ים הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִים֮ בְּ⁠עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠פְּרָזוֹת֒ 1 the Jews, the ones of the open country, the ones who dwell in the cities of the open areas These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to make the identification of this group clear. The first phrase means that they lived in rural areas. The second phrase means they lived in settlements that did not have walls around them, that is, in villages. You can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Jews who live in villages in the countryside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
959 EST 9 19 acn1 figs-explicit עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙…וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 make the fourteenth day … and a good day The implication is that this explanation is being offered for the benefit of city-dwelling Jews who might wonder why rural Jews celebrate this holiday on a different day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “rather than on the fifteenth day.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
960 EST 9 19 acn2 עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙…וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 make the fourteenth day … and a good day Alternate translation: “observe this holiday on the fourteenth day”
961 EST 9 19 j83d translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 the fourteenth day Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
962 EST 9 19 j85d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md) and [9:17](../09/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
963 EST 9 19 j87d figs-hendiadys שִׂמְחָ֥ה וּ⁠מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 for rejoicing and for feasting As in verses 17 and 18, this means “by celebrating joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
964 EST 9 19 j89d figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 and a good day This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
965 EST 9 19 acn3 translate-symaction וּ⁠מִשְׁל֥וֹחַ מָנ֖וֹת אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 and for the sending of gifts, a man to his friend Giving gifts, in this culture as in many cultures, was a way of acknowledging a special occasion. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
966 EST 9 19 j91d figs-idiom אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 a man to his friend Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
967 EST 9 20 acn4 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב…הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה 1 And … wrote these things Alternate translation: “wrote an account of all of these events”
968 EST 9 20 acn5 כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינוֹת֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 all the Jews who were in all the provinces of the king Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “all the Jews everywhere in the kingdom”
969 EST 9 20 j95d figs-merism הַ⁠קְּרוֹבִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רְחוֹקִֽים 1 the near ones and the far ones This is a figurative way of referring to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. This expression means the Jews who lived in or near Susa, those who lived far away, and all Jews in between. Alternate translation: “everywhere they lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
970 EST 9 21 acn6 figs-idiom לְ⁠קַיֵּם֮ עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֒ לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים 1 to set up for them to be making Here, **to set up** means to establish, and to **make** a day means to observe it as a holiday. Alternate translation: “to establish … as a holiday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
971 EST 9 21 j97d translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 the fourteenth day Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
972 EST 9 21 j99d translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 of the month of Adar **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md), [9:17](../09/17.md), and [9:19](../09/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
973 EST 9 21 j111 translate-ordinal יוֹם־חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 the fifteenth day of it Alternate translation: “the fifteenth day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
974 EST 9 21 n4v9 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 every year by year This expression means “every year.” Alternation translation: “each year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
975 EST 9 22 acn7 grammar-connect-logic-result כַּ⁠יָּמִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר 1 as the days when This verse gives the reason for what Mordecai told the Jews to do in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because those were the days when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
976 EST 9 22 acn8 figs-metaphor נָ֨חוּ בָ⁠הֶ֤ם הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מֵ⁠א֣וֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 the Jews rested on them from their enemies As in verses 16, 17, and 18, **resting** here is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “the Jews stopped fighting because they had defeated their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
977 EST 9 22 acn9 וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ אֲשֶׁר֩ 1 and as the month when Alternate translation: “And that was the month when”
978 EST 9 22 aco1 figs-parallelism נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 it had turned for them from sorrow into joy and from mourning into a good day These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how dramatic and wonderful the change was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “after being very sad, they became very happy.” Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sorrowful and crying to being very joyful and celebrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
979 EST 9 22 aco3 figs-explicit נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 it had turned for them from sorrow into joy and from mourning into a good day It is implicit that the Jews were deeply distressed because they were being threatened with destruction, and they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “everything had changed for them. They had been deeply distressed because they were threatened with destruction. But they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
980 EST 9 22 nch1 figs-metaphor נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 it had turned for them from sorrow into joy **Turning** figuratively represents changing. Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sad to being joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
981 EST 9 22 aco4 figs-abstractnouns מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 from sorrow into joy The abstract nouns **sorrow** and **joy** can be expressed with adjectives such as “distressed” and “happy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
982 EST 9 22 j113 figs-explicit לַ⁠עֲשׂ֣וֹת אוֹתָ֗⁠ם יְמֵי֙ 1 in order to make them days of These are things that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “so Mordecai told them to observe those days with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
983 EST 9 22 j115 figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 feasting and rejoicing As in verses 17, 18, and 19, this phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word “rejoicing” tells how the celebrating was to be done. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” or “feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
984 EST 9 22 aco5 וּ⁠מִשְׁל֤וֹחַ מָנוֹת֙ אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 and sending of gifts, a man to his friend See how you translated this in verse 19. Review the notes there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”
985 EST 9 22 j117 figs-idiom אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 a man to his friend Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
986 EST 9 22 aco6 translate-symaction וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 and gifts to the needy In this culture as in many others, helping the poor was also a way of acknowledging a special occasion. The idea was that no one should miss out on the benefits of the wonderful thing that God had done. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should help the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
987 EST 9 22 z1vl figs-explicit וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 This is also something that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should give gifts to the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
988 EST 9 23 aco7 figs-explicit וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙…אֲשֶׁר־כָּתַ֥ב מָרְדֳּכַ֖י אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 And … accepted … what Mordecai had written to them The implication seems to be that the Jews were glad to do what Mordecai had instructed, because they had already been doing it. You can add a word such as “readily” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
989 EST 9 23 aco8 וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ 1 And … accepted Alternate translation: “agreed”
990 EST 9 23 ib25 figs-events אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת 1 what they had begun to do You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
991 EST 9 24 j119 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי֩ 1 For This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
992 EST 9 24 kqf6 figs-explicit כִּי֩ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
993 EST 9 24 j125 figs-distinguish צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 the adversary of all the Jews This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
994 EST 9 24 aco9 חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 had plotted concerning the Jews to annihilate them Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”
995 EST 9 24 xz7s figs-explicit וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 and he had cast a Pur (which is “the lot”) You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
996 EST 9 24 bcy2 translate-names פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 a Pur (which is “the lot”) As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
997 EST 9 24 j127 figs-hendiadys לְ⁠הֻמָּ֖⁠ם וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 to vex them and to destroy them The terms **vex** and **destroy** mean basically the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the degree to which Haman’s deadly plans were distressing to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the terms and express the emphasis with a word like “completely.” Alternate translation: “and completely destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
998 EST 9 25 m8x3 figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹאָ⁠הּ֮ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 But when she came before the face of the king In this summary, many details are communicated implicitly. **She** means Esther. Also, this verse continues the account of what this celebration is commemorating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these things explicit. Alternate translation: “the celebration also commemorated how Esther dared to come into the king’s presence without being summoned, and she won his favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
999 EST 9 25 j128 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 before the face of the king Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the presence of a person. This phrase means that Esther came into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into the king’s presence” or “before the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1000 EST 9 25 acp1 figs-explicit אָמַ֣ר עִם־הַ⁠סֵּ֔פֶר 1 he said with the letter Once again, there is much information that is implicit here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the king gave Mordecai the authority to send a letter throughout the empire saying that the Jews could defend themselves against their enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1001 EST 9 25 y57b figs-idiom יָשׁ֞וּב מַחֲשַׁבְתּ֧⁠וֹ הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה אֲשֶׁר־חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עַל־רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ 1 Let his evil plot that he plotted concerning the Jews return on his head **His**, **he**, and **him** in this sentence refer to Haman. **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person was planning to do to someone else happened to that person instead. Use an idiom with that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “the wicked plan that Haman developed against the Jews will be done to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1002 EST 9 25 acp2 figs-personification וְ⁠תָל֥וּ אֹת֛⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנָ֖י⁠ו עַל־הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 and let them hang him and his sons on the tree The letter itself did not say this. The story is summarizing the events in compressed form. It is speaking of the letter as if it were a person who could take action and give commands like this, but it was the king who gave the command. Alternate translation: “the king also ordered his servants to hang [or impale] Haman on a wooden pole [or hang Haman on a gallows]. When the Jews in Susa killed his ten sons, the king had their bodies hanged [or impaled] as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1003 EST 9 25 j129 translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 the tree See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1004 EST 9 26 j131 grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֡ן 1 Therefore This introduces the reason why the Jews gave the name “Purim” to this celebration. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1005 EST 9 26 acp3 figs-explicit קָֽרְאוּ֩ לַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֤לֶּה פוּרִים֙ 1 they called these days, “Purim” **They** means the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jews called these days Purim, like the word Pur” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1006 EST 9 26 c1gi translate-names פוּרִים֙ 1 Purim This is the name of the festival that commemorates the salvation of the Jewish people in ancient Persia from Haman’s plot to destroy and kill all the Jews in a single day. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1007 EST 9 26 buf1 writing-background עַל־שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 on account of the name of Pur This is information that the original audience needed to understand how this celebration got its name. You can put this first in the verse because it explains what comes next. Alternate translation: “the Persian word for ‘lot’ is ‘Pur’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1008 EST 9 26 yq8m figs-explicit שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 the name of Pur. It can be stated clearly what “Pur” means. Alternate translation: “the word Pur, which means ‘lot’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1009 EST 9 26 j133 grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֕ן 1 Therefore The story has just given the reason why the holiday is called Purim. Now it is going to give another reason. It will be explaining why the Jews added this holiday to their calendar, in addition to the festivals that were commanded in the Law of Moses. The next verse describes them adding the holiday. This verse gives the reasons why they did that. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1010 EST 9 26 acp4 עַל־כָּל־דִּבְרֵ֖י הָ⁠אִגֶּ֣רֶת הַ⁠זֹּ֑את 1 on account of all the words of this letter This is a reference to the letter that Mordecai wrote, as described in verses 20–22. Alternate translation: “because Mordecai wrote to them to tell them to observe this holiday”
1011 EST 9 26 acp5 figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what they had seen concerning this and what had come upon them These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize what a vivid experience it was to live through the events that this story describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “amazing.” Alternate translation: “the amazing things that had happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1012 EST 9 26 acp6 figs-explicit וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what they had seen concerning this and what had come upon them These phrases say generally “this” and “what,” but they are referring to the specific events the story has related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could describe these things specifically. Alternate translation: “because the Jews had been able to destroy the enemies who had wanted to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1013 EST 9 26 acp7 figs-events וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what they had seen concerning this and what had come upon them You can put this first, before the information about Mordecai’s letter, because it happened first. You can say “then” when you tell about the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
1014 EST 9 26 j135 figs-idiom וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 and what had come upon them This expression means “what had happened to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1015 EST 9 27 acp8 קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ ׀ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֨ם ׀ וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם וְ⁠עַ֨ל כָּל־הַ⁠נִּלְוִ֤ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙…לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 The Jews set up and accepted for themselves, and for their seed, and for all those who unite themselves to them … to be making these two days Alternate translation: “the Jews said that they would tell their descendants and those people who became Jews to be certain to celebrate this festival”
1016 EST 9 27 acp9 figs-doublet קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ 1 The Jews set up and accepted “Set up” and “accepted” mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews definitely agreed to do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “agreed to establish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1017 EST 9 27 j137 figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם 1 and for their seed As in [6:13](../06/13.md), **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1018 EST 9 27 j141 figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֔וֹר 1 and it will not pass away This expression means that the Jews would never stop celebrating the feast of Purim every year. you could put this last since it applies to the whole verse. Alternate translation: “always” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1019 EST 9 27 acq0 figs-events לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 to be making these two days To present things in chronological order, you can put this before the reference to Jewish descendants and converts to Judaism. Alternate translation: “to establish those two days as holidays and to observe them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
1020 EST 9 27 acq1 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם 1 according to their writing Alternate translation: “in the way that Mordecai had told them to do in the letter”
1021 EST 9 27 acq2 וְ⁠כִ⁠זְמַנָּ֑⁠ם 1 and according to their appointed time This means the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar, as specified in [9:21](../09/21.md). Alternate translation: “on those exact days of the month of Adar”
1022 EST 9 27 j143 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 every year by year This expression means “each and every year.” Alternate translation: “every single year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1023 EST 9 28 acq3 grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 So these days are remembered and are made This gives the result of the reasons described in verses 26 and 27. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1024 EST 9 28 acq4 figs-doublet וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 So these days are remembered and are made **Remembered** and **made** mean basically the same thing here. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews have been faithful in doing this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “So the Jews have celebrated these days.” Alternate translation: “therefore they said that they would remember and celebrate on those two days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1025 EST 9 28 hc8s figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 So these days are remembered and are made This expression uses two passive forms, but you could say the same thing using active forms. Alternate translation: “so the Jews have celebrated and observed these days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1026 EST 9 28 j145 figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־דּ֣וֹר וָ⁠ד֗וֹר 1 in every generation by generation This expression means “in each and every generation.” Alternate translation: “in every single generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1027 EST 9 28 j147 figs-idiom מִשְׁפָּחָה֙ וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּחָ֔ה 1 family by family This expression means “every family.” Alternate translation: “every Jewish family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1028 EST 9 28 acq5 figs-merism מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 province by province, and city by city This could be a figure of speech that refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. Generally speaking, a province would be the largest division of the empire that would identify a person’s location, and a city would be the smallest. Particularly, since the Jews would continue to celebrate Purim after the Persian empire and its provinces no longer exist, you might choose to express the meaning of this figure of speech in a more general way. Alternate translation: “everywhere they have lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1029 EST 9 28 j149 figs-idiom מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה 1 province by province This expression means “every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1030 EST 9 28 j151 figs-idiom וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 and city by city This expression means “every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1031 EST 9 28 acq6 figs-doublenegatives וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 these days of Purim will not pass away As in verse 27, this expression means that the Jews will never stop celebrating the feast of Purim. You can say this positively. Alternate translation: “will always observe the Festival of Purim faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1032 EST 9 28 m5o8 figs-parallelism וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews will definitely not stop celebrating Purim each year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “definitely” or “certainly” or “always.” Alternate translation: “the Jews and their descendants will certainly always continue to celebrate this festival of Purim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1033 EST 9 28 acq7 מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 from the midst of the Jews Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”
1034 EST 9 28 i2qk וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף 1 and their remembrance will not come to an end Alternate translation: “will always observe”
1035 EST 9 28 j155 figs-metaphor מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 from their seed As in verse 27, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1036 EST 9 29 je8e figs-distinguish בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 the daughter of Abihail This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1037 EST 9 29 cm8c translate-names אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 Abihail This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1038 EST 9 29 oc4c וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י 1 Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of **Mordecai** here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”
1039 EST 9 29 acq8 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י 1 the Jew This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1040 EST 9 29 acq9 וַ֠⁠תִּכְתֹּב…אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף 1 wrote with all power Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”
1041 EST 9 29 ku7d translate-numbers לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 to set up this second letter of Purim **This second letter of Purim** could refer to: (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (see verses 20-22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1042 EST 9 30 acr1 figs-gendernotations וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים 1 he sent letters While this says “**he**,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1043 EST 9 30 acr2 figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֶל־שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה מַלְכ֖וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 to all the Jews, to 127 provinces, the kingdom of Ahasuerus These three phrases all mean the same thing. The repetition emphasizes that Esther and Mordecai sent this second letter out comprehensively throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “to all the Jews throughout the entire empire of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1044 EST 9 30 acr3 figs-metonymy שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 127 provinces The letter was not sent to the provinces as geographical territories, but to the Jews who lived in them. The Jews are being described by something associated with them, the places where they lived. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1045 EST 9 30 u389 translate-numbers שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 127 provinces Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1046 EST 9 30 iaf7 figs-abstractnouns דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 words of peace and truth The abstract nouns **peace** and **truth** can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1047 EST 9 30 mpse דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 The Hebrew word translated as **truth** here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”
1048 EST 9 31 acr4 לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 to set up these days of Purim at their appointed times according to what Mordecai the Jew and Esther the queen had set up for them Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”
1049 EST 9 31 rgr9 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1050 EST 9 31 acr5 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם 1 according to what they had set up concerning their lives and concerning their seed, to matters of the fasts and their outcry This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in [2:6](../02/06.md).) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.
1051 EST 9 31 rl2s figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם 1 and concerning their seed Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1052 EST 9 32 acr7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר 1 and it was written in the book You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1053 EST 10 intro h4m4 0 # Esther 10 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Mordecai’s new position<br><br>Through the power of Yahweh, Mordecai was given a new position in the Persian Empire. Mordecai was now the second in command in the kingdom of Persia and he used his position to help other Jews.
1054 EST 10 1 j157 writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֧וֹשׁ 1 Then the king Ahasuerus set This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way to introduce a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1055 EST 10 1 b5ht וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩…מַ֛ס 1 Then … set a tribute Alternate translation: “Then … levied a tax”
1056 EST 10 1 acr8 figs-merism עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the land and the islands of the sea The purpose of this chapter is to describe the greatness of Mordecai. It does that by showing that he was second in command to a very powerful emperor. Referring to both the land and the sea is a way to include everything that lives in a very large area of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “everyone throughout his empire.” Alternate translation: “on all the people in the empire … even the people who lived on the islands in the Mediterranean Sea” or “on everyone throughout the land and even the far-away islands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1057 EST 10 1 twn8 figs-explicit וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The phrase **the islands of the sea** likely refers to the fact that the Persian kings had conquered territories reaching all the way to the Mediterranean Sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which reached all the way to the Mediterranean Sea.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1058 EST 10 1 acr9 figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the land and the islands of the sea These geographic features were not expected to pay the tax. The land and coastlands represent the people living there. The story is describing those people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the places where they live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1059 EST 10 2 acs1 figs-doublet וְ⁠כָל־מַעֲשֵׂ֤ה תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 And all the deeds of his power and his might **Power** and **might** mean essentially the same thing. They are used together to emphasize how powerful King Ahasuerus was. If it is more natural in your language, you can use one word with that meaning, with another word that gives it emphasis. Alternate translation: “all that he achieved because of how very powerful he was” or “all the great things that he did because of his great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1060 EST 10 2 p98n figs-abstractnouns תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 his power and his might The abstract nouns **power** and **might** can be translated with an adjective. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1061 EST 10 2 k7tc וּ⁠פָרָשַׁת֙ 1 with the full account of Alternate translation: “They also wrote a full account”
1062 EST 10 2 acs2 גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 the greatness of Mordecai to which the king had made him great Alternate translation: “of how important Mordecai was” or “of how the king had honored Mordecai for the great things he had done”
1063 EST 10 2 acs3 גִּדְּל֖⁠וֹ 1 made him great See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”
1064 EST 10 2 acs4 figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 are they not written in the book of the events of days of the kings of Persia and Media? This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1065 EST 10 2 acs5 figs-activepassive הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record…” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1066 EST 10 2 acs6 הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 are they not written…? Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse, if it would be helpful in your language.
1067 EST 10 2 acs7 figs-idiom סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 the book of the events of days for the kings of Media and Persia See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1068 EST 10 3 j159 grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 For This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1069 EST 10 3 acs8 figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י 1 the Jew This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1070 EST 10 3 acs9 מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 was second to the King Ahasuerus Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”
1071 EST 10 3 act0 וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 and great among the Jews Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”
1072 EST 10 3 iui7 figs-gendernotations אֶחָ֑י⁠ו 1 his brothers Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1073 EST 10 3 act2 figs-parallelism דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed These two phrases basically mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard Mordecai worked for the good of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “He worked hard so his people and their descendants would prosper.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1074 EST 10 3 act3 figs-abstractnouns דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people and speaking peace to all its seed The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1075 EST 10 3 wte9 figs-metaphor דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 seeking good for his people **Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1076 EST 10 3 s8f8 figs-idiom וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 and speaking peace to all its seed **Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1077 EST 10 3 j161 figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 to all its seed Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

1077
tn_EST.tsv Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,1077 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro d989 0 # Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Esther\n\n1. King Ahasuerus sends away his wife, the queen (1:1–22)\n2. Ahasuerus chooses Esther as the new queen (2:1–23)\n3. Haman plots to destroy the Jews (3:1–15)\n4. Mordecai asks Esther to help her people (4:1–17)\n5. Esther pleads with the king for the Jews (5:1–7:10)\n6. The result of Haman’s plot to destroy the Jews (8:1–9:16)\n7. The Feast of Purim (9:17–32)\n8. Conclusion (10:1–3)\n\n### What is the Book of Esther about?\n\nThe Book of Esther tells how a young Jewish woman named Esther became the queen of Persia. As queen, she worked to save all the Jews in the Persian Empire from being destroyed.\n\nThis book ends by telling why the Jews celebrate the festival of Purim. The name “Purim” comes from the word “pur,” which means “lots” or “dice.” Haman, the enemy of Jews, threw dice to choose when to attack and destroy the Jews. The Jews celebrate Purim to remember how Yahweh rescued his people from being destroyed.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators can use the traditional title of this book, which is “The Book of Esther” or just “Esther.” Or they can choose a clearer title, such as “The Book About Esther.”\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Persian Empire?\n\nKing Cyrus the Great conquered and ruled over many kingdoms. This was in the part of the world called Persia, which is now Iran. So people named his kingdom the Persian Empire. When Cyrus conquered Babylonia in 539 B.C., he then controlled the Jews whom the Babylonians had earlier taken into exile.\n\n### Why were there Jews in Babylonia when the Persians conquered it?\n\nIn 586 B.C., the Babylonians conquered and took into exile the people of Judah. These Jews and their descendants were still in Babylon when the Persians conquered it.\n\n### What was meant by “the laws of the Medes and Persians”?\n\nThe phrase “the laws of the Medes and Persians” is found in Esther 1:19 and Daniel 6:12. It referred to laws and decrees that could not be changed or removed once they were issued. In the book of Esther, the king made a decree that the people could attack the Jews. Later he regretted that decision but he was not able to change the decree.\n\nThe term “Medes” refers to a people group that had formed its own nation, but the Persians conquered them.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What different levels of language are in the Book of Esther?\n\nIn the Book of Esther, people talk to each other in many different situations. There is the polite and stately talk in the Persian court and the words of royal decrees. Friends and close relatives also talk to each other. There are even the words that one uses in speaking to oneself. Translators should use all the ways their own language has to express these different situations in a way that their readers will identify and understand.
1:intro v1fp 0 # Esther 1 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The king’s divorce\n\nThe king’s advisers were afraid that husbands would lose their authority when they heard the queen had refused to come to show her beauty to the king’s guests, so the advisers told him to divorce her.
1:1 jdr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֖י 1 In the Old Testament, this is a standard way of beginning a historical story. Many languages have similar story-opening formulas, and if your language has one, you can use it. But do not use it if it would suggest that the story is not real, only made up. Alternate translation: “this account happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:1 zzz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בִּ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 The term **day** is used figuratively here to refer to a longer period of time. You could just say “during the reign of Ahasuerus,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “in the time of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:1 qwe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:1 v5ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 This is background information to help the reader identify Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:1 qwe3 ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ 1 Alternative translation: “This king named Ahasuerus ruled”
1:1 qwe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ 1 In case your audience might not know where these places are, you could say, “extending from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:1 qwe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 The number is given to show what a large empire this was. You could say that explicitly by saying, “Ahasuerus ruled a very large empire that had 127 provinces.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:1 qwe8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “one hundred twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1:2 dk31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת & עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 Here, the action of **sitting** on a throne is used figuratively to mean ruling over a kingdom. You could just say “ruled,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “ruled his empire from his royal throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:2 qwe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with a verb by saying, “the throne he ruled from,” or use an adjective, “his royal throne.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 hgm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֥ן 1 This was the name of a royal city of the Persian kings. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:2 qwr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠בִּירָֽה 1 This means a castle or palace where a king would live. But since the city of Susa itself is being called a **citadel** here, it’s likely that the term figuratively means royal city or capital city. The person telling this story is identifying Susa as the capital by calling it by the name of something closely associated with it, the royal palace within it. A good translation might be “the capital city of Persia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:3 ry7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 This means that Ahasuerus had already ruled for two full years and that these events took place in the year that followed them. Alternate translation: “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled his empire” or “after he had ruled for two years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1:3 qwr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 **Reign** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 qwr5 עָשָׂ֣ה מִשְׁתֶּ֔ה 1 Alternative translation: “he hosted a feast”
1:3 prm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חֵ֣יל ׀ פָּרַ֣ס וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 This likely refers to the leaders of the army. It is describing a part of the army by referring to the whole army. Alternate translation: “the officers of the army” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:3 qwr7 הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֛ים 1 This probably means something like “the wealthy landowners.”
1:3 jdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 **Face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so this phrase means “in his presence.” The invitation was to come to the royal capital to attend a banquet where the king would be present in person. You could say, as UST does, that the king was present in person to host the feast. Or you could say as an alternative, “all of them came to Susa for the feast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:4 qwr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ אֶת־עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 You can translate the abstract noun with an emphasized adjective. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 qet1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 **He** refers to the king. The implication is that he held this banquet to show all of his officials how wealthy and powerful he was. The invited officials would then go back to all the different parts of the empire and tell everyone this. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus wanted to demonstrate to his guests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:4 m8xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 The words **wealth** and **glory** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize how great his kingdom was. Alternate translation: “the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:4 qet3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ & וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 You can translate the abstract nouns **splendor**, **beauty**, and **greatness** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … that he was a very powerful king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 lun5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 The words **splendor** and **beauty** have similar meaning and emphasize how great he was. Alternate translation: “the splendor of his greatness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:4 qet5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יָמִ֣ים רַבִּ֔ים שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 This was a very long time for a royal feast to last. The earlier part of the verse provides the reason for this. To make the connection explicit, you could add some explanatory words to the verse like this: “Ahasuerus entertained his guests fabulously because he wanted to demonstrate that his empire was extremely wealthy and that he was a very powerful king. He did so many things for them that the festivities lasted for six months.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:4 x1v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 Six months is about **180 days** or about half a year. You can use whatever expression will best express this time period in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1:5 ue3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠מְל֣וֹאת ׀ הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 This implies “at the end of that feast.” You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after those 180 days were over” or “at the end of those six months” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 fv9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עָשָׂ֣ה הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ & מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 This was a second feast that the king hosted. He likely did this to thank the people who had worked so hard in hosting the first feast. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1:5 mj16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֨ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֜ה 1 The expression in this case seems to refer specifically to the royal **citadel** from which the city got its name. This second feast would not have been for everyone in the entire city. It was specifically for the people who served the king in the citadel and who had worked so hard over the previous six months hosting the first feast. Alternate translation: “for every man who worked for him in the palace at Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:5 qet7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 Here, **found** is an idiom that means could be found or were there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:5 qet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who worked for him in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:5 qey1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּ֧דוֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָ֛ן 1 The person telling this story is referring to the staff of the palace by speaking of two extreme parts of it, the most important and the least important people who worked there, in order to include everyone in between. You could just explain this meaning, as UST does. Alternate translation: “from the most important official to the least important servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1:5 qey3 שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 The story does not suggest that this was an unusually long time by saying, “for many days.” But you could also say something like “a whole week” to show that this was a generous gesture of thanks on the part of the king. Alternate translation: “another feast that lasted seven days”
1:6 qey5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 These **linens** were curtains that were hung in the courtyard. **Cotton** refers to the white color of some of them. So this means white and blue curtains. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:6 qey7 ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 You can specify at the beginning of this verse that the location being described is the same as in the previous verse: “In the courtyard, white and blue curtains.”
1:6 qey9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠חַבְלֵי־ב֣וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן 1 **Byssus** means “white linen” and it is used to describe the white color of some of these cords. So this means white and purple cords. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:6 qru1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִטּ֣וֹת ׀ זָהָ֣ב וָ⁠כֶ֗סֶף 1 You can specify that these couches were there for the guests to recline on while they ate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 asn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown רִֽצְפַ֥ת 1 This word probably refers to a mosaic floor made of inlaid pieces of colorful precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:6 eyi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בַּהַט 1 This is a kind of red and purple stone that contains pieces of crystal. You could call it “feldspar” or something descriptive like “red marble.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:6 qru3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וָ⁠שֵׁ֖שׁ 1 This is a white precious stone. You could identify it as “alabaster.” Alternatively, while it is not exactly the same thing as marble, your readers would get the right idea if you called it “white marble.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:6 qru5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠סֹחָֽרֶת 1 This word probably refers to a black marble that was used to create borders around mosaics. You could call this “black marble,” or you could just say that the floor contained “another precious stone.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:7 urm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַשְׁקוֹת֙ 1 The abstract noun **serving** refers to how the drinks were served at the banquet. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “The attendants served wine.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 qru7 וְ⁠כֵלִ֖ים מִ⁠כֵּלִ֣ים שׁוֹנִ֑ים 1 This could mean that “no two of them were alike.” But you could also just say that the wine was served in “various kinds of golden cups.”
1:7 r6ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 This means that King Ahasuerus himself paid for all the wine that the guests drank at his seven-day feast in Susa, and the wine came from his personal supply. Alternate translation: “the king was very generous with the royal wine” or “the king showed a great willingness to give” or “the king provided all of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 qru9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 This probably means special fine wine that only the king could acquire and afford. You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “royal wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 wpq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the king himself, viewed through his action of giving. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:8 qtu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁתִיָּ֥ה כַ⁠דָּ֖ת 1 The abstract noun **drinking** refers here not to the action of drinking, but to the guidelines for serving drinks that the king had established for the banquet. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus had established this rule for all his household attendants who served the wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 g5gu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֵ֣ין אֹנֵ֑ס 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) No one would be stopped from drinking even if the attendants thought they had already had enough. Alternate translation: “there was to be no restriction on drinking” (2) There would be no requirement to drink. Alternate translation: “no one must be forced to drink” Either way, this was another sign of the generosity that the king showed as he hosted this banquet to thank the people who worked for him. Either he was: (1) allowing them to drink as much as they wanted to, or (2) not requiring them to eat and drink everything that was served at a banquet as guests of the king would usually be expected to do. You could say explicitly at the beginning of the verse that the king was giving his guests a special privilege. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:8 f6px rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֣ן ׀ יִסַּ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ עַ֚ל כָּל־רַ֣ב בֵּית֔⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 This explains why no one had to drink if they did not want to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could give this explanation (the reason) before the result that it accounts for, using a connecting word like “so.” You could say, “The king had established for every overseer of his house to do according to the desire of man by man, so the drinking was according to the law, ‘There is no compulsion.’” Alternate translation: “the king made the attendants who served the wine follow this rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:8 qtu3 לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “the king wanted every guest to be able to drink as much as he wanted” or “all the guests could drink as little or as much as they wanted”
1:8 jdr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 This is an idiom that means “everyone.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:9 qtu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous גַּ֚ם 1 This introduces something else that was happening at the same time. You can indicate this by saying something like “during this time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
1:9 qtu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 You can explain that she was the wife of Ahasuerus by saying, “Queen Vashti**,** the king’s wife” or “his wife.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1:9 qtu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next one. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:9 qti1 מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה נָשִׁ֑ים 1 This could mean the women who served in the palace, the wives of the men who were officers and servants, or both. You could say, “a feast for the wives of the men who attended” or “for the women who worked in the palace.”
1:9 qti3 בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “the royal palace where King Ahasuerus lived”
1:9 qti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective royal. Alternate translation: “royal palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:10 jv7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “after six days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
1:10 le6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כְּ⁠ט֥וֹב לֵב־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בַּ⁠יָּ֑יִן 1 Here, **heart** figuratively means the action of thinking or feeling. Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was in a good mood from drinking wine” or “when the king was drunk with wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:10 dcb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לִ֠⁠מְהוּמָן בִּזְּתָ֨א חַרְבוֹנָ֜א בִּגְתָ֤א וַ⁠אֲבַגְתָא֙ זֵתַ֣ר וְ⁠כַרְכַּ֔ס 1 These are names of seven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:10 ens5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּ֣רִיסִ֔ים 1 This term occurs a dozen times in the story. It describes male royal officials who served as guardians for the women who lived in the palace. They were both guardians of the door, to keep unwanted people out of the women’s quarters, and guardians of the women inside, to take care of them and look after their needs. (As we learn in 2:21, some of these officials also protected the king’s private quarters.) As we see here, and as will also be seen in 2:14 and 2:16, their duties included escorting women from place to place. The term likely indicates that, in keeping with the practices of the time, these men were castrated because their work brought them into such close contact with the king’s wives and concubines. If your language has a term for such an official and you think your readers would recognize it, you could use it. Otherwise, you could use a term that describes the role that these officials played in the royal court. Alternate translation: “guardians” or “officials” or “castrated servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:10 qti7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 This is background information to explain who these men were. Alternate translation: “who attended him personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:10 jdr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that these seven men served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:11 qti9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְ֠⁠הָבִיא 1 This is the beginning of the instructions that King Ahasuerus gave to the seven eunuchs he summoned in verse 10. You can make this explicit by saying, “He told them to bring.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 jdr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus wanted Queen Vashti to come personally into his presence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:11 asd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective by saying, “wearing her royal crown.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:11 asd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 Ahasuerus likely wanted Vashti to wear her queen’s crown so that everyone would know that she was his wife. You could say that explicitly. (For the possible reasons why he wanted them to know this, see the next note.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 asd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background לְ⁠הַרְא֨וֹת הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ אֶת־יָפְיָ֔⁠הּ 1 Everything Ahasuerus did at his banquets was to show how rich and powerful he was. He seems to have believed that having a very beautiful wife was one more thing that proved he was a great man. So he wanted everyone to see how beautiful Vashti was. You can put this second in the verse, after explaining that Vashti was a very beautiful woman, because it accounts for what happens afterwards, when the king sends his seven personal servants to bring her in to his banquet. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:11 asd7 הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ 1 This might mean “his guests, especially the officials.”
1:11 asd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it is the reason that explains everything else that happens afterward in the verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:11 qvk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 Alternate translation: “she was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:12 asf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 You can put the events in chronological order and say first that the eunuchs told Vashti what the king had commanded and then say that she refused to come**.** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
1:12 asf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 If your language needs to give a reason why she refused, it is most likely because she did not want a group of drunken men staring at her lustfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:12 b57q בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “at the king’s command” or “what the king wanted”
1:12 asf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the eunuchs themselves, viewed through their action of telling Vashti what the king had commanded. Alternation translation: “when those servants told Queen Vashti what the king wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:12 kp6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:12 asf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַ⁠יִּקְצֹ֤ף הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ מְאֹ֔ד וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. You could combine them as UST does by saying, “The king became so angry that he could barely contain himself.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1:12 bsd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here the story uses a metaphor that pictures the king’s anger as **a fire that burned inside of him**. If your language has a different word picture that it uses to describe extreme anger, you can use that here. If not, you can translate plainly, “his anger continued to increase.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 asf9 לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים 1 This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”
1:13 g9fe יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים 1 This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”
1:13 x2u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1:13 adf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:13 jd11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 adf3 יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין 1 This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.
1:14 adf5 וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”
1:14 cc44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן 1 These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:14 jd13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **To see the face of** is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:14 adf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See:[[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:15 j6sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:15 ics9 כְּ⁠דָת֙ & עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because … ?”
1:15 adf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
1:15 jd15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that the eunuchs were the ones who told Queen Vashti what King Ahasuerus had commanded her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:15 adg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:16 adg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מְמוּכָ֗ן לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Memukan was speaking in the presence of the king and of the other officials. Alternate translation: “then Memukan spoke so that both the king and the officials could hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:16 yqr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ֣⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֕ר בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 This means all the different people groups that were living in the empire. You could say, “all the people groups in all the provinces that King Ahasuerus rules” or more generally, “every person who lives in the entire empire of King Ahasuerus.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:16 ss5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מְמוּכָ֗ן 1 See how you translated this man’s name in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:16 adg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 Memukan speaks of **the king** in third person as a form of respect. If you want to portray him as speaking primarily to the king because he is answering the king’s question, you could have him say, “in all the provinces that you rule” or “every person who lives in your entire empire.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:17 jd17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 This introduces the reason why Memukan says that Queen Vashti has done wrong against all the men in the kingdom and not only against King Ahasuerus. To show that, you can begin with “This is what will happen.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:17 gn4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּה֙ עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 To emphasize his point, Memukan exaggerates and says that every single woman in the empire will hear about Queen Vashti refusing to obey King Ahasuerus. You could say, as UST does, that “women all over the empire” will hear about what the queen did. Or you could preserve Memukan’s manner of speaking by saying, “every woman” will hear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:17 jd19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠הַבְז֥וֹת בַּעְלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that the women will treat their husbands with disrespect and not obey them. Alternate translation: “women will despise their husbands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:17 adg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠אָמְרָ֗⁠ם הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 The implication is that they will go on to say, “So if even the queen can disobey the king, why should I have to obey my husband?” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:17 adg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 The women will stop respecting their husbands after they hear about this. You can put this report about what Queen Vashti did first, before “women will stop respecting their husbands,” because it is the reason that explains that result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:17 jd21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means the Queen Vashti refused to come into the presence of King Ahasuerus when he summoned her during the feast. See how you translated this in verse 11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:18 afg1 וְֽ⁠הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 Alternate translation: “even today” or “even this very day”
1:18 afg3 שָׂר֣וֹת פָּֽרַס־וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 It becomes clear later in the verse that Memukan is speaking of the wives of the king’s officials, and you could communicate that here by saying, “the wives of the officials who govern Persia and Media.” But the term “noblewomen” indicates that they also had high status of their own, so you could also call them “the leading women of Persia and Media.”
1:18 afg5 דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “what the queen has done”
1:18 afg7 תֹּאמַ֣רְנָה 1 This means that they will “talk back” or “disobey.” Alternate translation: “refuse to obey”
1:18 afg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְ⁠כֹ֖ל שָׂרֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means the husbands of the noblewomen. The implication may be, “They will disobey their husbands even though they are officials of the king.” You could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:18 u6d7 וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י בִּזָּי֥וֹן וָ⁠קָֽצֶף 1 This could mean either that they will treat their husbands with disrespect, and this will make their “husbands angry with them” or that “they will be angry with their husbands and treat them with contempt.”
1:18 afh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י 1 This could mean that the husbands will be as furious “as much as they can bear.” But you could also say, “That will be bad enough by itself, even if the news does not spread any farther.” If you think that is the meaning, you can say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:19 afh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:19 d8qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it pleases you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:19 jd25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that the decree will come from the king himself. Alternate translation: “you should personally issue a royal decree” or “you should write a decree yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:19 afh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective “royal.” Alternate translation: “royal decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 jd23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:19 afh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִכָּתֵ֛ב 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “you should write a decree yourself” or “command your scribes to write a decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:19 mh1a וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֑וֹר 1 Alternate translation: “these laws never become invalid” or “can never be changed”
1:19 jd27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person תָב֜וֹא & לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “never come into your presence again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:19 jd29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy תָב֜וֹא & לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Queen Vashti will never again come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “never again come before King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:19 jd31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ יִתֵּ֣ן הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠רְעוּתָ֖⁠הּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You can show the same meaning with a verb that addresses a singular “you” and indicates that Memukan is offering advice, not giving a command when he say, “choose another woman to be queen.” Alternate translation: “the king can give her position as queen to some other woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:19 afh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an expression such as “her royal position” or “her position as queen.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 afj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 Memukan means that the next queen should be “better than” Vashti by obeying all of the king’s commands. You could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 v9l3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁמַע֩ פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when everyone … hears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:20 des3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person: “When they hear what you have commanded.” Alternate translation: “when they hear the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:20 jd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶֽׁר־יַעֲשֶׂה֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 Even though the decree of Ahasuerus applied only to Vashti directly, implicitly it meant that all wives had to obey their husbands or else their husbands could banish and divorce them as well. You can say this explicitly at the end of the verse by saying, “because if any wife disobeys her husband, he can banish and divorce her, just as you did to Vashti.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 afj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “for all your kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:20 p8nz כִּ֥י רַבָּ֖ה הִ֑יא 1 Alternate translation: “even though your empire is very large”
1:20 afj5 הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֗ים יִתְּנ֤וּ יְקָר֙ לְ⁠בַעְלֵי⁠הֶ֔ן 1 Alternate translation: “women will respect and obey their husbands”
1:20 be9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּד֖וֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָֽן 1 This expression figuratively refers to all of the husbands in the empire. By naming both extremes, it includes everyone in between. You could just give the meaning, as UST does: “every husband in the empire.” Alternate translation: “this will be true for both the most important man and the least important man in the empire, and everyone in between” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1:21 afj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּיטַב֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 Like “if it is good to the king” in verse 19, this is an idiom that means the king thought this was a good idea or this advice pleased the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:21 afj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֑ים 1 Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus and all the officials who heard Memukan’s advice thought that his suggestion was a good idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:21 agj1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר מְמוּכָֽן 1 This means that King Ahasuerus wrote a law proclaiming what Memukan had suggested.
1:21 p5us rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מְמוּכָֽן 1 Translate his name as in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:22 agj3 וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֤ח סְפָרִים֙ אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **He** means King Ahasuerus. This is saying that the king sent letters to every province in his empire.
1:22 jd37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 This is an idiom that means “every province” or every single province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:22 agj5 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
1:22 jd39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 This is an idiom that means “every people group” or every single people group. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:22 jd41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:22 jj9n לִ⁠הְי֤וֹת כָּל־אִישׁ֙ שֹׂרֵ֣ר בְּ⁠בֵית֔⁠וֹ 1 This meant that all men should have complete authority over their wives and their children.
1:22 jd43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:22 agj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 The implication is that the husband ought to be able to give orders to his wife in his own native language and that she should understand and obey him, even if she had to learn his language to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:intro eb4q 0 # Esther 2 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Esther becomes queen\n\nEsther was humble and took the advice of the royal officials about how to dress for her time with the king. The king chose Esther to be the new queen.\n\n### Mordecai warns the king against a plot\n\nEsther’s cousin, Mordecai, discovered that two men planned to kill the king. He told Esther, who then told the king. She also gave Mordecai credit for telling her.
2:1 dpc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 This introduces a new event that happened some time later, but we do not know how much later. You can show this with a phrase like “After some time had passed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:1 e4lp כְּ⁠שֹׁ֕ךְ חֲמַ֖ת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was not angry any more” or “when King Ahasuerus became less angry”
2:1 agj9 זָכַ֤ר אֶת־וַשְׁתִּי֙ 1 This means that he started to think about Vashti. He probably thought about the things that he liked about her, meaning that he missed her.
2:1 xpt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 This refers to Vashti’s refusal to obey Ahasuerus, and to the decision he made in [1:21](../01/21.md) that she could never come into his presence again. This could actually mean that when he thought about Vashti and what she had done, he regretted the decision that he had made about her. But there was nothing he could do to bring her back because the laws of the empire could not be changed. You could explain all or some of this in your translation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 agk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:2 agk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו 1 These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in [1:13](../01/13.md), but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:2 agk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת 1 Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:2 s4hv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ 1 **Them** refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:2 zi03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ 1 The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:2 jd45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה 1 As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:3 g9vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:3 jd47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom טוֹבַ֨ת מַרְאֶ֜ה 1 As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:3 xqf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֤ן הַ⁠בִּירָה֙ 1 In this context, this expression probably means “to the palace here in Susa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:3 j4ka בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 This means the harem for virgins, the place where the young women would live and receive beauty treatments before they were taken to the king (see verses 13 and 14).
2:3 d754 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “let Hegai, the king’s official, who is in charge of the women, take care of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:3 jd49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Hegai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:3 lf71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הֵגֶ֛א 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:3 jd51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your eunuch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:3 agk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס 1 See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the official of” or “the administrator of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:3 agk9 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “who is in charge of the women who live there.”
2:3 w1ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 This term seems to refer to a specific substance that women would put on their face or other parts of their body to make themselves more beautiful. From verse 12, it appears to mean lotions that were used along with oils and perfumes. But here, this one aspect of a woman’s beauty treatment seems to be used to refer to all of it, so you could call these “beauty treatments.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:4 jd53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תִּיטַב֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying something such as “the young woman you like the best.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:4 lh3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus could decide which young woman he liked the best and make her queen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 jd55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 Here, **eyes** have the same figurative meaning. The phrase indicates that King Ahasuerus thought that this suggestion was a good idea. Alternate translation: “The king found their suggestion appealing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 zxc1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ כֵּֽן 1 Alternate translation: “so he followed the suggestion”
2:5 h6z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants אִ֣ישׁ יְהוּדִ֔י 1 This introduces Mordecai as a new character in the story. Use your language’s way of introducing a new character. This expression means a Jewish man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2:5 uu9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 Here the phrase likely indicates the city rather than the palace, that is, the capital city of Susa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:5 zxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:5 q2rz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֶּ֣ן יָאִ֧יר בֶּן־שִׁמְעִ֛י בֶּן־קִ֖ישׁ 1 These are men’s names. Jair, Shimei, and Kish are Mordecai’s male ancestors. You could say, “Mordecai was the son of Jair, who was the son of Shimei, who was the son of Kish,” or see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:5 kw5t אִ֥ישׁ יְמִינִֽי 1 While this likely refers to Kish, it is necessarily also true of Mordecai, and you could put it second in the verse. That way Mordecai’s nationality would come first, then his tribe, and then his family and clan. Alternate translation: “from the tribe of Benjamin”
2:6 zxc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם עִם־הַ⁠גֹּלָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הָגְלְתָ֔ה עִ֖ם יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 The story now tells about something that happened many years before. This is background information that explains how this Jewish family came to live in Susa. You can introduce this by saying something like, “Many years earlier.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:6 z7fe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon had taken Kish away from Jerusalem along with some other captives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:6 egm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 You can bring this information forward from later in the verse because it provides background information that helps identify Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:6 zxc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought the people that he took away from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “had taken Kish away from Jerusalem … and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:6 zxc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous עִ֖ם 1 This means that the two things happened at the same time. You can indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time that he took.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:6 ch1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה 1 In the historical passage where this event is described (2 Kings 24:8–17), this king is called Jehoiachin. That was another name by which he was known. You can call him Jehoiachin here in Esther if you think that would help your readers recognize him better. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:6 zxv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 You can say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought this king when he took him away from Jerusalem. For example, you can say, “Nebuchadnezzar … took King Jehoiachin of Judah away from Jerusalem and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:7 zxv3 וַ⁠יְהִ֨י 1 The story now returns to talking about Mordecai. If it is helpful for your readers, you can specify his name, saying, “Now, Mordecai.”
2:7 hfm9 בַּת־דֹּד֔⁠וֹ 1 If your language has a specific term for this relationship, you can use it. For example, you can say, “his cousin.” Alternate translation: “his uncle’s daughter”
2:7 m9kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הֲדַסָּ֗ה הִ֤יא אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 Here the story is indicating that this woman’s Hebrew name was Hadassah and her Persian name was Esther. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:7 zxv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 This is a woman’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:7 ccb1 אֵ֥ין לָ֖⁠הּ אָ֣ב וָ⁠אֵ֑ם 1 You could say simply that “she was an orphan,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “both her father and mother had died”
2:7 jd59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְ⁠הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֤ה יְפַת־תֹּ֨אַר֙ וְ⁠טוֹבַ֣ת מַרְאֶ֔ה 1 These two phrases mean something similar. Separately, they could be saying that Esther was both sexually mature and very attractive. But taken together, they mean that, overall, she was very pleasant to look at. You could combine them, as UST does, and say that she was “exceptionally attractive” Alternate translation: “she had a lovely body and a beautiful face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:7 skt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠מ֤וֹת אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ וְ⁠אִמָּ֔⁠הּ לְקָחָ֧⁠הּ מָרְדֳּכַ֛י ל֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַֽת 1 This is background information explaining the relationship between Mordecai and Esther. You can move it to right after the place where Esther is introduced by name because it describes what happened in the past, before Esther became a beautiful young woman. Alternate translation: “after her father and her mother had died, Mordecai had adopted her as his own daughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:8 zxv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 After providing this background information about Mordecai and Esther in verses 5–7, the story now tells what happened as a result of these facts, when the provincial officers described in verse 3 began sending young women to the harem. That is, the story tells what happened to Esther because her family was living in the Persian empire and she was very attractive. Use your language’s way of showing that the events are now moving forward after giving background information. Alternate translation: “and so this is what happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:8 zcv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 This indicates that two actions took place at the same time. You should indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:8 zcv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “when the messengers proclaimed the king’s decree and the scribes published the king’s law.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:8 c52i דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 This refers to King Ahasuerus banishing Queen Vashti from his presence.
2:8 zcv5 וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ 1 This refers to King Ahasuerus commanding that men would have complete authority over their wives.
2:8 zcv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע 1 You could also say where they did this action. Alternate translation: “Messengers went throughout the empire and proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:8 m3ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:8 jd65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֖ה 1 Here again, this likely means “the capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:8 mbk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֣ד הֵגָ֑י 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. You could say that the officers “put them under the custody of Hegai” or that “Hegai began to take care of them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:8 zcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע & וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ & וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 This means that Esther was brought to the harem of King Ahaserus at the same time as other young women were also being brought to the harem. You can say, “they brought Esther at the same time” or “they also brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:8 n3zc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they brought Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:8 zcb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 You can explain why this happened. For example, you can say, “Because Esther was exceptionally attractive, the officers also brought her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:8 zcb3 בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the king’s palace”
2:8 jd71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגַ֖י שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 As earlier in this verse, this means under the custody of Hegai or that Hegai also began to take care of her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:8 zcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 This means that Hegai took care of the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move this information to earlier in the verse when Hegai is first mentioned because it explains why the young women were brought to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:9 zcb7 וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 This means that Hegai found Esther attractive, and she obtained kindness from him or that Hegai was very impressed with Esther, and she won his favor. In other words, because he was so impressed with her, this made him want to do everything he could to help her. This is background information that explains why Hegai took the actions that are listed next.
2:9 zcb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that Hegai thought that Esther was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:9 f8i8 הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה 1 This means Esther. You should make sure that this is clear in your translation.
2:9 jd75 בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
2:9 jd77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. To say that she “lifted kindness before his face” is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, it could even suggest that Esther and Hegai became friends. Alternate translation: “she won his favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:9 jd79 לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
2:9 abc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֶ֤י⁠הָ 1 Alternate translation: “her beauty treatments,” as in [2:3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:9 abc2 מָנוֹתֶ֨⁠הָ֙ 1 In context, this likely means that Hegai made sure that Esther was served good food that would keep her healthy.
2:9 abc3 שֶׁ֣בַע הַ⁠נְּעָר֔וֹת הָ⁠רְאֻי֥וֹת לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֖⁠הּ מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means that Hegai chose seven female servants from the king’s palace and assigned them to take care of Esther.
2:9 abc4 וַ⁠יְשַׁנֶּ֧⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתֶ֛י⁠הָ 1 **Her** means Esther, and **her young women** means the female attendants Hegai assigned to her.
2:10 abc6 לֹא־הִגִּ֣ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 This means that Esther had not told anyone this information about herself.
2:10 abc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does, and say something like “what people group she was from.” Alternate translation: “Esther did not tell anyone that she was a Jew, and she did not tell anyone who her relatives were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:10 abc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֧י מָרְדֳּכַ֛י צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 This is background information that explains why Esther did not tell anyone about her family or nationality. It might be helpful to your readers to state this at the beginning of the verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:10 abc9 צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 This means that Mordecai had gotten her to promise not to do it.
2:11 jd81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 Alternate translation: “every single day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:11 abd1 מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ 1 Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”
2:11 jd83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:11 abd2 בֵּית־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”
2:11 abd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result לָ⁠דַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:11 nz1p שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”
2:11 abd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:12 jcj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ 1 Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:12 jd85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom נַעֲרָ֨ה וְ⁠נַעֲרָ֜ה 1 Alternate translation: “each one of the young women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:12 abd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ תֹּר֩ & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא ׀ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ 1 Each of these young women was going to have sexual relations with the king and, as a result, legally become one of his concubines, that is, one of his secondary wives. As the story has already explained, he would then choose one of them to become his queen and primary wife. But the king would still provide for each of the concubines for the rest of her life; they would not be free to marry anyone else. This is something that the story’s original audience would have understood implicitly. you could say it explicitly if your readers need this information to understand the story: “Each young woman in the harem, one at a time, was going to have sexual relations with King Ahasuerus and become one of his concubines” or “one of his secondary wives.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 p7i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown כְּ⁠דָ֤ת הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ 1 Here, **law** probably does not mean a legal decree, but rather a standard regimen that had been developed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:12 abd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background כִּ֛י כֵּ֥ן יִמְלְא֖וּ יְמֵ֣י מְרוּקֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 This phrase indicates that the story is now going to provide background information on how these treatments were done. It means, “This is how these women would spend the time preparing to go to the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:12 abd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שִׁשָּׁ֤ה חֳדָשִׁים֙ בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 This means that a woman’s attendants would rub her body with olive oil mixed with myrrh every day for six months. you could explain this in more detail if your readers need this information to understand the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 abd9 בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 This likely means “olive oil mixed with myrrh.”
2:12 zhd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּ⁠בְ⁠תַמְרוּקֵ֖י הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 This means lotions designed for women. In 2:3 and 2:9, this one specific part of the program seems to be used figuratively to mean all of it, and so in those verses it can be translated “beauty treatments.” But it should be translated with a specific term or phrase here, such as “women’s lotions” or “feminine ointments” because it is named along with oils and perfumes as one component of the treatment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:13 abd0 וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה 1 Alternate translation: “after a woman’s year of beauty treatments was completed”
2:13 abe0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 abe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 **Anything** most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 v133 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:13 xx9x בֵּ֥ית 2 Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
2:13 abe3 בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
2:14 abe4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה 1 She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in [1:11](../01/11.md). you could say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 ded5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה 1 It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 lq9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בֵּ֤ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ שֵׁנִ֔י 1 Alternate translations: “a different house for women” or “the harem for concubines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
2:14 yw63 אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “where Shaashgaz, the king’s servant in charge of the concubines, would take care of her”
2:14 ze74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. Just as Hegai was the overseer of the virgins, Shaashgaz was the overseer of the concubines, so he would be the one responsible for Esther while she was in the harem for concubines. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Shaashgaz” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 q5yx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז 1 This is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:14 abe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this term, **eunuch**, in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” rather than “of the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:14 abe6 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 This means that Shaashgaz was the official who *took care of the concubines* or who was responsible for the concubines.
2:14 abe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 As a **concubine**, the young woman was one of the king’s secondary wives. She would live in this harem for the rest of her life. She was not free to return to her family or to marry anybody else. If it would help your readers to understand the story, you could explain all or part of this to your readers here, if you did not do so in 2:12 or 2:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 abe8 לֹא־תָב֥וֹא עוֹד֙ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 In verse 12, the Note mentioned that “go to the king” meant “have sexual relations with the king.” But for this occurrence of the expression, it is appropriate to use a more general phrase such as “visit the king” because there could be other, more social reasons for a further visit. The woman would now be a secondary wife, and the king would only send for her if he decided that he enjoyed being with her. Alternate translation: “She would not go and see the king again”
2:14 abe9 חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ 1 This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”
2:14 abf0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:15 fiy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12-14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:15 jk51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת 1 This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:15 mg8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲבִיחַ֣יִל 1 This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:15 qx3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2:15 vw9r אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”
2:15 abf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 As the king’s personal servant, **Hegai** would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you could make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:15 abf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:15 abf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you decided to translate the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” for “of the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:15 z519 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:15 jd87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י 1 Here, **eyes** is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 jd89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 This phrase can mean either **every man or every person who saw her**. Alternate translation: “every man who saw her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:16 jd91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֨ח אֶסְתֵּ֜ר 1 You can say this with an active form by saying, for example, “The king’s servants brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:16 abf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns אֶל־בֵּ֣ית מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 You can use an adjective to translate the abstract noun **royalty.** For example, you can say, “in his royal palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 jd92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “in month ten” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
2:16 jr5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 **Tebeth** is the name of the tenth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “that is, the month of Tebeth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
2:16 abf6 חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court. But for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given.
2:16 abf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 You could convert the Hebrew days and months into approximate dates on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to provide the Hebrew days and months. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:16 x6yg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠מַלְכוּתֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
2:17 p3s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֶּאֱהַ֨ב הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֶת־אֶסְתֵּר֙ מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠בְּתוּלֹ֑ת 1 These two phrases mean almost the same thing. The information is given twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Ahasuerus was completely convinced that Esther was the one he should make his queen**.** “More than all the virgins” basically duplicates the meaning of “more than all the women,” so, if this duplication would be confusing in your language, you don’t need to include both phrases, or you could say, “more than all of them” for the second phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:17 abf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 This means all the other women who had been brought to the king and who became his concubines. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:17 bcu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. See how you translated similar phrases in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:15](../02/15.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus was very impressed with both Esther’s appearance and her personality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:17 abf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 **Favor** and **kindness** mean similar things and are probably used together here to strengthen a single idea. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased with her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:17 jd93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 sym3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֤שֶׂם כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ בְּ⁠רֹאשָׁ֔⁠הּ 1 Ahasuerus did this to show that he was making Esther his queen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2:17 abg0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 To translate the abstract noun **royalty**, you can use an adjective such as a “royal” crown. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:18 abg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה גָד֗וֹל 1 The king did this to celebrate Esther becoming the queen. You can say this explicitly. For example, you can say, “Then, to celebrate her becoming the queen, the king hosted a great feast.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:18 b1hd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 You could indicate to your readers this is the name that Ahasuerus gave to the feast, for example, “He called it ‘Esther’s Feast.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:18 ufm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וַ⁠הֲנָחָ֤ה לַ⁠מְּדִינוֹת֙ עָשָׂ֔ה 1 This was probably a “tax holiday,” that is, a temporary elimination of taxes. For a time, the provinces did not have to send in the usual taxes to the king. You could say something like “he proclaimed a temporary reprieve from taxes for all the provinces of his empire.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:18 jd95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus personally gave lavish gifts to the guests at this feast. You could say something like “with royal generosity” or “with great willingness to give” or “with generosity that only a king can give.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:19 g38f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Since this happened some time after Esther’s Feast, you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
2:19 p842 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 The most likely explanation for this is that Ahasuerus decided he would like to have more concubines. you could say this explicitly if it will help the readers to understand the story. He probably believed that having a large number of concubines was another thing that would show he was a great king. To do so, you could add: “because Ahasuerus decided that he would like to have more concubines.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:19 abg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “at the time when the king’s officers were gathering virgins for a second time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:19 ang3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 This indicates that the information about Mordecai explains what he was doing at this same time. You can use a phrase such as “during this time” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:19 a23f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֥ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Possible meanings are: (1) **Sitting at the king’s gate** is an idiom meaning that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) Mordecai sat there so he could hear about how Esther was doing from the many people who passed through the gate.
2:19 i8in בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s house” or “the gate to the king’s palace”
2:20 abg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מֽוֹלַדְתָּ⁠הּ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עַמָּ֔⁠הּ 1 These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does. Alternate translation: “who her relatives were or that she was a Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:20 fb39 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 Alternate translation: “just as Mordecai had instructed her” or “as Mordecai had made her promise” or “because Mordecai had warned her not to tell anyone”
2:21 vi16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֔ם 1 This resumes the story after the background information that is provided in verse 20. Indicate this in the way that your language resumes a story after giving background information, such as with a connecting phrase like “during that time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
2:21 abg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 It is implicit in the story that Mordecai heard the two men talking who are named right afterwards. You can say this explicitly if it helps the readers to understand this part of the story. To do so, add: “he heard two men talking.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:21 abg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 As in verse 19, this is likely an idiom that means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate where officials met to make important decisions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:21 y2vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִּגְתָ֨ן וָ⁠תֶ֜רֶשׁ 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:21 abg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שְׁנֵֽי־סָרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). For the phrase **of the king**, you can say “royal.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:21 abh0 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֣י הַ⁠סַּ֔ף 1 In this case the men were not guardians of one of the harems but guardians of the king’s private rooms. You could say, “they guarded the doorway to the king’s private rooms” or “they protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters.”
2:21 abh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקְשׁוּ֙ 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they were plotting” or “they wanted to find a way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 jd97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. You could say, “they were planning to assassinate him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:22 y7tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּוָּדַ֤ע הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 You can say this with an active form, for example by saying, “Mordecai found out what they were planning.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:22 abh2 וַ⁠יַּגֵּ֖ד לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 This means that he told Queen Esther about it somehow.
2:22 dgp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 This expression means that Esther passed the information along to King Ahasuerus on Mordecai’s behalf or that she told the king the information had come from Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:23 abh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
2:23 ld4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:23 abh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:23 y28j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or “wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:23 g9nh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:23 abh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים 1 This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:23 abh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:intro zb26 0 # Esther 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Haman plots against the Jews\n\nMordecai was told to prostrate himself before Haman. This would be considered to be worship. But for a Jew, it was wrong to worship someone other than Yahweh. Because of this, he refused to do it. This made Haman angry, so he decided to kill all the Jews in the Persian Empire. Haman was a descendant of Agag, a king of the Amalekite people. The Amalekites became the enemies of the Jews during the exodus (Exodus 17:8-16). Moses told the people that they would need to destroy them (Deuteronomy 25:17-19), and later God commanded Saul to destroy them (1 Samuel 15:2-3). Samuel killed King Agag (1 Samuel 15:33), but the Amalekites were never completely destroyed (1 Samuel 30:17). Both Mordecai and Haman were probably very aware that their people were enemies.
3:1 mm4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a connecting phrase that introduces a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
3:1 abh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 This event happened some time after Esther became queen, and you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
3:1 ir5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הָמָ֧ן 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:1 abh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 These are the names of Haman’s father and Haman’s people group. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:1 abh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit גִּדַּל֩ & אֲחַשְׁוֵר֜וֹשׁ אֶת־הָמָ֧ן 1 This means that Ahasuerus **promoted** Haman. It’s implied in the story that Haman was already one of Ahasuerus’s officials, but that he was now being promoted to a higher position. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:1 abi0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם֙ אֶת־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that the king was making Haman very powerful. You could combine them and say something like, “the king gave Haman a very high position that was over all of his other officials.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:1 pl9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to advance or promote a person to a higher, more important position than they held previously. Alternate translation: “he gave him a more important position” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:1 ptm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 Here, **seat of authority** means Haman’s position or status in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:1 abi1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you can express the same idea with a concrete noun for this whole phrase. For example, you can say, “his position.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:1 abi2 מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר אִתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 **Him** in this phrase may refer to the king. You could say that “the king promoted him above his other officials” or “gave him more authority than all of his other officials” or that “Haman became more important than all of his other officials.”
3:2 abi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, the **gate of the king**, probably the entrance to the citadel, may figuratively represent the citadel itself, the place where these people served the king. The citadel, in turn, would represent everyone who served the king. So you could say just “all the king’s other servants.” However, this may also be a reference to the specific group of officials who were stationed at the gate, the way Mordecai was. Alternate translation: “the royal officials who were stationed at the palace gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:2 abi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ & כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ לְ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 The servants were required to do this as a way of honoring him whenever Haman walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:2 e25k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3:2 abi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:2 fg8v וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 This means bowing down all the way to the ground.
3:2 jd99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:2 abi6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:2 abi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3:2 abi8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:3 abi9 עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this expression at the beginning of [3:2](../03/02.md).
3:3 abj0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ & לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. You could say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:3 abj1 מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”
3:4 jd3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ 1 This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:4 jd1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 This expression means “every day.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:4 abj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יְהִ֗י ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ & וְ⁠לֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 Here, **he did not listen** means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:4 uek4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠הָמָ֗ן לִ⁠רְאוֹת֙ הֲ⁠יַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 In this context, **standing** figuratively means to survive a challenge, and **words** means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:4 abj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:4 abj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:5 abj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן 1 Here, **seeing** figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:5 njt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3:5 wk8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה 1 Here, **Haman’s rage** is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 k5h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:6 abj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:6 abj7 וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז 1 **Despise** in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.
3:6 jd9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 abj8 לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְ⁠בַדּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”
3:6 j11r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ 1 As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:6 abj9 כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥ידוּ ל֖⁠וֹ אֶת־עַ֣ם מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 **They** means the other royal officials. **Him** refers to Haman. **The people of Mordecai** means the Jews. Mordecai had told these officials that he would not bow down to Haman because Jews worshiped only God. So this means that the other officials had told Haman that Mordecai was not bowing down to him because he was a Jew.
3:6 hue9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֣שׁ הָמָ֗ן לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֧יד 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means trying to do something. In this context, it means that Haman decided that he would try to kill all the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 abk0 בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכ֥וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֖וֹשׁ 1 This means in the entire empire that King Ahasuerus ruled.
3:6 abk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים & עַ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 These two phrases refer to the same group of people. The repetition emphasizes how great the threat was to their existence. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “all of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai’s people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:7 zl12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙ 1 Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3:7 wyv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 **Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
3:7 abk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 As in [2:16](../02/16.md), you could convert the Hebrew month into an approximate time on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to give the Hebrew month. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:7 tw99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֔ה לַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translations: “during the twelfth year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” or “when King Ahasuerus had reigned for about twelve years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3:7 g4lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:7 abk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 A **lot** was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:7 abk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:7 abk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:7 j13r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:7 j15r מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.
3:7 j17r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:7 ih4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
3:7 abk6 שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 See how you decided in [2:16](../02/16.md) and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.
3:7 abk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:7 k3vd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3:8 abk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:8 aig9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers יֶשְׁנ֣⁠וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד 1 **He** refers to the king, and **one people** refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3:8 p4a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מְפֻזָּ֤ר וּ⁠מְפֹרָד֙ 1 These two words mean almost the same thing. Haman uses the repetition to emphasize that the Jews are everywhere throughout the empire and so their influence, which he says is bad, will affect everyone. You could combine these words as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:8 abk9 בֵּ֣ין הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל מְדִינ֣וֹת מַלְכוּתֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 Haman is saying that the Jews are mixed in with all the other peoples, and they live in every province.
3:8 abl0 וְ⁠דָתֵי⁠הֶ֞ם שֹׁנ֣וֹת מִ⁠כָּל־עָ֗ם וְ⁠אֶת־דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֵינָ֣⁠ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 Haman is saying that the Jews have their own set of laws, and he is accusing them of not obeying the king’s laws as a result.
3:8 r34x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could have him say, “your laws.” Or you could indicate this respect another way by having Haman begin by saying, “Your Majesty.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:8 bf9g וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֵין־שֹׁוֶ֖ה לְ⁠הַנִּיחָֽ⁠ם 1 Haman is saying, “It is not good for you to allow them to live in your empire.” This can also be stated without the negative. Alternate translation: “the king should remove them” or “you should remove them”
3:8 j19r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying, “not good for you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:9 abl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:9 abl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 See how you decided to translate this idiom in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” or “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:9 abl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֖ב 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who would do the action. For example, you could say, “the king could write a decree” or “you could write a decree.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:9 abl4 לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 This means that the decree would say that all the Jews should be killed.
3:9 eh3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֶשְׁקוֹל֙ עַל־יְדֵי֙ עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) Haman could mean that the king’s men will be able to collect a huge amount of money from the plunder that they would get from the Jews. Referring to the weight would be a way of saying, “I guarantee that it will be at least that much.” This reasoning agrees with 3:13, where the king’s letter specifies that those who kill the Jews can take their plunder. Alternate translation: “we will get so much plunder that the officers you send will be able to bring back” (Also see UST) (2) “**Weigh out into the hands**” could be an idiom that means Haman himself will pay the officers who will put the plan into effect. Haman will not do this personally, but it means that he will take responsibility for paying them from his own resources. Alternate translation: “From my own resources I will pay … to the men who do the work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:9 lhv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 This would be worth over $300 million at current prices today. But since prices vary over time, if you expressed the value in modern measurements, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate. Instead you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the talent, and explain in a note that a talent was equivalent to about 30 kilograms. Alternatively, you could specify the weight of the silver in the text, as UST does in metric tons. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
3:9 vm59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 The **talent** was the largest unit of money and **10,000** was the largest number in the counting system of the time. It is possible that Haman used these terms to represent a very large, but not precise, amount. Alternate translation: “a huge amount of silver” or “enormous amounts of silver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:9 abl5 עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 This could mean: (1) those who work for the king in general (administrators) or (2) more specifically the officers whom Ahasuerus would send around the empire to organize the killing of the Jews.
3:9 abl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could also have him speak of “your royal treasuries.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:10 abl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 The implication is that Ahasuerus thought that Haman’s suggestion was a good idea and he agreed to it. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king agreed that this was a good idea, so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:10 abl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 **Giving the ring to Haman** showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
3:10 c9md rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:10 abm0 בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.
3:10 abm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
3:11 sz4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:11 abm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that **he can do whatever he wants to the Jews**. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:12 hx6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:12 t6qa rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 You can add “of that same year” to show that Haman did this right after Ahasuerus agreed to his plan. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the first month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
3:12 abm3 בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 You can put this information first because it places the event within the timeline of the story.
3:12 abm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה הָמָ֡ן 1 You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Haman dictated a letter to them” or “they wrote a decree containing all that Haman had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:12 abm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵֽי־הַ֠⁠מֶּלֶךְ 1 This seems to mean the officials of the king who served in the palace in the capital city, since they are distinguished from the provincial governors and the leaders of the people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:12 j23r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 This expression means every province**.** See how you translated this in 1:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:12 abm7 שָׂ֤רֵי עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “the leaders of each people group”
3:12 j25r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 This expression means every people group**.** See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:12 j27r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “to each province using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:12 abm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 The implication is that the scribes translated the letter and sent it to each province using its own alphabet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:12 j31r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 See how you translated this expression in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “and to each people group in its own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:12 j33r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** is a metonym meaning the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “according to its language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:12 abm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹשׁ֙ נִכְתָּ֔ב 1 There are two This could mean: (1) Here, **name** could mean the authority of the king. This would be saying that Haman’s letter had the same authority as it would have had if the king had sent it himself. Alternate translation: “Haman sent the letter under the king’s own authority” (2) However, this could also mean that Haman actually had the scribes sign the king’s name to the letter. Alternate translation: “they signed the king’s name at the end of the letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:12 lyf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נִכְתָּ֔ב וְ⁠נֶחְתָּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to show that he was sending the letter under the king’s own authority, Haman sealed each copy of the letter with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it,” or “the scribes signed the king’s name at the end of the letters. Then they sealed the letters with wax, and stamped the wax by using the king’s ring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:13 hxx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁל֨וֹחַ סְפָרִ֜ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “couriers delivered the letters.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:13 j34r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הָ⁠רָצִים֮ 1 Here, **hand** could mean two different things: (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the couriers carried the letters in their hands. Alternate translation: “couriers hand-delivered the documents” (2) “Hand” could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that couriers were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers gave the documents directly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:13 abn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 Haman did not send the letters to the provinces (the geographical territories) themselves. Rather, he sent them to the officials in every province in the empire. The story is using the word “province” to refer figuratively to these officials by something associated with them, the territories they ruled. Your translation should make clear that the letters were sent to people, not places. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:13 xs6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֡יד לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֣ד 1 These words mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is envisioned. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “completely destroy.” (A “doublet” can use more than two words. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:13 abn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִ⁠נַּ֨עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֜ן 1 This is a figure of speech that figuratively describes all of something by naming two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. You could express its meaning as UST does and say something like “every single one of them.” Alternate translation: “including young people and old people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
3:13 abn2 טַ֤ף וְ⁠נָשִׁים֙ 1 Alternate translation: “including the children and the women”
3:13 j35r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “on a single day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3:13 abn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 Implicitly, this means “the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:13 g5br rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 Alternate translation: “on day thirteen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3:13 j36r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “of month twelve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3:13 i5ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 This is the name of the twelfth month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you decided in 2:16 and 3:7 to express dates that the story gives according to the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
3:13 pbp1 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 This means that the letters also said that those who killed the Jews could take everything that belonged to them.
3:14 tj7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “The officials in every province presented a copy of the letter as the law.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:14 vga2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 This expression means each and every province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:14 l9w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב & גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to post copies where everyone could see them” or “the king commanded the officials to display copies of these letters where all the people could see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:14 f6dc לִ⁠הְי֥וֹת עֲתִדִ֖ים לַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 Alternate translations: “so that people would be ready to do on that day what the king had written in the letter” or “so that they would get ready to do what the letter said to do when the day came”
3:15 abn4 הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This means that the king had commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible.
3:15 abn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 You can state explicitly where the couriers brought the letters. Alternate translation: “as the king had commanded, couriers rushed the letters to every province in the empire” or “then, according to what the king commanded, men riding horses took these letters quickly to every province in the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 i12c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “People read the letter out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:15 nlk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 Here this likely means in the “capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:15 abn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche יָשְׁב֣וּ לִ⁠שְׁתּ֔וֹת 1 (1) This could mean that Ahasuerus and Haman had more than just a drink together. This could be a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. They may have celebrated with an entire banquet that is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “had a celebration feast together” (2) Another possibility is that this is describing a toast that Ahasuerus and Haman shared to celebrate their plan. “Sat down” would simply be describing how the men would have reclined at a table to drink. Alternate translation: “had a celebration toast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:15 wm4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נָבֽוֹכָה 1 The implication is that the people in Susa were very upset about what was going to happen and they did not know what to do about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 wbgv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר 1 The author wants us to see the contrast between the king and Haman sitting down to relax and drink and the people in the city agitated and in an uproar over what the king and Haman had proclaimed. Use a connecting word or other way that your language uses to show a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:15 abn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר שׁוּשָׁ֖ן 1 This does not mean the city itself, but the people who live there. This is a figure of speech in which something is called not by its own name, but by the name of something closely associated with it. So this means “everyone who lived in Susa” or the people in Susa (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:15 abn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns נָבֽוֹכָה 1 You can translate the abstract noun **confusion** with a verbal phrase such as “was very confused.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:intro z7u2 0 # Esther 4 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Mordecai warns Esther to act\n\nMordecai tells Esther she must beg the king for the Jews’ lives even if she risks her own death.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Implicit information\n\nThere is implicit information that translators may not understand. The sentence, “Who knows whether you have come to this royal position for such a time as this?” means “maybe God made you the queen so you could save the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 j37r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י יָדַע֙ 1 Here the story re-introduces Mordecai as the main character in focus. Alternate translation: “when Mordecai found out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
4:1 nya6 כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר נַעֲשָׂ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “about Haman’s plan to kill all the Jews” or “about those letters”
4:1 vgy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 These actions demonstrate extreme sadness. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:1 abn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 You can explain why Mordecai did this. Alternate translation: “he was so anguished that he tore his clothes and put on rough sackcloth and threw ashes over himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 abo0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹךְ הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 The next verse shows that Mordecai was heading towards the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly here. Mordecai might have wanted to call attention to the danger that the Jews were in by going to a public location where people were used to seeing him. Or he might have wanted to contact Esther and ask her to help with the trouble. Or he might have wanted both. Alternate translation: “he started walking towards the city center, towards the king’s palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 abo1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּזְעַ֛ק זְעָקָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּ⁠מָרָֽה 1 **Great** and **bitter** are two words that refer to the same thing and that work together. They indicate that Mordecai’s cry was so loud because it was so anguished. Alternate translation: “cried out in anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:2 abo2 וַ⁠יָּב֕וֹא 1 **He** means Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai came”
4:2 j38r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַ֖ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that Mordecai could not come inside the gate to the king’s palace, but had to wait just outside of it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:2 abo3 שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this in [2:19](../02/19.md). Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s palace”
4:2 abo4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֥ין לָ⁠ב֛וֹא אֶל־שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בִּ⁠לְב֥וּשׁ שָֽׂק 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains why Mordecai waited outside. See the UST. Alternate translation: “But no one who was wearing sackcloth was allowed inside the palace gates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:3 e73y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 This expression means in every single province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. Alternate translation: “in each and every province” or “in every province of the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:3 abo5 מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 Alternate translation: “anywhere that the letter that said to destroy the Jews was announced in public”
4:3 abo6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ 1 These two phrases are referring to the same thing, that is, the information that the letter conveyed. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious a situation this was. Alternate translation: “the letter from the king” or “the law that said to destroy the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:3 e7zx אֵ֤בֶל גָּדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “the Jews mourned greatly” or “when the Jews heard about it, they mourned greatly”
4:3 abo7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠צ֥וֹם 1 **Fasting** is a sign of mourning. If your readers would not understand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “they went without food because they were so upset” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:3 abo8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וּ⁠בְכִ֖י וּ⁠מִסְפֵּ֑ד 1 These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how distressed the Jews were. Alternate translation: “wailed loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:3 djf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction שַׂ֣ק וָ⁠אֵ֔פֶר יֻצַּ֖ע לָֽ⁠רַבִּֽים 1 These were actions that demonstrated deep grief. “Many of them lay on the ground, dressed in sackcloth and sitting in ashes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:4 q7ll נַעֲר֨וֹת אֶסְתֵּ֤ר 1 Alternate translation: “Esther’s female servants” of “Esther’s maids”
4:4 abo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֶ֨י⁠הָ֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “her male servants” or “her other officials” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:4 abp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לָ֔⁠הּ 1 That is, they told her that Mordecai was sitting outside the gate wearing sackcloth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:4 abp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 **The queen** means Esther. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Esther herself became very afraid” or “this made the queen very distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:4 abp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 The implication is that this happened when she heard what Mordecai was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When she heard about this, Esther herself became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:4 y8bc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּשְׁלַ֨ח בְּגָדִ֜ים לְ⁠הַלְבִּ֣ישׁ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 **She** means Esther. This was her way of encouraging Mordecai to be hopeful and act publicly as if whatever situation he was worried about were not completely desperate. Alternate translation: “she sent servants to take to Mordecai some good clothes to wear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:4 abp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹ֥א קִבֵּֽל 1 This was Mordecai’s way of replying to Esther that the situation truly was desperate. Alternate translation: “he refused to put them on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:5 abp4 וַ⁠תִּקְרָא֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Alternative translation: “then Esther summoned Hathak, one of the king’s officials”
4:5 vf4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:5 lp8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶעֱמִ֣יד לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Alternate translation: “who was one of the royal guardians whom the king had assigned to serve Esther personally” You can put this information first because it provides background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
4:5 icg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י 1 See how you translated this term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:5 j39r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the guardians served Esther personally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:5 abp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism לָ⁠דַ֥עַת מַה־זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠עַל־מַה־זֶּֽה 1 These two phrases mean similar things. In both cases, “this” refers to what Mordecai was doing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Esther now knew there must be a very serious reason why Mordecai was wearing sackcloth in such a public place. Alternate translation: “to find out why he was so distressed that he was sitting at the palace gate wearing sackcloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
4:6 abp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הֲתָ֖ךְ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 Hathak went out specifically to speak with Mordecai and find out why he was so distressed, as Esther had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Hathak went out to speak with Mordecai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:6 mgl5 רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 Alternate translation: “the central plaza”
4:6 j41r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that the open square was in front of the palace gate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:6 abp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The citadel is being described by reference to something associated with it, the gate that leads into it. Alternate translation: “the citadel gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:7 zq3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche אֵ֖ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 Here, **him** refers to Mordecai, but here Mordecai figuratively represents the entire group of which he is a member. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman was planning to do to the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4:7 abp9 פָּרָשַׁ֣ת הַ⁠כֶּ֗סֶף אֲשֶׁ֨ר אָמַ֤ר הָמָן֙ לִ֠⁠שְׁקוֹל עַל־גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ בַּיְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) the amount of silver that Haman said the king would get for his treasury from the plunder that the people who destroyed the Jews would take from them, or (2) the amount of silver that Haman had said he would contribute to pay for the expenses of the plan to destroy the Jews. You could say either one as an alternate translation, but it should agree with your interpretation of [3:9](../03/09.md).
4:8 j43r פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן כְּתָֽב־הַ֠⁠דָּת 1 Alternate translation: “a copy of the letter that Haman had sent out” or “a copy of the decree”
4:8 zt49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ֠⁠דָּת אֲשֶׁר־נִתַּ֨ן בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֤ן 1 If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the law that the heralds had read out loud in Susa” or “the decree that the king’s servants had posted in Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:8 abq0 לְ⁠הַשְׁמִידָ⁠ם֙ 1 Alternative translation: “that said that all the Jews must be killed”
4:8 abq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism לְ⁠הַרְא֥וֹת אֶת־אֶסְתֵּ֖ר וּ⁠לְ⁠הַגִּ֣יד לָ֑⁠הּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize how important Mordecai knew it was for Esther to understand just what Haman was planning. “so that Esther could see exactly what it said.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
4:8 abq2 וּ⁠לְ⁠צַוּ֣וֹת עָלֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 Alternate translation: “and to urge her”
4:8 gds6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הִֽתְחַנֶּן־ל֛⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠בַקֵּ֥שׁ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize the force of the action that Mordecai felt was needed. Alternate translation: “to plead with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:8 j47r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Esther should go into the presence of the king to ask personally for the king’s intervention. Alternate translation: “to go to the king personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:8 abq3 עַל־עַמָּֽ⁠הּ 1 Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”
4:10 abq5 וַ⁠תֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַ⁠הֲתָ֔ךְ וַ⁠תְּצַוֵּ֖⁠הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”
4:11 abq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 **All the servants of the king** refers to the royal officials in the palace. **The people of the provinces** refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:11 abq7 כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If it would be helpful in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
4:11 d9mh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 Here, Esther once again refers to a group figuratively by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:11 abq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶ⁠חָצֵ֨ר הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֜ית 1 As [5:1](../05/01.md) makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:11 abq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א 1 If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:11 abr0 אַחַ֤ת דָּת⁠וֹ֙ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself. Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom”
4:11 abr1 לְ⁠הָמִ֔ית 1 Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”
4:11 abr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction לְ֠⁠בַד מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:11 abr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:11 ilp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠חָיָ֑ה 1 This means that the guards will not kill this person and he can proceed to speak to the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the guards will not kill him and he can speak to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:11 abr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י לֹ֤א נִקְרֵ֨אתי֙ לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 Esther is saying by implication that she cannot speak to the king as Mordecai has requested because the king has not been calling for her, which would have given her an opportunity to speak to him. If she goes without being summoned, she could be put to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:11 j49r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י 1 This expression indicates a contrast between Esther’s present situation and the situation she has just described. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
4:11 abr5 זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 The phrase means that Esther has not been called in the king’s presence for a period of at least 30 days. You could use an equivalent expression in your language that would indicate this is a long enough time that Esther has reason to believe the king is not interested in seeing her. Alternate translation: “in over a month”
4:11 gv1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 Alternate translation: “thirty days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
4:12 abr6 וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֔י 1 From this point on, the author focuses only on Mordecai and Esther and does not specify who the messenger is. You can use a general phrase such as, “they told Mordecai” or “Mordecai was told” or “messengers told Mordecai.” If that would be confusing, you could continue to specify that the messenger was Hathak, as the ancient Greek version did. See the UST.
4:13 abr7 וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר מָרְדֳּכַ֖י לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶל־אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “then Mordecai sent back this message to Esther”
4:14 i1uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה יַעֲמ֤וֹד לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מִ⁠מָּק֣וֹם אַחֵ֔ר 1 Here, **relief** and **deliverance** are spoken of as if they are living things that can rise up. Alternate translation: “someone else will rise up from another place and rescue the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4:14 t3k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה 1 Here, **relief** and **deliverance** mean very similar things. They are used together to emphasize the great emotion behind being delivered from this great evil. If it works better in your language, you can use one word instead of two, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:14 abs0 וְ⁠אַ֥תְּ וּ⁠בֵית־אָבִ֖י⁠ךְ תֹּאבֵ֑דוּ 1 The implication is that the Jews will be rescued starting in that other place, but the ones living in Susa will still be in danger because no one who could have helped them there (such as Esther) would have done anything. Alternate translation: “you and your relatives will be killed”
4:14 dtg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וּ⁠מִ֣י יוֹדֵ֔עַ אִם־לְ⁠עֵ֣ת כָּ⁠זֹ֔את הִגַּ֖עַתְּ לַ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 This is really a statement, and it is about what is happening right then. Mordecai asks it in question form so that Esther will think deeply about her role in this situation. Alternate translation: “who knows, perhaps it was to intervene in this very situation that you became queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:16 d6cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים הַֽ⁠נִּמְצְאִ֣ים בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live here in Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:16 t2wg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠צ֣וּמוּ עָ֠לַ⁠י 1 The verb **fast** here is plural, including Mordecai and all of the Jews. Fasting (that is, going without eating) was a symbolic act that the Jews did when they were praying intensely. You could make the connection with prayer explicit. Alternate translation: “fast and pray for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:16 qw8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers וְ⁠אַל־תֹּאכְל֨וּ וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁתּ֜וּ שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת יָמִים֙ לַ֣יְלָה וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 This expression means that Esther was asking the Jews in Susa not to eat or drink anything during the day or the night for a period of three days. Alternate translation: “tell them to not eat or drink anything for three days and three nights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
4:16 j51r גַּם־אֲנִ֥י וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתַ֖⁠י אָצ֣וּם כֵּ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “my maids and I will also fast”
4:16 abs2 וּ⁠בְ⁠כֵ֞ן 1 Alternate translation: “after we have all done that, and while still fasting”
4:16 abs3 אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת 1 Alternate translation: “even though there is a law against going without being summoned”
4:16 abs4 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי 1 Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”
4:17 abs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:17 abs6 כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”
5:intro k5ff 0 # Esther 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Esther’s respect\nEsther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:1 j53r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5:1 abs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **royalty**, you can express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:1 abs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:1 abs9 בַּ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֔ית 1 See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “the inner courtyard of the palace”
5:1 uk7p נֹ֖כַח בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “across from the room where the king was”
5:1 abt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ֠⁠הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ יוֹשֵׁ֞ב עַל־כִּסֵּ֤א מַלְכוּת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to those things that belonged only to the king. You can translate this idea with a verb, “the throne he ruled from” and “the palace where he reigned,” or with an adjective, “his royal throne” and “his royal palace.” Alternate translation: “in the throne room of the palace, sitting on the king’s throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:1 j55r נֹ֖כַח פֶּ֥תַח הַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 Alternate translation: “facing the entrance of the room”
5:2 abt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְהִי֩ 1 This expression introduces what happened next. Alternate translation: “Now” or “and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
5:2 abt2 כִ⁠רְא֨וֹת 1 Alternate translation: “when … noticed”
5:2 j57r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 See how you translated similar expressions in 2:9, 2:15, and 2:17. Review the explanations there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus **thought Esther looked very attractive** as she stood in the court. It could also mean that King Ahasuerus was very pleased to see her. It could mean both. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” or “he approved of her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:2 pw4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that King Ahasuerus decided not to kill Esther for coming into the inner court without being summoned. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:2 uu8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said that Esther should be executed for coming into the king’s inner court without being summoned. See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:2 abt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her to signal that he would be glad to talk to her.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:2 abt4 וַ⁠תִּקְרַ֣ב 1 Alternate translation; “so … came close” or “so … came up to the throne”
5:2 z4mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 This action was probably customary for a king’s subjects in a Persian court, when the king extended the royal scepter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:2 abt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 This action demonstrated that Esther respected the authority of King Ahasuerus and was thankful for his kindness to her. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include that information here, such as: “ … to show that she respected his authority.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:2 j59r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 Here, **head** is a metonym meaning the top (or uppermost part) of an object or location. This phrase means that Esther touched the top of the king’s scepter on the end that was extended toward her. Alternate translation: “the top of the scepter” or “the tip of the scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:3 abt6 מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”
5:3 abt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is very interested in hearing why Esther has come to see him. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if it would be more natural in your language to combine them into one. Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
5:3 j61r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 This was probably a formal and customary expression in the Persian royal court, meant to show honor to the person making a request of the king and to indicate the king’s willingness to be very generous when answering the request. King Ahasuerus was almost certainly not offering to give Esther half of his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is.” Alternate translation: “I will give you what you want, even if you ask me to give you half of my kingdom!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5:3 c6h7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” or “I will give you what you want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:4 abt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19 and 3:9. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:4 m3uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:4 j63r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יָב֨וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָן֙ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “O king, please come with Haman” or “you and Haman come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:4 abt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “the banquet that I have prepared for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:4 abu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be singular, since here it refers just to the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
5:5 abu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The king would have said this to his servants, not to Esther. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The king said to his servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:5 abu2 מַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָמָ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 The **word of Esther** means her invitation to the banquet. Alternate translation: “go and get Haman and bring him quickly to the banquet that Esther has prepared”
5:5 abu3 עָשְׂתָ֥ה 1 Alternate translation: “had prepared for them”
5:6 d5wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 These two question-and-statement pairs mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther whatever she wants. If this is confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. you can combine them into one or replace the repetition with a statement of what the repetition means, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
5:6 pj3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 When Ahasuerus asked Esther in the throne room what she wanted, she said that she wanted him and Haman to come to a banquet she had prepared. But since the king asks her once again at the banquet what she wants, it is clear that he knew this was not her real request. Instead, he knew that she wanted to show him hospitality first, as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship. You can indicate this by translating, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:6 q5nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:6 e2v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:6 j65r עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”
5:7 abu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֥עַן & וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֑ר 1 Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” or “replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
5:7 r4aw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The words **petition** and **request** mean the same thing. Esther probably used these words together as a way of speaking very formally and respectfully to the king. Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:7 abu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:8 c2br rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 The expression **find favor** means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:8 abu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means the King Ahasuerus is pleased with Esther and willing to grant her request. Alternate translation: “if the king evaluates me and approves” or “if the king is pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:8 c2jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:8 abu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ ט֔וֹב 1 This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), and [5:4](../05/04.md). Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:8 j69r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לָ⁠תֵת֙ אֶת־שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־בַּקָּשָׁתִ֑⁠י 1 The phrases **to grant my petition** and **to perform my request** mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “to do what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:8 x8hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “please come with Haman to another banquet that I will prepare for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:8 j71r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be dual if your language uses that form, since it refers to the king and Haman, otherwise it should be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5:8 abu9 וּ⁠מָחָ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The **word of the king** means his request for Esther to tell him what she wants. Alternate translation: “I will answer your question then”
5:8 gf9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “according to your word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5:9 abv1 וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֤א 1 Alternate translation: “and … left the banquet”
5:9 j73r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet שָׂמֵ֖חַ וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 The word **joyful** and the phrase **good of heart** mean the same thing. These terms are used together to show that Haman was very happy after attending Esther’s banquet with King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “feeling very good” [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]
5:9 j75r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 Here, **heart** figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. The phrase means that Haman felt happy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:9 dkg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹא־קָם֙ 1 Under other circumstances, officials were expected to bow low to the ground to show respect for Haman. See [3:2](../03/02.md). But since Mordecai was already sitting on the ground as a sign of mourning, he would have been expected to stand up to show respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not stand up to show respect for Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:9 j77r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹא־זָ֣ע מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ 1 The phrase means that Mordecai was not afraid of Haman or of what Haman might do to him for refusing to show the respect that the king had commanded. Alternate translation: “or tremble fearfully in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:9 s47u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֛ן עַֽל־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י חֵמָֽה 1 Here, **Haman’s rage** is described as something that could fill him up. See how you translated this expression in [3:5](../03/05.md). Alternate translation: “Haman became very angry because of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:10 v5nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּתְאַפַּ֣ק הָמָ֔ן 1 There is a contrast between this sentence and the previous one. Haman felt very much like doing one thing, but he decided it would be better to do something else. The contrast can be indicated with a phrase such as “but even though.” Alternate translation: “but even though Haman was so angry, he kept himself from losing his temper” or “Haman refused to show how angry he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:10 bcn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names זֶ֥רֶשׁ 1 This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5:11 abv4 וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר לָ⁠הֶ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “then … made a long speech to them about”
5:11 mvm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כְּב֥וֹד עָשְׁר֖⁠וֹ 1 **Glory** and **wealth** are both abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “Haman told them about how great his wealth was” or “Haman told them about the many great things he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:11 j79r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠רֹ֣ב בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 Having many sons was probably seen as a mark of honor and status in Persian culture. This phrase probably means that Haman was boasting about the status he enjoyed in Persian society because he had many sons. Alternate translation: “how many sons he had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
5:11 abv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 This word can sometimes be used in Hebrew to mean both male and female children. However, here it clearly refers to male children, so you should translate it that way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5:11 m7fq גִּדְּל֤⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “how the king had continually given him more authority” or “how the king had honored him many times by giving him more important work”
5:11 b7c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נִשְּׂא֔⁠וֹ עַל 1 Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to “advance” or “promote” a person to a higher, more important position than they had previously. Alternate translation: “given him a position more important than” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:11 abv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 This means all of the others, as [3:1](../03/01.md) makes clear. Alternate translation: “all of his other officials and administrators” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:11 xwvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The words **officials** and **administrators** mean similar things. If your language uses one word for these, you can combine them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:12 abv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations אַ֣ף 1 You can translate it as an exclamation because Haman believes he has saved the best for last and is now introducing what he considers to be his most recent significant honor. Alternate translation: “and that is not all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
5:12 w1bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹא־הֵבִיאָה֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֧ה עִם־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ & כִּ֣י אִם־אוֹתִ֑⁠י 1 This can be expressed positively. Alternate translation: “I was the only one Queen Esther invited besides the king” or “Queen Esther invited just two of us, the king and me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5:12 abv8 עָשָׂ֖תָה 1 Alternate translation: “she had prepared”
5:12 abv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:13 abw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙ 1 This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “ … does not satisfy me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:13 wu84 וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה 1 Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”
5:13 abw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
5:13 abw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:13 abw3 בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
5:14 abw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:14 j81r וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
5:14 abw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:14 i2f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
5:14 k8zd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
5:14 hiui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:14 abw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:14 abw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בֹֽא & אֶל הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ 1 **Then** indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5:14 bbs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן 1 The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:14 i8is וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
5:14 j83r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6:intro i9x7 0 # Esther 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Approaching the king\nIt was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
6:1 j85r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
6:1 abw9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Here, **sleep** is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
6:1 abx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא 1 **He** means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:1 abx2 סֵ֤פֶר הַ⁠זִּכְרֹנוֹת֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים 1 This is equivalent to the expression “the book of the events of days” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “the royal chronicles” or “the records of what had happened during all the time that he had been king”
6:1 abx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּהְי֥וּ נִקְרָאִ֖ים 1 This means that the chronicles were read out loud. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the young men got the chronicles and began to read them out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:1 j87r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the book was being read in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:2 u4gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֣א כָת֗וּב 1 Both terms **found** and **recorded** can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the writers had recorded there” or “they read the part where the writers had written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:2 abx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 The implication is that Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering the plot and telling him about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering a plot against the king and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:2 abx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 To relate the events in chronological order, you can put this at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “but Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering their plot and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
6:2 syd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִּגְתָ֣נָא וָ⁠תֶ֗רֶשׁ 1 These are the same two men who are named in [2:21](../02/21.md). However, there the first man’s name is said to be “Bigthan.” Decide on a consistent way of translating these names so your readers will know that they are the same men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:2 abx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שְׁנֵי֙ סָרִיסֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 See how you translated the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “two of the royal guardians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6:2 abx7 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֖י הַ⁠סַּ֑ף 1 See how you translated this expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “who protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters”
6:2 abx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בִּקְשׁוּ֙ 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they had planned” or “they had tried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:2 j89r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “to assassinate” or “to kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:3 lmz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מַֽה־נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה יְקָ֧ר וּ⁠גְדוּלָּ֛ה לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 **Honor** and **greatness** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize that Mordecai should certainly have been honored in some grand way for saving the king’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this by putting the terms together. For example, you could say, “What great honor was done for Mordecai?” Alternate translation: “what did we do to reward Mordecai or to show that we appreciated what he did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
6:3 aby0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what did I do” or “what did we do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:3 n2az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹא־נַעֲשָׂ֥ה עִמּ֖⁠וֹ דָּבָֽר 1 You can say this with an active form. However, it would be good to say this in a way that does not create the impression that the young men are accusing the king. Alternate translation: “no one did anything for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:3 aby1 עַל־זֶ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “for saving my life”
6:4 aby2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 This could mean either: (1) The king knows that there is someone in the courtyard, maybe because he heard someone walking there; he wants to know who it is. (2) Since there are always people around the palace, the king assumes that there must be someone out in the courtyard. In either case, the king wants to know if there is someone there with whom he could consult about the best way to honor Mordecai. As the story has already said in [1:13](../01/13.md), it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king wanted to consult someone about the best way to honor Mordecai, so he asked, ‘who is in the courtyard’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:4 aby3 מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 In order to present the events in logical and chronological order, you can put the king’s question last in the verse if that would be more natural in your language. Haman had already come in the courtyard by the time the king asked this question.
6:4 j91r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background וְ⁠הָמָ֣ן בָּ֗א לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 This sentence indicates that Haman had already entered the outer court when King Ahasuerus asked his question. You could indicate this with a phrase such as “at that moment” or “just then” or “while they were talking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
6:4 rg8t לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה 1 This phrase is describing the first courtyard a person would come to after entering the palace from the outside. Alternate translation: “the outer courtyard of the palace”
6:4 vu7p לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”
6:4 at53 הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”
6:4 aby4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6:5 aby5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say so. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:5 j93r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִנֵּ֥ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:5 j95r יָבֽוֹא 1 Alternate translation: “he may come in”
6:6 j97r וַ⁠יָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”
6:6 ky5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מַה־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֕וֹת בָּ⁠אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “what should I do for the man whom I would really like to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:6 n3r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “whom I am glad to honor” or “whom I want to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:6 jh4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Here, **heart** could mean two different things: (1) Heart could figuratively represent the action of thinking or feeling. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said in his thoughts.” (2) Heart could also be a metaphor meaning to be inside someone or something. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said inside himself.” Either way, the phrase means that Haman was not saying this out loud, but saying it to himself in his thoughts. Alternate translation: “Haman thought to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:6 yft1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לְ⁠מִ֞י יַחְפֹּ֥ץ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת יְקָ֖ר יוֹתֵ֥ר מִמֶּֽ⁠נִּי 1 Haman is actually making a statement to himself rather than asking a question and trying to figure out the answer. He uses a question form to emphasize how true he believes the statement to be. If it would be helpful in your language, instead of a question, you could use a statement such as, “Surely there is no one whom the king would take pleasure in honoring more than me!” Alternate translation: “whom would the king like to honor more than me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:7 j1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “for a man the king is glad to honor” or “for a man the king wants to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:7 aby6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “if you really want to honor someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:8 mz79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יָבִ֨יאוּ֙ 1 The implication is that the king’s servants would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “let someone bring” or “tell your servants to bring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:8 aby7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לְב֣וּשׁ מַלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to anything that belongs to the king. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal garment.” Alternate translation: “one of your own royal robes that you have already worn yourself” or “one of the robes you wear to show that you are the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:8 aby8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “that you have already worn yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:8 aby9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠ס֗וּס אֲשֶׁ֨ר רָכַ֤ב עָלָי⁠ו֙ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “a horse that you have already ridden yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:8 r63j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 This whole phrase refers to the horse. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:8 abz0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 The implication is that this would be done to show that this was one of the king’s own horses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head to show that it belongs to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:8 abz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:9 pp3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָת֨וֹן הַ⁠לְּב֜וּשׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:9 j1d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֔ים 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:9 pfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙ 1 Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:9 j1d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:9 abz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:9 abz4 בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in [4:6](../04/06.md)), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”
6:9 qs3k וְ⁠קָרְא֣וּ 1 Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”
6:9 j1d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:9 j1d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” or “this is what the king does when he especially wants to honor someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:9 pwgm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this” or “this is what the king does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:10 j2d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 The implication is that the king liked Haman’s suggestion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king liked this idea, so he replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:10 abz5 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר דִּבַּ֔רְתָּ וַֽ⁠עֲשֵׂה־כֵן֙ 1 Alternate translation: “do everything that you have said” or “do just what you have suggested”
6:10 abz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 As in [2:19](../02/19.md), this is likely an idiom which means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the king’s gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:10 abz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the gate to the palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6:10 gln7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 Here the action of letting **fall** is a metaphor meaning to leave out or leave unfulfilled. The phrase means that Haman must do absolutely everything that he said. Alternate translation: “do not leave out anything that you suggested” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:10 abz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “Be sure to do absolutely everything that you have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
6:11 abz9 וַ⁠יַּרְכִּיבֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 See how you translated these expressions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “seated him on the horse and then led the horse through the public square of the city”
6:11 j2d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman shouted out to the people in front of Mordecai, that is, the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “called out to all of the people in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:11 j2d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:12 uri5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction אָבֵ֖ל וַ⁠חֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ 1 People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6:13 j3d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן 1 The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in [5:10](../05/10.md) to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:13 aca1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:13 aca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨⁠וֹ חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠זֶ֣רֶשׁ 1 The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:13 aca3 חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו 1 See how you translated this expression in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “his advisors”
6:13 fd5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אִ֣ם & מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִ⁠נְפֹּ֤ל לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he … ” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:13 j3d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. This could mean: (1) that Haman has already begun to fall down (bow down) in front of Mordecai figuratively, or (2) that Haman and Mordecai are facing one another figuratively in hand-to-hand combat. Alternate translation: “before whom” or “in whose presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:13 p5t2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִ⁠זֶּ֣רַע הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “one of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:13 nan5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לֹא־תוּכַ֣ל ל֔⁠וֹ 1 Here Haman’s wife and friends are again speaking figuratively as if Haman is in a battle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “you will not win against him” or “you will not have greater honor than he has” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:13 j3d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּֽי 1 This conjunction indicates a contrast between the actions of prevailing (in the previous clause) and falling. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
6:13 j3d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפ֥וֹל תִּפּ֖וֹל 1 Here the action of **falling**: (1) either refers once again to prostrating oneself, and is a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated, or (2) Haman’s wife and friends are saying that for Haman, defeat will be the outcome of the figurative battle. Alternate translation: “you will certainly lose to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:13 j3d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman will lose in his struggle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “before him” or “in his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:14 j4d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background עוֹדָ⁠ם֙ מְדַבְּרִ֣ים עִמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 This phrase indicates something that happened after Haman’s wife and friends started talking with Haman and while they were still talking. You should indicate this with a phrase such as “while.” Alternate translation: “while they were still talking together, the king’s eunuchs arrived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
6:14 aca4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you decided to translate this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Not all of the king’s eunuchs came. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the king’s servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6:14 aca5 וַ⁠יַּבְהִ֨לוּ֙ לְ⁠הָבִ֣יא אֶת־הָמָ֔ן 1 Alternative translation: “they wanted to bring Haman quickly”
6:14 aca6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשְׂתָ֥ה אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 Esther’s servants would have done most of the work of preparing the banquet. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Esther and her servants had prepared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:intro x4w3 0 # Esther 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe story of Haman’s fall concludes in this chapter.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Covering Haman’s face\n\nWhen “the servants covered Haman’s face,” they were showing that he had been condemned to be executed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:1 n8vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יָּבֹ֤א הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠הָמָ֔ן לִ⁠שְׁתּ֖וֹת עִם־אֶסְתֵּ֥ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּֽה 1 Esther hosted Ahasuerus and Haman for more than just drinks. This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. An entire banquet is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “so the king and Haman went to the second banquet that Queen Esther had prepared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:2 xt9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙ 1 This refers to the day after the first banquet, as mentioned in [5:8](../05/08.md). Alternate translation: “at that second banquet” or “on that second day of feasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
7:2 s5ae בְּ⁠מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 Alternate translation: “while they were drinking wine” or “while the servants were pouring the wine and giving it to them”
7:2 yks7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ & וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 These two statements mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is truly disposed to giving Esther what she wants. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:2 p1xt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 Ahasuerus has now allowed Esther to show her hospitality at two banquets. But he knows that she has done this as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship, and that this signals that she has an important and urgent request to make. You can indicate this by having the king ask, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:2 sem7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you what you ask for” or “I will do for you what you ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:2 j4d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:2 j4d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7:3 ac96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֨עַן & וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֔ר 1 Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
7:3 k27c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 **Favor** means the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:3 aca7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:3 j4d7 הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 In this case, Esther is addressing Ahasuerus directly as “O king”; she is not speaking about him in the third person as a sign of respect, as she and others usually do elsewhere in the story. This may indicate a special urgency to what she is saying, so it would be good to include this difference in your translation or indicate the urgency in some other way.
7:3 aca8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). The suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good plan to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But here, Esther has just addressed the king directly with “O king” and she is pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people. So an alternate translation here could be something more like, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:3 aca9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The phrases **at my petition** and **at my request** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the urgency of the request. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two requests. Alternate translation: “please spare my life and save my people” or “my request is that you spare my life and the lives of my people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:3 j4d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please spare my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:3 bvi1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י 1 The abstract noun **petition** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “that is what I am asking for” or “that is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:3 qghp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 If this is unclear in your language, you can repeat from the previous clause the words that have been left out. Alternate translation: “and let my people be given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:3 j5d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The abstract noun **request** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “rhat is what I am asking for” or “rhat is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:4 acb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 As Esther points out later in the verse, the Jews actually have not been exchanged for money. Rather, **sell** is a figurative way of saying “turn over to.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning by saying something like “For someone has turned us over to our enemies.” Alternatively, you could use the same figure, but show that it is a comparison. Alternate translation: “it is as though I and my people are cattle that have been sold to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:4 fhs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has sold us” or “for someone has put us in danger of our enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:4 e9cx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 As in [3:13](../03/13.md), these words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction. If using three words would be difficult or confusing in your language, you could use one word for this and indicate that the destruction is extreme. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:4 yg01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns such as these, you can replace them with one or more verbs. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:4 acb2 וְ֠⁠אִלּוּ לַ⁠עֲבָדִ֨ים וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁפָח֤וֹת נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “if the men and even the women had been sold into slavery”
7:4 j5d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole אֵ֥ין הַ⁠צָּ֛ר שֹׁוֶ֖ה בְּ⁠נֵ֥זֶק הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Esther is speaking very deferentially and with some exaggeration in order to impress on the king how important this is to her. She is saying that it would have been worth less to her to see her people rescued from slavery than it would have been to see the king spared the trouble of intervening on their behalf. (Haman uses the expression of “not equal” in this same sense in [5:13](../05/13.md).) Alternate translation: “that would have been a matter too small to bother you with” or “that would be a small matter to a king like you, but this is very much worse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7:4 acb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Esther addresses King Ahasuerus in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
7:5 acb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ & וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 These two words mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:5 acb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They both ask about the identity of the man who is trying to destroy the Jews. King Ahasuerus uses the repetition to emphasize how outraged he is. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two phrases. However, from another perspective, both the man’s identity and his location are important to know so that his plot can be stopped. So, for that reason, you could also decide to include both phrases in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:5 acb7 מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 Alternate translation: “who has done this”
7:5 dl4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁר־מְלָא֥⁠וֹ לִבּ֖⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת כֵּֽן 1 Here the concept of a **full heart** uses two metaphors at once. “Heart” figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. Also, saying that the “heart” is “full” is a figurative way of saying that someone is fully intending to do something, usually something that should not be done. Alternate translation: “where is the man who is intending to do such a thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:6 j5d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet צַ֣ר וְ⁠אוֹיֵ֔ב 1 These words mean the same thing. Together, they emphasize Haman’s complete hostility towards the Jews. If it is more natural in your language, you can combine them and indicate the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “the one who is our absolute nemesis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:6 ar4f נִבְעַ֔ת 1 Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”
7:6 j5d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy נִבְעַ֔ת מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:7 bzd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּ⁠חֲמָת⁠וֹ֙ מִ⁠מִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 Here, **in his rage** is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:7 j6d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַ⁠בִּיתָ֑ן 1 The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you could say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:7 uaq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁ⁠וֹ֙ 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:7 qz1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה 1 Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:7 nin1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:7 j6d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here the abstract noun **evil** means “harm,” not something that is morally wrong as in the previous verse. In this context, it can be expressed with a verb such as “execute.” Alternate translation: “the king was likely to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:8 j6d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ שָׁב֩ & וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל 1 The implication is that when the king returned to the room, he saw what this verse describes next. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the king returned … , he saw that Haman had fallen … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:8 h4c7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 The implication is that Haman was doing this as he pleaded for his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add that information to the end of this phrase: “ … as he was begging Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:8 acb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
7:8 acb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 The expression **was fallen** means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:8 acc0 הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”
7:8 thq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲ֠⁠גַם לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could phrase it as a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:8 l4ce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה 1 The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
7:8 acc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you could also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7:8 adq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִ⁠פִּ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:8 acc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר & וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 The king spoke, and then the servants covered Haman’s face. One action followed upon another. However, this happened so quickly that almost no time seemed to pass in between. You can indicate this with a phrase like “as soon as.” Alternate translation: “when the king said this, immediately they covered Haman’s face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
7:8 j6d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 The implication is that some the king’s servants who were present did this, and they did it because they understood that the king wanted Haman to be executed. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face because he was going to be executed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:8 acc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 **Covering the face** in this culture, as in many others, was a sign that a person had been condemned to death. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face to show that he would be executed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7:9 a7ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names חַ֠רְבוֹנָה 1 This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7:9 j7d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:9 acc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this term and this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
7:9 j7d3 הִנֵּה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”
7:9 acc5 גַּ֣ם & הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י & עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן 1 Alternate translation:“Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
7:9 j7d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
7:9 j7d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:9 j7d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
7:9 acc6 עֹמֵד֙ 1 Alternate translation: “is set up”
7:9 sre1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could convert this to a modern measure. See how you translated this phrase in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
7:9 acc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 **Him** means Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:10 j8d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
7:10 umd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה 1 Here the story figuratively compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:intro z6j7 0 # Esther 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### God’s protection\nYahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
8:1 j8d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:1 j8d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן 1 Here, **house** figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
8:1 nm3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
8:1 acc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:1 j8d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:1 acd0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
8:1 j9d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 Esther told this to the king. She would likely have explained not just how she and Mordecai were related, but that he had raised her after her parents died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king that Mordecai was her cousin and that he had been like a father to her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:2 m5hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֨סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ & וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
8:2 acd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ 1 See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:2 j9d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:2 acd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
8:2 z5yn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:2 acd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠תָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 To place someone over something figuratively means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:2 d2tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:3 j9d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠תּ֣וֹסֶף אֶסְתֵּ֗ר וַ⁠תְּדַבֵּר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here the exact meaning of the progression of verbs is uncertain, but this verse probably begins a new event in the story separate from what happened in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then Esther again spoke in the king’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:3 j9d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “while she was in his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:3 j9d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **falling** is an idiom referring to the action of bowing down or prostrating oneself, and **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. Alternate translation: “and she bowed down” or “and she prostrated herself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:3 acd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 This may actually mean that Esther put her face right on top of the feet of King Ahasuerus. This would have been an act of humility and desperation by which she showed that her need was very great and that she believed the king had great power to help her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
8:3 acd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 Esther’s action was probably a recognized sign of pleading in this culture. However, it would likely still have been remarkable for a queen to fall at the feet of her husband, the king. you could show this by introducing the information with a phrase like “in fact.” Alternate translation: “in fact, to show how desperately she was pleading, Esther got down and put her face right on top of his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:3 j1r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means that Esther prostrated herself in front of the feet of King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:3 jmn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠הַֽעֲבִיר֙ אֶת־רָעַת֙ הָמָ֣ן הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 Here, **the evil** refers to Haman’s plan. This expression means to prevent a wrong action from happening. Alternate translation: “to stop the evil plan of Haman the Agagite” or “to prevent the evil things from happening that Haman the Agagite had planned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:3 bp22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 This is the name of Haman’s people group. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8:3 c2hw מַֽחֲשַׁבְתּ֔⁠וֹ אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָשַׁ֖ב 1 Alternate translation: “and the plot that he had invented” or “and the plot that Haman invented”
8:4 xh24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֤וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֵ֖ת שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 As in [5:2](../05/02.md), King Ahasuerus did this to show that Esther had his favor. In that earlier episode, this indicated that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed for coming into the inner court without being summoned. But since Esther was apparently already in the king’s presence on this occasion, it seems that the gesture could also be used generally to show that the king was positively disposed towards a person and would grant the person’s request. Alternate translation: “the king held out his golden scepter to Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
8:4 acd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would be helpful, review the explanation of what this object was. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:4 acd8 וַ⁠תָּ֣קָם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “Esther got up off the floor”
8:4 j1r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means the Esther now stood facing King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “and stood facing the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:5 w7yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב & וְ⁠כָשֵׁ֤ר הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king will think that her suggestion is a good idea and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if what I am going to suggest seems like a good idea to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
8:5 r2yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו & וְ⁠טוֹבָ֥ה אֲנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king is positively disposed towards her, that he thinks well of her, and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
8:5 acd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו 1 Here Esther addresses the king throughout in the third person as a way of showing respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
8:5 ace0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב 1 This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). A suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But in another place, [7:3](../07/03.md), when Esther was pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people, the suggested alternate translation was, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” Here, Esther is also pleading, so you could use that phrase here in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “if what I ask for seems right in the king’s evaluation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:5 ftc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן 1 This expression also appears many times in the story. It means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:5 j1r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו & לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. These phrases could mean “as I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Esther’s request would become evident in his face first, so it would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:5 xci7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and I please you” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:5 j1r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 The first letters that told of the plan to destroy the Jews would not be brought back to Susa physically. Rather, **bring back** is an idiom that means “cancel” or “revoke.” Alternate translation: “make a new law to cancel what Haman decreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:5 nbk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “write a new letter” or “make a new law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:6 j2r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֠י 1 Here Esther is giving the reason why she is asking King Ahasuerus to revoke the letters. Alternate translation: “the reason I am asking is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8:6 udt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 Esther is actually making a statement, but she expresses herself in question form to show how strongly she feels about what she is saying. She does not actually expect the king to tell her how she could bear seeing her people destroyed. Alternate translation: “I cannot bear to see disaster fall on the Jews” or “I cannot endure watching my relatives be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8:6 ace1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 These two sentences mean basically the same thing. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I could not bear to see my relatives and my whole people destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
8:6 ace2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 Even though it was morally very wrong for Haman to want to destroy Mordecai’s whole people, here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md). It means the same thing as “destruction” in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “my people being destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:6 ace3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יִמְצָ֣א 1 As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **find** is an idiom that means something exists in a certain place or time, not that people were looking for it and located it. Esther is speaking of the harm that will exist for the Jews if the effect of Haman’s letters is not undone. Alternate translation: “would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:6 ace4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן 1 This abstract noun can be expressed with a verb such as “destroyed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8:6 ace5 מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 Alternate translation: “my relatives”
8:7 j2r7 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
8:7 ace6 בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר 1 See the note about this expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I have given Esther all the property that belonged to Haman” or “I have given Esther the household of Haman”
8:7 h44h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בֵית־הָמָ֜ן 1 Here, **house** is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:7 ace7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
8:7 ace8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:7 j2r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:8 acf0 וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם 1 Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”
8:8 acf1 כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”
8:8 j3r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:8 j3mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. This phrase means Esther and Mordecai have permission to write with the authority of the King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:8 acf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I give you permission to write with my own authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
8:8 j3r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This is a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
8:8 acf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
8:8 j3r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 Here, King Ahasuerus is expressing the reason why he cannot simply revoke the first letter and also why Esther and Mordecai can write another letter that people must obey. Alternate translation: “you see” or “people will obey your letter because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8:8 acf4 אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 As in verse 5, this expression means “revoke.” Alternate translation: “no one can revoke” or “no one can nullify”
8:8 acf5 כְתָ֞ב & אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this first in the verse because it explains why Ahasuerus answers Esther and Mordecai in the way that he does. See the UST.
8:8 acf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כְתָ֞ב אֲשֶׁר־נִכְתָּ֣ב בְּ⁠שֵׁם־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠נַחְתּ֛וֹם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 The king is describing a general situation, but he has Haman’s letter specifically in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman wrote his letter with my authority, and he sealed it with the ring that has my official seal on it. No one can revoke a letter like that” (The story explained in [1:19](../01/19.md) that the king’s laws could not be changed once they had been made and proclaimed.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:9 acf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 This indicates that what is described in this verse was done because of what the king said in the previous verse. Use a connecting word or phrase to show this in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8:9 s4ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king called his scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:9 acf8 וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 If you use an expression such as “called,” make sure your readers will understand that the king likely sent an official to go and bring the scribes back with him. The king did not call out in a loud voice to get them to come.
8:9 j4r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 Alternate translation: “in month three” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
8:9 acf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 It would still be the same year as in [3:7](../03/07.md), the twelfth year that Ahasuerus reigned as king of Persia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the third month of the year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:9 j356 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 **Sivan** is the name of the third month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “the month of Sivan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
8:9 acg1 הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court, but for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given. This month overlaps with May and June on a Western calendar.
8:9 j4r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֣ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 Alternation translation: “on day 23” or “on the twenty-third day of the month” The exact date of the letter helps to establish its legal authority. This would be on June 25th of a Western calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
8:9 sz6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מָרְדֳּכַ֣י 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and they wrote in a letter everything that Mordecai dictated to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:9 acg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֶל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 It appears from verse 11 that the letter would have been addressed specifically to the Jews in the empire, telling them that the king had authorized them to defend themselves. But copies were also sent to all the royal and provincial officials. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the letter addressed the Jews in the empire, but copies were also sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:9 acg3 וְ⁠אֶ֣ל הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִֽים־וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּחוֹת֩ וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת 1 See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md), where they were used to describe who received Haman’s letter. These are all people in government positions. The first one is the governor of the province and the other two are rulers under him who govern cities or smaller areas. If your language uses one term for all of these, you could use that with a descriptive phrase such as “to the government leaders of each province and also to the leaders under him.”
8:9 acg4 אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֗וּשׁ שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 This is background information explaining how far this new letter had to be sent. See how you translated this phrase in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the empire of Ahasuerus had 127 provinces, stretching all the way from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west”
8:9 zp4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
8:9 j4r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 This expression means “to people in every province.” Alternate translation: “the scribes wrote to the people in each province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:9 bj5s כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
8:9 j4r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:9 j4r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשֹׁנ֑⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:9 j5r1 וְ⁠אֶ֨ל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם וְ⁠כִ⁠לְשׁוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”
8:10 acg5 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֗ב & וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם 1 **He** refers to Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use his name here.
8:10 ijp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁם֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ 1 Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:10 jf31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:10 yt4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַד֩ הָ⁠רָצִ֨ים בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֜ים 1 As in [3:13](../03/13.md), **hand** could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:10 acg6 רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 Alternate translation: “They rose fast horses that were used in the king’s service. These horses had been bred in the king’s stables.”
8:10 p9uc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 Here, **sons** is a metonym meaning the offspring of royal livestock. Alternate translation: “the offspring of the king’s horses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:11 j5r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־עִיר־וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 This expression means “in each and every city.” It is possibly referring to the entire empire by naming one part of it, its cities. The story says in [9:19](../09/19.md) that not just Jews living in cities but Jews living in rural areas also defended themselves. It is likely that the messengers only published the news in the cities and not the entire countryside, but the news was certainly intended for everyone, not only people living in the cities. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire” or “in each and every city” or “in every single city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:11 e1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠הִקָּהֵל֮ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ⁠ם֒ 1 Here, **to stand** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “to join together and fight for their lives” or “to join together and fight back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:11 j5r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִיד֩ וְ⁠לַ⁠הֲרֹ֨ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 These words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is being described. See how you translated this in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [7:4](../07/04.md). Alternate translation: “completely destroy” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:11 acg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כָּל־חֵ֨יל עַ֧ם וּ⁠מְדִינָ֛ה הַ⁠צָּרִ֥ים אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 **Strength** is a figurative way of referring to an army or to a person carrying weaponry. Alternate translation: “the army of any people or province that attacked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:11 acg8 טַ֣ף וְ⁠נָשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “they could also kill the wives and children of the armed men”
8:11 acg9 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 See how you translated this expression in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “and take everything that belonged to them”
8:12 ach0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 This was the day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “on the same day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:12 ach1 בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “in every province of the kingdom”
8:12 j6r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
8:12 hi2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
8:12 ach2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:12 j6r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:07](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
8:13 j6r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:13 j6r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:13 ach4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:13 ach5 וְ⁠לִ⁠הְי֨וֹת הַיְּהוּדִ֤ים עֲתִידִים֙ לַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “that way the Jews would get ready to do what the letter said when the day came”
8:13 qk1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠הִנָּקֵ֖ם מֵ⁠אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This expression, “to take revenge from” another person, means to correct a wrong they have done. In this context, the phrase means to correct the wrong of the original law that gave people permission to kill the Jews. Alternate translation: “and fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:14 ach7 הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 See how you translated this in [8:10](../08/10.md). Alternate translation: “messengers riding on fast horses that were used for the king’s business”
8:14 ach6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:14 b69j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים 1 These two terms mean almost the same thing and are used together to emphasize the fact that the couriers were told to deliver the letters as quickly as possible. Alternate translation: “they went immediately” or “as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:14 ach8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 To present the events in chronological order, you can put this after the king’s command, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
8:14 j6r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king’s officials also posted and read copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:15 j7r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י יָצָ֣א 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:15 j7r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Mordecai had been in the presence of King Ahasuerus and was now leaving in order to fulfill his duties as a high official in the Persian government. Alternate translation: “from the palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:15 ach9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת וָ⁠ח֔וּר וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה וְ⁠תַכְרִ֥יךְ בּ֖וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן 1 The implication is that the king gave Mordecai these special things to wear to show that he was now his highest officer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. To put these events in chronological order, you could place this information before the report that Mordecai left the king’s presence to fulfill his duties. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:15 aci1 בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת 1 Alternate translation: “a blue and white garment that the king had worn”
8:15 aci2 וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “a large golden crown”
8:15 eqc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֣יר שׁוּשָׁ֔ן צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 Here, **the city** represents the people living in it. Alternate translation: “the people of Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:15 i1ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoiced** tells how they cheered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by saying something like “shouted joyfully.” Alternate translation: “cheered and were happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
8:15 aci3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 The implication is that the people did this when they saw Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:16 q2ru rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה 1 Here, **light** figuratively represents happiness. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:16 aci4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֑ה 1 The terms **light** and **joy** refer to the same thing here. They are used together to emphasize the extreme happiness that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt very happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:16 j8r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠שָׂשֹׂ֖ן וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 These terms have similar meaning and are used together with the previous doublet to emphasize again the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:16 n94u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 Here, **honor** might have two possible meanings. (1) Other people honored the Jews. Alternate translation: “other people honored them” (2) The Jews themselves felt honor instead of shame. Alternate translation: “they felt honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:17 k1eh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֨ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֜ה 1 This expression means “each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:17 j8r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 This expression means “each and every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:17 va7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 This expression describes the king’s message as if it were a person that could travel to a particular place. This phrase refers to all the places that received the king’s letter. Alternate translation: “wherever the king’s couriers took his decree” or “wherever the couriers read the letter announcing the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
8:17 j8r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet שִׂמְחָ֤ה וְ⁠שָׂשׂוֹן֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 The terms **joy** and **rejoicing** have similar meaning and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:17 p89m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 These two terms mean something similar and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “and had festive celebrations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8:17 aci5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. Alternate translation: “and a holiday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:17 aci6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 The implication is that they did this because they thought that the Jews might attack them when the Jews fought back against their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:17 aci7 וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “many people from the other ethnic groups in the empire”
8:17 aci8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ 1 The **peoples of the land** were the non-Jewish people groups within the empire. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:17 r3qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they had become very afraid of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:17 aci9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 To present the events in chronological order, you can say this before saying that the people from the other groups became Jews themselves. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
9:intro yty1 0 # Esther 9 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Purim\n\nThe events of this chapter were so significant, the Jews celebrated these events every year after this. It is known as “Purim.”\n\n## Important stylistic devices in this chapter\n\n### Ironic Situation\n\nThe day that was supposed to bring great victory to the enemies of the Jews became a day of great victory for the Jews. This is a type of irony.\n\n### Opening Summary\n\nVerse 1 of chapter 9 provides a summary of everything that happens in this chapter. If using an opening summary is not normally used in your language, be sure to mark this as a summary either in the text or in a footnote. An opening summary like this is a characteristic device of Hebrew storytelling. So even though it describes the final outcome, we do not recommend that you move it to the end of the chapter unless it is very confusing to leave it here. To make it clear that verse 1 is only a summary and not the entire story, you could say something like this at the end of the verse: “This is what happened” or “Here are more details about what happened.”
9:1 j8r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 This introduces a new event. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
9:1 acj0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 The implication is that this happened in the twelfth month of the same year that the letters were sent out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that year, the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:1 j8r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “now in the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:1 t9yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), and [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
9:1 j9r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:1 acj1 אֲשֶׁ֨ר & דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 Alternate translation: “what the letters said the king had decreed”
9:1 wh56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification אֲשֶׁ֨ר הִגִּ֧יעַ דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 This expression describes the king’s decree as if it had traveled through time (as a person travels through space) and reached this particular day. This phrase means that it was time for people to obey the decree. Alternate translation: “when the time came for people to obey the king’s law and decree” or “when it was the day established in the king’s letters for people to carry out the king’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9:1 acj2 בַּ⁠יּ֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר שִׂבְּר֜וּ אֹיְבֵ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט בָּ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “the enemies of the Jews had expected to defeat the Jews on that day”
9:1 ect2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט 1 This word usually means “to rule over,” but here it figuratively means “to have power over, to be able to destroy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:1 lq9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נַהֲפ֣וֹךְ 1 Saying that a situation was turned over is a figurative way of saying that what happened was the opposite of what was expected. Alternate translation: “the situation was reversed” or “the opposite happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:1 acj3 ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִשְׁלְט֧וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים הֵ֖מָּה בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “Instead, it was the Jews themselves who destroyed their enemies”
9:1 acj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This is an idiom that describes enemies (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:2 tj62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. Alternate translation: “to defend themselves” or “to fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:2 d44x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠מְבַקְשֵׁ֖י רָֽעָתָ֑⁠ם 1 Here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md) and [8:6](../08/06.md). In this context, the term can be expressed with a verb. Alternate translation: “who were trying to destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:2 acj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “no one stood against them” or “no one was able to defeat them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:2 x8s3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “was able to fight back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:2 j9r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so here it means “when faced with them.” Alternate translation: “against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:2 h7jh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “all the peoples suddenly became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:2 acj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 The implication is that as a result, no one helped anyone who attacked the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:3 acj8 שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת וְ⁠הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּח֗וֹת 1 See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [8:9](../08/09.md). Alternate translation: “the government leaders in each province”
9:3 acj9 וְ⁠עֹשֵׂ֤י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “anyone the king had trusted with his affairs”
9:3 ack0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מְנַשְּׂאִ֖ים אֶת־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 Here, **lifting up** is a figurative way of saying “helping.” The picture is likely of someone helping a tired or injured person to stand or walk by holding them up. Alternate translation: “helped the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:3 q2ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:4 j9r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 This term introduces the reason why the officials and satraps and governors were becoming afraid of Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:4 xd49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The implication is that this is why all the other officials were afraid of Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “They were afraid of him because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:4 ack1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **The palace of the king** is a figurative way of describing the king’s administration by referring to the place where it was headquartered. Alternate translation: “was very important in the king’s government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:4 ack2 גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **Great** here is the same term that, as a verb, describes promotion within the king’s service in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “Mordecai was a very important royal official”
9:4 mr66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖⁠וֹ הוֹלֵ֣ךְ בְּ⁠כָל־הַ⁠מְּדִינ֑וֹת 1 Here the story speaks of the news of Mordecai’s greatness as if it were a living thing that could travel throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire, everyone was hearing the news of his greatness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9:4 j9r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָרְדֳּכַ֖י הוֹלֵ֥ךְ וְ⁠גָדֽוֹל 1 This expression means that Mordecai continued to become more powerful and influential. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was becoming more famous because the king was giving him more and more power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:5 ack3 וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 After the information about Mordecai, the story now returns to tell what happened on the appointed day. You could add a phrase to show this. Alternate translation, add: “on the day when they were allowed to defend themselves”
9:5 ack4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 This expression means that the Jews defended themselves against their enemies, even to the point of killing people who attacked them. Alternate translation: “the Jews attacked all of their enemies and killed them with their swords” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:5 j11d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 Swords were not necessarily the only weapons the Jews had and used. The sword is used to represent all of their weaponry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this more general meaning. Alternate translation: “the Jews took up their weapons and used them against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:5 j13d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠הֶ֖רֶג וְ⁠אַבְדָ֑ן 1 These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they destroyed them completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
9:5 j15d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֥וּ בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ⁠רְצוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 This expression does not mean that the Jews felt pleasure when they killed their enemies. Rather, it means that the Jews were able to defend themselves against their enemies and were not hindered in any way. Alternate translation: “they were able to do everything they wanted to do against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:5 ack5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 This is an idiom that describes enemies. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:6 b5ft וּ⁠בְ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֗ה 1 Alternate translation: “just in Susa, the capital city”
9:6 j17d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הָרְג֤וּ & וְ⁠אַבֵּ֔ד 1 These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
9:6 ha18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִֽישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:7 ack6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא & דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן & אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 The story lists the names of Haman’s sons before explaining that they were his sons and that the Jews killed them. To be clear who these people are, you can add this information from verse 10 explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “rhe Jews killed the ten sons of their enemy Haman son of Hammedatha. The names of his sons were … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:7 s6x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא & דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן & אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:8 g6zx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פּוֹרָ֛תָא & אֲדַלְיָ֖א & אֲרִידָֽתָא 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:9 gj4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙ & אֲרִיסַ֔י & אֲרִדַ֖י & וַיְזָֽתָא 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:10 fsa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י 1 Alternate translation: “the 10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:10 xt5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
9:10 j19d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:10 ack7 וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”
9:11 ack8 בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”
9:11 j21d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification בָּ֣א מִסְפַּ֧ר & לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here the story speaks about the report as if it were a living thing that could come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “one of the king’s servants told the king the number of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9:11 acl0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase likely means that someone came into the king’s presence in order to deliver this report. Alternate translation: “someone came in and reported to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:11 j22d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מִסְפַּ֧ר הַֽ⁠הֲרוּגִ֛ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “how many people the Jews had killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:12 j33d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הָרְגוּ֩ & וְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 These terms mean the same thing and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
9:12 cz3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמֵ֧שׁ מֵא֣וֹת אִ֗ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:12 acl1 וְ⁠אֵת֙ 1 Alternate translation: “including”
9:12 j5p9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:12 vh5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר מְדִינ֥וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מֶ֣ה עָשׂ֑וּ 1 The king is making a statement, but he uses a question form to show that he is very convinced that the Jews must have also killed many people in the other provinces. Alternate translation: “what they must have done in the rest of the king’s provinces” or “they must have killed many more in the rest of the king’s provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:12 s3sr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וּ⁠מַה־שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ ע֖וֹד וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 These two statements mean basically the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther what she wants. If it would be confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “is there anything more that you want? Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:12 n3ua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. You can also say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:12 ly4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “anything more that you want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:13 acl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 This is an idiom that has been used many times in the story. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:13 acl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִנָּתֵ֣ן 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can indicate that Esther is asking the king to do it. Alternate translation: “please allow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:13 nz41 גַּם־מָחָ֗ר לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כְּ⁠דָ֣ת הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם 1 Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live in Susa to obey today’s decree tomorrow also” or “to do tomorrow also what was decreed that they should do today”
9:13 j43d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
9:13 acl4 עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 The request is not for the king to allow the bodies to be impaled (or hanged), but instead, for the king to order this. Alternate translation: “and have the bodies of Haman’s ten sons hanged [or impaled]”
9:13 acl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 The purpose of this would not be to kill the sons, since they are already dead, but to demonstrate publicly that the enemies of the Jews had been completely defeated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:13 acl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 It is implicit that since Haman’s sons are already dead, what Esther is actually asking for is for their bodies to be impaled or hanged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:13 nr1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:13 qyu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:14 acl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠הֵֽעָשׂ֣וֹת כֵּ֔ן 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king granted both of Esther’s requests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:14 acl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 This phrase, “in Susa,” seems to indicate that this refers to Esther’s first request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he issued a decree allowing the Jews in Susa to fight against their enemies again the next day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:14 j47d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 This can be stated in active form as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:14 j49d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
9:14 acl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit תָּלֽוּ 1 This was Esther’s second request. You can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he ordered his servants to hang [or impale] the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:14 j51d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:15 j55d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 Alternate translation: “who lived in the capital city of Susa”
9:15 acm0 וַ⁠יִּֽקָּהֲל֞וּ 1 Alternate translation: “joined together”
9:15 p9gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:15 j57d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), and [9:1](../09/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
9:15 j59d בְ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
9:15 j61d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִ֑ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “three hundred men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:15 lp12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 Here, the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:16 j65d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. See how you translated this in [8:11](../08/11.md). Alternate translation: “joined together to fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:16 acm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 It’s implicit here, and stated explicitly in the next verse, that these other Jews fought their enemies only on the thirteenth day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “on the thirteenth day of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:16 acm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֨וֹחַ֙ מֵ⁠אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they had no more trouble from their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:16 kms1 וְ⁠הָרֹג֙ בְּ⁠שֹׂ֣נְאֵי⁠הֶ֔ם חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 Alternate translation: “and killed 75,000 of them”
9:16 i1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 Alternate translation: “seventy-five thousand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:16 m2cx לֹ֥א שָֽׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” or “they did not take the valuable things” or “the did not take their possessions”
9:17 ll4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:17 j67d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), and [9:15](../09/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
9:17 acm5 בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “they devoted the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar, to joyful celebration” or “they feasted joyfully the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar”
9:17 kjj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:17 j69d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoicing** tells how they celebrated. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9:17 acm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה 1 This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
9:18 w531 וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”
9:18 acm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:18 acm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:18 j73d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 13” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:18 j75d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “and on day 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:18 acm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֗וֹחַ בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 **Resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:18 j77d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 15” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:18 j79d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 This phrase means the same thing as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9:19 j81d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֞ן 1 This term introduces the result of the events that were described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:19 acn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֣ים הַפְּרָזִ֗ים הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִים֮ בְּ⁠עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠פְּרָזוֹת֒ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to make the identification of this group clear. The first phrase means that they lived in rural areas. The second phrase means they lived in settlements that did not have walls around them, that is, in villages. You can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Jews who live in villages in the countryside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:19 acn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ & וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 The implication is that this explanation is being offered for the benefit of city-dwelling Jews who might wonder why rural Jews celebrate this holiday on a different day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “rather than on the fifteenth day.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:19 acn2 עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ & וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 Alternate translation: “observe this holiday on the fourteenth day”
9:19 j83d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:19 j85d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md) and [9:17](../09/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
9:19 j87d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys שִׂמְחָ֥ה וּ⁠מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 As in verses 17 and 18, this means “by celebrating joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9:19 j89d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:19 acn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וּ⁠מִשְׁל֥וֹחַ מָנ֖וֹת אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 Giving gifts, in this culture as in many cultures, was a way of acknowledging a special occasion. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:19 j91d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:20 acn4 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב & הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “wrote an account of all of these events”
9:20 acn5 כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינוֹת֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “all the Jews everywhere in the kingdom”
9:20 j95d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism הַ⁠קְּרוֹבִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רְחוֹקִֽים 1 This is a figurative way of referring to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. This expression means the Jews who lived in or near Susa, those who lived far away, and all Jews in between. Alternate translation: “everywhere they lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
9:21 acn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠קַיֵּם֮ עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֒ לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים 1 Here, **to set up** means to establish, and to **make** a day means to observe it as a holiday. Alternate translation: “to establish … as a holiday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:21 j97d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:21 j99d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md), [9:17](../09/17.md), and [9:19](../09/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
9:21 j111 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal יוֹם־חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “the fifteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9:21 n4v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 This expression means “every year.” Alternation translation: “each year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:22 acn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כַּ⁠יָּמִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר 1 This verse gives the reason for what Mordecai told the Jews to do in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because those were the days when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:22 acn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָ֨חוּ בָ⁠הֶ֤ם הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מֵ⁠א֣וֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 As in verses 16, 17, and 18, **resting** here is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “the Jews stopped fighting because they had defeated their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:22 acn9 וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ אֲשֶׁר֩ 1 Alternate translation: “And that was the month when”
9:22 aco1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how dramatic and wonderful the change was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “after being very sad, they became very happy.” Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sorrowful and crying to being very joyful and celebrating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:22 aco3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 It is implicit that the Jews were deeply distressed because they were being threatened with destruction, and they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “everything had changed for them. They had been deeply distressed because they were threatened with destruction. But they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:22 nch1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 **Turning** figuratively represents changing. Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sad to being joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:22 aco4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 The abstract nouns **sorrow** and **joy** can be expressed with adjectives such as “distressed” and “happy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:22 j113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לַ⁠עֲשׂ֣וֹת אוֹתָ֗⁠ם יְמֵי֙ 1 These are things that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “so Mordecai told them to observe those days with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:22 j115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 As in verses 17, 18, and 19, this phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word “rejoicing” tells how the celebrating was to be done. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” or “feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9:22 aco5 וּ⁠מִשְׁל֤וֹחַ מָנוֹת֙ אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 See how you translated this in verse 19. Review the notes there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”
9:22 j117 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:22 aco6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 In this culture as in many others, helping the poor was also a way of acknowledging a special occasion. The idea was that no one should miss out on the benefits of the wonderful thing that God had done. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should help the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
9:22 z1vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 This is also something that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should give gifts to the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:23 aco7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ & אֲשֶׁר־כָּתַ֥ב מָרְדֳּכַ֖י אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 The implication seems to be that the Jews were glad to do what Mordecai had instructed, because they had already been doing it. You can add a word such as “readily” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:23 aco8 וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ 1 Alternate translation: “agreed”
9:23 ib25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת 1 You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
9:24 j119 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי֩ 1 This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:24 kqf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּי֩ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:24 j125 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
9:24 aco9 חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”
9:24 xz7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:24 bcy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:24 j127 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys לְ⁠הֻמָּ֖⁠ם וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 The terms **vex** and **destroy** mean basically the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the degree to which Haman’s deadly plans were distressing to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the terms and express the emphasis with a word like “completely.” Alternate translation: “and completely destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9:25 m8x3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹאָ⁠הּ֮ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 In this summary, many details are communicated implicitly. **She** means Esther. Also, this verse continues the account of what this celebration is commemorating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these things explicit. Alternate translation: “the celebration also commemorated how Esther dared to come into the king’s presence without being summoned, and she won his favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:25 j128 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the presence of a person. This phrase means that Esther came into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into the king’s presence” or “before the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:25 acp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אָמַ֣ר עִם־הַ⁠סֵּ֔פֶר 1 Once again, there is much information that is implicit here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the king gave Mordecai the authority to send a letter throughout the empire saying that the Jews could defend themselves against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:25 y57b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יָשׁ֞וּב מַחֲשַׁבְתּ֧⁠וֹ הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה אֲשֶׁר־חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עַל־רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ 1 **His**, **he**, and **him** in this sentence refer to Haman. **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person was planning to do to someone else happened to that person instead. Use an idiom with that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “the wicked plan that Haman developed against the Jews will be done to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:25 acp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְ⁠תָל֥וּ אֹת֛⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנָ֖י⁠ו עַל־הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 The letter itself did not say this. The story is summarizing the events in compressed form. It is speaking of the letter as if it were a person who could take action and give commands like this, but it was the king who gave the command. Alternate translation: “the king also ordered his servants to hang [or impale] Haman on a wooden pole [or hang Haman on a gallows]. When the Jews in Susa killed his ten sons, the king had their bodies hanged [or impaled] as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9:25 j129 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
9:26 j131 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֡ן 1 This introduces the reason why the Jews gave the name “Purim” to this celebration. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:26 acp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit קָֽרְאוּ֩ לַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֤לֶּה פוּרִים֙ 1 **They** means the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jews called these days Purim, like the word Pur” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:26 c1gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פוּרִים֙ 1 This is the name of the festival that commemorates the salvation of the Jewish people in ancient Persia from Haman’s plot to destroy and kill all the Jews in a single day. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:26 buf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background עַל־שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 This is information that the original audience needed to understand how this celebration got its name. You can put this first in the verse because it explains what comes next. Alternate translation: “the Persian word for ‘lot’ is ‘Pur’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
9:26 yq8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 It can be stated clearly what “Pur” means. Alternate translation: “the word Pur, which means ‘lot’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:26 j133 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֕ן 1 The story has just given the reason why the holiday is called Purim. Now it is going to give another reason. It will be explaining why the Jews added this holiday to their calendar, in addition to the festivals that were commanded in the Law of Moses. The next verse describes them adding the holiday. This verse gives the reasons why they did that. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:26 acp4 עַל־כָּל־דִּבְרֵ֖י הָ⁠אִגֶּ֣רֶת הַ⁠זֹּ֑את 1 This is a reference to the letter that Mordecai wrote, as described in verses 20–22. Alternate translation: “because Mordecai wrote to them to tell them to observe this holiday”
9:26 acp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize what a vivid experience it was to live through the events that this story describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “amazing.” Alternate translation: “the amazing things that had happened to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:26 acp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 These phrases say generally “this” and “what,” but they are referring to the specific events the story has related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could describe these things specifically. Alternate translation: “because the Jews had been able to destroy the enemies who had wanted to destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:26 acp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 You can put this first, before the information about Mordecai’s letter, because it happened first. You can say “then” when you tell about the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
9:26 j135 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This expression means “what had happened to them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:27 acp8 קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ ׀ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֨ם ׀ וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם וְ⁠עַ֨ל כָּל־הַ⁠נִּלְוִ֤ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙ & לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “the Jews said that they would tell their descendants and those people who became Jews to be certain to celebrate this festival”
9:27 acp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ 1 “Set up” and “accepted” mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews definitely agreed to do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “agreed to establish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
9:27 j137 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם 1 As in [6:13](../06/13.md), **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:27 j141 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֔וֹר 1 This expression means that the Jews would never stop celebrating the feast of Purim every year. you could put this last since it applies to the whole verse. Alternate translation: “always” or “forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:27 acq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 To present things in chronological order, you can put this before the reference to Jewish descendants and converts to Judaism. Alternate translation: “to establish those two days as holidays and to observe them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
9:27 acq1 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “in the way that Mordecai had told them to do in the letter”
9:27 acq2 וְ⁠כִ⁠זְמַנָּ֑⁠ם 1 This means the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar, as specified in [9:21](../09/21.md). Alternate translation: “on those exact days of the month of Adar”
9:27 j143 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 This expression means “each and every year.” Alternate translation: “every single year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:28 acq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 This gives the result of the reasons described in verses 26 and 27. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
9:28 acq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 **Remembered** and **made** mean basically the same thing here. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews have been faithful in doing this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “So the Jews have celebrated these days.” Alternate translation: “therefore they said that they would remember and celebrate on those two days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
9:28 hc8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 This expression uses two passive forms, but you could say the same thing using active forms. Alternate translation: “so the Jews have celebrated and observed these days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:28 j145 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־דּ֣וֹר וָ⁠ד֗וֹר 1 This expression means “in each and every generation.” Alternate translation: “in every single generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:28 j147 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִשְׁפָּחָה֙ וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּחָ֔ה 1 This expression means “every family.” Alternate translation: “every Jewish family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:28 acq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 This could be a figure of speech that refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. Generally speaking, a province would be the largest division of the empire that would identify a person’s location, and a city would be the smallest. Particularly, since the Jews would continue to celebrate Purim after the Persian empire and its provinces no longer exist, you might choose to express the meaning of this figure of speech in a more general way. Alternate translation: “everywhere they have lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
9:28 j149 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה 1 This expression means “every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:28 j151 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 This expression means “every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9:28 acq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 As in verse 27, this expression means that the Jews will never stop celebrating the feast of Purim. You can say this positively. Alternate translation: “will always observe the Festival of Purim faithfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9:28 m5o8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews will definitely not stop celebrating Purim each year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “definitely” or “certainly” or “always.” Alternate translation: “the Jews and their descendants will certainly always continue to celebrate this festival of Purim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:28 acq7 מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”
9:28 i2qk וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף 1 Alternate translation: “will always observe”
9:28 j155 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 As in verse 27, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:29 je8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
9:29 cm8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9:29 oc4c וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י 1 Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of **Mordecai** here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”
9:29 acq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י 1 This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
9:29 acq9 וַ֠⁠תִּכְתֹּב & אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף 1 Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”
9:29 ku7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 **This second letter of Purim** could refer to: (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (see verses 20-22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:30 acr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים 1 While this says “**he**,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9:30 acr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֶל־שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה מַלְכ֖וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 These three phrases all mean the same thing. The repetition emphasizes that Esther and Mordecai sent this second letter out comprehensively throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “to all the Jews throughout the entire empire of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
9:30 acr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 The letter was not sent to the provinces as geographical territories, but to the Jews who lived in them. The Jews are being described by something associated with them, the places where they lived. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:30 u389 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
9:30 iaf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 The abstract nouns **peace** and **truth** can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9:30 mpse דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 The Hebrew word translated as **truth** here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”
9:31 acr4 לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”
9:31 rgr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
9:31 acr5 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in [2:6](../02/06.md).) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.
9:31 rl2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם 1 Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:32 acr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:intro h4m4 0 # Esther 10 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Mordecai’s new position\n\nThrough the power of Yahweh, Mordecai was given a new position in the Persian Empire. Mordecai was now the second in command in the kingdom of Persia and he used his position to help other Jews.
10:1 j157 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֧וֹשׁ 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way to introduce a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
10:1 b5ht וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ & מַ֛ס 1 Alternate translation: “Then … levied a tax”
10:1 acr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The purpose of this chapter is to describe the greatness of Mordecai. It does that by showing that he was second in command to a very powerful emperor. Referring to both the land and the sea is a way to include everything that lives in a very large area of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “everyone throughout his empire.” Alternate translation: “on all the people in the empire … even the people who lived on the islands in the Mediterranean Sea” or “on everyone throughout the land and even the far-away islands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
10:1 twn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The phrase **the islands of the sea** likely refers to the fact that the Persian kings had conquered territories reaching all the way to the Mediterranean Sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which reached all the way to the Mediterranean Sea.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:1 acr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 These geographic features were not expected to pay the tax. The land and coastlands represent the people living there. The story is describing those people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the places where they live. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:2 acs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠כָל־מַעֲשֵׂ֤ה תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 **Power** and **might** mean essentially the same thing. They are used together to emphasize how powerful King Ahasuerus was. If it is more natural in your language, you can use one word with that meaning, with another word that gives it emphasis. Alternate translation: “all that he achieved because of how very powerful he was” or “all the great things that he did because of his great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10:2 p98n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 The abstract nouns **power** and **might** can be translated with an adjective. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:2 k7tc וּ⁠פָרָשַׁת֙ 1 Alternate translation: “They also wrote a full account”
10:2 acs2 גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “of how important Mordecai was” or “of how the king had honored Mordecai for the great things he had done”
10:2 acs3 גִּדְּל֖⁠וֹ 1 See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”
10:2 acs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:2 acs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:2 acs6 הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse, if it would be helpful in your language.
10:2 acs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:3 j159 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
10:3 acs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
10:3 acs9 מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”
10:3 act0 וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”
10:3 iui7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אֶחָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
10:3 act2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases basically mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard Mordecai worked for the good of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “He worked hard so his people and their descendants would prosper.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
10:3 act3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:3 wte9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 **Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:3 s8f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 **Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10:3 j161 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro d989 0 # Introduction to Esther\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Esther\n\n1. King Ahasuerus sends away his wife, the queen (1:1–22)\n2. Ahasuerus chooses Esther as the new queen (2:1–23)\n3. Haman plots to destroy the Jews (3:1–15)\n4. Mordecai asks Esther to help her people (4:1–17)\n5. Esther pleads with the king for the Jews (5:1–7:10)\n6. The result of Haman’s plot to destroy the Jews (8:1–9:16)\n7. The Feast of Purim (9:17–32)\n8. Conclusion (10:1–3)\n\n### What is the Book of Esther about?\n\nThe Book of Esther tells how a young Jewish woman named Esther became the queen of Persia. As queen, she worked to save all the Jews in the Persian Empire from being destroyed.\n\nThis book ends by telling why the Jews celebrate the festival of Purim. The name “Purim” comes from the word “pur,” which means “lots” or “dice.” Haman, the enemy of Jews, threw dice to choose when to attack and destroy the Jews. The Jews celebrate Purim to remember how Yahweh rescued his people from being destroyed.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators can use the traditional title of this book, which is “The Book of Esther” or just “Esther.” Or they can choose a clearer title, such as “The Book About Esther.”\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the Persian Empire?\n\nKing Cyrus the Great conquered and ruled over many kingdoms. This was in the part of the world called Persia, which is now Iran. So people named his kingdom the Persian Empire. When Cyrus conquered Babylonia in 539 B.C., he then controlled the Jews whom the Babylonians had earlier taken into exile.\n\n### Why were there Jews in Babylonia when the Persians conquered it?\n\nIn 586 B.C., the Babylonians conquered and took into exile the people of Judah. These Jews and their descendants were still in Babylon when the Persians conquered it.\n\n### What was meant by “the laws of the Medes and Persians”?\n\nThe phrase “the laws of the Medes and Persians” is found in Esther 1:19 and Daniel 6:12. It referred to laws and decrees that could not be changed or removed once they were issued. In the book of Esther, the king made a decree that the people could attack the Jews. Later he regretted that decision but he was not able to change the decree.\n\nThe term “Medes” refers to a people group that had formed its own nation, but the Persians conquered them.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What different levels of language are in the Book of Esther?\n\nIn the Book of Esther, people talk to each other in many different situations. There is the polite and stately talk in the Persian court and the words of royal decrees. Friends and close relatives also talk to each other. There are even the words that one uses in speaking to oneself. Translators should use all the ways their own language has to express these different situations in a way that their readers will identify and understand.
3 1:intro v1fp 0 # Esther 1 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The king’s divorce\n\nThe king’s advisers were afraid that husbands would lose their authority when they heard the queen had refused to come to show her beauty to the king’s guests, so the advisers told him to divorce her.
4 1:1 jdr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֖י 1 In the Old Testament, this is a standard way of beginning a historical story. Many languages have similar story-opening formulas, and if your language has one, you can use it. But do not use it if it would suggest that the story is not real, only made up. Alternate translation: “this account happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5 1:1 zzz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בִּ⁠ימֵ֣י אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 The term **day** is used figuratively here to refer to a longer period of time. You could just say “during the reign of Ahasuerus,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “in the time of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6 1:1 qwe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7 1:1 v5ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 This is background information to help the reader identify Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
8 1:1 qwe3 ה֣וּא אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ הַ⁠מֹּלֵךְ֙ 1 Alternative translation: “This king named Ahasuerus ruled”
9 1:1 qwe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֔וּשׁ 1 In case your audience might not know where these places are, you could say, “extending from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
10 1:1 qwe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 The number is given to show what a large empire this was. You could say that explicitly by saying, “Ahasuerus ruled a very large empire that had 127 provinces.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11 1:1 qwe8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שֶׁ֛בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּ⁠מֵאָ֖ה מְדִינָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “one hundred twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
12 1:2 dk31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת & עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 Here, the action of **sitting** on a throne is used figuratively to mean ruling over a kingdom. You could just say “ruled,” as UST does. But as an alternative, you could say, “ruled his empire from his royal throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13 1:2 qwe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns עַ֚ל כִּסֵּ֣א מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with a verb by saying, “the throne he ruled from,” or use an adjective, “his royal throne.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14 1:2 hgm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֥ן 1 This was the name of a royal city of the Persian kings. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
15 1:2 qwr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠בִּירָֽה 1 This means a castle or palace where a king would live. But since the city of Susa itself is being called a **citadel** here, it’s likely that the term figuratively means royal city or capital city. The person telling this story is identifying Susa as the capital by calling it by the name of something closely associated with it, the royal palace within it. A good translation might be “the capital city of Persia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
16 1:3 ry7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 This means that Ahasuerus had already ruled for two full years and that these events took place in the year that followed them. Alternate translation: “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled his empire” or “after he had ruled for two years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
17 1:3 qwr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֤ת שָׁלוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠מָלְכ֔⁠וֹ 1 **Reign** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “during the third year that Ahasuerus ruled.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 1:3 qwr5 עָשָׂ֣ה מִשְׁתֶּ֔ה 1 Alternative translation: “he hosted a feast”
19 1:3 prm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חֵ֣יל ׀ פָּרַ֣ס וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 This likely refers to the leaders of the army. It is describing a part of the army by referring to the whole army. Alternate translation: “the officers of the army” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
20 1:3 qwr7 הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֛ים 1 This probably means something like “the wealthy landowners.”
21 1:3 jdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 **Face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so this phrase means “in his presence.” The invitation was to come to the royal capital to attend a banquet where the king would be present in person. You could say, as UST does, that the king was present in person to host the feast. Or you could say as an alternative, “all of them came to Susa for the feast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22 1:4 qwr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ אֶת־עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 You can translate the abstract noun with an emphasized adjective. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23 1:4 qet1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ 1 **He** refers to the king. The implication is that he held this banquet to show all of his officials how wealthy and powerful he was. The invited officials would then go back to all the different parts of the empire and tell everyone this. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus wanted to demonstrate to his guests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
24 1:4 m8xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet עֹ֨שֶׁר֙ כְּב֣וֹד מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 The words **wealth** and **glory** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize how great his kingdom was. Alternate translation: “the great wealth of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
25 1:4 qet3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠הַרְאֹת֗⁠וֹ & וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 You can translate the abstract nouns **splendor**, **beauty**, and **greatness** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus … wanted to demonstrate … that he was a very powerful king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26 1:4 lun5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet יְקָ֔ר תִּפְאֶ֖רֶת גְּדוּלָּת֑⁠וֹ 1 The words **splendor** and **beauty** have similar meaning and emphasize how great he was. Alternate translation: “the splendor of his greatness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
27 1:4 qet5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יָמִ֣ים רַבִּ֔ים שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 This was a very long time for a royal feast to last. The earlier part of the verse provides the reason for this. To make the connection explicit, you could add some explanatory words to the verse like this: “Ahasuerus entertained his guests fabulously because he wanted to demonstrate that his empire was extremely wealthy and that he was a very powerful king. He did so many things for them that the festivities lasted for six months.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28 1:4 x1v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שְׁמוֹנִ֥ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת יֽוֹם 1 Six months is about **180 days** or about half a year. You can use whatever expression will best express this time period in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
29 1:5 ue3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠מְל֣וֹאת ׀ הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 This implies “at the end of that feast.” You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after those 180 days were over” or “at the end of those six months” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
30 1:5 fv9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עָשָׂ֣ה הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ & מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 This was a second feast that the king hosted. He likely did this to thank the people who had worked so hard in hosting the first feast. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
31 1:5 mj16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֨ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֜ה 1 The expression in this case seems to refer specifically to the royal **citadel** from which the city got its name. This second feast would not have been for everyone in the entire city. It was specifically for the people who served the king in the citadel and who had worked so hard over the previous six months hosting the first feast. Alternate translation: “for every man who worked for him in the palace at Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
32 1:5 qet7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 Here, **found** is an idiom that means could be found or were there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
33 1:5 qet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠נִּמְצְאִים֩ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who worked for him in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
34 1:5 qey1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּ֧דוֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָ֛ן 1 The person telling this story is referring to the staff of the palace by speaking of two extreme parts of it, the most important and the least important people who worked there, in order to include everyone in between. You could just explain this meaning, as UST does. Alternate translation: “from the most important official to the least important servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
35 1:5 qey3 שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 The story does not suggest that this was an unusually long time by saying, “for many days.” But you could also say something like “a whole week” to show that this was a generous gesture of thanks on the part of the king. Alternate translation: “another feast that lasted seven days”
36 1:6 qey5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 These **linens** were curtains that were hung in the courtyard. **Cotton** refers to the white color of some of them. So this means white and blue curtains. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
37 1:6 qey7 ח֣וּר ׀ כַּרְפַּ֣ס וּ⁠תְכֵ֗לֶת 1 You can specify at the beginning of this verse that the location being described is the same as in the previous verse: “In the courtyard, white and blue curtains.”
38 1:6 qey9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠חַבְלֵי־ב֣וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן 1 **Byssus** means “white linen” and it is used to describe the white color of some of these cords. So this means white and purple cords. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
39 1:6 qru1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִטּ֣וֹת ׀ זָהָ֣ב וָ⁠כֶ֗סֶף 1 You can specify that these couches were there for the guests to recline on while they ate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
40 1:6 asn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown רִֽצְפַ֥ת 1 This word probably refers to a mosaic floor made of inlaid pieces of colorful precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
41 1:6 eyi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בַּהַט 1 This is a kind of red and purple stone that contains pieces of crystal. You could call it “feldspar” or something descriptive like “red marble.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
42 1:6 qru3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וָ⁠שֵׁ֖שׁ 1 This is a white precious stone. You could identify it as “alabaster.” Alternatively, while it is not exactly the same thing as marble, your readers would get the right idea if you called it “white marble.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
43 1:6 qru5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠סֹחָֽרֶת 1 This word probably refers to a black marble that was used to create borders around mosaics. You could call this “black marble,” or you could just say that the floor contained “another precious stone.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
44 1:7 urm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַשְׁקוֹת֙ 1 The abstract noun **serving** refers to how the drinks were served at the banquet. You can translate it with a verb by saying, “The attendants served wine.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
45 1:7 qru7 וְ⁠כֵלִ֖ים מִ⁠כֵּלִ֣ים שׁוֹנִ֑ים 1 This could mean that “no two of them were alike.” But you could also just say that the wine was served in “various kinds of golden cups.”
46 1:7 r6ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 This means that King Ahasuerus himself paid for all the wine that the guests drank at his seven-day feast in Susa, and the wine came from his personal supply. Alternate translation: “the king was very generous with the royal wine” or “the king showed a great willingness to give” or “the king provided all of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
47 1:7 qru9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠יֵ֥ין מַלְכ֛וּת רָ֖ב כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 This probably means special fine wine that only the king could acquire and afford. You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “royal wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
48 1:7 wpq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the king himself, viewed through his action of giving. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
49 1:8 qtu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁתִיָּ֥ה כַ⁠דָּ֖ת 1 The abstract noun **drinking** refers here not to the action of drinking, but to the guidelines for serving drinks that the king had established for the banquet. Alternate translation: “Ahasuerus had established this rule for all his household attendants who served the wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
50 1:8 g5gu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֵ֣ין אֹנֵ֑ס 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) No one would be stopped from drinking even if the attendants thought they had already had enough. Alternate translation: “there was to be no restriction on drinking” (2) There would be no requirement to drink. Alternate translation: “no one must be forced to drink” Either way, this was another sign of the generosity that the king showed as he hosted this banquet to thank the people who worked for him. Either he was: (1) allowing them to drink as much as they wanted to, or (2) not requiring them to eat and drink everything that was served at a banquet as guests of the king would usually be expected to do. You could say explicitly at the beginning of the verse that the king was giving his guests a special privilege. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
51 1:8 f6px rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֣ן ׀ יִסַּ֣ד הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ עַ֚ל כָּל־רַ֣ב בֵּית֔⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 This explains why no one had to drink if they did not want to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could give this explanation (the reason) before the result that it accounts for, using a connecting word like “so.” You could say, “The king had established for every overseer of his house to do according to the desire of man by man, so the drinking was according to the law, ‘There is no compulsion.’” Alternate translation: “the king made the attendants who served the wine follow this rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
52 1:8 qtu3 לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כִּ⁠רְצ֥וֹן אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “the king wanted every guest to be able to drink as much as he wanted” or “all the guests could drink as little or as much as they wanted”
53 1:8 jdr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִישׁ־וָ⁠אִֽישׁ 1 This is an idiom that means “everyone.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
54 1:9 qtu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous גַּ֚ם 1 This introduces something else that was happening at the same time. You can indicate this by saying something like “during this time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
55 1:9 qtu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 You can explain that she was the wife of Ahasuerus by saying, “Queen Vashti**,** the king’s wife” or “his wife.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
56 1:9 qtu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וַשְׁתִּ֣י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next one. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
57 1:9 qti1 מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה נָשִׁ֑ים 1 This could mean the women who served in the palace, the wives of the men who were officers and servants, or both. You could say, “a feast for the wives of the men who attended” or “for the women who worked in the palace.”
58 1:9 qti3 בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֖ר לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “the royal palace where King Ahasuerus lived”
59 1:9 qti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בֵּ֚ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective royal. Alternate translation: “royal palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
60 1:10 jv7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “after six days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
61 1:10 le6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כְּ⁠ט֥וֹב לֵב־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בַּ⁠יָּ֑יִן 1 Here, **heart** figuratively means the action of thinking or feeling. Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was in a good mood from drinking wine” or “when the king was drunk with wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
62 1:10 dcb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לִ֠⁠מְהוּמָן בִּזְּתָ֨א חַרְבוֹנָ֜א בִּגְתָ֤א וַ⁠אֲבַגְתָא֙ זֵתַ֣ר וְ⁠כַרְכַּ֔ס 1 These are names of seven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
63 1:10 ens5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּ֣רִיסִ֔ים 1 This term occurs a dozen times in the story. It describes male royal officials who served as guardians for the women who lived in the palace. They were both guardians of the door, to keep unwanted people out of the women’s quarters, and guardians of the women inside, to take care of them and look after their needs. (As we learn in 2:21, some of these officials also protected the king’s private quarters.) As we see here, and as will also be seen in 2:14 and 2:16, their duties included escorting women from place to place. The term likely indicates that, in keeping with the practices of the time, these men were castrated because their work brought them into such close contact with the king’s wives and concubines. If your language has a term for such an official and you think your readers would recognize it, you could use it. Otherwise, you could use a term that describes the role that these officials played in the royal court. Alternate translation: “guardians” or “officials” or “castrated servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
64 1:10 qti7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background הַ⁠מְשָׁ֣רְתִ֔ים אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 This is background information to explain who these men were. Alternate translation: “who attended him personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
65 1:10 jdr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶת־פְּנֵ֖י הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that these seven men served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
66 1:11 qti9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְ֠⁠הָבִיא 1 This is the beginning of the instructions that King Ahasuerus gave to the seven eunuchs he summoned in verse 10. You can make this explicit by saying, “He told them to bring.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
67 1:11 jdr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus wanted Queen Vashti to come personally into his presence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
68 1:11 asd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an adjective by saying, “wearing her royal crown.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
69 1:11 asd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠כֶ֣תֶר מַלְכ֑וּת 1 Ahasuerus likely wanted Vashti to wear her queen’s crown so that everyone would know that she was his wife. You could say that explicitly. (For the possible reasons why he wanted them to know this, see the next note.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
70 1:11 asd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background לְ⁠הַרְא֨וֹת הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ אֶת־יָפְיָ֔⁠הּ 1 Everything Ahasuerus did at his banquets was to show how rich and powerful he was. He seems to have believed that having a very beautiful wife was one more thing that proved he was a great man. So he wanted everyone to see how beautiful Vashti was. You can put this second in the verse, after explaining that Vashti was a very beautiful woman, because it accounts for what happens afterwards, when the king sends his seven personal servants to bring her in to his banquet. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
71 1:11 asd7 הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֤ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִים֙ 1 This might mean “his guests, especially the officials.”
72 1:11 asd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it is the reason that explains everything else that happens afterward in the verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
73 1:11 qvk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּֽי־טוֹבַ֥ת מַרְאֶ֖ה הִֽיא 1 Alternate translation: “she was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
74 1:12 asf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 You can put the events in chronological order and say first that the eunuchs told Vashti what the king had commanded and then say that she refused to come**.** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
75 1:12 asf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֞ן הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֣ה וַשְׁתִּ֗י לָ⁠בוֹא֙ 1 If your language needs to give a reason why she refused, it is most likely because she did not want a group of drunken men staring at her lustfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
76 1:12 b57q בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “at the king’s command” or “what the king wanted”
77 1:12 asf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 Here, **hand** refers figuratively to the eunuchs themselves, viewed through their action of telling Vashti what the king had commanded. Alternation translation: “when those servants told Queen Vashti what the king wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
78 1:12 kp6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֑ים 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
79 1:12 asf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַ⁠יִּקְצֹ֤ף הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ מְאֹ֔ד וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. You could combine them as UST does by saying, “The king became so angry that he could barely contain himself.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
80 1:12 bsd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמָת֖⁠וֹ בָּעֲרָ֥ה בֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here the story uses a metaphor that pictures the king’s anger as **a fire that burned inside of him**. If your language has a different word picture that it uses to describe extreme anger, you can use that here. If not, you can translate plainly, “his anger continued to increase.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
81 1:13 asf9 לַ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים 1 This means the king’s advisors. You could call them “his advisors” or “the royal advisors.”
82 1:13 g9fe יֹדְעֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִתִּ֑ים 1 This means something like “who knew the right way to do things” or “who understood the culture.”
83 1:13 x2u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This means that it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. This is background information that explains why the king called upon these men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
84 1:13 adf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵן֙ דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse to put the reason before the result because it explains what happens next. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
85 1:13 jd11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would personally ask his wise men for advice in matters like these. Alternate translation: “to consult personally with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
86 1:13 adf3 יֹדְעֵ֖י דָּ֥ת וָ⁠דִֽין 1 This means that these advisors knew the law and knew how to make good decisions in light of it.
87 1:14 adf5 וְ⁠הַ⁠קָּרֹ֣ב אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Alternate translation: “the king’s closest advisors”
88 1:14 cc44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names כַּרְשְׁנָ֤א שֵׁתָר֙ אַדְמָ֣תָא תַרְשִׁ֔ישׁ מֶ֥רֶס מַרְסְנָ֖א מְמוּכָ֑ן 1 These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
89 1:14 jd13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom רֹאֵי֙ פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **To see the face of** is an idiom that means to be in the presence of a person. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus would regularly and personally consult with these seven advisors. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
90 1:14 adf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִ֥ים רִאשֹׁנָ֖ה בַּ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 Here, **sitting** represents ruling or judging. The expression here means that these were the most powerful officials in the empire. (See:[[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
91 1:15 j6sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כְּ⁠דָת֙ מַֽה־לַּ⁠עֲשׂ֔וֹת בַּ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה וַשְׁתִּ֑י עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־עָשְׂתָ֗ה אֶֽת־מַאֲמַר֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 This verse presents the question that the king asked the wise men. It may be helpful to indicate this by saying something like “The king asked them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
92 1:15 ics9 כְּ⁠דָת֙ & עַ֣ל ׀ אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 Alternate translation: “What does the law say we should do … because … ?”
93 1:15 adf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 To present the events in chronological order, you can begin with the information that these men brought the command. Alternate translation: “Queen Vashti did not do what I told my servants to command her to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
94 1:15 jd15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יַ֖ד הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that the eunuchs were the ones who told Queen Vashti what King Ahasuerus had commanded her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
95 1:15 adg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִֽים 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
96 1:16 adg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מְמוּכָ֗ן לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Memukan was speaking in the presence of the king and of the other officials. Alternate translation: “then Memukan spoke so that both the king and the officials could hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
97 1:16 yqr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ֣⁠עַמִּ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֕ר בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 This means all the different people groups that were living in the empire. You could say, “all the people groups in all the provinces that King Ahasuerus rules” or more generally, “every person who lives in the entire empire of King Ahasuerus.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
98 1:16 ss5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מְמוּכָ֗ן 1 See how you translated this man’s name in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
99 1:16 adg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֽוֹשׁ 1 Memukan speaks of **the king** in third person as a form of respect. If you want to portray him as speaking primarily to the king because he is answering the king’s question, you could have him say, “in all the provinces that you rule” or “every person who lives in your entire empire.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
100 1:17 jd17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 This introduces the reason why Memukan says that Queen Vashti has done wrong against all the men in the kingdom and not only against King Ahasuerus. To show that, you can begin with “This is what will happen.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
101 1:17 gn4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּה֙ עַל־כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 To emphasize his point, Memukan exaggerates and says that every single woman in the empire will hear about Queen Vashti refusing to obey King Ahasuerus. You could say, as UST does, that “women all over the empire” will hear about what the queen did. Or you could preserve Memukan’s manner of speaking by saying, “every woman” will hear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
102 1:17 jd19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠הַבְז֥וֹת בַּעְלֵי⁠הֶ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that the women will treat their husbands with disrespect and not obey them. Alternate translation: “women will despise their husbands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
103 1:17 adg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠אָמְרָ֗⁠ם הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 The implication is that they will go on to say, “So if even the queen can disobey the king, why should I have to obey my husband?” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
104 1:17 adg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֡וֹשׁ אָמַ֞ר לְ⁠הָבִ֨יא אֶת־וַשְׁתִּ֧י הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠לֹא־בָֽאָה 1 The women will stop respecting their husbands after they hear about this. You can put this report about what Queen Vashti did first, before “women will stop respecting their husbands,” because it is the reason that explains that result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
105 1:17 jd21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means the Queen Vashti refused to come into the presence of King Ahasuerus when he summoned her during the feast. See how you translated this in verse 11. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
106 1:18 afg1 וְֽ⁠הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 Alternate translation: “even today” or “even this very day”
107 1:18 afg3 שָׂר֣וֹת פָּֽרַס־וּ⁠מָדַ֗י 1 It becomes clear later in the verse that Memukan is speaking of the wives of the king’s officials, and you could communicate that here by saying, “the wives of the officials who govern Persia and Media.” But the term “noblewomen” indicates that they also had high status of their own, so you could also call them “the leading women of Persia and Media.”
108 1:18 afg5 דְּבַ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “what the queen has done”
109 1:18 afg7 תֹּאמַ֣רְנָה 1 This means that they will “talk back” or “disobey.” Alternate translation: “refuse to obey”
110 1:18 afg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְ⁠כֹ֖ל שָׂרֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means the husbands of the noblewomen. The implication may be, “They will disobey their husbands even though they are officials of the king.” You could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
111 1:18 u6d7 וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י בִּזָּי֥וֹן וָ⁠קָֽצֶף 1 This could mean either that they will treat their husbands with disrespect, and this will make their “husbands angry with them” or that “they will be angry with their husbands and treat them with contempt.”
112 1:18 afh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠כְ⁠דַ֖י 1 This could mean that the husbands will be as furious “as much as they can bear.” But you could also say, “That will be bad enough by itself, even if the news does not spread any farther.” If you think that is the meaning, you can say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
113 1:19 afh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
114 1:19 d8qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֗וֹב 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “If it pleases you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
115 1:19 jd25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵצֵ֤א דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that the decree will come from the king himself. Alternate translation: “you should personally issue a royal decree” or “you should write a decree yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
116 1:19 afh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns דְבַר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with the adjective “royal.” Alternate translation: “royal decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
117 1:19 jd23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
118 1:19 afh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִכָּתֵ֛ב 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “you should write a decree yourself” or “command your scribes to write a decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
119 1:19 mh1a וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֑וֹר 1 Alternate translation: “these laws never become invalid” or “can never be changed”
120 1:19 jd27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person תָב֜וֹא & לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “never come into your presence again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
121 1:19 jd29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy תָב֜וֹא & לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. The phrase means that Queen Vashti will never again come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “never again come before King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
122 1:19 jd31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ יִתֵּ֣ן הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠רְעוּתָ֖⁠הּ הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You can show the same meaning with a verb that addresses a singular “you” and indicates that Memukan is offering advice, not giving a command when he say, “choose another woman to be queen.” Alternate translation: “the king can give her position as queen to some other woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
123 1:19 afh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠מַלְכוּתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 You can translate the abstract noun **royalty** with an expression such as “her royal position” or “her position as queen.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
124 1:19 afj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַ⁠טּוֹבָ֥ה מִמֶּֽ⁠נָּה 1 Memukan means that the next queen should be “better than” Vashti by obeying all of the king’s commands. You could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
125 1:20 v9l3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁמַע֩ פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when everyone … hears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
126 1:20 des3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person פִּתְגָ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person: “When they hear what you have commanded.” Alternate translation: “when they hear the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
127 1:20 jd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶֽׁר־יַעֲשֶׂה֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 Even though the decree of Ahasuerus applied only to Vashti directly, implicitly it meant that all wives had to obey their husbands or else their husbands could banish and divorce them as well. You can say this explicitly at the end of the verse by saying, “because if any wife disobeys her husband, he can banish and divorce her, just as you did to Vashti.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
128 1:20 afj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 Memukan speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. Alternate translation: “for all your kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
129 1:20 p8nz כִּ֥י רַבָּ֖ה הִ֑יא 1 Alternate translation: “even though your empire is very large”
130 1:20 afj5 הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֗ים יִתְּנ֤וּ יְקָר֙ לְ⁠בַעְלֵי⁠הֶ֔ן 1 Alternate translation: “women will respect and obey their husbands”
131 1:20 be9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְ⁠מִ⁠גָּד֖וֹל וְ⁠עַד־קָטָֽן 1 This expression figuratively refers to all of the husbands in the empire. By naming both extremes, it includes everyone in between. You could just give the meaning, as UST does: “every husband in the empire.” Alternate translation: “this will be true for both the most important man and the least important man in the empire, and everyone in between” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
132 1:21 afj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּיטַב֙ הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 Like “if it is good to the king” in verse 19, this is an idiom that means the king thought this was a good idea or this advice pleased the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
133 1:21 afj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ וְ⁠הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֑ים 1 Here, **eyes** stand for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus and all the officials who heard Memukan’s advice thought that his suggestion was a good idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
134 1:21 agj1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר מְמוּכָֽן 1 This means that King Ahasuerus wrote a law proclaiming what Memukan had suggested.
135 1:21 p5us rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מְמוּכָֽן 1 Translate his name as in [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
136 1:22 agj3 וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֤ח סְפָרִים֙ אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **He** means King Ahasuerus. This is saying that the king sent letters to every province in his empire.
137 1:22 jd37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 This is an idiom that means “every province” or every single province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
138 1:22 agj5 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
139 1:22 jd39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 This is an idiom that means “every people group” or every single people group. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
140 1:22 jd41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
141 1:22 jj9n לִ⁠הְי֤וֹת כָּל־אִישׁ֙ שֹׂרֵ֣ר בְּ⁠בֵית֔⁠וֹ 1 This meant that all men should have complete authority over their wives and their children.
142 1:22 jd43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
143 1:22 agj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּ⁠לְשׁ֥וֹן עַמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 The implication is that the husband ought to be able to give orders to his wife in his own native language and that she should understand and obey him, even if she had to learn his language to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
144 2:intro eb4q 0 # Esther 2 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Esther becomes queen\n\nEsther was humble and took the advice of the royal officials about how to dress for her time with the king. The king chose Esther to be the new queen.\n\n### Mordecai warns the king against a plot\n\nEsther’s cousin, Mordecai, discovered that two men planned to kill the king. He told Esther, who then told the king. She also gave Mordecai credit for telling her.
145 2:1 dpc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent אַחַר֙ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 This introduces a new event that happened some time later, but we do not know how much later. You can show this with a phrase like “After some time had passed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
146 2:1 e4lp כְּ⁠שֹׁ֕ךְ חֲמַ֖ת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “when King Ahasuerus was not angry any more” or “when King Ahasuerus became less angry”
147 2:1 agj9 זָכַ֤ר אֶת־וַשְׁתִּי֙ 1 This means that he started to think about Vashti. He probably thought about the things that he liked about her, meaning that he missed her.
148 2:1 xpt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֔תָה וְ⁠אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 This refers to Vashti’s refusal to obey Ahasuerus, and to the decision he made in [1:21](../01/21.md) that she could never come into his presence again. This could actually mean that when he thought about Vashti and what she had done, he regretted the decision that he had made about her. But there was nothing he could do to bring her back because the laws of the empire could not be changed. You could explain all or some of this in your translation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
149 2:1 agk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁר־נִגְזַ֖ר עָלֶֽי⁠הָ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say that the king performed the action. Alternate translation: “what he had decided” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
150 2:2 agk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נַעֲרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מְשָׁרְתָ֑י⁠ו 1 These were not the older, wiser royal advisors whom Ahasuerus consulted in [1:13](../01/13.md), but younger men who stood nearby the king ready to help with any practical needs. You could call them his personal servants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
151 2:2 agk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ נְעָר֥וֹת 1 Implicit in this suggestion is the idea, “You should get a new wife for yourself.” You can say that explicitly at the beginning of the advice that the young men gave to the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
152 2:2 s4hv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants יְבַקְשׁ֥וּ 1 **Them** refers to the servants that the king would send to do this. If this is unclear, you could say “servants” or “your servants.” Be sure to express this in a form that shows that it is a not a command but a respectful suggestion such as “You could send some men Alternate translation: “to look for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
153 2:2 zi03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person לַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ 1 The young men speak to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “for yourself” or “on your behalf” if that would be clear but also respectful in your language (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
154 2:2 jd45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom טוֹב֥וֹת מַרְאֶֽה 1 As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
155 2:3 g9vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠יַפְקֵ֨ד הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 The young men speak to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternatively, you could have them say “you could appoint” in a respectful way (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
156 2:3 jd47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom טוֹבַ֨ת מַרְאֶ֜ה 1 As in 1:11, this is an idiom that means very beautiful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
157 2:3 xqf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֤ן הַ⁠בִּירָה֙ 1 In this context, this expression probably means “to the palace here in Susa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
158 2:3 j4ka בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 This means the harem for virgins, the place where the young women would live and receive beauty treatments before they were taken to the king (see verses 13 and 14).
159 2:3 d754 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “let Hegai, the king’s official, who is in charge of the women, take care of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
160 2:3 jd49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יַ֥ד הֵגֶ֛א 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Hegai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
161 2:3 lf71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הֵגֶ֛א 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
162 2:3 jd51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “your eunuch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
163 2:3 agk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס 1 See how you translated this term in 1:10. Alternate translation: “the official of” or “the administrator of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
164 2:3 agk9 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “who is in charge of the women who live there.”
165 2:3 w1ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 This term seems to refer to a specific substance that women would put on their face or other parts of their body to make themselves more beautiful. From verse 12, it appears to mean lotions that were used along with oils and perfumes. But here, this one aspect of a woman’s beauty treatment seems to be used to refer to all of it, so you could call these “beauty treatments.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
166 2:4 jd53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תִּיטַב֙ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The servants spoke to the king in third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying something such as “the young woman you like the best.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
167 2:4 lh3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus could decide which young woman he liked the best and make her queen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
168 2:4 jd55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 Here, **eyes** have the same figurative meaning. The phrase indicates that King Ahasuerus thought that this suggestion was a good idea. Alternate translation: “The king found their suggestion appealing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
169 2:4 zxc1 וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ כֵּֽן 1 Alternate translation: “so he followed the suggestion”
170 2:5 h6z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants אִ֣ישׁ יְהוּדִ֔י 1 This introduces Mordecai as a new character in the story. Use your language’s way of introducing a new character. This expression means a Jewish man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
171 2:5 uu9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 Here the phrase likely indicates the city rather than the palace, that is, the capital city of Susa. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
172 2:5 zxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
173 2:5 q2rz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֶּ֣ן יָאִ֧יר בֶּן־שִׁמְעִ֛י בֶּן־קִ֖ישׁ 1 These are men’s names. Jair, Shimei, and Kish are Mordecai’s male ancestors. You could say, “Mordecai was the son of Jair, who was the son of Shimei, who was the son of Kish,” or see the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
174 2:5 kw5t אִ֥ישׁ יְמִינִֽי 1 While this likely refers to Kish, it is necessarily also true of Mordecai, and you could put it second in the verse. That way Mordecai’s nationality would come first, then his tribe, and then his family and clan. Alternate translation: “from the tribe of Benjamin”
175 2:6 zxc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם עִם־הַ⁠גֹּלָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הָגְלְתָ֔ה עִ֖ם יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 The story now tells about something that happened many years before. This is background information that explains how this Jewish family came to live in Susa. You can introduce this by saying something like, “Many years earlier.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
176 2:6 z7fe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon had taken Kish away from Jerusalem along with some other captives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177 2:6 egm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 You can bring this information forward from later in the verse because it provides background information that helps identify Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
178 2:6 zxc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הָגְלָה֙ מִ⁠יר֣וּשָׁלַ֔יִם 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought the people that he took away from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “had taken Kish away from Jerusalem … and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
179 2:6 zxc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous עִ֖ם 1 This means that the two things happened at the same time. You can indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time that he took.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
180 2:6 ch1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יְכָנְיָ֣ה מֶֽלֶךְ־יְהוּדָ֑ה 1 In the historical passage where this event is described (2 Kings 24:8–17), this king is called Jehoiachin. That was another name by which he was known. You can call him Jehoiachin here in Esther if you think that would help your readers recognize him better. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
181 2:6 zxv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶגְלָ֔ה נְבוּכַדְנֶאצַּ֖ר מֶ֥לֶךְ בָּבֶֽל 1 You can say where King Nebuchadnezzar brought this king when he took him away from Jerusalem. For example, you can say, “Nebuchadnezzar … took King Jehoiachin of Judah away from Jerusalem and brought him to Babylon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
182 2:7 zxv3 וַ⁠יְהִ֨י 1 The story now returns to talking about Mordecai. If it is helpful for your readers, you can specify his name, saying, “Now, Mordecai.”
183 2:7 hfm9 בַּת־דֹּד֔⁠וֹ 1 If your language has a specific term for this relationship, you can use it. For example, you can say, “his cousin.” Alternate translation: “his uncle’s daughter”
184 2:7 m9kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הֲדַסָּ֗ה הִ֤יא אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 Here the story is indicating that this woman’s Hebrew name was Hadassah and her Persian name was Esther. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
185 2:7 zxv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶסְתֵּר֙ 1 This is a woman’s name. It occurs many times throughout the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
186 2:7 ccb1 אֵ֥ין לָ֖⁠הּ אָ֣ב וָ⁠אֵ֑ם 1 You could say simply that “she was an orphan,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “both her father and mother had died”
187 2:7 jd59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְ⁠הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֤ה יְפַת־תֹּ֨אַר֙ וְ⁠טוֹבַ֣ת מַרְאֶ֔ה 1 These two phrases mean something similar. Separately, they could be saying that Esther was both sexually mature and very attractive. But taken together, they mean that, overall, she was very pleasant to look at. You could combine them, as UST does, and say that she was “exceptionally attractive” Alternate translation: “she had a lovely body and a beautiful face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
188 2:7 skt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠מ֤וֹת אָבִ֨י⁠הָ֙ וְ⁠אִמָּ֔⁠הּ לְקָחָ֧⁠הּ מָרְדֳּכַ֛י ל֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַֽת 1 This is background information explaining the relationship between Mordecai and Esther. You can move it to right after the place where Esther is introduced by name because it describes what happened in the past, before Esther became a beautiful young woman. Alternate translation: “after her father and her mother had died, Mordecai had adopted her as his own daughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
189 2:8 zxv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 After providing this background information about Mordecai and Esther in verses 5–7, the story now tells what happened as a result of these facts, when the provincial officers described in verse 3 began sending young women to the harem. That is, the story tells what happened to Esther because her family was living in the Persian empire and she was very attractive. Use your language’s way of showing that the events are now moving forward after giving background information. Alternate translation: “and so this is what happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
190 2:8 zcv1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 This indicates that two actions took place at the same time. You should indicate this with a phrase like “at the same time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
191 2:8 zcv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “when the messengers proclaimed the king’s decree and the scribes published the king’s law.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
192 2:8 c52i דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 This refers to King Ahasuerus banishing Queen Vashti from his presence.
193 2:8 zcv5 וְ⁠דָת֔⁠וֹ 1 This refers to King Ahasuerus commanding that men would have complete authority over their wives.
194 2:8 zcv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע 1 You could also say where they did this action. Alternate translation: “Messengers went throughout the empire and proclaimed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
195 2:8 m3ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ נְעָר֥וֹת רַבּ֛וֹת 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
196 2:8 jd65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שׁוּשַׁ֥ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֖ה 1 Here again, this likely means “the capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
197 2:8 mbk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֣ד הֵגָ֑י 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. As the overseer of the women, Hegai was responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. You could say that the officers “put them under the custody of Hegai” or that “Hegai began to take care of them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
198 2:8 zcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠הִשָּׁמַ֤ע & וּֽ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֞ץ & וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 This means that Esther was brought to the harem of King Ahaserus at the same time as other young women were also being brought to the harem. You can say, “they brought Esther at the same time” or “they also brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
199 2:8 n3zc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they brought Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
200 2:8 zcb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֤ח 1 You can explain why this happened. For example, you can say, “Because Esther was exceptionally attractive, the officers also brought her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
201 2:8 zcb3 בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the king’s palace”
202 2:8 jd71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֥ד הֵגַ֖י שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 As earlier in this verse, this means under the custody of Hegai or that Hegai also began to take care of her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
203 2:8 zcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background שֹׁמֵ֥ר הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 This means that Hegai took care of the young women who lived in the harem for virgins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move this information to earlier in the verse when Hegai is first mentioned because it explains why the young women were brought to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
204 2:9 zcb7 וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 This means that Hegai found Esther attractive, and she obtained kindness from him or that Hegai was very impressed with Esther, and she won his favor. In other words, because he was so impressed with her, this made him want to do everything he could to help her. This is background information that explains why Hegai took the actions that are listed next.
205 2:9 zcb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּיטַ֨ב הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that Hegai thought that Esther was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
206 2:9 f8i8 הַ⁠נַּעֲרָ֣ה 1 This means Esther. You should make sure that this is clear in your translation.
207 2:9 jd75 בְ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֮ 1 Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
208 2:9 jd77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠תִּשָּׂ֣א חֶ֣סֶד לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. To say that she “lifted kindness before his face” is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, it could even suggest that Esther and Hegai became friends. Alternate translation: “she won his favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
209 2:9 jd79 לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֒ 1 Here, **his** refers to Hegai. You should make sure that this clear in your translation.
210 2:9 abc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תַּמְרוּקֶ֤י⁠הָ 1 Alternate translation: “her beauty treatments,” as in [2:3](../02/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
211 2:9 abc2 מָנוֹתֶ֨⁠הָ֙ 1 In context, this likely means that Hegai made sure that Esther was served good food that would keep her healthy.
212 2:9 abc3 שֶׁ֣בַע הַ⁠נְּעָר֔וֹת הָ⁠רְאֻי֥וֹת לָֽ⁠תֶת־לָ֖⁠הּ מִ⁠בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means that Hegai chose seven female servants from the king’s palace and assigned them to take care of Esther.
213 2:9 abc4 וַ⁠יְשַׁנֶּ֧⁠הָ וְ⁠אֶת־נַעֲרוֹתֶ֛י⁠הָ 1 **Her** means Esther, and **her young women** means the female attendants Hegai assigned to her.
214 2:10 abc6 לֹא־הִגִּ֣ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 This means that Esther had not told anyone this information about herself.
215 2:10 abc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet אֶת־עַמָּ֖⁠הּ וְ⁠אֶת־מֽוֹלַדְתָּ֑⁠הּ 1 These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does, and say something like “what people group she was from.” Alternate translation: “Esther did not tell anyone that she was a Jew, and she did not tell anyone who her relatives were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
216 2:10 abc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֧י מָרְדֳּכַ֛י צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 This is background information that explains why Esther did not tell anyone about her family or nationality. It might be helpful to your readers to state this at the beginning of the verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
217 2:10 abc9 צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ 1 This means that Mordecai had gotten her to promise not to do it.
218 2:11 jd81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 Alternate translation: “every single day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
219 2:11 abd1 מָרְדֳּכַי֙ מִתְהַלֵּ֔ךְ 1 Express this in the way your language describes an action that someone repeats over and over. For example, you can say, “Mordecai would walk around.”
220 2:11 jd83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י חֲצַ֣ר 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a place. So you could say, “in front of the courtyard.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
221 2:11 abd2 בֵּית־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “the harem for virgins”
222 2:11 abd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result לָ⁠דַ֨עַת֙ אֶת־שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 This is background information that explains why Mordecai would walk around in front of the courtyard. It was so that he could ask people who were going into or coming out of the courtyard how Esther was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could place this first in the verse because it explains the rest of what is said. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
223 2:11 nz1p שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “how Esther was doing” or “about Esther’s well-being”
224 2:11 abd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism שְׁל֣וֹם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר וּ⁠מַה־יֵּעָשֶׂ֖ה בָּֽ⁠הּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The story is using the repetition to emphasize how concerned Mordecai was for Esther. You could combine them and say, “how Esther was doing” or “if Esther was all right.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
225 2:12 jcj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ 1 Verses 12 to 14 are background information about how the virgins who were gathered for the king became his concubines. These verses are not specifically about Esther, but about the women in general. Use your language’s way of letting your readers know that this is background information by using a connecting word or a phrase such as, “This is how virgins became concubines for the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
226 2:12 jd85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom נַעֲרָ֨ה וְ⁠נַעֲרָ֜ה 1 Alternate translation: “each one of the young women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
227 2:12 abd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֡יעַ תֹּר֩ & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא ׀ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֗וֹשׁ 1 Each of these young women was going to have sexual relations with the king and, as a result, legally become one of his concubines, that is, one of his secondary wives. As the story has already explained, he would then choose one of them to become his queen and primary wife. But the king would still provide for each of the concubines for the rest of her life; they would not be free to marry anyone else. This is something that the story’s original audience would have understood implicitly. you could say it explicitly if your readers need this information to understand the story: “Each young woman in the harem, one at a time, was going to have sexual relations with King Ahasuerus and become one of his concubines” or “one of his secondary wives.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
228 2:12 p7i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown כְּ⁠דָ֤ת הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ 1 Here, **law** probably does not mean a legal decree, but rather a standard regimen that had been developed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
229 2:12 abd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background כִּ֛י כֵּ֥ן יִמְלְא֖וּ יְמֵ֣י מְרוּקֵי⁠הֶ֑ן 1 This phrase indicates that the story is now going to provide background information on how these treatments were done. It means, “This is how these women would spend the time preparing to go to the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
230 2:12 abd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שִׁשָּׁ֤ה חֳדָשִׁים֙ בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 This means that a woman’s attendants would rub her body with olive oil mixed with myrrh every day for six months. you could explain this in more detail if your readers need this information to understand the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
231 2:12 abd9 בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מֹּ֔ר 1 This likely means “olive oil mixed with myrrh.”
232 2:12 zhd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּ⁠בְ⁠תַמְרוּקֵ֖י הַ⁠נָּשִֽׁים 1 This means lotions designed for women. In 2:3 and 2:9, this one specific part of the program seems to be used figuratively to mean all of it, and so in those verses it can be translated “beauty treatments.” But it should be translated with a specific term or phrase here, such as “women’s lotions” or “feminine ointments” because it is named along with oils and perfumes as one component of the treatment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
233 2:13 abd0 וּ⁠בָ⁠זֶ֕ה 1 Alternate translation: “after a woman’s year of beauty treatments was completed”
234 2:13 abe0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַֽ⁠נַּעֲרָ֖ה בָּאָ֣ה אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means that the young woman would go and have sexual relations with the king and thereby become one of his concubines. If your readers need this information to understand the story, you could explain that here, if you did not do so in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
235 2:13 abe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 **Anything** most likely refers to clothing and jewelry. This phrase probably means that a woman could take any of those that she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly by saying, “A young woman could take whatever clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem for virgins and wear them when she went to the king’s palace.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
236 2:13 v133 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר תֹּאמַ֜ר יִנָּ֤תֵֽן לָ⁠הּ֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she could take whatever she wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
237 2:13 xx9x בֵּ֥ית 2 Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
238 2:13 abe3 בֵּ֥ית הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the king’s rooms” or “the king’s house” or “the king’s palace”
239 2:14 abe4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִ֣יא בָאָ֗ה 1 She would not walk over on her own. Rather, the king’s servants would come and bring her to the king’s private quarters, in the way that they were told to bring Vashti to the banquet in [1:11](../01/11.md). you could say this explicitly if it would help your readers to understand the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
240 2:14 ded5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ֠⁠בַ⁠בֹּקֶר הִ֣יא שָׁבָ֞ה 1 It is implied that this is the following morning. This information can be made clear. Once again, she would not go on her own. Alternate translation: “the next morning the king’s servants would bring her to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
241 2:14 lq9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בֵּ֤ית הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ שֵׁנִ֔י 1 Alternate translations: “a different house for women” or “the harem for concubines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
242 2:14 yw63 אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “where Shaashgaz, the king’s servant in charge of the concubines, would take care of her”
243 2:14 ze74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֶל־יַ֧ד שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. Just as Hegai was the overseer of the virgins, Shaashgaz was the overseer of the concubines, so he would be the one responsible for Esther while she was in the harem for concubines. Alternate translation: “under the custody of Shaashgaz” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
244 2:14 q5yx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שַֽׁעֲשְׁגַ֛ז 1 This is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
245 2:14 abe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סְרִ֥יס הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this term, **eunuch**, in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” rather than “of the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
246 2:14 abe6 שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 This means that Shaashgaz was the official who *took care of the concubines* or who was responsible for the concubines.
247 2:14 abe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַ⁠פִּֽילַגְשִׁ֑ים 1 As a **concubine**, the young woman was one of the king’s secondary wives. She would live in this harem for the rest of her life. She was not free to return to her family or to marry anybody else. If it would help your readers to understand the story, you could explain all or part of this to your readers here, if you did not do so in 2:12 or 2:13. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
248 2:14 abe8 לֹא־תָב֥וֹא עוֹד֙ אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 In verse 12, the Note mentioned that “go to the king” meant “have sexual relations with the king.” But for this occurrence of the expression, it is appropriate to use a more general phrase such as “visit the king” because there could be other, more social reasons for a further visit. The woman would now be a secondary wife, and the king would only send for her if he decided that he enjoyed being with her. Alternate translation: “She would not go and see the king again”
249 2:14 abe9 חָפֵ֥ץ בָּ֛⁠הּ 1 This means that he “had enjoyed being with her” or that she “had pleased the king very much.”
250 2:14 abf0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְרְאָ֥ה בְ⁠שֵֽׁם 1 You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “and the king asked for her by name” or “and called for her by name.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
251 2:15 fiy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠בְ⁠הַגִּ֣יעַ תֹּר־אֶסְתֵּ֣ר & לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 The story resumes here after the background information that was provided in verses 12-14 about what the women in the harem did when they became concubines of the king. A contrast is being drawn. A young woman could take any clothing and jewelry she wanted from the harem. But Esther only asked for what Hegai recommended. So it would be good to introduce this episode with a word such as “but,” which draws a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
252 2:15 jk51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish בַּת־אֲבִיחַ֣יִל דֹּ֣ד מָרְדֳּכַ֡י אֲשֶׁר֩ לָקַֽח־ל֨⁠וֹ לְ⁠בַ֜ת 1 This background information reminds the reader who Esther was by describing her relationship to Mordecai. You could make this a separate sentence and move it later in the verse to keep from breaking up the flow of the first sentence about what Esther did. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
253 2:15 mg8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲבִיחַ֣יִל 1 This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
254 2:15 qx3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א בִקְשָׁה֙ דָּבָ֔ר כִּ֠י אִ֣ם אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 You can state this in a positive form by saying, “she asked only for.” Alternate translation: “she did not ask for anything else to wear except” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
255 2:15 vw9r אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 Alternate translation: “what Hegai recommended” or “what Hegai suggested”
256 2:15 abf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֹאמַ֛ר הֵגַ֥י 1 As the king’s personal servant, **Hegai** would have known what kind of clothing and jewelry Ahasuerus found attractive on a woman. By following his advice, Esther showed that she trusted Hegai. This is implicit information that you could make explicit if it would help the reader to understand the story. You might say, for example, “Hegai knew the king’s preferences because he was his personal servant. Esther had come to trust Hegai and so she followed his advice.” This could go at the end of the verse or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
257 2:15 abf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שֹׁמֵ֣ר הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֑ים 1 This is saying that Hegai was the royal official responsible for the women in the harem for virgins. This is background information that reminds the reader who Hegai was by describing his responsibilities. You could also move this to the end of the verse and put it in parentheses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
258 2:15 abf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown סְרִיס־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you decided to translate the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). You could say “royal” for “of the king.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
259 2:15 z519 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom נֹשֵׂ֣את חֵ֔ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. In this context, the expression probably means that everyone who saw Esther dressed in the clothes she would wear for her visit to the king was very impressed with the way she looked. Alternate translation: “pleased all who saw her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
260 2:15 jd87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֖י 1 Here, **eyes** is a metonym for seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. In this context, the phrase probably means that everyone who saw Esther thought that she was either an attractive woman or a pleasant person, or both. Alternate translation: “in the judgment of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
261 2:15 jd89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations כָּל־רֹאֶֽי⁠הָ 1 This phrase can mean either **every man or every person who saw her**. Alternate translation: “every man who saw her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
262 2:16 jd91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּלָּקַ֨ח אֶסְתֵּ֜ר 1 You can say this with an active form by saying, for example, “The king’s servants brought Esther.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
263 2:16 abf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns אֶל־בֵּ֣ית מַלְכוּת֔⁠וֹ 1 You can use an adjective to translate the abstract noun **royalty.** For example, you can say, “in his royal palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
264 2:16 jd92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “in month ten” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
265 2:16 jr5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 **Tebeth** is the name of the tenth month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “that is, the month of Tebeth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
266 2:16 abf6 חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court. But for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given.
267 2:16 abf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ טֵבֵ֑ת 1 You could convert the Hebrew days and months into approximate dates on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to provide the Hebrew days and months. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
268 2:16 x6yg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת־שֶׁ֖בַע לְ⁠מַלְכוּתֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
269 2:17 p3s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֶּאֱהַ֨ב הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֶת־אֶסְתֵּר֙ מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠בְּתוּלֹ֑ת 1 These two phrases mean almost the same thing. The information is given twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Ahasuerus was completely convinced that Esther was the one he should make his queen**.** “More than all the virgins” basically duplicates the meaning of “more than all the women,” so, if this duplication would be confusing in your language, you don’t need to include both phrases, or you could say, “more than all of them” for the second phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
270 2:17 abf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִ⁠כָּל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁ֔ים 1 This means all the other women who had been brought to the king and who became his concubines. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
271 2:17 bcu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 This is a rare expression in Hebrew, and the exact meaning is uncertain. See how you translated similar phrases in [2:9](../02/09.md) and [2:15](../02/15.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus was very impressed with both Esther’s appearance and her personality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
272 2:17 abf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַ⁠תִּשָּׂא־חֵ֥ן וָ⁠חֶ֛סֶד לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 **Favor** and **kindness** mean similar things and are probably used together here to strengthen a single idea. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased with her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
273 2:17 jd93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
274 2:17 sym3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֤שֶׂם כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ בְּ⁠רֹאשָׁ֔⁠הּ 1 Ahasuerus did this to show that he was making Esther his queen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
275 2:17 abg0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כֶּֽתֶר־מַלְכוּת֙ 1 To translate the abstract noun **royalty**, you can use an adjective such as a “royal” crown. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
276 2:18 abg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה גָד֗וֹל 1 The king did this to celebrate Esther becoming the queen. You can say this explicitly. For example, you can say, “Then, to celebrate her becoming the queen, the king hosted a great feast.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
277 2:18 b1hd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 You could indicate to your readers this is the name that Ahasuerus gave to the feast, for example, “He called it ‘Esther’s Feast.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
278 2:18 ufm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וַ⁠הֲנָחָ֤ה לַ⁠מְּדִינוֹת֙ עָשָׂ֔ה 1 This was probably a “tax holiday,” that is, a temporary elimination of taxes. For a time, the provinces did not have to send in the usual taxes to the king. You could say something like “he proclaimed a temporary reprieve from taxes for all the provinces of his empire.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
279 2:18 jd95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כְּ⁠יַ֥ד הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **hand** figuratively represents the action of doing or giving. The phrase means that King Ahasuerus personally gave lavish gifts to the guests at this feast. You could say something like “with royal generosity” or “with great willingness to give” or “with generosity that only a king can give.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
280 2:19 g38f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 Since this happened some time after Esther’s Feast, you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
281 2:19 p842 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 The most likely explanation for this is that Ahasuerus decided he would like to have more concubines. you could say this explicitly if it will help the readers to understand the story. He probably believed that having a large number of concubines was another thing that would show he was a great king. To do so, you could add: “because Ahasuerus decided that he would like to have more concubines.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
282 2:19 abg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “at the time when the king’s officers were gathering virgins for a second time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
283 2:19 ang3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וּ⁠בְ⁠הִקָּבֵ֥ץ בְּתוּל֖וֹת שֵׁנִ֑ית וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 This indicates that the information about Mordecai explains what he was doing at this same time. You can use a phrase such as “during this time” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
284 2:19 a23f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֥ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Possible meanings are: (1) **Sitting at the king’s gate** is an idiom meaning that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) Mordecai sat there so he could hear about how Esther was doing from the many people who passed through the gate.
285 2:19 i8in בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s house” or “the gate to the king’s palace”
286 2:20 abg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מֽוֹלַדְתָּ⁠הּ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עַמָּ֔⁠הּ 1 These two short phrases mean almost the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that Esther followed Mordecai’s instructions exactly. You could combine them, as UST does. Alternate translation: “who her relatives were or that she was a Jew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
287 2:20 fb39 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר צִוָּ֥ה עָלֶ֖י⁠הָ מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 Alternate translation: “just as Mordecai had instructed her” or “as Mordecai had made her promise” or “because Mordecai had warned her not to tell anyone”
288 2:21 vi16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֔ם 1 This resumes the story after the background information that is provided in verse 20. Indicate this in the way that your language resumes a story after giving background information, such as with a connecting phrase like “during that time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
289 2:21 abg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 It is implicit in the story that Mordecai heard the two men talking who are named right afterwards. You can say this explicitly if it helps the readers to understand this part of the story. To do so, add: “he heard two men talking.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
290 2:21 abg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יֹשֵׁ֣ב בְּ⁠שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 As in verse 19, this is likely an idiom that means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate where officials met to make important decisions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
291 2:21 y2vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִּגְתָ֨ן וָ⁠תֶ֜רֶשׁ 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
292 2:21 abg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שְׁנֵֽי־סָרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). For the phrase **of the king**, you can say “royal.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
293 2:21 abh0 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֣י הַ⁠סַּ֔ף 1 In this case the men were not guardians of one of the harems but guardians of the king’s private rooms. You could say, “they guarded the doorway to the king’s private rooms” or “they protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters.”
294 2:21 abh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקְשׁוּ֙ 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they were plotting” or “they wanted to find a way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
295 2:21 jd97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. You could say, “they were planning to assassinate him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
296 2:22 y7tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּוָּדַ֤ע הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 You can say this with an active form, for example by saying, “Mordecai found out what they were planning.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
297 2:22 abh2 וַ⁠יַּגֵּ֖ד לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 This means that he told Queen Esther about it somehow.
298 2:22 dgp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֵׁ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 This expression means that Esther passed the information along to King Ahasuerus on Mordecai’s behalf or that she told the king the information had come from Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
299 2:23 abh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 This verse tells what happened next after Esther gave the information to the king. You can use a word such as “then” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
300 2:23 ld4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יְבֻקַּ֤שׁ הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֔א 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “Then the king’s servants investigated Mordecai’s report and found out that it was true.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
301 2:23 abh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּתָּל֥וּ שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־עֵ֑ץ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king ordered his servants to impale those two men on wooden poles” or “the king ordered his servants to hang those two men on a gallows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
302 2:23 y28j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עֵ֑ץ 1 This seems to refer specifically to a pole or wooden structure that would be used to suspend a person above the ground and that could be used as a means of killing him or to display his body after he was dead. This might mean: (1) by hanging him from it with a rope tied around his neck, or (2) by impaling him on it, that is, by sticking a sharp point on one end of a pole through his body. Alternate translation: “wooden structure” or “wooden pole” or “gallows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
303 2:23 g9nh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֗ב 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “The king’s scribes recorded an account of this.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
304 2:23 abh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠סֵ֛פֶר דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠יָּמִ֖ים 1 This is an idiom that describes a regular record of the events in a king’s reign. You could call this “the royal chronicles.” Alternate translation: “the daily record book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
305 2:23 abh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** refers figuratively to the presence of a person. The phrase means that the scribes wrote this account while King Ahasuerus was personally present. You could say that they did this in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “the king watched a scribe write this down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
306 3:intro zb26 0 # Esther 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Haman plots against the Jews\n\nMordecai was told to prostrate himself before Haman. This would be considered to be worship. But for a Jew, it was wrong to worship someone other than Yahweh. Because of this, he refused to do it. This made Haman angry, so he decided to kill all the Jews in the Persian Empire. Haman was a descendant of Agag, a king of the Amalekite people. The Amalekites became the enemies of the Jews during the exodus (Exodus 17:8-16). Moses told the people that they would need to destroy them (Deuteronomy 25:17-19), and later God commanded Saul to destroy them (1 Samuel 15:2-3). Samuel killed King Agag (1 Samuel 15:33), but the Amalekites were never completely destroyed (1 Samuel 30:17). Both Mordecai and Haman were probably very aware that their people were enemies.
307 3:1 mm4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a connecting phrase that introduces a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
308 3:1 abh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential אַחַ֣ר ׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 This event happened some time after Esther became queen, and you can show this by using a connecting phrase such as “some time later.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
309 3:1 ir5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הָמָ֧ן 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs many times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
310 3:1 abh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 These are the names of Haman’s father and Haman’s people group. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
311 3:1 abh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit גִּדַּל֩ & אֲחַשְׁוֵר֜וֹשׁ אֶת־הָמָ֧ן 1 This means that Ahasuerus **promoted** Haman. It’s implied in the story that Haman was already one of Ahasuerus’s officials, but that he was now being promoted to a higher position. You could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
312 3:1 abi0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ וַ⁠יָּ֨שֶׂם֙ אֶת־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize that the king was making Haman very powerful. You could combine them and say something like, “the king gave Haman a very high position that was over all of his other officials.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
313 3:1 pl9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יְנַשְּׂאֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to advance or promote a person to a higher, more important position than they held previously. Alternate translation: “he gave him a more important position” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
314 3:1 ptm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 Here, **seat of authority** means Haman’s position or status in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
315 3:1 abi1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you can express the same idea with a concrete noun for this whole phrase. For example, you can say, “his position.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
316 3:1 abi2 מֵ⁠עַ֕ל כָּל־הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר אִתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 **Him** in this phrase may refer to the king. You could say that “the king promoted him above his other officials” or “gave him more authority than all of his other officials” or that “Haman became more important than all of his other officials.”
317 3:2 abi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, the **gate of the king**, probably the entrance to the citadel, may figuratively represent the citadel itself, the place where these people served the king. The citadel, in turn, would represent everyone who served the king. So you could say just “all the king’s other servants.” However, this may also be a reference to the specific group of officials who were stationed at the gate, the way Mordecai was. Alternate translation: “the royal officials who were stationed at the palace gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
318 3:2 abi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠כָל־עַבְדֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ & כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ לְ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 The servants were required to do this as a way of honoring him whenever Haman walked by. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
319 3:2 e25k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 This means that the other officials humbled themselves and lay flat on the ground before Haman. These actions represented recognition and respect for the very high position that the king had given him in the Persian government. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
320 3:2 abi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet כֹּרְעִ֤ים וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the officials knew how important it was to obey the king’s command and honor Haman in this way. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “bow down all the way to the ground.” Alternate translation: “bowing and lying down on the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
321 3:2 fg8v וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוִים֙ 1 This means bowing down all the way to the ground.
322 3:2 jd99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains the reason why all the other officials were bowing to Haman. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
323 3:2 abi6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּי־כֵ֖ן צִוָּה־ל֣⁠וֹ 1 The king did this as a sign of Haman’s new position. You can state this here or in a separate sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “the king had commanded them to do this in order to show that he had given Haman such a high position” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
324 3:2 abi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was against the king’s command and how much determination it took for Mordecai to remain standing. You could combine these phrases as UST does and say, “But Mordecai refused to bow down to Haman.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
325 3:2 abi8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָ֨רְדֳּכַ֔י לֹ֥א יִכְרַ֖ע וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶֽה 1 It appears that as a Jew, Mordecai considered it wrong to worship anyone other than Yahweh, and that he believed he would be worshiping Haman if he bowed down low to the ground to honor him. So, on religious grounds, Mordecai refused to bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
326 3:3 abi9 עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this expression at the beginning of [3:2](../03/02.md).
327 3:3 abj0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ & לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 They spoke to Mordecai because they saw that he did not bow down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. You could say, for example, “The other officials saw that, and they asked Mordecai.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
328 3:3 abj1 מַדּ֨וּעַ֙ אַתָּ֣ה עוֹבֵ֔ר אֵ֖ת מִצְוַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternative translation: “why are you disobeying the king’s command” or “why are you not obeying what the king commanded”
329 3:4 jd3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ 1 This means that they spoke to him about not bowing down. Specifically, they warned him that he would be severely punished if he kept disobeying the king and not honoring his highest official. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
330 3:4 jd1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom י֣וֹם וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 This expression means “every day.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
331 3:4 abj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יְהִ֗י ב⁠אמר⁠ם אֵלָי⁠ו֙ & וְ⁠לֹ֥א שָׁמַ֖ע אֲלֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 Here, **he did not listen** means he did not heed their warning or he did not do what they said. Mordecai heard them, but he did not do what they advised him to do. This means that even though the other officials questioned him and probably warned him, he still refused to bow down. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
332 3:4 uek4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠הָמָ֗ן לִ⁠רְאוֹת֙ הֲ⁠יַֽעַמְדוּ֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 In this context, **standing** figuratively means to survive a challenge, and **words** means the reasons that Mordecai gave for his actions. This phrase means that the other officials told Haman about it to see if he would tolerate it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
333 3:4 abj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 This is the answer that Mordecai gave the other officials when they asked him why he refused to bow down to Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put it first in the verse because it explains everything that happens afterwards. Alternate translation: “Mordecai told them that he was a Jew, and that Jews would bow down only to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
334 3:4 abj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥יד לָ⁠הֶ֖ם אֲשֶׁר־ה֥וּא יְהוּדִֽי 1 Mordecai’s explanation would have included the fact that Jews would only worship Yahweh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
335 3:5 abj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָמָ֔ן 1 Here, **seeing** figuratively means knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Haman learned about this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
336 3:5 njt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֵ֣ין מָרְדֳּכַ֔י כֹּרֵ֥עַ וּ⁠מִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה ל֑⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious an offense this was. You could combine them as UST does and say, “Mordecai was refusing to bow down to him.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai would not bow down or lie on the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
337 3:5 wk8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֖ן חֵמָֽה 1 Here, **Haman’s rage** is spoken of as something that could fill him up. You could say that he was furious or extremely angry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
338 3:6 k5h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Haman considered that it was not enough” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
339 3:6 abj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 Haman probably decided to go to such extremes because he was so angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
340 3:6 abj7 וַ⁠יִּ֣בֶז 1 **Despise** in this context means not to hate but to think little of or think something is too small. This expression means that Haman decided it would not be enough just to kill Mordecai alone.
341 3:6 jd9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֗י⁠ו 1 Here, **eyes** stand for “seeing,” and in this case “seeing” figuratively means judgment. This phrase means in Haman’s judgment. Alternate translation: “as he saw it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
342 3:6 abj8 לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ בְּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֣י לְ⁠בַדּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “he rejected the idea of killing only Mordecai” or “he decided to kill more than just Mordecai” or “he decided that it would not be enough to get rid of only Mordecai”
343 3:6 j11r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֤ח יָד֙ 1 As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
344 3:6 abj9 כִּֽי־הִגִּ֥ידוּ ל֖⁠וֹ אֶת־עַ֣ם מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 **They** means the other royal officials. **Him** refers to Haman. **The people of Mordecai** means the Jews. Mordecai had told these officials that he would not bow down to Haman because Jews worshiped only God. So this means that the other officials had told Haman that Mordecai was not bowing down to him because he was a Jew.
345 3:6 hue9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֣שׁ הָמָ֗ן לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֧יד 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means trying to do something. In this context, it means that Haman decided that he would try to kill all the Jews. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
346 3:6 abk0 בְּ⁠כָל־מַלְכ֥וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֖וֹשׁ 1 This means in the entire empire that King Ahasuerus ruled.
347 3:6 abk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים & עַ֥ם מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 These two phrases refer to the same group of people. The repetition emphasizes how great the threat was to their existence. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “all of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “Mordecai’s people, the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
348 3:7 zl12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁוֹן֙ 1 Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
349 3:7 wyv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 **Nisan** is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
350 3:7 abk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown חֹ֣דֶשׁ נִיסָ֔ן 1 As in [2:16](../02/16.md), you could convert the Hebrew month into an approximate time on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the dates will be different every year and the translation will not be quite accurate. So you may just want to give the Hebrew month. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
351 3:7 tw99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁנַת֙ שְׁתֵּ֣ים עֶשְׂרֵ֔ה לַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translations: “during the twelfth year of the reign of Ahasuerus as king of Persia” or “when King Ahasuerus had reigned for about twelve years” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
352 3:7 g4lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ ה֨וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 The storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and the word for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
353 3:7 abk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֜ל 1 A **lot** was an object with different markings on various sides that was used, most likely by dropping it on the ground, to select a specific time for doing something. The belief was that God or the gods would control which way the object fell, thus guiding the selection process and granting favor to the action if it were done on the date chosen. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
354 3:7 abk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. You can say, for example, “Haman had his servants cast a Pur.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
355 3:7 abk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result הִפִּ֣יל פּוּר֩ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first because it explains the rest of what happens in this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
356 3:7 j13r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הָמָ֗ן 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Haman was physically present when the lot was cast. Alternate translation: “as Haman watched” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
357 3:7 j15r מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 This expression means that the lot was cast to select a particular day of the month and a particular month of the year.
358 3:7 j17r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִ⁠יּ֧וֹם ׀ לְ⁠י֛וֹם וּ⁠מֵ⁠חֹ֛דֶשׁ לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ 1 Haman was casting the lot to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to determine the best day and the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
359 3:7 ih4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. This name occurs several times in the story. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
360 3:7 abk6 שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 See how you decided in [2:16](../02/16.md) and the first part of this verse to represent the dates that are given in the Hebrew calendar in the book of Esther. Be consistent.
361 3:7 abk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 This means that the lot indicated the twelfth month of that year as the time for Haman to carry out his plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (The day that was chosen is reported in verse 13.) Alternate translation: “the lot indicated the twelfth month, the month of Adar, as the best month to kill the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
362 3:7 k3vd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternative translation: “month twelve” or “the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
363 3:8 abk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 The implication is that Haman then went to see the king so that he could speak with him. You could say that explicitly. Do not give your readers the impression that the king was present with Haman while he was casting the lot. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
364 3:8 aig9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers יֶשְׁנ֣⁠וֹ עַם־אֶחָ֗ד 1 **He** refers to the king, and **one people** refers to the Jews as a people group. So this means there is a people group or a group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
365 3:8 p4a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מְפֻזָּ֤ר וּ⁠מְפֹרָד֙ 1 These two words mean almost the same thing. Haman uses the repetition to emphasize that the Jews are everywhere throughout the empire and so their influence, which he says is bad, will affect everyone. You could combine these words as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
366 3:8 abk9 בֵּ֣ין הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֔ים בְּ⁠כֹ֖ל מְדִינ֣וֹת מַלְכוּתֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 Haman is saying that the Jews are mixed in with all the other peoples, and they live in every province.
367 3:8 abl0 וְ⁠דָתֵי⁠הֶ֞ם שֹׁנ֣וֹת מִ⁠כָּל־עָ֗ם וְ⁠אֶת־דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֵינָ֣⁠ם עֹשִׂ֔ים 1 Haman is saying that the Jews have their own set of laws, and he is accusing them of not obeying the king’s laws as a result.
368 3:8 r34x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person דָּתֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could have him say, “your laws.” Or you could indicate this respect another way by having Haman begin by saying, “Your Majesty.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
369 3:8 bf9g וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ אֵין־שֹׁוֶ֖ה לְ⁠הַנִּיחָֽ⁠ם 1 Haman is saying, “It is not good for you to allow them to live in your empire.” This can also be stated without the negative. Alternate translation: “the king should remove them” or “you should remove them”
370 3:8 j19r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠לַ⁠מֶּ֥לֶךְ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person by saying, “not good for you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
371 3:9 abl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
372 3:9 abl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 See how you decided to translate this idiom in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” or “if the king thinks this is a good idea” or “if this advice is pleasing to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
373 3:9 abl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֖ב 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who would do the action. For example, you could say, “the king could write a decree” or “you could write a decree.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
374 3:9 abl4 לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 This means that the decree would say that all the Jews should be killed.
375 3:9 eh3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֶשְׁקוֹל֙ עַל־יְדֵי֙ עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) Haman could mean that the king’s men will be able to collect a huge amount of money from the plunder that they would get from the Jews. Referring to the weight would be a way of saying, “I guarantee that it will be at least that much.” This reasoning agrees with 3:13, where the king’s letter specifies that those who kill the Jews can take their plunder. Alternate translation: “we will get so much plunder that the officers you send will be able to bring back” (Also see UST) (2) “**Weigh out into the hands**” could be an idiom that means Haman himself will pay the officers who will put the plan into effect. Haman will not do this personally, but it means that he will take responsibility for paying them from his own resources. Alternate translation: “From my own resources I will pay … to the men who do the work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
376 3:9 lhv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 This would be worth over $300 million at current prices today. But since prices vary over time, if you expressed the value in modern measurements, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate. Instead you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the talent, and explain in a note that a talent was equivalent to about 30 kilograms. Alternatively, you could specify the weight of the silver in the text, as UST does in metric tons. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
377 3:9 vm59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole וַ⁠עֲשֶׂ֨רֶת אֲלָפִ֜ים כִּכַּר־כֶּ֗סֶף 1 The **talent** was the largest unit of money and **10,000** was the largest number in the counting system of the time. It is possible that Haman used these terms to represent a very large, but not precise, amount. Alternate translation: “a huge amount of silver” or “enormous amounts of silver” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
378 3:9 abl5 עֹשֵׂ֣י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָ֔ה 1 This could mean: (1) those who work for the king in general (administrators) or (2) more specifically the officers whom Ahasuerus would send around the empire to organize the killing of the Jews.
379 3:9 abl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Haman speaks to the king in third person as a form of respect. You could also have him speak of “your royal treasuries.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
380 3:10 abl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 The implication is that Ahasuerus thought that Haman’s suggestion was a good idea and he agreed to it. You could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king agreed that this was a good idea, so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
381 3:10 abl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֧סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל יָד֑⁠וֹ וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֗⁠הּ לְ⁠הָמָ֧ן 1 **Giving the ring to Haman** showed that Haman could act on the king’s own authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king gave Haman the power to act on his authority to carry out the plan. To show that, he gave Haman the ring he wore that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
382 3:10 c9md rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 This was a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. This ring had the king’s name or mark on it. When he put a wax seal on important papers, he would press the mark onto the seal. If a paper had this mark on its seal, people would know that what was written on the paper was written with the king’s authority and had to be obeyed. You could describe this as “the ring he wore that had his official seal on it.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
383 3:10 abm0 בֶּֽן־הַמְּדָ֛תָא הָ⁠אֲגָגִ֖י 1 This information about Haman’s identity is repeated to stress that the king giving him the signet ring was an official legal act that transferred power to him. (In the same way, legal documents today often use a person’s full name and other identifying information.) If you repeat this information in your own translation, your readers should see this significance.
384 3:10 abm1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִֽים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. It means that he had become “the enemy of the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
385 3:11 sz4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠כֶּ֖סֶף נָת֣וּן לָ֑⁠ךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. This could mean one of the following things: (1) “You can keep the money from plundering the Jews for yourself.” (2) “I give you permission to take the money from the Jews and to give it to the men just as you have said.” (3) “You do not need to pay for the expenses of the plan yourself.” (4) This statement by the king may also be a formal and cultural way of expressing gratitude for the promised money without actually releasing Haman from paying the money into the treasury. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
386 3:11 abm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָ⁠עָ֕ם לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת בּ֖⁠וֹ כַּ⁠טּ֥וֹב בְּ⁠עֵינֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The king is telling Haman that **he can do whatever he wants to the Jews**. Alternate translation: “you can do to the Jews as you see fit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
387 3:12 hx6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְאוּ֩ סֹפְרֵ֨י הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. It was most likely Haman, since the king had given him authority to act on his behalf. So you could say, “Haman called in the royal scribes.” Alternate translation: “the king summoned his scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
388 3:12 t6qa rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 You can add “of that same year” to show that Haman did this right after Ahasuerus agreed to his plan. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the first month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
389 3:12 abm3 בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֣ר יוֹם֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 You can put this information first because it places the event within the timeline of the story.
390 3:12 abm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה הָמָ֡ן 1 You can say this with an active form. You can also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Haman dictated a letter to them” or “they wrote a decree containing all that Haman had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
391 3:12 abm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנֵֽי־הַ֠⁠מֶּלֶךְ 1 This seems to mean the officials of the king who served in the palace in the capital city, since they are distinguished from the provincial governors and the leaders of the people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
392 3:12 j23r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 This expression means every province**.** See how you translated this in 1:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
393 3:12 abm7 שָׂ֤רֵי עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “the leaders of each people group”
394 3:12 j25r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom עַם֙ וָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 This expression means every people group**.** See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
395 3:12 j27r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 See how you translated this in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “to each province using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
396 3:12 abm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 The implication is that the scribes translated the letter and sent it to each province using its own alphabet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
397 3:12 j31r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 See how you translated this expression in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “and to each people group in its own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
398 3:12 j33r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשׁוֹנ֑⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** is a metonym meaning the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “according to its language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
399 3:12 abm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֨ם הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹשׁ֙ נִכְתָּ֔ב 1 There are two This could mean: (1) Here, **name** could mean the authority of the king. This would be saying that Haman’s letter had the same authority as it would have had if the king had sent it himself. Alternate translation: “Haman sent the letter under the king’s own authority” (2) However, this could also mean that Haman actually had the scribes sign the king’s name to the letter. Alternate translation: “they signed the king’s name at the end of the letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
400 3:12 lyf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נִכְתָּ֔ב וְ⁠נֶחְתָּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to show that he was sending the letter under the king’s own authority, Haman sealed each copy of the letter with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it,” or “the scribes signed the king’s name at the end of the letters. Then they sealed the letters with wax, and stamped the wax by using the king’s ring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
401 3:13 hxx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁל֨וֹחַ סְפָרִ֜ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “couriers delivered the letters.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
402 3:13 j34r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַ֣ד הָ⁠רָצִים֮ 1 Here, **hand** could mean two different things: (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the couriers carried the letters in their hands. Alternate translation: “couriers hand-delivered the documents” (2) “Hand” could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that couriers were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers gave the documents directly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
403 3:13 abn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־מְדִינ֣וֹת הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 Haman did not send the letters to the provinces (the geographical territories) themselves. Rather, he sent them to the officials in every province in the empire. The story is using the word “province” to refer figuratively to these officials by something associated with them, the territories they ruled. Your translation should make clear that the letters were sent to people, not places. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
404 3:13 xs6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֡יד לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֣ד 1 These words mean the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is envisioned. You could combine them as UST does and say something like “completely destroy.” (A “doublet” can use more than two words. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
405 3:13 abn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מִ⁠נַּ֨עַר וְ⁠עַד־זָקֵ֜ן 1 This is a figure of speech that figuratively describes all of something by naming two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. You could express its meaning as UST does and say something like “every single one of them.” Alternate translation: “including young people and old people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
406 3:13 abn2 טַ֤ף וְ⁠נָשִׁים֙ 1 Alternate translation: “including the children and the women”
407 3:13 j35r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “on a single day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
408 3:13 abn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 Implicitly, this means “the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
409 3:13 g5br rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 Alternate translation: “on day thirteen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
410 3:13 j36r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “of month twelve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
411 3:13 i5ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 This is the name of the twelfth month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you decided in 2:16 and 3:7 to express dates that the story gives according to the Hebrew calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
412 3:13 pbp1 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 This means that the letters also said that those who killed the Jews could take everything that belonged to them.
413 3:14 tj7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 You can say this with an active form. For example, you can say, “The officials in every province presented a copy of the letter as the law.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
414 3:14 vga2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 This expression means each and every province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
415 3:14 l9w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב & גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָֽ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to post copies where everyone could see them” or “the king commanded the officials to display copies of these letters where all the people could see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
416 3:14 f6dc לִ⁠הְי֥וֹת עֲתִדִ֖ים לַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 Alternate translations: “so that people would be ready to do on that day what the king had written in the letter” or “so that they would get ready to do what the letter said to do when the day came”
417 3:15 abn4 הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This means that the king had commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible.
418 3:15 abn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הָֽ⁠רָצִ֞ים יָצְא֤וּ דְחוּפִים֙ בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 You can state explicitly where the couriers brought the letters. Alternate translation: “as the king had commanded, couriers rushed the letters to every province in the empire” or “then, according to what the king commanded, men riding horses took these letters quickly to every province in the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
419 3:15 i12c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. For example, you can say, “People read the letter out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
420 3:15 nlk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֑ה 1 Here this likely means in the “capital city of Susa.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
421 3:15 abn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche יָשְׁב֣וּ לִ⁠שְׁתּ֔וֹת 1 (1) This could mean that Ahasuerus and Haman had more than just a drink together. This could be a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. They may have celebrated with an entire banquet that is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “had a celebration feast together” (2) Another possibility is that this is describing a toast that Ahasuerus and Haman shared to celebrate their plan. “Sat down” would simply be describing how the men would have reclined at a table to drink. Alternate translation: “had a celebration toast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
422 3:15 wm4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נָבֽוֹכָה 1 The implication is that the people in Susa were very upset about what was going to happen and they did not know what to do about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
423 3:15 wbgv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר 1 The author wants us to see the contrast between the king and Haman sitting down to relax and drink and the people in the city agitated and in an uproar over what the king and Haman had proclaimed. Use a connecting word or other way that your language uses to show a contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
424 3:15 abn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֥יר שׁוּשָׁ֖ן 1 This does not mean the city itself, but the people who live there. This is a figure of speech in which something is called not by its own name, but by the name of something closely associated with it. So this means “everyone who lived in Susa” or the people in Susa (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
425 3:15 abn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns נָבֽוֹכָה 1 You can translate the abstract noun **confusion** with a verbal phrase such as “was very confused.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
426 4:intro z7u2 0 # Esther 4 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Mordecai warns Esther to act\n\nMordecai tells Esther she must beg the king for the Jews’ lives even if she risks her own death.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Implicit information\n\nThere is implicit information that translators may not understand. The sentence, “Who knows whether you have come to this royal position for such a time as this?” means “maybe God made you the queen so you could save the Jews.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
427 4:1 j37r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י יָדַע֙ 1 Here the story re-introduces Mordecai as the main character in focus. Alternate translation: “when Mordecai found out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
428 4:1 nya6 כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר נַעֲשָׂ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “about Haman’s plan to kill all the Jews” or “about those letters”
429 4:1 vgy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 These actions demonstrate extreme sadness. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
430 4:1 abn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרַ֤ע מָרְדֳּכַי֙ אֶת־בְּגָדָ֔י⁠ו וַ⁠יִּלְבַּ֥שׁ שַׂ֖ק וָ⁠אֵ֑פֶר 1 You can explain why Mordecai did this. Alternate translation: “he was so anguished that he tore his clothes and put on rough sackcloth and threw ashes over himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
431 4:1 abo0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹךְ הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 The next verse shows that Mordecai was heading towards the king’s palace. You could say that explicitly here. Mordecai might have wanted to call attention to the danger that the Jews were in by going to a public location where people were used to seeing him. Or he might have wanted to contact Esther and ask her to help with the trouble. Or he might have wanted both. Alternate translation: “he started walking towards the city center, towards the king’s palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
432 4:1 abo1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּזְעַ֛ק זְעָקָ֥ה גְדֹלָ֖ה וּ⁠מָרָֽה 1 **Great** and **bitter** are two words that refer to the same thing and that work together. They indicate that Mordecai’s cry was so loud because it was so anguished. Alternate translation: “cried out in anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
433 4:2 abo2 וַ⁠יָּב֕וֹא 1 **He** means Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai came”
434 4:2 j38r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַ֖ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that Mordecai could not come inside the gate to the king’s palace, but had to wait just outside of it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
435 4:2 abo3 שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this in [2:19](../02/19.md). Alternate translation: “the gate to the king’s palace”
436 4:2 abo4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֥ין לָ⁠ב֛וֹא אֶל־שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ בִּ⁠לְב֥וּשׁ שָֽׂק 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it explains why Mordecai waited outside. See the UST. Alternate translation: “But no one who was wearing sackcloth was allowed inside the palace gates” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
437 4:3 e73y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֗ה 1 This expression means in every single province. See how you translated the term “province” in 1:1. Alternate translation: “in each and every province” or “in every province of the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
438 4:3 abo5 מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 Alternate translation: “anywhere that the letter that said to destroy the Jews was announced in public”
439 4:3 abo6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ 1 These two phrases are referring to the same thing, that is, the information that the letter conveyed. The repetition is used to emphasize how serious a situation this was. Alternate translation: “the letter from the king” or “the law that said to destroy the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
440 4:3 e7zx אֵ֤בֶל גָּדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “the Jews mourned greatly” or “when the Jews heard about it, they mourned greatly”
441 4:3 abo7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠צ֥וֹם 1 **Fasting** is a sign of mourning. If your readers would not understand this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “they went without food because they were so upset” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
442 4:3 abo8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וּ⁠בְכִ֖י וּ⁠מִסְפֵּ֑ד 1 These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how distressed the Jews were. Alternate translation: “wailed loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
443 4:3 djf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction שַׂ֣ק וָ⁠אֵ֔פֶר יֻצַּ֖ע לָֽ⁠רַבִּֽים 1 These were actions that demonstrated deep grief. “Many of them lay on the ground, dressed in sackcloth and sitting in ashes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
444 4:4 q7ll נַעֲר֨וֹת אֶסְתֵּ֤ר 1 Alternate translation: “Esther’s female servants” of “Esther’s maids”
445 4:4 abo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֶ֨י⁠הָ֙ 1 See how you translated this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “her male servants” or “her other officials” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
446 4:4 abp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לָ֔⁠הּ 1 That is, they told her that Mordecai was sitting outside the gate wearing sackcloth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
447 4:4 abp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 **The queen** means Esther. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Esther herself became very afraid” or “this made the queen very distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
448 4:4 abp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּתְחַלְחַ֥ל הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֖ה מְאֹ֑ד 1 The implication is that this happened when she heard what Mordecai was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When she heard about this, Esther herself became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
449 4:4 y8bc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּשְׁלַ֨ח בְּגָדִ֜ים לְ⁠הַלְבִּ֣ישׁ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֗י 1 **She** means Esther. This was her way of encouraging Mordecai to be hopeful and act publicly as if whatever situation he was worried about were not completely desperate. Alternate translation: “she sent servants to take to Mordecai some good clothes to wear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
450 4:4 abp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹ֥א קִבֵּֽל 1 This was Mordecai’s way of replying to Esther that the situation truly was desperate. Alternate translation: “he refused to put them on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
451 4:5 abp4 וַ⁠תִּקְרָא֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Alternative translation: “then Esther summoned Hathak, one of the king’s officials”
452 4:5 vf4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לַ⁠הֲתָ֜ךְ 1 This is a man’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
453 4:5 lp8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר הֶעֱמִ֣יד לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Alternate translation: “who was one of the royal guardians whom the king had assigned to serve Esther personally” You can put this information first because it provides background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
454 4:5 icg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מִ⁠סָּרִיסֵ֤י 1 See how you translated this term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
455 4:5 j39r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the guardians served Esther personally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
456 4:5 abp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism לָ⁠דַ֥עַת מַה־זֶּ֖ה וְ⁠עַל־מַה־זֶּֽה 1 These two phrases mean similar things. In both cases, “this” refers to what Mordecai was doing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Esther now knew there must be a very serious reason why Mordecai was wearing sackcloth in such a public place. Alternate translation: “to find out why he was so distressed that he was sitting at the palace gate wearing sackcloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
457 4:6 abp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א הֲתָ֖ךְ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 Hathak went out specifically to speak with Mordecai and find out why he was so distressed, as Esther had asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Hathak went out to speak with Mordecai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
458 4:6 mgl5 רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 Alternate translation: “the central plaza”
459 4:6 j41r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of an object. The phrase means that the open square was in front of the palace gate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
460 4:6 abp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שַֽׁעַר־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The citadel is being described by reference to something associated with it, the gate that leads into it. Alternate translation: “the citadel gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
461 4:7 zq3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche אֵ֖ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 Here, **him** refers to Mordecai, but here Mordecai figuratively represents the entire group of which he is a member. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman was planning to do to the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
462 4:7 abp9 פָּרָשַׁ֣ת הַ⁠כֶּ֗סֶף אֲשֶׁ֨ר אָמַ֤ר הָמָן֙ לִ֠⁠שְׁקוֹל עַל־גִּנְזֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ בַּיְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) the amount of silver that Haman said the king would get for his treasury from the plunder that the people who destroyed the Jews would take from them, or (2) the amount of silver that Haman had said he would contribute to pay for the expenses of the plan to destroy the Jews. You could say either one as an alternate translation, but it should agree with your interpretation of [3:9](../03/09.md).
463 4:8 j43r פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן כְּתָֽב־הַ֠⁠דָּת 1 Alternate translation: “a copy of the letter that Haman had sent out” or “a copy of the decree”
464 4:8 zt49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הַ֠⁠דָּת אֲשֶׁר־נִתַּ֨ן בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֤ן 1 If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the law that the heralds had read out loud in Susa” or “the decree that the king’s servants had posted in Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
465 4:8 abq0 לְ⁠הַשְׁמִידָ⁠ם֙ 1 Alternative translation: “that said that all the Jews must be killed”
466 4:8 abq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism לְ⁠הַרְא֥וֹת אֶת־אֶסְתֵּ֖ר וּ⁠לְ⁠הַגִּ֣יד לָ֑⁠הּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize how important Mordecai knew it was for Esther to understand just what Haman was planning. “so that Esther could see exactly what it said.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
467 4:8 abq2 וּ⁠לְ⁠צַוּ֣וֹת עָלֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 Alternate translation: “and to urge her”
468 4:8 gds6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הִֽתְחַנֶּן־ל֛⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠בַקֵּ֥שׁ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They are repeated to emphasize the force of the action that Mordecai felt was needed. Alternate translation: “to plead with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
469 4:8 j47r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִ⁠לְּ⁠פָנָ֖י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. In this context, the phrase means that Esther should go into the presence of the king to ask personally for the king’s intervention. Alternate translation: “to go to the king personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
470 4:8 abq3 עַל־עַמָּֽ⁠הּ 1 Alternate translation: “to act mercifully toward her people”
471 4:10 abq5 וַ⁠תֹּ֤אמֶר אֶסְתֵּר֙ לַ⁠הֲתָ֔ךְ וַ⁠תְּצַוֵּ֖⁠הוּ אֶֽל־מָרְדֳּכָֽי 1 Alternate translation: “then Esther told Hathak to go back to Mordecai and tell him this”
472 4:11 abq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 **All the servants of the king** refers to the royal officials in the palace. **The people of the provinces** refers to those living out in the empire. So this phrase means something like “those both near and far.” Esther is using a figure of speech to refer to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “everyone in the whole empire knows.” Alternate translation: “all the king’s officials and all the people in the empire know this law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
473 4:11 abq7 כָּל־עַבְדֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ וְ⁠עַם־מְדִינ֨וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ יֽוֹדְעִ֗ים 1 Esther says this to show that there is no uncertainty about this being the law. You can put this information after the description of the law itself, If it would be helpful in your language, so that it can serve to emphasize how definite the law is that was just described.
474 4:11 d9mh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism כָּל־אִ֣ישׁ וְ⁠אִשָּׁ֡ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר 1 Here, Esther once again refers to a group figuratively by describing two parts of it. She means all of the people whom Ahasuerus rules as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “anyone”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
475 4:11 abq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction יָבֽוֹא־אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֩ אֶל־הֶ⁠חָצֵ֨ר הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֜ית 1 As [5:1](../05/01.md) makes clear, this refers to a courtyard right outside the room where King Ahasuerus sat on his throne. He could see out of the entrance to the room into the courtyard and tell if anyone came and stood there. Anyone who did that was asking to speak to the king. Alternate translation: “who goes into the inner courtyard of the palace, where the king can see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
476 4:11 abq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־יִקָּרֵ֗א 1 If it would help your readers to understand, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “when the king has not summoned that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
477 4:11 abr0 אַחַ֤ת דָּת⁠וֹ֙ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this after the explanation of the law itself. Alternate translation: “this law applies to everyone in the kingdom”
478 4:11 abr1 לְ⁠הָמִ֔ית 1 Alternate translation: “that person must be executed” or “the guards will kill that person”
479 4:11 abr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction לְ֠⁠בַד מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יֽוֹשִׁיט־ל֥⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 If the king pointed his scepter toward a person, that meant that the king was accepting him. Alternate translation: “unless the king extends his golden scepter towards him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
480 4:11 abr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֥יט הַ⁠זָּהָ֖ב 1 A scepter was an ornamental staff or wand that rulers carried or held as a symbol of their authority. According to this, the scepter of King Ahasuerus was made of gold. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
481 4:11 ilp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠חָיָ֑ה 1 This means that the guards will not kill this person and he can proceed to speak to the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the guards will not kill him and he can speak to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
482 4:11 abr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י לֹ֤א נִקְרֵ֨אתי֙ לָ⁠ב֣וֹא אֶל־הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 Esther is saying by implication that she cannot speak to the king as Mordecai has requested because the king has not been calling for her, which would have given her an opportunity to speak to him. If she goes without being summoned, she could be put to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
483 4:11 j49r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י 1 This expression indicates a contrast between Esther’s present situation and the situation she has just described. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
484 4:11 abr5 זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 The phrase means that Esther has not been called in the king’s presence for a period of at least 30 days. You could use an equivalent expression in your language that would indicate this is a long enough time that Esther has reason to believe the king is not interested in seeing her. Alternate translation: “in over a month”
485 4:11 gv1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers זֶ֖ה שְׁלוֹשִׁ֥ים יֽוֹם 1 Alternate translation: “thirty days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
486 4:12 abr6 וַ⁠יַּגִּ֣ידוּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֔י 1 From this point on, the author focuses only on Mordecai and Esther and does not specify who the messenger is. You can use a general phrase such as, “they told Mordecai” or “Mordecai was told” or “messengers told Mordecai.” If that would be confusing, you could continue to specify that the messenger was Hathak, as the ancient Greek version did. See the UST.
487 4:13 abr7 וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר מָרְדֳּכַ֖י לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶל־אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “then Mordecai sent back this message to Esther”
488 4:14 i1uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה יַעֲמ֤וֹד לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מִ⁠מָּק֣וֹם אַחֵ֔ר 1 Here, **relief** and **deliverance** are spoken of as if they are living things that can rise up. Alternate translation: “someone else will rise up from another place and rescue the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
489 4:14 t3k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet רֶ֣וַח וְ⁠הַצָּלָ֞ה 1 Here, **relief** and **deliverance** mean very similar things. They are used together to emphasize the great emotion behind being delivered from this great evil. If it works better in your language, you can use one word instead of two, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
490 4:14 abs0 וְ⁠אַ֥תְּ וּ⁠בֵית־אָבִ֖י⁠ךְ תֹּאבֵ֑דוּ 1 The implication is that the Jews will be rescued starting in that other place, but the ones living in Susa will still be in danger because no one who could have helped them there (such as Esther) would have done anything. Alternate translation: “you and your relatives will be killed”
491 4:14 dtg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion וּ⁠מִ֣י יוֹדֵ֔עַ אִם־לְ⁠עֵ֣ת כָּ⁠זֹ֔את הִגַּ֖עַתְּ לַ⁠מַּלְכֽוּת 1 This is really a statement, and it is about what is happening right then. Mordecai asks it in question form so that Esther will think deeply about her role in this situation. Alternate translation: “who knows, perhaps it was to intervene in this very situation that you became queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
492 4:16 d6cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים הַֽ⁠נִּמְצְאִ֣ים בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live here in Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
493 4:16 t2wg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠צ֣וּמוּ עָ֠לַ⁠י 1 The verb **fast** here is plural, including Mordecai and all of the Jews. Fasting (that is, going without eating) was a symbolic act that the Jews did when they were praying intensely. You could make the connection with prayer explicit. Alternate translation: “fast and pray for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
494 4:16 qw8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers וְ⁠אַל־תֹּאכְל֨וּ וְ⁠אַל־תִּשְׁתּ֜וּ שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת יָמִים֙ לַ֣יְלָה וָ⁠י֔וֹם 1 This expression means that Esther was asking the Jews in Susa not to eat or drink anything during the day or the night for a period of three days. Alternate translation: “tell them to not eat or drink anything for three days and three nights” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
495 4:16 j51r גַּם־אֲנִ֥י וְ⁠נַעֲרֹתַ֖⁠י אָצ֣וּם כֵּ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “my maids and I will also fast”
496 4:16 abs2 וּ⁠בְ⁠כֵ֞ן 1 Alternate translation: “after we have all done that, and while still fasting”
497 4:16 abs3 אֲשֶׁ֣ר לֹֽא־כַ⁠דָּ֔ת 1 Alternate translation: “even though there is a law against going without being summoned”
498 4:16 abs4 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר אָבַ֖דְתִּי אָבָֽדְתִּי 1 Alternate translation: “then if they kill me, they kill me”
499 4:17 abs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יַּעֲבֹ֖ר מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 The implication is that Mordecai did this after Hathak brought Esther’s reply back to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so after Hathak told this to Mordecai, he went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
500 4:17 abs6 כְּ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־צִוְּתָ֥ה עָלָ֖י⁠ו אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 Alternate translation: “everything that Esther had told him to do”
501 5:intro k5ff 0 # Esther 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins a section about Haman’s fall (Chapters 5-7).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Esther’s respect\nEsther approached the king with the utmost of respect. By doing this, her character became respected by the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
502 5:1 j53r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֗י 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “three days later” or “when Esther had been fasting for three days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
503 5:1 abs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **royalty**, you can express the same idea with an adjective and a concrete noun. Alternate translation: “Esther put on the robes that showed that she was the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
504 5:1 abs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּלְבַּ֤שׁ אֶסְתֵּר֙ מַלְכ֔וּת 1 It is clear from the story that before she went to see the king, Esther got a banquet ready so that she could invite him and Haman to come to it right away. If it is confusing to leave that out, you can explain that here. Alternate translation, add: “Esther prepared a grand banquet and then put on her royal robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
505 5:1 abs9 בַּ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠פְּנִימִ֔ית 1 See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “the inner courtyard of the palace”
506 5:1 uk7p נֹ֖כַח בֵּ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “across from the room where the king was”
507 5:1 abt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns וְ֠⁠הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ יוֹשֵׁ֞ב עַל־כִּסֵּ֤א מַלְכוּת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מַּלְכ֔וּת 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to those things that belonged only to the king. You can translate this idea with a verb, “the throne he ruled from” and “the palace where he reigned,” or with an adjective, “his royal throne” and “his royal palace.” Alternate translation: “in the throne room of the palace, sitting on the king’s throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
508 5:1 j55r נֹ֖כַח פֶּ֥תַח הַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 Alternate translation: “facing the entrance of the room”
509 5:2 abt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְהִי֩ 1 This expression introduces what happened next. Alternate translation: “Now” or “and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
510 5:2 abt2 כִ⁠רְא֨וֹת 1 Alternate translation: “when … noticed”
511 5:2 j57r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 See how you translated similar expressions in 2:9, 2:15, and 2:17. Review the explanations there if that would be helpful. In this context, it probably means that King Ahasuerus **thought Esther looked very attractive** as she stood in the court. It could also mean that King Ahasuerus was very pleased to see her. It could mean both. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” or “he approved of her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
512 5:2 pw4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָשְׂאָ֥ה חֵ֖ן בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that King Ahasuerus decided not to kill Esther for coming into the inner court without being summoned. Alternate translation: “he was very pleased to see her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
513 5:2 uu8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said that Esther should be executed for coming into the king’s inner court without being summoned. See how you translated this in 4:11. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
514 5:2 abt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יּ֨וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר אֶת־שַׁרְבִ֤יט הַ⁠זָּהָב֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠יָד֔⁠וֹ 1 King Ahasuerus did this to show that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he extended the gold scepter toward her to signal that he would be glad to talk to her.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
515 5:2 abt4 וַ⁠תִּקְרַ֣ב 1 Alternate translation; “so … came close” or “so … came up to the throne”
516 5:2 z4mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 This action was probably customary for a king’s subjects in a Persian court, when the king extended the royal scepter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
517 5:2 abt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּגַּ֖ע בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 This action demonstrated that Esther respected the authority of King Ahasuerus and was thankful for his kindness to her. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could include that information here, such as: “ … to show that she respected his authority.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
518 5:2 j59r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּ⁠רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠שַּׁרְבִֽיט 1 Here, **head** is a metonym meaning the top (or uppermost part) of an object or location. This phrase means that Esther touched the top of the king’s scepter on the end that was extended toward her. Alternate translation: “the top of the scepter” or “the tip of the scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
519 5:3 abt6 מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?”
520 5:3 abt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַה־לָּ֖⁠ךְ אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֑ה וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is very interested in hearing why Esther has come to see him. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if it would be more natural in your language to combine them into one. Alternate translation: “What do you want, Queen Esther?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
521 5:3 j61r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 This was probably a formal and customary expression in the Persian royal court, meant to show honor to the person making a request of the king and to indicate the king’s willingness to be very generous when answering the request. King Ahasuerus was almost certainly not offering to give Esther half of his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is.” Alternate translation: “I will give you what you want, even if you ask me to give you half of my kingdom!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
522 5:3 c6h7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֥תֵֽן לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” or “I will give you what you want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
523 5:4 abt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 1:19 and 3:9. Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
524 5:4 m3uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
525 5:4 j63r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יָב֨וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָן֙ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “O king, please come with Haman” or “you and Haman come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
526 5:4 abt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “the banquet that I have prepared for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
527 5:4 abu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־עָשִׂ֥יתִי לֽ⁠וֹ 1 If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be singular, since here it refers just to the king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
528 5:5 abu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The king would have said this to his servants, not to Esther. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The king said to his servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
529 5:5 abu2 מַהֲרוּ֙ אֶת־הָמָ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֑ר 1 The **word of Esther** means her invitation to the banquet. Alternate translation: “go and get Haman and bring him quickly to the banquet that Esther has prepared”
530 5:5 abu3 עָשְׂתָ֥ה 1 Alternate translation: “had prepared for them”
531 5:6 d5wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 These two question-and-statement pairs mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther whatever she wants. If this is confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. you can combine them into one or replace the repetition with a statement of what the repetition means, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
532 5:6 pj3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 When Ahasuerus asked Esther in the throne room what she wanted, she said that she wanted him and Haman to come to a banquet she had prepared. But since the king asks her once again at the banquet what she wants, it is clear that he knew this was not her real request. Instead, he knew that she wanted to show him hospitality first, as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship. You can indicate this by translating, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
533 5:6 q5nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֖⁠ךְ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
534 5:6 e2v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
535 5:6 j65r עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is”
536 5:7 abu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֥עַן & וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֑ר 1 Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” or “replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
537 5:7 r4aw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The words **petition** and **request** mean the same thing. Esther probably used these words together as a way of speaking very formally and respectfully to the king. Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
538 5:7 abu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְׁאֵלָתִ֖⁠י וּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “this is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
539 5:8 c2br rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 The expression **find favor** means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
540 5:8 abu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. The phrase means the King Ahasuerus is pleased with Esther and willing to grant her request. Alternate translation: “if the king evaluates me and approves” or “if the king is pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
541 5:8 c2jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֜ן בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
542 5:8 abu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ ט֔וֹב 1 This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), and [5:4](../05/04.md). Alternate translation: “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
543 5:8 j69r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לָ⁠תֵת֙ אֶת־שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת אֶת־בַּקָּשָׁתִ֑⁠י 1 The phrases **to grant my petition** and **to perform my request** mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “to do what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
544 5:8 x8hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “please come with Haman to another banquet that I will prepare for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
545 5:8 j71r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual יָב֧וֹא הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ וְ⁠הָמָ֗ן אֶל־הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 If you decide to translate this as “the banquet that I have prepared for you,” then the word “you” should be dual if your language uses that form, since it refers to the king and Haman, otherwise it should be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
546 5:8 abu9 וּ⁠מָחָ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The **word of the king** means his request for Esther to tell him what she wants. Alternate translation: “I will answer your question then”
547 5:8 gf9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person כִּ⁠דְבַ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Esther speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. Alternate translation: “according to your word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
548 5:9 abv1 וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֤א 1 Alternate translation: “and … left the banquet”
549 5:9 j73r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet שָׂמֵ֖חַ וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 The word **joyful** and the phrase **good of heart** mean the same thing. These terms are used together to show that Haman was very happy after attending Esther’s banquet with King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “feeling very good” [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]
550 5:9 j75r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠ט֣וֹב לֵ֑ב 1 Here, **heart** figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. The phrase means that Haman felt happy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
551 5:9 dkg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹא־קָם֙ 1 Under other circumstances, officials were expected to bow low to the ground to show respect for Haman. See [3:2](../03/02.md). But since Mordecai was already sitting on the ground as a sign of mourning, he would have been expected to stand up to show respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai did not stand up to show respect for Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
552 5:9 j77r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠לֹא־זָ֣ע מִמֶּ֔⁠נּוּ 1 The phrase means that Mordecai was not afraid of Haman or of what Haman might do to him for refusing to show the respect that the king had commanded. Alternate translation: “or tremble fearfully in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
553 5:9 s47u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֥א הָמָ֛ן עַֽל־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י חֵמָֽה 1 Here, **Haman’s rage** is described as something that could fill him up. See how you translated this expression in [3:5](../03/05.md). Alternate translation: “Haman became very angry because of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
554 5:10 v5nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּתְאַפַּ֣ק הָמָ֔ן 1 There is a contrast between this sentence and the previous one. Haman felt very much like doing one thing, but he decided it would be better to do something else. The contrast can be indicated with a phrase such as “but even though.” Alternate translation: “but even though Haman was so angry, he kept himself from losing his temper” or “Haman refused to show how angry he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
555 5:10 bcn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names זֶ֥רֶשׁ 1 This is a woman’s name. It occurs several times in this chapter and the next. Be sure to translate it consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
556 5:11 abv4 וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר לָ⁠הֶ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “then … made a long speech to them about”
557 5:11 mvm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כְּב֥וֹד עָשְׁר֖⁠וֹ 1 **Glory** and **wealth** are both abstract nouns. Alternate translation: “Haman told them about how great his wealth was” or “Haman told them about the many great things he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
558 5:11 j79r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וְ⁠רֹ֣ב בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 Having many sons was probably seen as a mark of honor and status in Persian culture. This phrase probably means that Haman was boasting about the status he enjoyed in Persian society because he had many sons. Alternate translation: “how many sons he had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
559 5:11 abv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations בָּנָ֑י⁠ו 1 This word can sometimes be used in Hebrew to mean both male and female children. However, here it clearly refers to male children, so you should translate it that way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
560 5:11 m7fq גִּדְּל֤⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “how the king had continually given him more authority” or “how the king had honored him many times by giving him more important work”
561 5:11 b7c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נִשְּׂא֔⁠וֹ עַל 1 Here, **lifting** is a metaphor meaning to “advance” or “promote” a person to a higher, more important position than they had previously. Alternate translation: “given him a position more important than” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
562 5:11 abv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 This means all of the others, as [3:1](../03/01.md) makes clear. Alternate translation: “all of his other officials and administrators” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
563 5:11 xwvh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הַ⁠שָּׂרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַבְדֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 The words **officials** and **administrators** mean similar things. If your language uses one word for these, you can combine them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
564 5:12 abv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations אַ֣ף 1 You can translate it as an exclamation because Haman believes he has saved the best for last and is now introducing what he considers to be his most recent significant honor. Alternate translation: “and that is not all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
565 5:12 w1bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives לֹא־הֵבִיאָה֩ אֶסְתֵּ֨ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֧ה עִם־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ & כִּ֣י אִם־אוֹתִ֑⁠י 1 This can be expressed positively. Alternate translation: “I was the only one Queen Esther invited besides the king” or “Queen Esther invited just two of us, the king and me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
566 5:12 abv8 עָשָׂ֖תָה 1 Alternate translation: “she had prepared”
567 5:12 abv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־לְ⁠מָחָ֛ר אֲנִ֥י קָֽרוּא־לָ֖⁠הּ עִם־הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and she has invited me to attend another banquet with the king again tomorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
568 5:13 abw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ שֹׁוֶ֖ה לִ֑⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֗ת אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֲנִ֤י רֹאֶה֙ 1 This is a figurative way of speaking. It is as if Haman is weighing his happiness on one side of a scale and his unhappiness on the other side. Haman is saying that his happiness over all the honors he has received is still not greater than his unhappiness over seeing Mordecai fail to honor him, so on balance, he is unhappy. Alternate translation: “I still cannot be happy as long as I keep seeing” or “all of this does not make me happy” or “ … does not satisfy me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
569 5:13 wu84 וְ⁠כָל־זֶ֕ה 1 Haman is continuing to speak here. You can show this by beginning with “Then Haman said.”
570 5:13 abw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔י 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
571 5:13 abw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Haman could be referring to the way Mordecai has been refusing to stand up to honor him, or he could be referring generally to the way Mordecai has never honored him (by either bowing or standing up) ever since he was appointed to a position in the king’s service and stationed at the gate. Either way, being reminded of this dishonor is the reason why Haman continues to be unhappy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sitting at the citadel gate and refusing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
572 5:13 abw3 בְּ⁠שַׁ֥עַר הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “the citadel gate”
573 5:14 abw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תֹּ֣אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֩ זֶ֨רֶשׁ אִשְׁתּ֜⁠וֹ וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 The verb is feminine, so it is Zeresh who is speaking here. By mentioning the friends, it is implied that they are in agreement with what she says. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say, “Then Haman’s wife Zeresh suggested, and his friends agreed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
574 5:14 j81r וְ⁠כָל־אֹֽהֲבָ֗י⁠ו 1 This means the friends whom Haman had invited to his home that day. Alternate translation: “his friends who were there”
575 5:14 abw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יַֽעֲשׂוּ 1 You can say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your servants set up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
576 5:14 i2f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עֵץ֮ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
577 5:14 k8zd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֣הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּה֒ 1 You can convert this to a modern measure if that is the style of translation that you are using. Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
578 5:14 hiui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֱמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what Haman would say to the king. Alternate translation: “speak to the king and tell him that you would like to hang Mordecai on it” or “tell the king that you intend to hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
579 5:14 abw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠יִתְל֤וּ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַי֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit who does the action. Probably, Haman’s servants would carry out the action. But since it would happen under Haman’s orders and perhaps under his supervision, you could also describe him as the one who does the action if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have your servants hang Mordecai on it” or “and hang Mordecai on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
580 5:14 abw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בֹֽא & אֶל הַ⁠מִּשְׁתֶּ֖ה שָׂמֵ֑חַ 1 **Then** indicates more than a time sequence here. Zeresh and the friends are saying what the result would be. Alternate translation: “after he is dead, you will be able to go to the banquet … in a good mood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
581 5:14 bbs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּיטַ֧ב הַ⁠דָּבָ֛ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן 1 The **word** was the suggestion that Zeresh and the friends made. Here, **face** figuratively represents Haman himself by something associated with him, his face, which showed what he was thinking and feeling. Alternate translation: “Haman decided that he liked this idea” or “that suggestion pleased Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
582 5:14 i8is וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 Haman most likely did not do this personally. He ordered it to be done. Alternate translation: “he gave his servants orders to set up the pole” or “he told his servants to construct the gallows”
583 5:14 j83r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
584 6:intro i9x7 0 # Esther 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the story of Haman’s fall.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Approaching the king\nIt was not possible for a person to easily approach the king. Normally, access to him was very limited. There are several events in this chapter which show the layers of protection surrounding the king.
585 6:1 j85r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent בַּ⁠לַּ֣יְלָה הַ⁠ה֔וּא 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way of introducing a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
586 6:1 abw9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification נָדְדָ֖ה שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Here, **sleep** is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could flee away. Alternate translation: “the king could not sleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
587 6:1 abx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר לְ⁠הָבִ֞יא 1 **He** means the king. The implication is that he told the young men who attended him to do this. Verses 3 and 5 indicate this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so he commanded his servants to fetch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
588 6:1 abx2 סֵ֤פֶר הַ⁠זִּכְרֹנוֹת֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים 1 This is equivalent to the expression “the book of the events of days” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “the royal chronicles” or “the records of what had happened during all the time that he had been king”
589 6:1 abx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּהְי֥וּ נִקְרָאִ֖ים 1 This means that the chronicles were read out loud. You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the young men got the chronicles and began to read them out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
590 6:1 j87r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that the book was being read in the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
591 6:2 u4gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּמָּצֵ֣א כָת֗וּב 1 Both terms **found** and **recorded** can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the writers had recorded there” or “they read the part where the writers had written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
592 6:2 abx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 The implication is that Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering the plot and telling him about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering a plot against the king and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
593 6:2 abx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events הִגִּ֨יד מָרְדֳּכַ֜י עַל 1 To relate the events in chronological order, you can put this at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “but Mordecai had saved the king’s life by discovering their plot and telling him about it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
594 6:2 syd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִּגְתָ֣נָא וָ⁠תֶ֗רֶשׁ 1 These are the same two men who are named in [2:21](../02/21.md). However, there the first man’s name is said to be “Bigthan.” Decide on a consistent way of translating these names so your readers will know that they are the same men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
595 6:2 abx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שְׁנֵי֙ סָרִיסֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 See how you translated the term **eunuch** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “two of the royal guardians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
596 6:2 abx7 מִ⁠שֹּׁמְרֵ֖י הַ⁠סַּ֑ף 1 See how you translated this expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “who protected the doorway to the king’s private quarters”
597 6:2 abx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בִּקְשׁוּ֙ 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means actively trying to do something. Alternate translation: “they had planned” or “they had tried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
598 6:2 j89r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “to assassinate” or “to kill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
599 6:3 lmz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מַֽה־נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה יְקָ֧ר וּ⁠גְדוּלָּ֛ה לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֖י 1 **Honor** and **greatness** have similar meanings and they are used together to emphasize that Mordecai should certainly have been honored in some grand way for saving the king’s life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this by putting the terms together. For example, you could say, “What great honor was done for Mordecai?” Alternate translation: “what did we do to reward Mordecai or to show that we appreciated what he did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
600 6:3 aby0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive נַּעֲשָׂ֞ה 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what did I do” or “what did we do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
601 6:3 n2az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹא־נַעֲשָׂ֥ה עִמּ֖⁠וֹ דָּבָֽר 1 You can say this with an active form. However, it would be good to say this in a way that does not create the impression that the young men are accusing the king. Alternate translation: “no one did anything for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
602 6:3 aby1 עַל־זֶ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “for saving my life”
603 6:4 aby2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 This could mean either: (1) The king knows that there is someone in the courtyard, maybe because he heard someone walking there; he wants to know who it is. (2) Since there are always people around the palace, the king assumes that there must be someone out in the courtyard. In either case, the king wants to know if there is someone there with whom he could consult about the best way to honor Mordecai. As the story has already said in [1:13](../01/13.md), it was the king’s habit to consult his advisors on important questions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king wanted to consult someone about the best way to honor Mordecai, so he asked, ‘who is in the courtyard’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
604 6:4 aby3 מִ֣י בֶ⁠חָצֵ֑ר 1 In order to present the events in logical and chronological order, you can put the king’s question last in the verse if that would be more natural in your language. Haman had already come in the courtyard by the time the king asked this question.
605 6:4 j91r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background וְ⁠הָמָ֣ן בָּ֗א לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 This sentence indicates that Haman had already entered the outer court when King Ahasuerus asked his question. You could indicate this with a phrase such as “at that moment” or “just then” or “while they were talking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
606 6:4 rg8t לַ⁠חֲצַ֤ר בֵּית־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַ⁠חִ֣יצוֹנָ֔ה 1 This phrase is describing the first courtyard a person would come to after entering the palace from the outside. Alternate translation: “the outer courtyard of the palace”
607 6:4 vu7p לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ לִ⁠תְלוֹת֙ אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “to tell the king that he wanted to hang Mordecai” or “to tell the king that he wanted to impale Mordecai”
608 6:4 at53 הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ אֲשֶׁר־הֵכִ֥ין לֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on the pole that he had set up” or “on the gallows that he had set up for Mordecai”
609 6:4 aby4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
610 6:5 aby5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמְר֜וּ נַעֲרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 It is implied that the young men went and looked, perhaps through a window or a doorway, to see who might be in the courtyard before they answered the king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say so. Alternate translation: “the young men who served the king looked and saw that Haman was in the courtyard. They said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
611 6:5 j93r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִנֵּ֥ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. You could also have the young men address the king directly to get his attention. Alternate translation: “O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
612 6:5 j95r יָבֽוֹא 1 Alternate translation: “he may come in”
613 6:6 j97r וַ⁠יָּבוֹא֮ הָמָן֒ וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר ל⁠וֹ֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “when Haman came in, the king said”
614 6:6 ky5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person מַה־לַ⁠עֲשׂ֕וֹת בָּ⁠אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “what should I do for the man whom I would really like to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
615 6:6 n3r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “whom I am glad to honor” or “whom I want to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
616 6:6 jh4i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הָמָן֙ בְּ⁠לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Here, **heart** could mean two different things: (1) Heart could figuratively represent the action of thinking or feeling. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said in his thoughts.” (2) Heart could also be a metaphor meaning to be inside someone or something. In that case, the phrase would mean “then Haman said inside himself.” Either way, the phrase means that Haman was not saying this out loud, but saying it to himself in his thoughts. Alternate translation: “Haman thought to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
617 6:6 yft1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion לְ⁠מִ֞י יַחְפֹּ֥ץ הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת יְקָ֖ר יוֹתֵ֥ר מִמֶּֽ⁠נִּי 1 Haman is actually making a statement to himself rather than asking a question and trying to figure out the answer. He uses a question form to emphasize how true he believes the statement to be. If it would be helpful in your language, instead of a question, you could use a statement such as, “Surely there is no one whom the king would take pleasure in honoring more than me!” Alternate translation: “whom would the king like to honor more than me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
618 6:7 j1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do it and to really want to do it. Alternate translation: “for a man the king is glad to honor” or “for a man the king wants to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
619 6:7 aby6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִ֕ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “if you really want to honor someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
620 6:8 mz79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יָבִ֨יאוּ֙ 1 The implication is that the king’s servants would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “let someone bring” or “tell your servants to bring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
621 6:8 aby7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לְב֣וּשׁ מַלְכ֔וּת אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to anything that belongs to the king. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal garment.” Alternate translation: “one of your own royal robes that you have already worn yourself” or “one of the robes you wear to show that you are the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
622 6:8 aby8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אֲשֶׁ֥ר לָֽבַשׁ־בּ֖⁠וֹ הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “that you have already worn yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
623 6:8 aby9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְ⁠ס֗וּס אֲשֶׁ֨ר רָכַ֤ב עָלָי⁠ו֙ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. You can have him address the king in the second person. Alternate translation: “a horse that you have already ridden yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
624 6:8 r63j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 This whole phrase refers to the horse. You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
625 6:8 abz0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר נִתַּ֛ן כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת בְּ⁠רֹאשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 The implication is that this would be done to show that this was one of the king’s own horses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that has a royal crown on its head to show that it belongs to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
626 6:8 abz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כֶּ֥תֶר מַלְכ֖וּת 1 **Royalty** is an abstract noun that refers to the royal authority that the king exercised. You can translate this idea with an adjective, “a royal crown.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
627 6:9 pp3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָת֨וֹן הַ⁠לְּב֜וּשׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סּ֗וּס עַל־יַד־אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ 1 Here, **hand** is a metaphor meaning power, control, or authority. It appears that the king himself would not perform such acts of service to one of his subjects even if he really wanted to honor that person. So Haman is saying that on behalf of the king, representing his authority and power, one of the king’s most noble officials should present the man with the robe and the horse. Alternate translation: “then, on your behalf, have one of your most noble officials present the man with the robe and the horse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
628 6:9 j1d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִ֞ישׁ מִ⁠שָּׂרֵ֤י הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ הַֽ⁠פַּרְתְּמִ֔ים 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “one of your most noble officials” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
629 6:9 pfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הִלְבִּ֨ישׁוּ֙ 1 Since **them** is plural, it likely refers to the king’s servants. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have your servants clothe … with the robe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
630 6:9 j1d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
631 6:9 abz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֣ץ בִּֽ⁠יקָר֑⁠וֹ 1 Haman speaks to the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “the man whom you really want to honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
632 6:9 abz4 בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 This refers to a large, open space in the city, either the space that was in front of the palace (as in [4:6](../04/06.md)), or a space inside one of the city gates. In either case, this would have been a public area where people could gather, and so it was a place where a great number of people would have seen how the king was honoring Mordecai. Alternate translation: “through the public square of the city”
633 6:9 qs3k וְ⁠קָרְא֣וּ 1 Alternate translation: “and tell the noble official and servants to proclaim” or “and have them shout out”
634 6:9 j1d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that the servants were to shout out to the people in front of the man on the horse, that is, to the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “to whoever is in front of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
635 6:9 j1d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה לָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” or “this is what the king does when he especially wants to honor someone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
636 6:9 pwgm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּ֚כָה יֵעָשֶׂ֣ה 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this” or “this is what the king does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
637 6:10 j2d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ 1 The implication is that the king liked Haman’s suggestion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king liked this idea, so he replied” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
638 6:10 abz5 כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר דִּבַּ֔רְתָּ וַֽ⁠עֲשֵׂה־כֵן֙ 1 Alternate translation: “do everything that you have said” or “do just what you have suggested”
639 6:10 abz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 As in [2:19](../02/19.md), this is likely an idiom which means that Mordecai worked for the king in some capacity and was stationed at the gate. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the king’s gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
640 6:10 abz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠יּוֹשֵׁ֖ב בְּ⁠שַׁ֣עַר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 Here the king speaks of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “one of my servants, who is stationed at the gate to the palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
641 6:10 gln7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 Here the action of letting **fall** is a metaphor meaning to leave out or leave unfulfilled. The phrase means that Haman must do absolutely everything that he said. Alternate translation: “do not leave out anything that you suggested” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
642 6:10 abz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives אַל־תַּפֵּ֣ל דָּבָ֔ר 1 This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: “Be sure to do absolutely everything that you have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
643 6:11 abz9 וַ⁠יַּרְכִּיבֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ בִּ⁠רְח֣וֹב הָ⁠עִ֔יר 1 See how you translated these expressions in verse 9. Alternate translation: “seated him on the horse and then led the horse through the public square of the city”
644 6:11 j2d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֣א לְ⁠פָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman shouted out to the people in front of Mordecai, that is, the people who were in the path of his horse as it approached. Alternate translation: “called out to all of the people in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
645 6:11 j2d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֥ר הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ חָפֵ֥ץ בִּ⁠יקָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 **To delight** in doing something means to be glad to do something or to want to do something. Alternate translation: “the king is doing this because he really wants to honor this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
646 6:12 uri5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction אָבֵ֖ל וַ⁠חֲפ֥וּי רֹֽאשׁ 1 People often covered their heads to show that they were either extremely sad or ashamed. Alternate translation: “covering his head because he felt completely disgraced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
647 6:13 j3d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יְסַפֵּ֨ר הָמָ֜ן 1 The implication is that, just as Haman gathered his friends together in [5:10](../05/10.md) to boast of his status, now he gathered them together once again to talk about what had just happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman brought all his friends together again. He told … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
648 6:13 aca1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֣ר קָרָ֑⁠הוּ 1 The implication is that he told about the things that had happened to him “that day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
649 6:13 aca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יֹּ֩אמְרוּ֩ ל֨⁠וֹ חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠זֶ֣רֶשׁ 1 The implication is that, just as King Ahasuerus had royal advisors, Haman had advisors of his own. They would have been included among the “friends” he gathered for this occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of his friends were also his advisors, and they and his wife Zeresh told him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
650 6:13 aca3 חֲכָמָ֜י⁠ו 1 See how you translated this expression in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “his advisors”
651 6:13 fd5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אִ֣ם & מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁר֩ הַחִלּ֨וֹתָ לִ⁠נְפֹּ֤ל לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 This could mean either of two possibilities: (1) The action of falling could refer to bowing down and it could be a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated. Haman wanted Mordecai to bow down in front of him. But instead, the story would be saying that Haman is starting to bow down (in a metaphorical sense) in front of Mordecai. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to humiliate you. If he … ” (2) “Fall” could be a figurative way of saying “be killed in battle.” In that case, Zeresh would be comparing Haman and Mordecai to two soldiers who are fighting. She is saying that Haman has already “begun to fall,” that is, he is losing the battle, and he is likely to be killed. Alternate translation: “Mordecai has begun to defeat you. Since he … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
652 6:13 j3d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָי⁠ו֙ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. This could mean: (1) that Haman has already begun to fall down (bow down) in front of Mordecai figuratively, or (2) that Haman and Mordecai are facing one another figuratively in hand-to-hand combat. Alternate translation: “before whom” or “in whose presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
653 6:13 p5t2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִ⁠זֶּ֣רַע הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” It is a comparison: Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “one of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
654 6:13 nan5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לֹא־תוּכַ֣ל ל֔⁠וֹ 1 Here Haman’s wife and friends are again speaking figuratively as if Haman is in a battle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “you will not win against him” or “you will not have greater honor than he has” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
655 6:13 j3d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּֽי 1 This conjunction indicates a contrast between the actions of prevailing (in the previous clause) and falling. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
656 6:13 j3d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפ֥וֹל תִּפּ֖וֹל 1 Here the action of **falling**: (1) either refers once again to prostrating oneself, and is a metaphor meaning to be dishonored and defeated, or (2) Haman’s wife and friends are saying that for Haman, defeat will be the outcome of the figurative battle. Alternate translation: “you will certainly lose to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
657 6:13 j3d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָֽי⁠ו 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person. The phrase means that Haman will lose in his struggle with Mordecai. Alternate translation: “before him” or “in his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
658 6:14 j4d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background עוֹדָ⁠ם֙ מְדַבְּרִ֣ים עִמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 This phrase indicates something that happened after Haman’s wife and friends started talking with Haman and while they were still talking. You should indicate this with a phrase such as “while.” Alternate translation: “while they were still talking together, the king’s eunuchs arrived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
659 6:14 aca4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠סָרִיסֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 See how you decided to translate this term in [1:10](../01/10.md). Not all of the king’s eunuchs came. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “some of the king’s servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
660 6:14 aca5 וַ⁠יַּבְהִ֨לוּ֙ לְ⁠הָבִ֣יא אֶת־הָמָ֔ן 1 Alternative translation: “they wanted to bring Haman quickly”
661 6:14 aca6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁר־עָשְׂתָ֥ה אֶסְתֵּֽר 1 Esther’s servants would have done most of the work of preparing the banquet. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Esther and her servants had prepared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
662 7:intro x4w3 0 # Esther 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe story of Haman’s fall concludes in this chapter.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Covering Haman’s face\n\nWhen “the servants covered Haman’s face,” they were showing that he had been condemned to be executed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
663 7:1 n8vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יָּבֹ֤א הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ וְ⁠הָמָ֔ן לִ⁠שְׁתּ֖וֹת עִם־אֶסְתֵּ֥ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּֽה 1 Esther hosted Ahasuerus and Haman for more than just drinks. This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. An entire banquet is being described here by reference to one part of it, the drinks. Alternate translation: “so the king and Haman went to the second banquet that Queen Esther had prepared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
664 7:2 xt9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שֵּׁנִי֙ 1 This refers to the day after the first banquet, as mentioned in [5:8](../05/08.md). Alternate translation: “at that second banquet” or “on that second day of feasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
665 7:2 s5ae בְּ⁠מִשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 Alternate translation: “while they were drinking wine” or “while the servants were pouring the wine and giving it to them”
666 7:2 yks7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ & וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֑⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 These two statements mean almost the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show that he is truly disposed to giving Esther what she wants. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “now please tell me what you really want. Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
667 7:2 p1xt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַה־שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 Ahasuerus has now allowed Esther to show her hospitality at two banquets. But he knows that she has done this as a gesture of respect for him and their relationship, and that this signals that she has an important and urgent request to make. You can indicate this by having the king ask, “Now please tell me what you really want.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
668 7:2 sem7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠תִנָּ֣תֵֽן & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. Alternate translation: “I will give you what you ask for” or “I will do for you what you ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
669 7:2 j4d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵלָתֵ֛⁠ךְ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֛⁠ךְ 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “what you really want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
670 7:2 j4d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole עַד־חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מַּלְכ֖וּת 1 See how you translated this expression in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “I will give you anything you ask for, no matter how great it is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
671 7:3 ac96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys וַ⁠תַּ֨עַן & וַ⁠תֹּאמַ֔ר 1 Here a single idea is being expressed by using two words connected with “and.” Together the two words mean that Esther responded to the question that the king asked her. Alternate translation: “answered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
672 7:3 k27c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 **Favor** means the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
673 7:3 aca7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אִם־מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and approve” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
674 7:3 j4d7 הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 In this case, Esther is addressing Ahasuerus directly as “O king”; she is not speaking about him in the third person as a sign of respect, as she and others usually do elsewhere in the story. This may indicate a special urgency to what she is saying, so it would be good to include this difference in your translation or indicate the urgency in some other way.
675 7:3 aca8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ ט֑וֹב 1 This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). The suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good plan to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But here, Esther has just addressed the king directly with “O king” and she is pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people. So an alternate translation here could be something more like, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
676 7:3 aca9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The phrases **at my petition** and **at my request** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the urgency of the request. If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two requests. Alternate translation: “please spare my life and save my people” or “my request is that you spare my life and the lives of my people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
677 7:3 j4d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive תִּנָּֽתֶן־לִ֤⁠י נַפְשִׁ⁠י֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “please spare my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
678 7:3 bvi1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠שְׁאֵ֣לָתִ֔⁠י 1 The abstract noun **petition** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “that is what I am asking for” or “that is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
679 7:3 qghp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 If this is unclear in your language, you can repeat from the previous clause the words that have been left out. Alternate translation: “and let my people be given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
680 7:3 j5d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠בַקָּשָׁתִֽ⁠י 1 The abstract noun **request** can be expressed with the verb “ask for.” Alternate translation: “rhat is what I am asking for” or “rhat is what I want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
681 7:4 acb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 As Esther points out later in the verse, the Jews actually have not been exchanged for money. Rather, **sell** is a figurative way of saying “turn over to.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning by saying something like “For someone has turned us over to our enemies.” Alternatively, you could use the same figure, but show that it is a comparison. Alternate translation: “it is as though I and my people are cattle that have been sold to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
682 7:4 fhs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כִּ֤י נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone has sold us” or “for someone has put us in danger of our enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
683 7:4 e9cx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 As in [3:13](../03/13.md), these words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction. If using three words would be difficult or confusing in your language, you could use one word for this and indicate that the destruction is extreme. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
684 7:4 yg01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠הַשְׁמִ֖יד לַ⁠הֲר֣וֹג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֑ד 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns such as these, you can replace them with one or more verbs. Alternate translation: “and they are going to kill every one of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
685 7:4 acb2 וְ֠⁠אִלּוּ לַ⁠עֲבָדִ֨ים וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׁפָח֤וֹת נִמְכַּ֨רְנוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “if the men and even the women had been sold into slavery”
686 7:4 j5d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole אֵ֥ין הַ⁠צָּ֛ר שֹׁוֶ֖ה בְּ⁠נֵ֥זֶק הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Esther is speaking very deferentially and with some exaggeration in order to impress on the king how important this is to her. She is saying that it would have been worth less to her to see her people rescued from slavery than it would have been to see the king spared the trouble of intervening on their behalf. (Haman uses the expression of “not equal” in this same sense in [5:13](../05/13.md).) Alternate translation: “that would have been a matter too small to bother you with” or “that would be a small matter to a king like you, but this is very much worse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
687 7:4 acb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Esther addresses King Ahasuerus in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
688 7:5 acb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ & וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 These two words mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
689 7:5 acb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They both ask about the identity of the man who is trying to destroy the Jews. King Ahasuerus uses the repetition to emphasize how outraged he is. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two phrases. However, from another perspective, both the man’s identity and his location are important to know so that his plot can be stopped. So, for that reason, you could also decide to include both phrases in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
690 7:5 acb7 מִ֣י ה֥וּא זֶה֙ וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא 1 Alternate translation: “who has done this”
691 7:5 dl4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠אֵֽי־זֶ֣ה ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁר־מְלָא֥⁠וֹ לִבּ֖⁠וֹ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֥וֹת כֵּֽן 1 Here the concept of a **full heart** uses two metaphors at once. “Heart” figuratively represents the action of thinking or feeling. Also, saying that the “heart” is “full” is a figurative way of saying that someone is fully intending to do something, usually something that should not be done. Alternate translation: “where is the man who is intending to do such a thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
692 7:6 j5d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet צַ֣ר וְ⁠אוֹיֵ֔ב 1 These words mean the same thing. Together, they emphasize Haman’s complete hostility towards the Jews. If it is more natural in your language, you can combine them and indicate the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “the one who is our absolute nemesis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
693 7:6 ar4f נִבְעַ֔ת 1 Alternative translation: “was extremely afraid”
694 7:6 j5d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy נִבְעַ֔ת מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that Haman was now extremely afraid to be in the presence of King Ahasuerus and Queen Esther. Alternate translation: “this made Haman very afraid to be in the presence of the king and the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
695 7:7 bzd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ קָ֤ם בַּ⁠חֲמָת⁠וֹ֙ מִ⁠מִּשְׁתֵּ֣ה הַ⁠יַּ֔יִן 1 Here, **in his rage** is an idiom meaning to be extremely angry. Alternate translation: “the king was extremely angry and got up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
696 7:7 j6d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֶל־גִּנַּ֖ת הַ⁠בִּיתָ֑ן 1 The implication is that Ahasuerus went outside to absorb the shock that a man he had promoted to the highest position in his empire was plotting to destroy his queen and her whole people. Ahasuerus needed to sort out his conflicting loyalties and decide what to do about this. If it would be misunderstood, you could say explicitly why he went outside. Alternate translation: “he went outside to the palace garden to decide what to do.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
697 7:7 uaq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠בַקֵּ֤שׁ עַל־נַפְשׁ⁠וֹ֙ 1 Here, **seeking** figuratively means to beg or plead urgently for something. This phrase means that Haman wanted to beg Esther to persuade the king not to order his execution. Alternate translation: “to plead with Queen Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
698 7:7 qz1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֣י רָאָ֔ה 1 Here, **seeing** is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “he realized” or “he understood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
699 7:7 nin1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king had decided to cause a disaster against him” or “the king was decided to destroy him” or “the king had decided to kill him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
700 7:7 j6d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כָלְתָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה מֵ⁠אֵ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here the abstract noun **evil** means “harm,” not something that is morally wrong as in the previous verse. In this context, it can be expressed with a verb such as “execute.” Alternate translation: “the king was likely to execute him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
701 7:8 j6d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֶּ֡לֶךְ שָׁב֩ & וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל 1 The implication is that when the king returned to the room, he saw what this verse describes next. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the king returned … , he saw that Haman had fallen … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
702 7:8 h4c7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 The implication is that Haman was doing this as he pleaded for his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add that information to the end of this phrase: “ … as he was begging Esther to spare his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
703 7:8 acb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 If you prefer to present the events in chronological order, you can put this information first in the verse. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
704 7:8 acb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠הָמָן֙ נֹפֵ֔ל עַל־הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 The expression **was fallen** means that as Haman was begging for his life, he was not standing up; he had suddenly come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a couch. (From the impression that the king got when he returned, it is possible that Haman was even grabbing her arms or shoulders as he pleaded with Esther.) Alternate translation: “Haman had come down very close to Esther as she was reclining on a banqueting couch” or “Haman had thrown himself down on the couch where Esther was reclining” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
705 7:8 acc0 הַ⁠מִּטָּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶסְתֵּ֣ר עָלֶ֔י⁠הָ 1 In this culture, especially at a banquet like this one, wealthy people would recline on couches as they ate and drank. Alternate translation: “Esther’s banqueting couch”
706 7:8 thq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲ֠⁠גַם לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 The king phrases this as a question to show his shock and anger at what he thinks Haman is doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could phrase it as a statement. Alternate translation: “he is even trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
707 7:8 l4ce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism לִ⁠כְבּ֧וֹשׁ אֶת־הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֛ה 1 The story is using a mild expression to refer to something that is disturbing. In this context, “subdue” means “rape.” The king thought that Haman was trying to rape Esther, and he likely said just that. You can show this in your translation if you want to make this clear. Alternate translation: “trying to rape the queen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
708 7:8 acc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism עִמִּ֖⁠י בַּ⁠בָּ֑יִת 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the idea that they are expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. However, each one does indicate something slightly different about what a serious offense it would be if Haman actually were trying to rape Esther. It would be a violation of the king’s personal trust and a violation of the trust implicit in hospitality. So you could also include both phrases. Alternate translation: “in my presence and in my own house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
709 7:8 adq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר יָצָא֙ מִ⁠פִּ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 This expression describes the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “as soon as the king said this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
710 7:8 acc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background הַ⁠דָּבָ֗ר & וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 The king spoke, and then the servants covered Haman’s face. One action followed upon another. However, this happened so quickly that almost no time seemed to pass in between. You can indicate this with a phrase like “as soon as.” Alternate translation: “when the king said this, immediately they covered Haman’s face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
711 7:8 j6d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 The implication is that some the king’s servants who were present did this, and they did it because they understood that the king wanted Haman to be executed. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face because he was going to be executed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
712 7:8 acc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וּ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָמָ֖ן חָפֽוּ 1 **Covering the face** in this culture, as in many others, was a sign that a person had been condemned to death. Alternate translation: “some of his servants covered Haman’s face to show that he would be executed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
713 7:9 a7ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names חַ֠רְבוֹנָה 1 This is a man’s name. See how you translated it in [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
714 7:9 j7d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֶחָ֨ד מִן־הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Harbona was one of the eunuchs who served King Ahasuerus personally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
715 7:9 acc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַ⁠סָּרִיסִ֜ים לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 See how you translated this term and this phrase in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “the guardians who served the king personally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
716 7:9 j7d3 הִנֵּה 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, it can be omitted from your translation. But consider using an expression that is natural in your language for someone to address the king directly to get his attention. For example, you could say, “O king!”
717 7:9 acc5 גַּ֣ם & הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ אֲשֶׁר־עָשָׂ֪ה הָמָ֟ן לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י & עֹמֵד֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הָמָ֔ן 1 Alternate translation:“Haman has also set up a pole [or gallows] at his house because he wants to impale [or hang] Mordecai on it”
718 7:9 j7d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֣ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
719 7:9 j7d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְֽ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י אֲשֶׁ֧ר דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 This expression means that Mordecai said something that benefitted the king. Specifically, Mordecai reported an assassination plot and saved the king’s life. Alternate translation: “Mordecai, who saved the king’s life.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
720 7:9 j7d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person דִּבֶּר־ט֣וֹב עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Harbona addresses the king in the third person as a way of showing respect. Alternate translation: “saved your life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
721 7:9 acc6 עֹמֵד֙ 1 Alternate translation: “is set up”
722 7:9 sre1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance גָּבֹ֖הַּ חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים אַמָּ֑ה 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could convert this to a modern measure. See how you translated this phrase in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “seventy-five feet high” or “twenty-five meters high” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
723 7:9 acc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit תְּלֻ֥⁠הוּ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 **Him** means Haman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “hang [or impale] Haman on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
724 7:10 j8d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֖ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
725 7:10 umd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠חֲמַ֥ת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ שָׁכָֽכָה 1 Here the story figuratively compares the king’s anger to floodwaters, which can cause great destruction. “Subside” means for waters to drain away and for their level to go down. You could express the meaning by saying something like “Then the king’s rage lessened,” or “Then the king was not so angry.” Or you could use a different metaphor that would be meaningful in your language, such as, “Then the king cooled off.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
726 8:intro z6j7 0 # Esther 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### God’s protection\nYahweh is at work in this chapter preventing the possible destruction of the Jews. God used Esther and Mordecai to protect their people.
727 8:1 j8d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 This could mean one of three things: (1) A new series of events is now being described, but the story makes clear that they happened on the same day as the second banquet. While it must have been some time later in the day, the idea is that when Haman lost his life, and also his property, Esther gained what her enemy had lost. Alternate translation: “that same day” (2) The expression could also be an idiom that means “as of that day.” This would refer to the effective date for the transfer of Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “as of that day” (3) The term “day” could also be used figuratively to mean around the same time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
728 8:1 j8d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche נָתַ֞ן הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרוֹשׁ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה אֶת־בֵּ֥ית הָמָ֖ן 1 Here, **house** figuratively represents all the household and property of Haman. The story could be referring to all the property by naming one part of it, the house. Or “house” could be a metonym for “property,” meaning everything a person owns and keeps in their house, and by extension everything they own beyond the house as well. Alternate translation: “King Ahasuerus declared that everything that Haman had owned would now belong to Queen Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
729 8:1 nm3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֣ר הַיְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
730 8:1 acc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֗י בָּ֚א לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The implication is that when the king learned how Mordecai was related to Esther, he summoned Mordecai into his presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he learned that, the king sent for Mordecai to come into his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
731 8:1 j8d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase indicates that Mordecai was allowed to come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
732 8:1 acd0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 You can say this before saying that the king summoned Mordecai, since it happened first. See the UST. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king how Mordecai was related to her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
733 8:1 j9d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit הִגִּ֥ידָה אֶסְתֵּ֖ר מַ֥ה הוּא־לָֽ⁠הּ 1 Esther told this to the king. She would likely have explained not just how she and Mordecai were related, but that he had raised her after her parents died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Esther told the king that Mordecai was her cousin and that he had been like a father to her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
734 8:2 m5hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יָּ֨סַר הַ⁠מֶּ֜לֶךְ אֶת־טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ & וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 Giving the ring to Mordecai showed that Mordecai could now act on the king’s own authority, and it enabled him to do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king now gave this ring to Mordecai to show that Mordecai had the power to act on the authority of the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
735 8:2 acd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown טַבַּעְתּ֗⁠וֹ 1 See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). Review the explanation there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “the ring that had his official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
736 8:2 j9d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 This means that the king had taken back his signet ring from Haman. He would have done this when he sentenced Haman to death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the king had given Haman the ring that had his official seal on it, but he had taken it back from Haman when he sentenced Haman to death, and the king was wearing it again.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
737 8:2 acd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱבִיר֙ מֵֽ⁠הָמָ֔ן 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information first in the verse because it happened before everything else. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
738 8:2 z5yn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַֽ⁠יִּתְּנָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠מָרְדֳּכָ֑י 1 By giving his signet ring to Mordecai, the king gave Mordecai the authority to write important papers that people would have to obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
739 8:2 acd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַ⁠תָּ֧שֶׂם אֶסְתֵּ֛ר אֶֽת־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עַל־בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 To place someone over something figuratively means to put them in charge of it. Alternate translation: “Esther appointed Mordecai to be in charge of everything that had belonged to Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
740 8:2 d2tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בֵּ֥ית הָמָֽן 1 See the explanation of this phrase in verse 1. Alternate translation: “everything that Haman had owned” or “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
741 8:3 j9d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠תּ֣וֹסֶף אֶסְתֵּ֗ר וַ⁠תְּדַבֵּר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here the exact meaning of the progression of verbs is uncertain, but this verse probably begins a new event in the story separate from what happened in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “then Esther again spoke in the king’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
742 8:3 j9d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “while she was in his presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
743 8:3 j9d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **falling** is an idiom referring to the action of bowing down or prostrating oneself, and **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. Alternate translation: “and she bowed down” or “and she prostrated herself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
744 8:3 acd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 This may actually mean that Esther put her face right on top of the feet of King Ahasuerus. This would have been an act of humility and desperation by which she showed that her need was very great and that she believed the king had great power to help her. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
745 8:3 acd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּפֹּ֖ל לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 Esther’s action was probably a recognized sign of pleading in this culture. However, it would likely still have been remarkable for a queen to fall at the feet of her husband, the king. you could show this by introducing the information with a phrase like “in fact.” Alternate translation: “in fact, to show how desperately she was pleading, Esther got down and put her face right on top of his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
746 8:3 j1r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means that Esther prostrated herself in front of the feet of King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
747 8:3 jmn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠הַֽעֲבִיר֙ אֶת־רָעַת֙ הָמָ֣ן הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 Here, **the evil** refers to Haman’s plan. This expression means to prevent a wrong action from happening. Alternate translation: “to stop the evil plan of Haman the Agagite” or “to prevent the evil things from happening that Haman the Agagite had planned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
748 8:3 bp22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הָֽ⁠אֲגָגִ֔י 1 This is the name of Haman’s people group. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
749 8:3 c2hw מַֽחֲשַׁבְתּ֔⁠וֹ אֲשֶׁ֥ר חָשַׁ֖ב 1 Alternate translation: “and the plot that he had invented” or “and the plot that Haman invented”
750 8:4 xh24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וַ⁠יּ֤וֹשֶׁט הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֔ר אֵ֖ת שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 As in [5:2](../05/02.md), King Ahasuerus did this to show that Esther had his favor. In that earlier episode, this indicated that he would not enforce the law that said Esther should be executed for coming into the inner court without being summoned. But since Esther was apparently already in the king’s presence on this occasion, it seems that the gesture could also be used generally to show that the king was positively disposed towards a person and would grant the person’s request. Alternate translation: “the king held out his golden scepter to Esther” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
751 8:4 acd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שַׁרְבִ֣ט הַ⁠זָּהָ֑ב 1 See how you translated this in [4:11](../04/11.md). If it would be helpful, review the explanation of what this object was. Alternate translation: “golden scepter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
752 8:4 acd8 וַ⁠תָּ֣קָם אֶסְתֵּ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “Esther got up off the floor”
753 8:4 j1r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of a person, place, or object. This phrase means the Esther now stood facing King Ahasuerus. Alternate translation: “and stood facing the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
754 8:5 w7yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב & וְ⁠כָשֵׁ֤ר הַ⁠דָּבָר֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king will think that her suggestion is a good idea and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if what I am going to suggest seems like a good idea to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
755 8:5 r2yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו & וְ⁠טוֹבָ֥ה אֲנִ֖י בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Esther is saying very deferentially that she hopes that the king is positively disposed towards her, that he thinks well of her, and will, therefore, grant her request. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is expressing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
756 8:5 acd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו 1 Here Esther addresses the king throughout in the third person as a way of showing respect. You could express the same meaning in the second person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
757 8:5 ace0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ ט֜וֹב 1 This is an idiom that also appears in [1:19](../01/19.md), [3:9](../03/09.md), [5:4](../05/04.md), and [5:8](../05/08.md). A suggested translation in those cases was, “If it seems like a good idea to you, O king.” That was suitable for the deferential tone the speakers were using. But in another place, [7:3](../07/03.md), when Esther was pleading urgently for the survival of her whole people, the suggested alternate translation was, “I hope you will be willing to do what I ask” Here, Esther is also pleading, so you could use that phrase here in your translation as well. Alternate translation: “if what I ask for seems right in the king’s evaluation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
758 8:5 ftc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִם־מָצָ֧אתִי חֵ֣ן 1 This expression also appears many times in the story. It means to gain the approval or acceptance of another person. Alternate translation: “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
759 8:5 j1r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֗י⁠ו & לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. These phrases could mean “as I stand here before you.” But “face” could also be referring figuratively to the king himself by naming one part of him. What he thought and felt about Esther’s request would become evident in his face first, so it would be an appropriate part of him to use to represent all of him. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
760 8:5 xci7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠עֵינָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. Alternate translation: “if you evaluate me and I please you” or “if you are pleased with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
761 8:5 j1r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 The first letters that told of the plan to destroy the Jews would not be brought back to Susa physically. Rather, **bring back** is an idiom that means “cancel” or “revoke.” Alternate translation: “make a new law to cancel what Haman decreed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
762 8:5 nbk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִכָּתֵ֞ב לְ⁠הָשִׁ֣יב אֶת־הַ⁠סְּפָרִ֗ים 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “write a new letter” or “make a new law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
763 8:6 j2r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֠י 1 Here Esther is giving the reason why she is asking King Ahasuerus to revoke the letters. Alternate translation: “the reason I am asking is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
764 8:6 udt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 Esther is actually making a statement, but she expresses herself in question form to show how strongly she feels about what she is saying. She does not actually expect the king to tell her how she could bear seeing her people destroyed. Alternate translation: “I cannot bear to see disaster fall on the Jews” or “I cannot endure watching my relatives be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
765 8:6 ace1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֵיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י וְ⁠אֵֽיכָכָ֤ה אוּכַל֙ וְֽ⁠רָאִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 These two sentences mean basically the same thing. Esther uses the repetition to emphasize the importance of what she is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “I could not bear to see my relatives and my whole people destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
766 8:6 ace2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בָּ⁠רָעָ֖ה אֲשֶׁר־יִמְצָ֣א אֶת־עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 Even though it was morally very wrong for Haman to want to destroy Mordecai’s whole people, here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md). It means the same thing as “destruction” in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “my people being destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
767 8:6 ace3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יִמְצָ֣א 1 As in [1:5](../01/05.md), **find** is an idiom that means something exists in a certain place or time, not that people were looking for it and located it. Esther is speaking of the harm that will exist for the Jews if the effect of Haman’s letters is not undone. Alternate translation: “would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
768 8:6 ace4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בְּ⁠אָבְדַ֖ן 1 This abstract noun can be expressed with a verb such as “destroyed.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
769 8:6 ace5 מוֹלַדְתִּֽ⁠י 1 Alternate translation: “my relatives”
770 8:7 j2r7 הִנֵּ֨ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.”
771 8:7 ace6 בֵית־הָמָ֜ן נָתַ֣תִּי לְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֗ר 1 See the note about this expression in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “I have given Esther all the property that belonged to Haman” or “I have given Esther the household of Haman”
772 8:7 h44h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בֵית־הָמָ֜ן 1 Here, **house** is a metonym meaning the entire household of Haman. Alternate translation: “the household of Haman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
773 8:7 ace7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וְ⁠אֹת⁠וֹ֙ תָּל֣וּ עַל־הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 You can put this information first because it happened before the king gave Haman’s property to Esther. Alternate translation: “I had my servants impale Haman on a wooden pole” or “I had my servants hang Haman on a gallows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
774 8:7 ace8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Be sure your translation is consistent in the chapters that follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
775 8:7 j2r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom שָׁלַ֥ח יָד֖⁠וֹ 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing them. Alternate translation: “because he plotted to destroy all the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
776 8:8 acf0 וְ֠⁠אַתֶּם 1 Alternate translation: “so this is what you should do”
777 8:8 acf1 כִּתְב֨וּ עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֜ים כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “I am giving you permission to write other letters to save your people”
778 8:8 j3r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כַּ⁠טּ֤וֹב בְּ⁠עֵֽינֵי⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here, **eyes** figuratively represent the action of seeing, and seeing is a metaphor for knowledge, notice, attention, or judgment. This phrase means that Esther and Mordecai have permission to write what they think is best. Alternate translation: “as you think is best” or “what you think is best” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
779 8:8 j3mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. This phrase means Esther and Mordecai have permission to write with the authority of the King Ahasuerus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
780 8:8 acf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person בְּ⁠שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I give you permission to write with my own authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
781 8:8 j3r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This is a special ring that could be used to imprint the king’s official seal on a law or decree. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
782 8:8 acf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 King Ahasuerus refers to himself in the third person. You can have him say this in the first person. Alternate translation: “the ring that has my official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
783 8:8 j3r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 Here, King Ahasuerus is expressing the reason why he cannot simply revoke the first letter and also why Esther and Mordecai can write another letter that people must obey. Alternate translation: “you see” or “people will obey your letter because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
784 8:8 acf4 אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 As in verse 5, this expression means “revoke.” Alternate translation: “no one can revoke” or “no one can nullify”
785 8:8 acf5 כְתָ֞ב & אֵ֥ין לְ⁠הָשִֽׁיב 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this first in the verse because it explains why Ahasuerus answers Esther and Mordecai in the way that he does. See the UST.
786 8:8 acf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כְתָ֞ב אֲשֶׁר־נִכְתָּ֣ב בְּ⁠שֵׁם־הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ וְ⁠נַחְתּ֛וֹם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֥עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 The king is describing a general situation, but he has Haman’s letter specifically in mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Haman wrote his letter with my authority, and he sealed it with the ring that has my official seal on it. No one can revoke a letter like that” (The story explained in [1:19](../01/19.md) that the king’s laws could not be changed once they had been made and proclaimed.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
787 8:9 acf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 This indicates that what is described in this verse was done because of what the king said in the previous verse. Use a connecting word or phrase to show this in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
788 8:9 s4ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the king called his scribes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
789 8:9 acf8 וַ⁠יִּקָּרְא֣וּ סֹפְרֵֽי־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ 1 If you use an expression such as “called,” make sure your readers will understand that the king likely sent an official to go and bring the scribes back with him. The king did not call out in a loud voice to get them to come.
790 8:9 j4r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 Alternate translation: “in month three” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
791 8:9 acf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֜י 1 It would still be the same year as in [3:7](../03/07.md), the twelfth year that Ahasuerus reigned as king of Persia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the third month of the year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
792 8:9 j356 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 **Sivan** is the name of the third month of the Hebrew calendar. Alternate translation: “the month of Sivan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
793 8:9 acg1 הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ סִיוָ֗ן 1 The story is being recorded from the perspective of the Persian court, but for the benefit of its intended Jewish audience, the Hebrew name of the month is given. This month overlaps with May and June on a Western calendar.
794 8:9 j4r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֣ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֮ בּ⁠וֹ֒ 1 Alternation translation: “on day 23” or “on the twenty-third day of the month” The exact date of the letter helps to establish its legal authority. This would be on June 25th of a Western calendar. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
795 8:9 sz6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּכָּתֵ֣ב כְּֽ⁠כָל־אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֣ה מָרְדֳּכַ֣י 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and they wrote in a letter everything that Mordecai dictated to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
796 8:9 acg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֶל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֡ים 1 It appears from verse 11 that the letter would have been addressed specifically to the Jews in the empire, telling them that the king had authorized them to defend themselves. But copies were also sent to all the royal and provincial officials. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the letter addressed the Jews in the empire, but copies were also sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
797 8:9 acg3 וְ⁠אֶ֣ל הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִֽים־וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּחוֹת֩ וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת 1 See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md), where they were used to describe who received Haman’s letter. These are all people in government positions. The first one is the governor of the province and the other two are rulers under him who govern cities or smaller areas. If your language uses one term for all of these, you could use that with a descriptive phrase such as “to the government leaders of each province and also to the leaders under him.”
798 8:9 acg4 אֲשֶׁ֣ר ׀ מֵ⁠הֹ֣דּוּ וְ⁠עַד־כּ֗וּשׁ שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 This is background information explaining how far this new letter had to be sent. See how you translated this phrase in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the empire of Ahasuerus had 127 provinces, stretching all the way from India in the east to Ethiopia in the west”
799 8:9 zp4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שֶׁ֣בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
800 8:9 j4r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֤ה וּ⁠מְדִינָה֙ 1 This expression means “to people in every province.” Alternate translation: “the scribes wrote to the people in each province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
801 8:9 bj5s כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֔⁠הּ 1 Alternate translation: “using its own alphabet” or “written in its own script”
802 8:9 j4r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠עַ֥ם וָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 This expression means “every people group.” Alternate translation: “and to each ethnic group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
803 8:9 j4r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ⁠לְשֹׁנ֑⁠וֹ 1 Here, **tongue** figuratively means the language spoken by a person or a group of people. Alternate translation: “in its own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
804 8:9 j5r1 וְ⁠אֶ֨ל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם וְ⁠כִ⁠לְשׁוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 The Jews would have been included among all the people groups in the empire in the phrase “people by people.” So this seems to be saying, “and especially to the Jews.” Verse 11 explains that it was particularly important for the Jews to read the letter because it gave them the right to defend themselves. Alternate translation: “they wrote especially to the Jews in their own script and in their own language”
805 8:10 acg5 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֗ב & וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם 1 **He** refers to Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use his name here.
806 8:10 ijp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שֵׁם֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵרֹ֔שׁ 1 Here, **name** is a metaphor meaning authority. Alternate translation: “Mordecai wrote with the authority of King Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
807 8:10 jf31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּחְתֹּ֖ם בְּ⁠טַבַּ֣עַת הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 This means that Mordecai sealed the letters with this ring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and he sealed the letters with the ring that had the king’s official seal on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
808 8:10 yt4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּ⁠יַד֩ הָ⁠רָצִ֨ים בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֜ים 1 As in [3:13](../03/13.md), **hand** could mean two different things. (1) It could literally mean “hand,” meaning that the runners carried the letters in their hands. (2) It could also be a metaphor for power, control, or authority, meaning that runners were the ones who delivered the letters to all the provinces throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “couriers on horseback delivered the letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
809 8:10 acg6 רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 Alternate translation: “They rose fast horses that were used in the king’s service. These horses had been bred in the king’s stables.”
810 8:10 p9uc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy בְּנֵ֖י הָֽ⁠רַמָּכִֽים 1 Here, **sons** is a metonym meaning the offspring of royal livestock. Alternate translation: “the offspring of the king’s horses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
811 8:11 j5r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־עִיר־וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 This expression means “in each and every city.” It is possibly referring to the entire empire by naming one part of it, its cities. The story says in [9:19](../09/19.md) that not just Jews living in cities but Jews living in rural areas also defended themselves. It is likely that the messengers only published the news in the cities and not the entire countryside, but the news was certainly intended for everyone, not only people living in the cities. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire” or “in each and every city” or “in every single city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
812 8:11 e1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠הִקָּהֵל֮ וְ⁠לַ⁠עֲמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ⁠ם֒ 1 Here, **to stand** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “to join together and fight for their lives” or “to join together and fight back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
813 8:11 j5r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet לְ⁠הַשְׁמִיד֩ וְ⁠לַ⁠הֲרֹ֨ג וּ⁠לְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 These words mean the same thing and are used together to emphasize the completeness of the destruction that is being described. See how you translated this in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [7:4](../07/04.md). Alternate translation: “completely destroy” (A “doublet” can involve the use of more than two words.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
814 8:11 acg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כָּל־חֵ֨יל עַ֧ם וּ⁠מְדִינָ֛ה הַ⁠צָּרִ֥ים אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 **Strength** is a figurative way of referring to an army or to a person carrying weaponry. Alternate translation: “the army of any people or province that attacked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
815 8:11 acg8 טַ֣ף וְ⁠נָשִׁ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “they could also kill the wives and children of the armed men”
816 8:11 acg9 וּ⁠שְׁלָלָ֖⁠ם לָ⁠בֽוֹז 1 See how you translated this expression in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “and take everything that belonged to them”
817 8:12 ach0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אֶחָ֔ד 1 This was the day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “on the same day that Haman had set for destroying the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
818 8:12 ach1 בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינ֖וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “in every province of the kingdom”
819 8:12 j6r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר 1 Alternate translation: “on day 13” or “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
820 8:12 hi2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “of month 12” or “of the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
821 8:12 ach2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לְ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ שְׁנֵים־עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Implicitly, this means “the twelfth month of that same year.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
822 8:12 j6r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֥דֶשׁ אֲדָֽר 1 This is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:07](../03/07.md) and [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
823 8:13 j6r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive פַּתְשֶׁ֣גֶן הַ⁠כְּתָ֗ב לְ⁠הִנָּ֤תֵֽן דָּת֙ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials to proclaim this as a law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
824 8:13 j6r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֣ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֔ה 1 This expression means “in each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
825 8:13 ach4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive גָּל֖וּי לְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עַמִּ֑ים 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the letter told the officials in every single province to post copies where everyone could see them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
826 8:13 ach5 וְ⁠לִ⁠הְי֨וֹת הַיְּהוּדִ֤ים עֲתִידִים֙ לַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “that way the Jews would get ready to do what the letter said when the day came”
827 8:13 qk1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠הִנָּקֵ֖ם מֵ⁠אֹיְבֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This expression, “to take revenge from” another person, means to correct a wrong they have done. In this context, the phrase means to correct the wrong of the original law that gave people permission to kill the Jews. Alternate translation: “and fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
828 8:14 ach7 הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 See how you translated this in [8:10](../08/10.md). Alternate translation: “messengers riding on fast horses that were used for the king’s business”
829 8:14 ach6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים בִּ⁠דְבַ֣ר הַ⁠מֶּ֑לֶךְ 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king commanded the couriers to deliver the letters as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
830 8:14 b69j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מְבֹהָלִ֥ים וּ⁠דְחוּפִ֖ים 1 These two terms mean almost the same thing and are used together to emphasize the fact that the couriers were told to deliver the letters as quickly as possible. Alternate translation: “they went immediately” or “as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
831 8:14 ach8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events הָ⁠רָצִ֞ים רֹכְבֵ֤י הָ⁠רֶ֨כֶשׁ֙ הָֽ⁠אֲחַשְׁתְּרָנִ֔ים 1 To present the events in chronological order, you can put this after the king’s command, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
832 8:14 j6r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠דָּ֥ת נִתְּנָ֖ה 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king’s officials also posted and read copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
833 8:15 j7r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֞י יָצָ֣א 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
834 8:15 j7r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּ֗לֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase means that Mordecai had been in the presence of King Ahasuerus and was now leaving in order to fulfill his duties as a high official in the Persian government. Alternate translation: “from the palace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
835 8:15 ach9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת וָ⁠ח֔וּר וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה וְ⁠תַכְרִ֥יךְ בּ֖וּץ וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן 1 The implication is that the king gave Mordecai these special things to wear to show that he was now his highest officer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. To put these events in chronological order, you could place this information before the report that Mordecai left the king’s presence to fulfill his duties. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
836 8:15 aci1 בִּ⁠לְב֤וּשׁ מַלְכוּת֙ תְּכֵ֣לֶת 1 Alternate translation: “a blue and white garment that the king had worn”
837 8:15 aci2 וַ⁠עֲטֶ֤רֶת זָהָב֙ גְּדוֹלָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “a large golden crown”
838 8:15 eqc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠עִ֣יר שׁוּשָׁ֔ן צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 Here, **the city** represents the people living in it. Alternate translation: “the people of Susa” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
839 8:15 i1ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoiced** tells how they cheered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by saying something like “shouted joyfully.” Alternate translation: “cheered and were happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
840 8:15 aci3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit צָהֲלָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׂמֵֽחָה 1 The implication is that the people did this when they saw Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
841 8:16 q2ru rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה 1 Here, **light** figuratively represents happiness. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
842 8:16 aci4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הָֽיְתָ֥ה אוֹרָ֖ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֑ה 1 The terms **light** and **joy** refer to the same thing here. They are used together to emphasize the extreme happiness that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews felt very happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
843 8:16 j8r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠שָׂשֹׂ֖ן וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 These terms have similar meaning and are used together with the previous doublet to emphasize again the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
844 8:16 n94u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וִ⁠יקָֽר 1 Here, **honor** might have two possible meanings. (1) Other people honored the Jews. Alternate translation: “other people honored them” (2) The Jews themselves felt honor instead of shame. Alternate translation: “they felt honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
845 8:17 k1eh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־מְדִינָ֨ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֜ה 1 This expression means “each and every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
846 8:17 j8r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֗יר 1 This expression means “each and every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
847 8:17 va7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification מְקוֹם֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֤לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת⁠וֹ֙ מַגִּ֔יעַ 1 This expression describes the king’s message as if it were a person that could travel to a particular place. This phrase refers to all the places that received the king’s letter. Alternate translation: “wherever the king’s couriers took his decree” or “wherever the couriers read the letter announcing the king’s decree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
848 8:17 j8r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet שִׂמְחָ֤ה וְ⁠שָׂשׂוֹן֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 The terms **joy** and **rejoicing** have similar meaning and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “the Jews rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
849 8:17 p89m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 These two terms mean something similar and are used together to emphasize the great happiness and joy that the Jews felt. Alternate translation: “and had festive celebrations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
850 8:17 aci5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. Alternate translation: “and a holiday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
851 8:17 aci6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 The implication is that they did this because they thought that the Jews might attack them when the Jews fought back against their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
852 8:17 aci7 וְ⁠רַבִּ֞ים מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ מִֽתְיַהֲדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “many people from the other ethnic groups in the empire”
853 8:17 aci8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מֵֽ⁠עַמֵּ֤י הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ 1 The **peoples of the land** were the non-Jewish people groups within the empire. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
854 8:17 r3qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they had become very afraid of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
855 8:17 aci9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 To present the events in chronological order, you can say this before saying that the people from the other groups became Jews themselves. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
856 9:intro yty1 0 # Esther 9 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Purim\n\nThe events of this chapter were so significant, the Jews celebrated these events every year after this. It is known as “Purim.”\n\n## Important stylistic devices in this chapter\n\n### Ironic Situation\n\nThe day that was supposed to bring great victory to the enemies of the Jews became a day of great victory for the Jews. This is a type of irony.\n\n### Opening Summary\n\nVerse 1 of chapter 9 provides a summary of everything that happens in this chapter. If using an opening summary is not normally used in your language, be sure to mark this as a summary either in the text or in a footnote. An opening summary like this is a characteristic device of Hebrew storytelling. So even though it describes the final outcome, we do not recommend that you move it to the end of the chapter unless it is very confusing to leave it here. To make it clear that verse 1 is only a summary and not the entire story, you could say something like this at the end of the verse: “This is what happened” or “Here are more details about what happened.”
857 9:1 j8r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 This introduces a new event. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
858 9:1 acj0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 The implication is that this happened in the twelfth month of the same year that the letters were sent out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the twelfth month of that year, the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
859 9:1 j8r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּ⁠בִ⁠שְׁנֵים֩ עָשָׂ֨ר חֹ֜דֶשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “now in the twelfth month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
860 9:1 t9yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הוּא־חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֗ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), and [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
861 9:1 j9r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלוֹשָׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day of the month” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
862 9:1 acj1 אֲשֶׁ֨ר & דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 Alternate translation: “what the letters said the king had decreed”
863 9:1 wh56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification אֲשֶׁ֨ר הִגִּ֧יעַ דְּבַר־הַ⁠מֶּ֛לֶךְ וְ⁠דָת֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠הֵעָשׂ֑וֹת 1 This expression describes the king’s decree as if it had traveled through time (as a person travels through space) and reached this particular day. This phrase means that it was time for people to obey the decree. Alternate translation: “when the time came for people to obey the king’s law and decree” or “when it was the day established in the king’s letters for people to carry out the king’s law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
864 9:1 acj2 בַּ⁠יּ֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֨ר שִׂבְּר֜וּ אֹיְבֵ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט בָּ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “the enemies of the Jews had expected to defeat the Jews on that day”
865 9:1 ect2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁל֣וֹט 1 This word usually means “to rule over,” but here it figuratively means “to have power over, to be able to destroy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
866 9:1 lq9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נַהֲפ֣וֹךְ 1 Saying that a situation was turned over is a figurative way of saying that what happened was the opposite of what was expected. Alternate translation: “the situation was reversed” or “the opposite happened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
867 9:1 acj3 ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִשְׁלְט֧וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֛ים הֵ֖מָּה בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “Instead, it was the Jews themselves who destroyed their enemies”
868 9:1 acj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This is an idiom that describes enemies (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
869 9:2 tj62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לִ⁠שְׁלֹ֣חַ יָ֔ד 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to cause someone physical harm with the intention of killing him. Alternate translation: “to defend themselves” or “to fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
870 9:2 d44x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠מְבַקְשֵׁ֖י רָֽעָתָ֑⁠ם 1 Here the abstract noun **evil** likely means “harm,” as in [7:7](../07/07.md) and [8:6](../08/06.md). In this context, the term can be expressed with a verb. Alternate translation: “who were trying to destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
871 9:2 acj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “no one stood against them” or “no one was able to defeat them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
872 9:2 x8s3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠אִישׁ֙ לֹא־עָמַ֣ד לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. Alternate translation: “was able to fight back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
873 9:2 j9r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **face** figuratively stands for the presence of a person, so here it means “when faced with them.” Alternate translation: “against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
874 9:2 h7jh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “all the peoples suddenly became very afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
875 9:2 acj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נָפַ֥ל פַּחְדָּ֖⁠ם עַל־כָּל־הָ⁠עַמִּֽים 1 The implication is that as a result, no one helped anyone who attacked the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
876 9:3 acj8 שָׂרֵ֨י הַ⁠מְּדִינ֜וֹת וְ⁠הָ⁠אֲחַשְׁדַּרְפְּנִ֣ים וְ⁠הַ⁠פַּח֗וֹת 1 See how you translated these terms in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [8:9](../08/09.md). Alternate translation: “the government leaders in each province”
877 9:3 acj9 וְ⁠עֹשֵׂ֤י הַ⁠מְּלָאכָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר לַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 Alternate translation: “anyone the king had trusted with his affairs”
878 9:3 ack0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מְנַשְּׂאִ֖ים אֶת־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֑ים 1 Here, **lifting up** is a figurative way of saying “helping.” The picture is likely of someone helping a tired or injured person to stand or walk by holding them up. Alternate translation: “helped the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
879 9:3 q2ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָפַ֥ל פַּֽחַד־מָרְדֳּכַ֖י עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 Here, **falling** is a metaphor meaning to affect someone. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of Mordecai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
880 9:4 j9r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּֽי 1 This term introduces the reason why the officials and satraps and governors were becoming afraid of Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
881 9:4 xd49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 The implication is that this is why all the other officials were afraid of Mordecai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “They were afraid of him because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
882 9:4 ack1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **The palace of the king** is a figurative way of describing the king’s administration by referring to the place where it was headquartered. Alternate translation: “was very important in the king’s government” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
883 9:4 ack2 גָ֤דוֹל מָרְדֳּכַי֙ בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠מֶּ֔לֶךְ 1 **Great** here is the same term that, as a verb, describes promotion within the king’s service in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “Mordecai was a very important royal official”
884 9:4 mr66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖⁠וֹ הוֹלֵ֣ךְ בְּ⁠כָל־הַ⁠מְּדִינ֑וֹת 1 Here the story speaks of the news of Mordecai’s greatness as if it were a living thing that could travel throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “throughout the empire, everyone was hearing the news of his greatness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
885 9:4 j9r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָרְדֳּכַ֖י הוֹלֵ֥ךְ וְ⁠גָדֽוֹל 1 This expression means that Mordecai continued to become more powerful and influential. Alternate translation: “Mordecai was becoming more famous because the king was giving him more and more power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
886 9:5 ack3 וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 After the information about Mordecai, the story now returns to tell what happened on the appointed day. You could add a phrase to show this. Alternate translation, add: “on the day when they were allowed to defend themselves”
887 9:5 ack4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּכּ֤וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 This expression means that the Jews defended themselves against their enemies, even to the point of killing people who attacked them. Alternate translation: “the Jews attacked all of their enemies and killed them with their swords” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
888 9:5 j11d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche מַכַּת־חֶ֥רֶב 1 Swords were not necessarily the only weapons the Jews had and used. The sword is used to represent all of their weaponry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this more general meaning. Alternate translation: “the Jews took up their weapons and used them against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
889 9:5 j13d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠הֶ֖רֶג וְ⁠אַבְדָ֑ן 1 These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they destroyed them completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
890 9:5 j15d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂ֥וּ בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם כִּ⁠רְצוֹנָֽ⁠ם 1 This expression does not mean that the Jews felt pleasure when they killed their enemies. Rather, it means that the Jews were able to defend themselves against their enemies and were not hindered in any way. Alternate translation: “they were able to do everything they wanted to do against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
891 9:5 ack5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְ⁠שֹׂנְאֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 This is an idiom that describes enemies. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
892 9:6 b5ft וּ⁠בְ⁠שׁוּשַׁ֣ן הַ⁠בִּירָ֗ה 1 Alternate translation: “just in Susa, the capital city”
893 9:6 j17d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הָרְג֤וּ & וְ⁠אַבֵּ֔ד 1 These two words have the same meaning and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
894 9:6 ha18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִֽישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
895 9:7 ack6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא & דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן & אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 The story lists the names of Haman’s sons before explaining that they were his sons and that the Jews killed them. To be clear who these people are, you can add this information from verse 10 explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “rhe Jews killed the ten sons of their enemy Haman son of Hammedatha. The names of his sons were … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
896 9:7 s6x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַּרְשַׁנְדָּ֛תָא & דַּֽלְפ֖וֹן & אַסְפָּֽתָא 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
897 9:8 g6zx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פּוֹרָ֛תָא & אֲדַלְיָ֖א & אֲרִידָֽתָא 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
898 9:9 gj4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַּרְמַ֨שְׁתָּא֙ & אֲרִיסַ֔י & אֲרִדַ֖י & וַיְזָֽתָא 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
899 9:10 fsa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲ֠שֶׂרֶת בְּנֵ֨י 1 Alternate translation: “the 10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
900 9:10 xt5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵ֥ר הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
901 9:10 j19d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 Here the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
902 9:10 ack7 וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “But … their possessions”
903 9:11 ack8 בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠ה֗וּא 1 Alternate translation: “at the end of that day”
904 9:11 j21d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification בָּ֣א מִסְפַּ֧ר & לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here the story speaks about the report as if it were a living thing that could come into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “one of the king’s servants told the king the number of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
905 9:11 acl0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הַ⁠מֶּֽלֶךְ 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. This phrase likely means that someone came into the king’s presence in order to deliver this report. Alternate translation: “someone came in and reported to the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
906 9:11 j22d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מִסְפַּ֧ר הַֽ⁠הֲרוּגִ֛ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “how many people the Jews had killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
907 9:12 j33d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הָרְגוּ֩ & וְ⁠אַבֵּ֜ד 1 These terms mean the same thing and are used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
908 9:12 cz3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמֵ֧שׁ מֵא֣וֹת אִ֗ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “five hundred men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
909 9:12 acl1 וְ⁠אֵת֙ 1 Alternate translation: “including”
910 9:12 j5p9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֣רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
911 9:12 vh5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion בִּ⁠שְׁאָ֛ר מְדִינ֥וֹת הַ⁠מֶּ֖לֶךְ מֶ֣ה עָשׂ֑וּ 1 The king is making a statement, but he uses a question form to show that he is very convinced that the Jews must have also killed many people in the other provinces. Alternate translation: “what they must have done in the rest of the king’s provinces” or “they must have killed many more in the rest of the king’s provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
912 9:12 s3sr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וּ⁠מַה־שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ וּ⁠מַה־בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ ע֖וֹד וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 These two statements mean basically the same thing. Ahasuerus says the same thing twice to show that he is truly disposed to give Esther what she wants. If it would be confusing, you do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “is there anything more that you want? Tell me, and I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
913 9:12 n3ua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּ֣תֵֽן לָ֔⁠ךְ & וְ⁠תֵעָֽשׂ 1 You can capture these parallel passive statements with one statement using an active form. You can also say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “I will do it for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
914 9:12 ly4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns שְּׁאֵֽלָתֵ⁠ךְ֙ & בַּקָּשָׁתֵ֥⁠ךְ 1 The two abstract nouns **petition** and **request** can be expressed with a single phrase using the verb “want.” Alternate translation: “anything more that you want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
915 9:13 acl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִם־עַל־הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ ט֔וֹב 1 This is an idiom that has been used many times in the story. Alternate translation: “if it seems like a good idea to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
916 9:13 acl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִנָּתֵ֣ן 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can indicate that Esther is asking the king to do it. Alternate translation: “please allow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
917 9:13 nz41 גַּם־מָחָ֗ר לַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן לַ⁠עֲשׂ֖וֹת כְּ⁠דָ֣ת הַ⁠יּ֑וֹם 1 Alternate translation: “all the Jews who live in Susa to obey today’s decree tomorrow also” or “to do tomorrow also what was decreed that they should do today”
918 9:13 j43d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
919 9:13 acl4 עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 The request is not for the king to allow the bodies to be impaled (or hanged), but instead, for the king to order this. Alternate translation: “and have the bodies of Haman’s ten sons hanged [or impaled]”
920 9:13 acl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 The purpose of this would not be to kill the sons, since they are already dead, but to demonstrate publicly that the enemies of the Jews had been completely defeated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
921 9:13 acl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי־הָמָ֖ן יִתְל֥וּ 1 It is implicit that since Haman’s sons are already dead, what Esther is actually asking for is for their bodies to be impaled or hanged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
922 9:13 nr1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
923 9:13 qyu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
924 9:14 acl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ֙ לְ⁠הֵֽעָשׂ֣וֹת כֵּ֔ן 1 You can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the king granted both of Esther’s requests” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
925 9:14 acl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 This phrase, “in Susa,” seems to indicate that this refers to Esther’s first request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he issued a decree allowing the Jews in Susa to fight against their enemies again the next day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
926 9:14 j47d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַ⁠תִּנָּתֵ֥ן דָּ֖ת בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 This can be stated in active form as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
927 9:14 j49d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
928 9:14 acl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit תָּלֽוּ 1 This was Esther’s second request. You can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he ordered his servants to hang [or impale] the bodies of Haman’s ten sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
929 9:14 j51d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת בְּנֵֽי 1 Alternate translation: “10 sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
930 9:15 j55d בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן 1 Alternate translation: “who lived in the capital city of Susa”
931 9:15 acm0 וַ⁠יִּֽקָּהֲל֞וּ 1 Alternate translation: “joined together”
932 9:15 p9gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּ⁠י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
933 9:15 j57d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), and [9:1](../09/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
934 9:15 j59d בְ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֔ן 1 Alternate translation: “in the capital city of Susa”
935 9:15 j61d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת אִ֑ישׁ 1 Alternate translation: “three hundred men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
936 9:15 lp12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠בַ֨⁠בִּזָּ֔ה לֹ֥א שָׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 Here, the expression **to stretch out a hand** means to take something from another person. Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
937 9:16 j65d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 Here, **standing** is a metaphor meaning to defend oneself and to fight back instead of running away from an enemy. See how you translated this in [8:11](../08/11.md). Alternate translation: “joined together to fight back against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
938 9:16 acm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נִקְהֲל֣וּ ׀ וְ⁠עָמֹ֣ד עַל־נַפְשָׁ֗⁠ם 1 It’s implicit here, and stated explicitly in the next verse, that these other Jews fought their enemies only on the thirteenth day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly here. Alternate translation, add: “on the thirteenth day of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
939 9:16 acm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֨וֹחַ֙ מֵ⁠אֹ֣יְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 Here, **resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they had no more trouble from their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
940 9:16 kms1 וְ⁠הָרֹג֙ בְּ⁠שֹׂ֣נְאֵי⁠הֶ֔ם חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 Alternate translation: “and killed 75,000 of them”
941 9:16 i1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים אָ֑לֶף 1 Alternate translation: “seventy-five thousand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
942 9:16 m2cx לֹ֥א שָֽׁלְח֖וּ אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “they did not take the things that belonged to them” or “they did not take the valuable things” or “the did not take their possessions”
943 9:17 ll4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־שְׁלֹשָׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר 1 Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
944 9:17 j67d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֑ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), and [9:15](../09/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
945 9:17 acm5 בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “they devoted the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar, to joyful celebration” or “they feasted joyfully the next day, the fourteenth day of the month of Adar”
946 9:17 kjj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
947 9:17 j69d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word **rejoicing** tells how they celebrated. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
948 9:17 acm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה 1 This is a figure of speech in which a part of something is used to mean the whole thing. The celebrations must have included more than just eating special meals together, but the story uses those meals to refer to the entire celebrations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
949 9:18 w531 וְהַיְּהוּדִ֣ים אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠שׁוּשָׁ֗ן נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “but the Jews who lived in the capital city of Susa”
950 9:18 acm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נִקְהֲלוּ֙ 1 The implication is that they did this to fight against their enemies. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who lived in Susa joined together to fight against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
951 9:18 acm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say which month this is. Alternate translation: “on the thirteenth and fourteenth days of the month of Adar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
952 9:18 j73d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּ⁠שְׁלֹשָׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 13” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
953 9:18 j75d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּ⁠בְ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “and on day 14” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
954 9:18 acm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠נ֗וֹחַ בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠עָשֹׂ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ י֖וֹם מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 **Resting** is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “they defeated them, and there was no fighting on the fifteenth day. They devoted that day to joyful celebration” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
955 9:18 j77d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ בּ֔⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “on day 15” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
956 9:18 j79d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֥ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָֽה 1 This phrase means the same thing as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
957 9:19 j81d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֞ן 1 This term introduces the result of the events that were described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
958 9:19 acn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֣ים הַפְּרָזִ֗ים הַ⁠יֹּשְׁבִים֮ בְּ⁠עָרֵ֣י הַ⁠פְּרָזוֹת֒ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. They are used together to make the identification of this group clear. The first phrase means that they lived in rural areas. The second phrase means they lived in settlements that did not have walls around them, that is, in villages. You can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Jews who live in villages in the countryside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
959 9:19 acn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ & וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 The implication is that this explanation is being offered for the benefit of city-dwelling Jews who might wonder why rural Jews celebrate this holiday on a different day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, add: “rather than on the fifteenth day.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
960 9:19 acn2 עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֠ת י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ & וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 Alternate translation: “observe this holiday on the fourteenth day”
961 9:19 j83d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
962 9:19 j85d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md) and [9:17](../09/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
963 9:19 j87d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys שִׂמְחָ֥ה וּ⁠מִשְׁתֶּ֖ה 1 As in verses 17 and 18, this means “by celebrating joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
964 9:19 j89d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 This expression generally means a day of happiness or celebration. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
965 9:19 acn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וּ⁠מִשְׁל֥וֹחַ מָנ֖וֹת אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 Giving gifts, in this culture as in many cultures, was a way of acknowledging a special occasion. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
966 9:19 j91d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִ֥ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
967 9:20 acn4 וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב & הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “wrote an account of all of these events”
968 9:20 acn5 כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר֙ בְּ⁠כָל־מְדִינוֹת֙ הַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “all the Jews everywhere in the kingdom”
969 9:20 j95d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism הַ⁠קְּרוֹבִ֖ים וְ⁠הָ⁠רְחוֹקִֽים 1 This is a figurative way of referring to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between. This expression means the Jews who lived in or near Susa, those who lived far away, and all Jews in between. Alternate translation: “everywhere they lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
970 9:21 acn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְ⁠קַיֵּם֮ עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֒ לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים 1 Here, **to set up** means to establish, and to **make** a day means to observe it as a holiday. Alternate translation: “to establish … as a holiday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
971 9:21 j97d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal י֣וֹם אַרְבָּעָ֤ה עָשָׂר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the fourteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
972 9:21 j99d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths לְ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ אֲדָ֔ר 1 **Adar** is the name of the twelfth and last month of the Hebrew calendar. See how you translated this in [3:7](../03/07.md), [3:13](../03/13.md), [8:12](../08/12.md), [9:1](../09/01.md), [9:15](../09/15.md), [9:17](../09/17.md), and [9:19](../09/19.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
973 9:21 j111 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal יוֹם־חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר בּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “the fifteenth day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
974 9:21 n4v9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 This expression means “every year.” Alternation translation: “each year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
975 9:22 acn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כַּ⁠יָּמִ֗ים אֲשֶׁר 1 This verse gives the reason for what Mordecai told the Jews to do in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because those were the days when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
976 9:22 acn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נָ֨חוּ בָ⁠הֶ֤ם הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֙ מֵ⁠א֣וֹיְבֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 As in verses 16, 17, and 18, **resting** here is a figurative way of saying that they no longer needed to fight against their enemies because they had won the battle. Alternate translation: “the Jews stopped fighting because they had defeated their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
977 9:22 acn9 וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ אֲשֶׁר֩ 1 Alternate translation: “And that was the month when”
978 9:22 aco1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how dramatic and wonderful the change was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like “after being very sad, they became very happy.” Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sorrowful and crying to being very joyful and celebrating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
979 9:22 aco3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵ⁠אֵ֖בֶל לְ⁠י֣וֹם ט֑וֹב 1 It is implicit that the Jews were deeply distressed because they were being threatened with destruction, and they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “everything had changed for them. They had been deeply distressed because they were threatened with destruction. But they became very happy once they were safe from all their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
980 9:22 nch1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor נֶהְפַּ֨ךְ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 **Turning** figuratively represents changing. Alternate translation: “they changed from being very sad to being joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
981 9:22 aco4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מִ⁠יָּגוֹן֙ לְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 The abstract nouns **sorrow** and **joy** can be expressed with adjectives such as “distressed” and “happy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
982 9:22 j113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit לַ⁠עֲשׂ֣וֹת אוֹתָ֗⁠ם יְמֵי֙ 1 These are things that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “so Mordecai told them to observe those days with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
983 9:22 j115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys מִשְׁתֶּ֣ה וְ⁠שִׂמְחָ֔ה 1 As in verses 17, 18, and 19, this phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with “and.” The word “rejoicing” tells how the celebrating was to be done. Alternate translation: “joyful celebration” or “feasting joyfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
984 9:22 aco5 וּ⁠מִשְׁל֤וֹחַ מָנוֹת֙ אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 See how you translated this in verse 19. Review the notes there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “and by giving gifts to one another”
985 9:22 j117 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אִ֣ישׁ לְ⁠רֵעֵ֔⁠הוּ 1 Here, **a man** means “a person.” The term **friend** would include family members and neighbors as well as social friends. Alternate translation: “to one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
986 9:22 aco6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 In this culture as in many others, helping the poor was also a way of acknowledging a special occasion. The idea was that no one should miss out on the benefits of the wonderful thing that God had done. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should help the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
987 9:22 z1vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מַתָּנ֖וֹת לָֽ⁠אֶבְיוֹנִֽים 1 This is also something that Mordecai is telling the Jews to do in his letters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that here. Alternate translation: “Mordecai also told them that they should give gifts to the poor on those days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
988 9:23 aco7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ & אֲשֶׁר־כָּתַ֥ב מָרְדֳּכַ֖י אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 The implication seems to be that the Jews were glad to do what Mordecai had instructed, because they had already been doing it. You can add a word such as “readily” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
989 9:23 aco8 וְ⁠קִבֵּל֙ 1 Alternate translation: “agreed”
990 9:23 ib25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events אֲשֶׁר־הֵחֵ֖לּוּ לַ⁠עֲשׂ֑וֹת 1 You can put this information first, to present the events in logical and chronological order. Alternate translation: “the Jews were already celebrating those days that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
991 9:24 j119 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּי֩ 1 This introduces the reason for the events previously described. The story will now summarize everything that happened previously. The Jews were to celebrate because they were able to fight back when Haman plotted to destroy all of them. Alternate translation: “they would celebrate these days to remember” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
992 9:24 kqf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit כִּי֩ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say here what this reason is explaining. Alternate translation: “they would establish those days as a holiday in order to remember how” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
993 9:24 j125 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish צֹרֵר֙ כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Haman. Alternate translation: “the enemy of all the Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
994 9:24 aco9 חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים לְ⁠אַבְּדָ֑⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “had tried to carry out a plan that would destroy the Jews”
995 9:24 xz7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠הִפִּ֥יל פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 You can say explicitly why Haman did this. Alternate translation: “he threw Pur (that is, he threw lots) to find out what would be the best day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
996 9:24 bcy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פּוּר֙ ה֣וּא הַ⁠גּוֹרָ֔ל 1 As in 3:7, the storyteller is giving both the Persian and the Hebrew name because this is the story behind the Festival of Purim, which takes its name from “Pur.” So this is not repetition for emphasis. You can put in the Persian name and then the name for “lot” in your own language to show that the storyteller is doing this. Alternate translation: “a Pur (that is, a lot)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
997 9:24 j127 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys לְ⁠הֻמָּ֖⁠ם וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַבְּדָֽ⁠ם 1 The terms **vex** and **destroy** mean basically the same thing. They are used together to emphasize the degree to which Haman’s deadly plans were distressing to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the terms and express the emphasis with a word like “completely.” Alternate translation: “and completely destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
998 9:25 m8x3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠בְ⁠בֹאָ⁠הּ֮ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 In this summary, many details are communicated implicitly. **She** means Esther. Also, this verse continues the account of what this celebration is commemorating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these things explicit. Alternate translation: “the celebration also commemorated how Esther dared to come into the king’s presence without being summoned, and she won his favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
999 9:25 j128 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י הַ⁠מֶּלֶךְ֒ 1 Here, **face** is a metonym meaning the presence of a person. This phrase means that Esther came into the king’s presence. Alternate translation: “into the king’s presence” or “before the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1000 9:25 acp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אָמַ֣ר עִם־הַ⁠סֵּ֔פֶר 1 Once again, there is much information that is implicit here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the king gave Mordecai the authority to send a letter throughout the empire saying that the Jews could defend themselves against their enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1001 9:25 y57b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom יָשׁ֞וּב מַחֲשַׁבְתּ֧⁠וֹ הָ⁠רָעָ֛ה אֲשֶׁר־חָשַׁ֥ב עַל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖ים עַל־רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ 1 **His**, **he**, and **him** in this sentence refer to Haman. **Return on his head** is an idiom that means that what a person was planning to do to someone else happened to that person instead. Use an idiom with that meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “the wicked plan that Haman developed against the Jews will be done to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1002 9:25 acp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification וְ⁠תָל֥וּ אֹת֛⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנָ֖י⁠ו עַל־הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 The letter itself did not say this. The story is summarizing the events in compressed form. It is speaking of the letter as if it were a person who could take action and give commands like this, but it was the king who gave the command. Alternate translation: “the king also ordered his servants to hang [or impale] Haman on a wooden pole [or hang Haman on a gallows]. When the Jews in Susa killed his ten sons, the king had their bodies hanged [or impaled] as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1003 9:25 j129 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הָ⁠עֵֽץ 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1004 9:26 j131 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֡ן 1 This introduces the reason why the Jews gave the name “Purim” to this celebration. Alternate translation: “for that reason” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1005 9:26 acp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit קָֽרְאוּ֩ לַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֤לֶּה פוּרִים֙ 1 **They** means the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jews called these days Purim, like the word Pur” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1006 9:26 c1gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פוּרִים֙ 1 This is the name of the festival that commemorates the salvation of the Jewish people in ancient Persia from Haman’s plot to destroy and kill all the Jews in a single day. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1007 9:26 buf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background עַל־שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 This is information that the original audience needed to understand how this celebration got its name. You can put this first in the verse because it explains what comes next. Alternate translation: “the Persian word for ‘lot’ is ‘Pur’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1008 9:26 yq8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שֵׁ֣ם הַ⁠פּ֔וּר 1 It can be stated clearly what “Pur” means. Alternate translation: “the word Pur, which means ‘lot’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1009 9:26 j133 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result עַל־כֵּ֕ן 1 The story has just given the reason why the holiday is called Purim. Now it is going to give another reason. It will be explaining why the Jews added this holiday to their calendar, in addition to the festivals that were commanded in the Law of Moses. The next verse describes them adding the holiday. This verse gives the reasons why they did that. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1010 9:26 acp4 עַל־כָּל־דִּבְרֵ֖י הָ⁠אִגֶּ֣רֶת הַ⁠זֹּ֑את 1 This is a reference to the letter that Mordecai wrote, as described in verses 20–22. Alternate translation: “because Mordecai wrote to them to tell them to observe this holiday”
1011 9:26 acp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize what a vivid experience it was to live through the events that this story describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “amazing.” Alternate translation: “the amazing things that had happened to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1012 9:26 acp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 These phrases say generally “this” and “what,” but they are referring to the specific events the story has related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could describe these things specifically. Alternate translation: “because the Jews had been able to destroy the enemies who had wanted to destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1013 9:26 acp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events וּ⁠מָֽה־רָא֣וּ עַל־כָּ֔כָה וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 You can put this first, before the information about Mordecai’s letter, because it happened first. You can say “then” when you tell about the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
1014 9:26 j135 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וּ⁠מָ֥ה הִגִּ֖יעַ אֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This expression means “what had happened to them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1015 9:27 acp8 קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ ׀ עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֨ם ׀ וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם וְ⁠עַ֨ל כָּל־הַ⁠נִּלְוִ֤ים עֲלֵי⁠הֶם֙ & לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “the Jews said that they would tell their descendants and those people who became Jews to be certain to celebrate this festival”
1016 9:27 acp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet קִיְּמ֣וּ וְקִבְּל֣וּ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִים֩ 1 “Set up” and “accepted” mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews definitely agreed to do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these words. Alternate translation: “agreed to establish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1017 9:27 j137 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֜⁠ם 1 As in [6:13](../06/13.md), **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1018 9:27 j141 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹ֣א יַעֲב֔וֹר 1 This expression means that the Jews would never stop celebrating the feast of Purim every year. you could put this last since it applies to the whole verse. Alternate translation: “always” or “forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1019 9:27 acq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events לִ⁠הְי֣וֹת עֹשִׂ֗ים אֵ֣ת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠יָּמִים֙ הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 To present things in chronological order, you can put this before the reference to Jewish descendants and converts to Judaism. Alternate translation: “to establish those two days as holidays and to observe them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
1020 9:27 acq1 כִּ⁠כְתָבָ֖⁠ם 1 Alternate translation: “in the way that Mordecai had told them to do in the letter”
1021 9:27 acq2 וְ⁠כִ⁠זְמַנָּ֑⁠ם 1 This means the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar, as specified in [9:21](../09/21.md). Alternate translation: “on those exact days of the month of Adar”
1022 9:27 j143 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־שָׁנָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁנָֽה 1 This expression means “each and every year.” Alternate translation: “every single year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1023 9:28 acq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 This gives the result of the reasons described in verses 26 and 27. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “that is why” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1024 9:28 acq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 **Remembered** and **made** mean basically the same thing here. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews have been faithful in doing this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “So the Jews have celebrated these days.” Alternate translation: “therefore they said that they would remember and celebrate on those two days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1025 9:28 hc8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ֠⁠אֵלֶּה נִזְכָּרִ֨ים וְ⁠נַעֲשִׂ֜ים 1 This expression uses two passive forms, but you could say the same thing using active forms. Alternate translation: “so the Jews have celebrated and observed these days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1026 9:28 j145 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּ⁠כָל־דּ֣וֹר וָ⁠ד֗וֹר 1 This expression means “in each and every generation.” Alternate translation: “in every single generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1027 9:28 j147 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מִשְׁפָּחָה֙ וּ⁠מִשְׁפָּחָ֔ה 1 This expression means “every family.” Alternate translation: “every Jewish family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1028 9:28 acq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 This could be a figure of speech that refers to something by speaking of two extreme parts of it in order to include everything in between those parts. Generally speaking, a province would be the largest division of the empire that would identify a person’s location, and a city would be the smallest. Particularly, since the Jews would continue to celebrate Purim after the Persian empire and its provinces no longer exist, you might choose to express the meaning of this figure of speech in a more general way. Alternate translation: “everywhere they have lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1029 9:28 j149 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מְדִינָ֥ה וּ⁠מְדִינָ֖ה 1 This expression means “every province.” Alternate translation: “in every single province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1030 9:28 j151 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠עִ֣יר וָ⁠עִ֑יר 1 This expression means “every city.” Alternate translation: “in every single city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1031 9:28 acq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 As in verse 27, this expression means that the Jews will never stop celebrating the feast of Purim. You can say this positively. Alternate translation: “will always observe the Festival of Purim faithfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1032 9:28 m5o8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וִ⁠ימֵ֞י הַ⁠פּוּרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה לֹ֤א יַֽעַבְרוּ֙ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 These two phrases mean similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that the Jews will definitely not stop celebrating Purim each year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases and express the emphasis with a word like “definitely” or “certainly” or “always.” Alternate translation: “the Jews and their descendants will certainly always continue to celebrate this festival of Purim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1033 9:28 acq7 מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “within the Jewish community”
1034 9:28 i2qk וְ⁠זִכְרָ֖⁠ם לֹא־יָס֥וּף 1 Alternate translation: “will always observe”
1035 9:28 j155 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִ⁠זַּרְעָֽ⁠ם 1 As in verse 27, **seed** is a metaphor meaning “offspring.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1036 9:29 je8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish בַת־אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 This information reminds the reader who Esther was. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1037 9:29 cm8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲבִיחַ֛יִל 1 This man was Esther’s father and Mordecai’s uncle. See how you translated his name in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1038 9:29 oc4c וּ⁠מָרְדֳּכַ֥י 1 Since the Hebrew verb wrote is feminine singular, it means that the letter was from Esther. The mention of **Mordecai** here probably means that Mordecai helped her to write the letter. Alternate translation: “with Mordecai”
1039 9:29 acq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֖י 1 This phrase gives information about Mordecai to remind the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1040 9:29 acq9 וַ֠⁠תִּכְתֹּב & אֶת־כָּל־תֹּ֑קֶף 1 Alternate translation: “using her royal authority” or “using the authority that she had as queen”
1041 9:29 ku7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers לְ⁠קַיֵּ֗ם אֵ֣ת אִגֶּ֧רֶת הַ⁠פּוּרִ֛ים הַ⁠זֹּ֖את הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 **This second letter of Purim** could refer to: (1) this letter that Esther is writing, which is the second letter that the Jews will receive about the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “an additional letter about Purim with her authority” or (2) the second letter that Mordecai wrote (see verses 20-22), creating the festival of Purim. Alternate translation: “to confirm what Mordecai had written about Purim in his second letter” In either case, this letter from Esther is to add her royal authority to what Mordecai had already written. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1042 9:30 acr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations וַ⁠יִּשְׁלַ֨ח סְפָרִ֜ים 1 While this says “**he**,” in context it refers to the letter that Esther wrote with Mordecai’s help. Alternate translation: “they sent copies of this second letter” or “Mordecai ordered messengers to take copies of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1043 9:30 acr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism אֶל־כָּל־הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗ים אֶל־שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה מַלְכ֖וּת אֲחַשְׁוֵר֑וֹשׁ 1 These three phrases all mean the same thing. The repetition emphasizes that Esther and Mordecai sent this second letter out comprehensively throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “to all the Jews throughout the entire empire of Ahasuerus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1044 9:30 acr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 The letter was not sent to the provinces as geographical territories, but to the Jews who lived in them. The Jews are being described by something associated with them, the places where they lived. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1045 9:30 u389 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שֶׁ֨בַע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים וּ⁠מֵאָה֙ מְדִינָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “one hundred and twenty-seven provinces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
1046 9:30 iaf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 The abstract nouns **peace** and **truth** can be expressed in other ways. Alternate translation: “encouraging the Jews that they are now safe and can live peacefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1047 9:30 mpse דִּבְרֵ֥י שָׁל֖וֹם וֶ⁠אֱמֶֽת 1 The Hebrew word translated as **truth** here also refers to things that are “sure” or “secure.” When “peace” and “truth” are paired together, they can refer to a peaceful, stable political environment, as in 2 Kings 20:19 and Jeremiah 33:6. Alternate translation: “with a message that assured them of their peaceful and stable situation”
1048 9:31 acr4 לְ⁠קַיֵּ֡ם אֵת־יְמֵי֩ הַ⁠פֻּרִ֨ים הָ⁠אֵ֜לֶּה בִּ⁠זְמַנֵּי⁠הֶ֗ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁר֩ קִיַּ֨ם עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֜ם מָרְדֳּכַ֤י הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ וְ⁠אֶסְתֵּ֣ר הַ⁠מַּלְכָּ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “in this second letter, Mordecai the Jew and Queen Esther confirmed that Purim should be celebrated on the fourteenth and fifteenth days of the month of Adar”
1049 9:31 rgr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִי֙ 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1050 9:31 acr5 וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר קִיְּמ֥וּ עַל־נַפְשָׁ֖⁠ם וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם דִּבְרֵ֥י הַ⁠צֹּמ֖וֹת וְ⁠זַעֲקָתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is referring to background information that the original audience would have known. They would have known what the fasting was about. It could be either: (1) fasting as a part of Purim. We know that some Jews fasted on the 13th day of the month of Adar to commemorate the day that Haman intended to destroy them, or (2) other times of fasting. Ever since the destruction of Jerusalem, the Jews had been fasting and mourning in the fifth month of the year to show their sorrow over what had happened. (The story refers to the Babylonian conquest of Jerusalem in [2:6](../02/06.md).) You could put this information in a footnote if it would help your readers to understand this.
1051 9:31 rl2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְ⁠עַל־זַרְעָ֑⁠ם 1 Here, **seed** is a metaphor meaning the offspring or descendants of the Jews. Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1052 9:32 acr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְתָּ֖ב בַּ⁠סֵּֽפֶר 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the royal scribes made an official record of it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1053 10:intro h4m4 0 # Esther 10 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Mordecai’s new position\n\nThrough the power of Yahweh, Mordecai was given a new position in the Persian Empire. Mordecai was now the second in command in the kingdom of Persia and he used his position to help other Jews.
1054 10:1 j157 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ הַ⁠מֶּ֨לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֧וֹשׁ 1 This introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural way to introduce a new event in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1055 10:1 b5ht וַ⁠יָּשֶׂם֩ & מַ֛ס 1 Alternate translation: “Then … levied a tax”
1056 10:1 acr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The purpose of this chapter is to describe the greatness of Mordecai. It does that by showing that he was second in command to a very powerful emperor. Referring to both the land and the sea is a way to include everything that lives in a very large area of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general meaning by saying something like “everyone throughout his empire.” Alternate translation: “on all the people in the empire … even the people who lived on the islands in the Mediterranean Sea” or “on everyone throughout the land and even the far-away islands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1057 10:1 twn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 The phrase **the islands of the sea** likely refers to the fact that the Persian kings had conquered territories reaching all the way to the Mediterranean Sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which reached all the way to the Mediterranean Sea.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1058 10:1 acr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ וְ⁠אִיֵּ֥י הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 These geographic features were not expected to pay the tax. The land and coastlands represent the people living there. The story is describing those people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the places where they live. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1059 10:2 acs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet וְ⁠כָל־מַעֲשֵׂ֤ה תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 **Power** and **might** mean essentially the same thing. They are used together to emphasize how powerful King Ahasuerus was. If it is more natural in your language, you can use one word with that meaning, with another word that gives it emphasis. Alternate translation: “all that he achieved because of how very powerful he was” or “all the great things that he did because of his great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1060 10:2 p98n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns תָקְפּ⁠וֹ֙ וּ⁠גְב֣וּרָת֔⁠וֹ 1 The abstract nouns **power** and **might** can be translated with an adjective. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1061 10:2 k7tc וּ⁠פָרָשַׁת֙ 1 Alternate translation: “They also wrote a full account”
1062 10:2 acs2 גְּדֻלַּ֣ת מָרְדֳּכַ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “of how important Mordecai was” or “of how the king had honored Mordecai for the great things he had done”
1063 10:2 acs3 גִּדְּל֖⁠וֹ 1 See how you translated this phrase in 3:1 and 5:11. Alternate translation: “had promoted him”
1064 10:2 acs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים עַל־סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 This is actually a statement. The question form is used to emphasize the certainty of the statement. If questions are not used this way in your language, then use a statement instead, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1065 10:2 acs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 You can say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “The king’s scribes made a record … ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1066 10:2 acs6 הֲ⁠לוֹא־הֵ֣ם כְּתוּבִ֗ים 1 Because it comes first logically, you can put this first in the verse, if it would be helpful in your language.
1067 10:2 acs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom סֵ֨פֶר֙ דִּבְרֵ֣י הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ים לְ⁠מַלְכֵ֖י מָדַ֥י וּ⁠פָרָֽס 1 See how you translated this in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “the royal record books of Media and Persia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1068 10:3 j159 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result כִּ֣י 1 This word indicates that this verse will give the reason why the scribes made a record about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1069 10:3 acs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish הַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֗י 1 This phrase gives clarifying information about Mordecai. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1070 10:3 acs9 מִשְׁנֶה֙ לַ⁠מֶּ֣לֶךְ אֲחַשְׁוֵר֔וֹשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “was the second most important person after King Ahasuerus himself”
1071 10:3 act0 וְ⁠גָדוֹל֙ לַ⁠יְּהוּדִ֔ים 1 Alternate translation: “and a great leader of the Jews”
1072 10:3 iui7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אֶחָ֑י⁠ו 1 Here, **brothers** is a figurative way of describing fellow members of the same people group. Alternate translation: “fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1073 10:3 act2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases basically mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard Mordecai worked for the good of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and say something like, “He worked hard so his people and their descendants would prosper.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1074 10:3 act3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 The abstract nouns **good** and **peace** refer in this context to prosperity and security. You could translate these ideas with verbs, for example, you could say, “He worked hard to make sure that his people would prosper and their descendants would be secure.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1075 10:3 wte9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor דֹּרֵ֥שׁ טוֹב֙ לְ⁠עַמּ֔⁠וֹ 1 **Seeking** is a figurative way to describe actively trying to do something or work hard for something. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1076 10:3 s8f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְ⁠דֹבֵ֥ר שָׁל֖וֹם לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 **Speaking peace** is a figurative way of describing actions that benefit the general welfare of others. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1077 10:3 j161 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְ⁠כָל־זַרְעֽ⁠וֹ 1 Here, **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Even if you combine the two parallel phrases, you can still convey the idea of “down through the generations” with a word such as “always.” Alternate translation: “and for their descendants” or “and for their offspring” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])